Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Technical Manual
WARNING
When electrical equipment is in operation dangerous voltage will be present
in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices,
incorrect use or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and
cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the P437 must be isolated. Where
stranded conductors are used, insulated crimped wire end ferrules must be
employed.
The signals MAI N: Bl ocked/faulty and SFMON: War ning (LED)
(permanently assigned to the LEDs labeled OUT OF SERVICE and ALARM) can
be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the P437. Schneider
Electric strongly recommends that these output relays are hardwired into the
substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
Any modifications to this P437 must be in accordance with the manual. If any
other modification is made without the express permission of Schneider
Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
Proper and safe operation of this P437 depends on appropriate shipping and
handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful
operation, maintenance and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this P437.
The User should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide
(SFTY/4LM/G11 or later version), with the warnings in Chapter 5, (p. 5-1),
Chapter 10, (p. 10-1), Chapter 11, (p. 11-1) and Chapter 12, (p. 121) and with the content of Chapter 14, (p. 14-1), before working on the
equipment. If the warnings are disregarded, it will invalidate the warranty,
and may render the product unsafe.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the P437
and of the system to which it is being connected;
are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with
safety engineering standards;
Note
This operating manual gives instructions for installation, commissioning and
operation of the P437. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable
circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of
questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper
authorization. Contact the appropriate technical sales office of Schneider Electric
and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on
the part of Schneider Electric, including settlement of warranties, result solely
from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of
the operating manual.
P437
Table of Contents
1
Overview .....................................................................................................................1-1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Design .........................................................................................................................1-7
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.6
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.9.4
P437
Table of Contents
2.10
2.10.1
2.11
2.12
2.12.1
Symbols .......................................................................................................................................................2-25
2.12.2
2.12.3
Operation ............................................................................................................3-1
3.1
3.2
3.3
Configuration of the Bay Panel and of the Measured Value Panels, Selection of the
Control Point (Function Group LOC) ............................................................................ 3-4
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE) .......................................... 3-26
3.5
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.7
Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP) ......... 3-41
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the PT 100 Analog Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y .......... 3-47
3.9
Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays (Function Group
OUTP) ........................................................................................................................3-49
3.10
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.10.4
3.11
Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED) ...... 3-65
3.11.1
3.11.2
3.11.3
3.12
3.12.1
3.12.2
3.12.3
3.12.4
3.12.5
3.12.6
3.12.7
Table of Contents
P437
3.12.8
3.12.9
3.12.10
3.12.11
3.12.12
3.12.13
3.12.14
3.13
3.14
3.14.1
3.14.2
3.14.3
3.14.4
3.14.5
3.14.6
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.17.1
3.17.2
Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload Protection .............................................. 3-119
3.18
3.18.1
3.18.2
3.18.3
3.18.4
3.19
3.19.1
3.19.2
3.19.3
Selection of the Measuring Loop for Determining Fault Data .................................................................... 3-124
3.19.4
3.19.5
3.19.6
3.20
3.20.1
3.20.2
3.20.3
3.20.4
3.20.5
3.21
3.21.1
3.21.2
3.21.3
3.21.4
3.21.5
3.21.6
3.22
3.22.1
3.22.2
3.22.3
3.22.4
Behavior with a Short-Circuit Fault During a Power Swing Event .............................................................. 3-188
3.22.5
3.22.6
3.22.7
P437
Table of Contents
3.23
3.23.1
3.23.2
3.23.3
3.23.4
3.23.5
3.24
3.25
3.25.1
3.26
3.26.1
3.26.2
3.26.3
3.26.4
3.26.5
3.26.6
3.26.7
3.26.8
3.26.9
3.26.10
3.26.11
3.27
3.27.1
3.27.2
3.27.3
3.27.4
3.27.5
3.27.6
3.27.7
3.27.8
3.27.9
3.27.10
3.27.11
3.27.12
3.27.13
3.27.14
3.28
3.28.1
3.28.2
3.28.3
3.28.4
3.28.5
3.28.6
3.28.7
3.28.8
3.28.9
3.28.10
3.28.11
3.28.12
3.29
3.29.1
3.29.2
Measured Values from the Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection ........................................................... 3-291
3.29.3
3.29.4
Starting ......................................................................................................................................................3-293
3.29.5
Table of Contents
P437
3.29.6
Improved Directional Measurement for Series-Compensated Line Applications xyz ................................. 3-295
3.29.7
3.29.8
3.29.9
3.29.10
3.29.11
3.30
3.30.1
3.30.2
3.30.3
3.30.4
3.30.5
3.30.6
3.30.7
Operating Modes of Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling and the Communication Channel . 3-315
3.30.8
3.30.9
3.30.10
3.30.11
3.30.12
3.30.13
3.31
3.31.1
3.31.2
3.31.3
3.31.4
3.31.5
3.32
3.32.1
3.32.2
3.32.3
3.32.4
3.32.5
3.32.6
Selecting the Measured Variable for the Residual Current Stage .............................................................. 3-348
3.32.7
3.32.8
3.33
3.33.1
3.33.2
3.33.3
3.33.4
Thermal Overload Protection Operation without Coolant Temperature (Ambient) Acquisition ..................3-353
3.33.5
3.33.6
3.33.7
3.33.8
3.33.9
3.33.10
3.33.11
3.34
3.34.1
3.34.2
3.34.3
3.34.4
3.34.5
3.34.6
3.34.7
P437
3.35
Table of Contents
3.35.1
3.35.2
3.35.3
3.35.4
3.35.5
3.35.6
Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency Gradient Monitoring (df/dt) ........................3-376
3.35.7
Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient Monitoring (f/t) ................................ 3-376
3.35.8
3.36
3.36.1
3.36.2
3.36.3
3.36.4
Active Power Monitoring when Set Thresholds are Exceeded ................................................................... 3-382
3.36.5
Active Power Direction when Set Thresholds are Exceeded ...................................................................... 3-383
3.36.6
3.36.7
Reactive Power Direction when Set Thresholds are Exceeded .................................................................. 3-385
3.36.8
Active Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ..............................................................3-386
3.36.9
Active Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ................................................................ 3-388
3.36.10
Reactive Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ..........................................................3-391
3.36.11
Reactive Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ............................................................ 3-392
3.36.12
3.37
3.37.1
3.37.2
3.37.3
3.37.4
3.37.5
3.37.6
3.37.7
3.37.8
3.37.9
3.37.10
3.37.11
3.38
3.38.1
3.38.2
3.38.3
3.38.4
3.38.5
3.38.6
3.38.7
3.38.8
3.38.9
3.38.10
3.38.11
3.38.12
3.39
3.39.1
3.39.2
3.39.3
3.39.4
3.39.5
3.39.6
3.40
Table of Contents
P437
3.41
3.41.1
3.41.2
3.41.3
3.41.4
3.41.5
Design .................................................................................................................4-1
4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.3
5.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply .................................................................... 5-5
5.3.4
5.4
5.5
5.6
Connection ................................................................................................................5-13
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.8.1
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.11.1
6.11.2
Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode .............................................................................. 6-17
P437
10
6.11.3
6.11.4
6.11.5
6.11.6
6.11.7
6.11.8
6.11.9
Settings ...............................................................................................................7-1
7.1
7.1.1
D e v i c e I d e n t i f i c a t i o n ............................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.2
C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a r a m e t e r s .................................................................................................................. 7-12
7.1.3
F u n c t i o n P a r a m e t e r s ............................................................................................................................ 7-88
8.1.1
C y c l i c V a l u e s ............................................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.2
C o n t r o l a n d T e s t i n g ............................................................................................................................8-127
8.1.3
O p e r a t i n g D a t a R e c o r d i n g ................................................................................................................8-146
8.2
8.2.1
E v e n t C o u n t e r s .................................................................................................................................... 8-147
8.2.2
M e a s u r e d E v e n t D a t a .........................................................................................................................8-153
8.2.3
E v e n t R e c o r d i n g .................................................................................................................................. 8-160
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.5
9.6
9.6.1
9.7
9.7.1
9.8
9.8.1
9.9
Controls .....................................................................................................................9-13
9.9.1
9.9.2
9.10
9.11
9.11.1
Table of Contents
10.2
10.2.1
Preparation ..................................................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.2
Tests ............................................................................................................................................................10-6
10.2.3
Table of Contents
P437
10.2.4
10.2.5
10.2.6
10.2.7
11
12
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
13
14
15
A1
A2
A3
Glossary ............................................................................................................A3-1
Modules ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Symbols ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Examples of Signal Names ......................................................................................................... A3-7
Symbols Used ............................................................................................................................. A3-8
A4
A5
A4.1.1
Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-1
A4.2
A4.2.1
Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-9
P437
10
Table of Contents
P437
1
1.1
Overview
The P437 distance protection device has been designed for selective short-circuit
protection, ground fault protection, and overload protection of transmission lines
and cables in medium-, high- and extra-high-voltage systems. The systems can
be solidly-grounded or resistance grounded.
The multitude of protection functions incorporated into the P437 enable the user
to cover a wide range of applications in the line protection. The relevant
protection parameters can be stored in four independent parameter subsets in
order to adapt the protection device to varying system operation conditions.
The P437 is equipped with a large number of protection functions. These can be
individually configured and cancelled.
All main functions are individually configurable. The user can adapt the P437
flexibly to the scope of protection required in each particular application.
The powerful programmable logic provided by the protection device also makes
it possible to accommodate special applications.
1-1
P437
Protection functions
P437
ANSI
IEC 61850
Function
group
Function
21
DisPDISn
DIST
Distance protection
68
RPSB1
PSB
30/ 74
AlmGGIO1
MCMON
Measuring-circuit monitoring
50TD P/ DtpPhs- /
N
DtpEftPTCOx
BUOC
50/ 27
SofPhs- /
SofEftPSOF1
SOTF
85 - 21
PsgPhsPSCH1
PSIG
Protective signaling
79
RREC1
ARC
Auto-reclosing control
25
RSYN1
ASC
()
67 N
GfsResPTOC1
/ PTOV1 /
RDIR1
GFSC
85 67N
PsgGfsPSCH1
GFCSG
50TD P/ DtpPhs- /
DTOC
Q/ N
DtpEft- /
DtpNgsPTCOx
51 P/ Q/ ItpPhs- /
N
ItpEft- /
ItpNgsPTCOx
IDMT
49
THERM
V<>
81
f<>
1-2
ThmPTTR1
FrqPTyFx
P437
Protection functions
P437
ANSI
IEC 61850
32
PdpAct- /
P<>
PdpRealPDyPx
50/ 62
BF
RBRFx
CBF
LIMIT
PloGGIOx
LOGIC /
LOG_2
Programmable logic
PHAR1
MAIN
Inrush stabilization
LGC
Function
group
Function
Communication functions
ANSI
IEC 61850
P437
Function
group
Function
16S
COMM1,
COMM2
()
CLK
IRIGB
()
COMM3,
COMM4
()
IEC
()
GOOSE
IEC 61850
()
16E
16E
GosGGIOx
IEC 61850
P437
Function
group
Function
INP
()
OUTP
8 to 30 output relays
()
1-3
P437
IEC 61850
Function
group
Mmuxxx
26
RtdGGIO1
MEASI
IdcGGIO1
MEASO
P437
Function
Measuring
RTD input
()
()
()
Miscellaneous functions
ANSI
P437
IEC 61850
Function
group
Function
F_KEY
LLN0.SGCB
PSS
PTRCx /
RDRE1
FT_RC
Fault recording
16S
COMM1
16S
COMM2
Self
Monitoring
CLK
IRIGB
16E
IEC
Communication to SCADA/
substation control/ RTU/modem, via RS485
or fiber optics using IEC 60870-5-101,
-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier, or via RJ45
or fiber optics using IEC 61850.
LIMIT
Recording
and data
acquisition
Overload Rec.
Metering
Fault Rec.
Vref
21
DIST
50/27
SOTF
MCMON
51P,N
BUOC
50/51 P,Q,N
DTOC
51/67 P,Q,N
IDMT
67N
GFSC
79
ARC
25
ASC
49
THERM
32
P<>
27/59 P,Q,N
V<>
50BF/62
CBF
I
V
IN,par
81 O/U
f<>
85-67N
GFCSG
85-21
PSIG
68
PSB
LGC
LOGIC
LGC
LOG_2
Scheme signaling
77
InterMiCOM
serial
COUNT
conventional
26
MEASI
MEASO
Always Available
Optional
Distance Protection
MiCOM P437
1-4
1.2
P437
General Functions
Functions listed in the tables above are self-contained function groups (except
for ILOCK) and can be individually configured or de-configured according to the
specific application requirements. Unused or cancelled function groups are
hidden to the user, thus simplifying the menu.
This concept provides a large choice of functions and makes wide-ranging
application of the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the
other hand simple and clear parameter settings can be made.
In this way the protection and control functions (except for ILOCK) can be
included in or excluded from the configuration; they are arranged on the branch
"General Functions" of the menu tree.
1-5
P437
1.3
Global Functions
In addition to the listed features, and extensive self-monitoring, the P437 is
equipped with the following global functions:
Overload recording
(time-tagged event logging)
Fault recording
(time-tagged event logging together with fault value recording of the three
phase currents, the residual current as well as the three phase-to-ground
voltages and the neutral-point displacement voltage).
1-6
1.4
P437
Design
The P437 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust
aluminum case and electrically interconnected via one analog p/c board and one
digital p/c board.
1-7
P437
1.5
1-8
1.6
P437
Depending on the order options (Chapter 15, (p. 15-1)) there are several more
modules available. The location diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-19)) give an
overview of the combinations of modules that are technically possible. The
module list (Section 4.3, (p. 4-6)) details the designations that appear in the
location diagrams.
The nominal currents and nominal voltages of the standard measuring inputs can
be set.
The nominal voltage range of the binary signal inputs (opto-coupler) is 24 to
250 V DC. As an option binary signal input modules with a higher operate
threshold are available.
The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended
range. The nominal voltage ranges are 60 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. As
an option there is a variant available for the lower nominal voltage range 24 V to
60 V DC.
All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes.
The optional PT 100 input (on the analog module Y(4I)) is lead-compensated and
balanced and linearized for PT 100 resistance thermometers as per IEC 751.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring,
zero suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input
variable via 20 adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured variables (cyclically updated measured operating data
and stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct
current via the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined
by 3 adjustable interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA,
for example) for slave-side open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine
scaling, and a limitation to lower nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where
sufficient output relays are available, a selectable measured variable can be
output in BCD-coded form by contacts.
1-9
P437
1.7
1-10
PC interface.
1.8
P437
Information Interfaces
Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or two
optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2).
Using the first channel of the communication interfaces (COMM1), the P437 can
be wired either to the substation control system or to a telecontrol system. This
channel is optionally available with a switchable protocol (per IEC 608705103,
IEC 8705101, DNP 3.0, MODBUS or Courier).
The second communication interface (COMM2, communication protocol per
IEC 608705103 only) is designed for remote control.
As an order option, there is an Ethernet interface for communication per
IEC 61850 available instead of channel 1.
External clock synchronization can be accomplished via one of the
communication protocols or by using the optional IRIGB input.
A direct link to one or two other MiCOM protection devices can be set up by
applying the optional InterMiCOM interfaces (COMM3, COMM4).
1-11
P437
1-12
P437
2
Technical Data
2.1
Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P437, version -311 -412/413 -650.
Declaration of Conformity
The product designated P437 Distance Protection Device has been designed
and manufactured in conformance with the European standards EN 6025526
and EN 6025527 and with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive
issued by the Council of the European Community.
2-1
P437
2 Technical Data
2.2
General Data
2.2.1
Design
Vertical 30.
Installation Position
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
Flush-mounted case:
Surface-mounted case:
Weight
84 TE case: Approx. 11 kg
F-SMA optical fiber connection per IEC 608742 (for plastic fibers), or
optical fiber connection BFOC-ST connector 2.5 per IEC 60874101 (for
glass fibers).
(ST is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors.)
2-2
P437
2 Technical Data
optical fiber connection BFOC-ST connector 2.5 per IEC 6087410 (for
glass fibers).
(ST is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors.)
Fiber (X13)
Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M5, self-centering with cage
clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 4 mm, or:
Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M3, self-centering with cage
clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 0.2 to 2.5 mm, or:
2.2.2
Per EN 60255-27.
Environmental Conditions
Temperatures
Recommended temperature range
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
2-3
P437
2 Technical Data
2.3
Tests
2.3.1
Type Tests
Type Tests
All tests per EN 60255-26.
2.3.1.1
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.
1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test
Per EN 60255-22-1, Class III.
Amplitude: 2 kV / 1 kV or 4 kV / 2 kV.
Source impedance: 50 .
2-4
P437
2 Technical Data
Phase-to-phase
Phase-to-ground
To comply with this standard, it is suggested to set the parameter (010 220)
IN P: F il ter to 6 [steps].
Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test
Per EN 61000-45 and EN 60255-225, insulation class 4.
Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical
lines.
Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV.
Source impedance: 12 / 42 .
Test voltage: 10 V.
Test frequency: 50 Hz
2.3.1.2
12 %.
Insulation
Voltage Test
Per EN 60255-27.
2 kV AC, 60 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power
supply inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test
Per EN 60255-27.
Time to half-value: 50 s
Peak value: 5 kV
2-5
P437
2.3.1.3
2 Technical Data
Environmental tests
2.3.1.4
Mechanical Robustness 1
Applicable to the following case variants:
Vibration Test
Per EN 6025521-1 or IEC 6025521-1, test severity class 1.
Frequency range in operation
10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during
operation), test severity class 1:
5 g for 11 ms.
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during
transport), test severity class 1:
15 g for 11 ms.
2-6
P437
2 Technical Data
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255213 or IEC 60255213, test procedure A, class 1.
Frequency range
2.3.1.5
Mechanical Robustness 2
Applicable to the following case variants:
Surface-mounted case
Vibration Test
Per EN 6025521-1 or IEC 6025521-1, test severity class 2.
Frequency range in operation
10 to 150 Hz, 2 g
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during
operation), test severity class 2:
10 g for 11 ms.
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during
transport), test severity class 1:
15 g for 11 ms.
Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during
transport), test severity class 1:
10 g for 16 ms.
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255213 or IEC 60255213, test procedure A, class 2.
Frequency range
2.3.2
Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-1.
Voltage Test
Per EN 60255-27.
2.2 kV AC, 1 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power
supply inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
2-7
P437
2 Technical Data
2-8
P437
2 Technical Data
2.4
2.4.1
Measuring Inputs
Load rating:
continuous: 20 A,
for 10 s: 150 A,
for 1 s: 500 A.
Load rating:
continuous: 150 V AC
for 10 s: 300 V AC
Frequency
2-9
P437
2.4.2
2 Technical Data
Special variants with switching thresholds from 58% to 72% of the nominal input
voltage (i.e. definitively low for VA < 58% of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively high for VA > 72% of the nominal supply voltage).
18 V standard variant:
VA = 19 to 110 V DC : 0.5 W 30%,
VA > 110 V DC: VA 5 mA 30%.
Special variants:
VA > switching threshold: VA 5 mA 30%.
2-10
P437
2 Technical Data
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
IRIGB Interface
Electrical isolation: 2 kV
Input current: 0 to 26 mA
Resistance Thermometer
Only PT 100 permitted for analog (I/O) module, mapping curve per IEC 75.1.
PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120 permitted for temperature p/c board (the RTD module).
2.4.6
Open-circuit monitoring: > +215C and < -40C ( > +419F and
< -40F).
Output current: 0 to 20 mA
2-11
P437
2.4.7
2 Technical Data
Output Relays
Binary I/O Module X(4H)
Rated voltage:
250 V DC
Continuous
current:
10 A
5A
Short-duration
current:
Making capacity:
Breaking capacity:
30 A for 3 s
30 A
30 A for 0.5 s.
1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms.
7500 W resistive or 30 A at
250 V DC,
Operating time:
less than 5 ms
Reset time:
less than 8 ms
less than 5 ms
2.4.8
2-12
P437
2 Technical Data
2.5
Interfaces
2.5.1
2.5.2
PC Interface
2.5.3
Distance to be bridged
Wire Leads
2-13
P437
2 Technical Data
2.5.4
ST connector
2-14
P437
2 Technical Data
SC connector
2.5.5
IRIGB Interface
B122 format
2-15
P437
2.6
2 Technical Data
Information Output
Counters, measured data, and indications: see chapter Information and Control
Functions.
2-16
P437
2 Technical Data
2.7
2.7.1
Main Function
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
Distance Protection
Reset time (measured variable from 2-fold operate value to 0): 40 ms,
approx. 30 ms
Time-Voltage Protection
Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value
to 1.2-fold operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8fold operate value):
45 ms, approx. 30 ms
2.7.5
40 ms, approx. 30 ms
1% to 10% (adjustable)
Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value
to 1.2-fold operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8fold operate value): 60 ms, approx. 50 ms
2-17
P437
2 Technical Data
2.8
Deviations
2.8.1
2.8.1.1
Definitions
Reference Conditions
Deviation
2.8.1.2
Distance Protection
2.8.1.3
Deviation at K = 0, 90: 3%
Directional Determination: 3
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring
Operate values Ineg, Vneg
2.8.1.4
Deviation: 3 %
Overcurrent-Time Protection
Operate values I>, IN>
2.8.1.5
Deviation: 5%
2.8.1.6
Deviation: 5%
Time-Voltage Protection
Operate values
2.8.1.7
Frequency Protection
Operate values f<>
2-18
30 mHz (f
nom
= 50 Hz)
40 mHz (f
nom
= 60 Hz)
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
2 Technical Data
2.8.1.8
0.1 Hz/s (f
nom
= 50 or 60 Hz)
2.8.1.9
2.8.1.10
Deviation: 1 %
Resistance Thermometer
2.8.1.11
Deviation: 5 %
Deviation: 2C
Deviation: 1 %
1%
2.8.2
2.8.2.1
Definitions
Reference conditions
Deviation
2.8.2.2
Definite-time stages
2.8.2.3
Deviation: 1% + 20 ms to 40 ms
Inverse-time stages
2-19
P437
2 Technical Data
2.8.3
2.8.3.1
Definitions
Reference conditions
Deviation
2.8.3.2
Deviation: 1%
Deviation: 0.5%
Deviation: 2%
Deviation: 2%
Load angle
Deviation: 1
Frequency
2.8.3.3
Deviation: 10 mHz
Fault Data
Short-circuit current and voltage
Deviation: 3%
2.8.3.4
Deviation: 5%
Internal Clock
With free running internal clock
Deviation: < 10 ms
2-20
1 ms
P437
2 Technical Data
2.9
2.9.1
Time Resolution
2.9.2
Amplitude resolution
2.9.3
Residual Current
Dynamic range
16 Inom
Amplitude resolution
2.9.4
150 V
Amplitude resolution
9.2 mVrms
2-21
P437
2 Technical Data
2.10
Recording Functions
2.10.1
All signals relating to normal operation; from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals.
All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals.
Up to 30 signals.
Overload Memory
Number
All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals.
All signals relevant for a ground fault event from a total of 1024 different
logic state signals.
Fault Memory
Number
2-22
All fault-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic state signals.
P437
2 Technical Data
As per Section 2.9, (p. 2-21), with maximum current dynamic ranges
(100 Inom / 16 IN,nom)
2-23
P437
2.11
2 Technical Data
Power Supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom
Nominal burden
2-24
P437
2 Technical Data
2.12
2.12.1
Symbols
The following symbols are used in accordance with IEC 600441 and IEC 600446
standards:
2-25
P437
2 Technical Data
Ipn
Isn
Ipsc
Kssc
I psc
I pn
Iref
Rbn
Pbn
Equivalent power over the rated resistive burden of the CT for rated
secondary current:
2
Pbn = Rbn I sn
Rb
Pb
Equivalent power over the actual resistive burden of the CT for rated
secondary current:
2
Pb = Rb I sn
Rct
Pct
Vsal
Vk
nn
nb
Rct + Rbn
Rct + Rb
= nn
Pct + Pbn
Pct + Pb
Rl
Rrel
Tp
Kd
= Tp
2-26
P437
2 Technical Data
2.12.2
General Equations
The current transformer can be dimensioned
either for the minimum required secondary accuracy limiting voltage acc.
to IEC 600441, 2.3.4:
V sal K d K ssc I sn (Rct + Rb)
Rct + Rb
Rct + Rbn
= K d K ssc
Pct + Pb
Pct + Pbn
Pbn
I sn
+ I sn Rct )
l
A
l = wire length
The MiCOM Px3x input CT burden Rrel is less than 20 m, independent of the set
nominal current (1A or 5A). Usually this relay burden can be neglected.
The rated knee point voltage Vk according to IEC 600441, 2.3.12 is lower than
the secondary accuracy limiting voltage Vsal according to IEC 600441, 2.3.4. It is
not possible to give a general relation between Vk and Vsal, but for standard core
material the following relations applies:
Xp
Rp
= 1 + Tp
2.12.3
Distance Protection
For the P437, the empirical dimensioning factor Kd = Kemp can be taken from the
following diagram, which shows three practical curves:
2-27
P437
2 Technical Data
Curve A (red): Choosing Kemp according to this line assures that transient
CT saturation practically does not affect distance protection: Distance
(instantaneous) zone trip is assured within 0/+40 ms for up to 95% of the
set zone reach.
30
A
25
20
15
B
K emp
10
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Xp / R p
As per IEC 60255-121 (draft 2011), the following 4 fault conditions have to be
checked to determine the required CT dimensioning.
A
DIST
1
Fig. 2-1: Check conditions.
2-28
P437
2 Technical Data
Case 1:
Case 2:
Case 3:
Case 4:
2-29
P437
2-30
2 Technical Data
P437
3
Operation
3.1
Modular Structure
The P437, a numerical device, is part of the MiCOM P30 family of devices. The
device types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware
modules. The figure below shows the basic hardware structure of the P437.
EDIT MODE
Processor module
Analog
module
Digital
busbus
module
Voltages
Currents
Signals
Commands
Signals
Commands
Signals
Commands
Measured data
Transformer module
HEALTHY
C
Analog I/O module
TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
Protection interface
InterMiCOM
Communic. module
Communication
interface(s)
PC interface
Signals
Commands
D5Z5201C
3-1
P437
3 Operation
3-2
P437
3 Operation
3.2
Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between
the user and the P437:
PC interface
Communication interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are
arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is
uniform throughout the device family. The main branches are:
Parameters Branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings,
including the identification data of the P437, the configuration parameters for
adapting the P437 interfaces to the system, and the function parameters for
adapting the device functions to the process. All values in this group are stored
in non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if
the power supply fails.
Operation Branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured
operating data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically
and consequently is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here,
for example those for resetting counters, memories and displays.
Events Branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this
group is therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the
measured fault data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can
be read out when required.
Display of Settings and Signals
Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in
accordance with the users choice. All settings and signals of the P437 are
documented in a separate collection of documents, the so-called
DataModelExplorer. The Addresses document (being part of the
DataModelExplorer) is complete in the sense that it contains all settings,
signals and measured variables that are relevant for the user of the P437.
The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of
Measured Value Panels on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically
displayed for specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal
operation to operation under overload conditions and finally to operation
following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P437 provides the measured
data relevant for the prevailing conditions.
3-3
P437
3.3
3 Operation
3-4
P437
3 Operation
3.3.1
Operation Panel
The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided
that at least one measured value has been configured.
The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on
the Operation Panel by means of an m out of n parameter. When more
measured operating values are selected for display than the LC display can
accommodate, then the display will either switch to the next set of measured
operating values at intervals defined by the setting for LOC: Hold-time for
Pa nels or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Operation Panel
[ 053 007 ]
Measured value 1
m out of n
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
Selected meas. val.
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
S1 1
LOC:
Autom. return time
[ 003 014 ]
LOC:
Autom. return time
LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
R1
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Operation Panel
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
47Z1301A
3-5
P437
3.3.2
3 Operation
Fault Panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault
Panel by setting an m out of n parameter. When more measured fault values
are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display
will either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by
the setting for LOC : Hold-time for P ane ls or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Fault Panel
[ 053 003 ]
Measured value 1
m out of n
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
Selected meas. val.
LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
Fault Panel
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z01EJA
3-6
P437
3 Operation
3.3.3
Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel
when there is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been
configured. The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends,
unless a fault occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload
Panel by setting a m out of n parameter. When more measured fault values are
selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will
either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by the
setting for LOC : Hol d-time for P ane ls or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Overload Panel
[ 053 005 ]
Measured value 1
m out of n
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Select. meas. values
LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
Overload Panel
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0140A
3.3.4
3-7
P437
3.4
3 Operation
Serial Interfaces
The P437 has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A
is optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels
depending on the design version. Communication between the P437 and the
control stations computer is through the communication module A. Setting and
interrogation is possible through all the P437's interfaces.
If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed,
settings for two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of
communication interface 1 (COMM1) may be assigned to the physical
communication channels 1 or 2 (see Section 3.12.13, (p. 3-109)). If the COMM1
settings have been assigned to communication channel 2, then the settings of
communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for
communication channel 1.
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P437 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes dead. It will only be enabled again when the time-out
period for the PC interface has elapsed.
If tests are run on the P437, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this
way the PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals
accordingly (see Section 3.12.14, (p. 3-110)).
3-8
P437
3 Operation
3.4.1
PC:
Bay address
[ 003 068 ]
PC:
Device address
[ 003 069 ]
PC:
Baud rate
[ 003 081 ]
PC:
Parity bit
[ 003 181 ]
PC:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 003 187 ]
PC:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 189 ]
PC:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 084 ]
PC:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 185 ]
PC:
Delta V
[ 003 055 ]
PC:
Delta I
[ 003 056 ]
PC:
Sig./meas.val.block.
[ 003 086 ]
PC:
Delta P
[ 003 059 ]
0
1
0: No
PC:
Delta f
[ 003 057 ]
PC:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 155 ]
1: Yes
PC:
Delta t
[ 003 058 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
PC:
Time-out
[ 003 188 ]
PC:
Command blocking
[ 003 182 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PC interface
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
19Z80ECA
3-9
P437
3.4.2
3 Operation
MODBUS
DNP 3.0
COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in
the P437.
Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In
addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary
signal input.
3-10
P437
3 Operation
COMM1:
Command block. USER
[ 003 172 ]
0
1
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
0: No
COMM1:
Command block. EXT
[ 003 173 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Basic IEC870-5 enabl
[ 003 215 ]
COMM1:
Communicat. protocol
[ 003 167 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Addit. -101 enable
[ 003 216 ]
Selected protocol
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Addit. ILS enable
[ 003 217 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
MODBUS enable
[ 003 220 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
DNP3 enable
[ 003 231 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
COURIER enable
[ 103 040 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
64Z51FEA
3-11
P437
3 Operation
COMM1:
-103 prot. variant
COMM1:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 178 ]
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
COMM1:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 165 ]
[ 003 074 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ]
[ 003 175 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
COMM1:
Delta V
[ 003 171 ]
[ 003 050 ]
COMM1:
Dead time monitoring
COMM1:
Delta I
[ 003 176 ]
[ 003 051 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
COMM1:
Delta P
[ 003 202 ]
[ 003 054 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
COMM1:
Delta f
[ 003 072 ]
[ 003 052 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
COMM1:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 166 ]
[ 003 150 ]
COMM1:
Name of manufacturer
COMM1:
Delta t
[ 003 161 ]
[ 003 053 ]
COMM1:
Octet address ASDU
COMM1:
Delta t (energy)
[ 003 073 ]
[ 003 151 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable
COMM1:
Contin. general scan
[ 003 177 ]
[ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 870-5-103
[ 003 219 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
Communication error
Communic. interface
304 422
COMM1:
Sig./meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0
1
0: No
COMM1:
Sig./meas.val.block.
1: Yes
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas. block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
12Z62FFA
Fig. 3-7: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 608705-103 interface protocol.
3-12
P437
3 Operation
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 870-5-101
[ 003 218 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Delta t
[ 003 053 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (energy)
[ 003 151 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
Contin. general scan
[ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Dead time monitoring
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Comm. address length
[ 003 201 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Octet 2 comm. addr.
[ 003 200 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Cause transm. length
[ 003 192 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Address length ASDU
[ 003 193 ]
COMM1:
Name of manufacturer
[ 003 161 ]
COMM1:
Octet 2 addr. ASDU
[ 003 194 ]
COMM1:
Octet address ASDU
[ 003 073 ]
COMM1:
Addr.length inf.obj.
[ 003 196 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 003 177 ]
COMM1:
Oct.3 addr. inf.obj.
[ 003 197 ]
COMM1:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1:
Inf.No.<->funct.type
[ 003 195 ]
COMM1:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 074 ]
COMM1:
Time tag length
[ 003 198 ]
COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 175 ]
COMM1:
ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv.
[ 003 190 ]
COMM1:
Delta V
[ 003 050 ]
COMM1:
ASDU2 conversion
[ 003 191 ]
COMM1:
Delta I
[ 003 051 ]
COMM1:
Initializ. signal
[ 003 199 ]
COMM1:
Delta P
[ 003 054 ]
COMM1:
Balanced operation
[ 003 226 ]
COMM1:
Delta f
[ 003 052 ]
COMM1:
Direction bit
[ 003 227 ]
COMM1:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 150 ]
COMM1:
Time-out interval
[ 003 228 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0
Comm. interface
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
COMM1:
Sig./meas.val.block.
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas. block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
19Z51FGA
Fig. 3-8: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol.
3-13
P437
3 Operation
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 074 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 175 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
Delta V
[ 003 050 ]
COMM1:
Dead time monitoring
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Delta I
[ 003 051 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Delta P
[ 003 054 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Delta f
[ 003 052 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 150 ]
COMM1:
Name of manufacturer
[ 003 161 ]
COMM1:
Delta t
[ 003 053 ]
COMM1:
Octet address ASDU
[ 003 073 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (energy)
[ 003 151 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 003 177 ]
COMM1:
Contin. general scan
[ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 870-5, ILS
[ 003 221 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
Comm. interface
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Sig./meas.val.block.
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas. block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
19Z51FHA
Fig. 3-9: Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS-C interface protocol.
3-14
P437
3 Operation
COMM1:
MODBUS prot. variant
[ 003 214 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Reg.asg. selec. cmds
[ 003 210 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Reg.asg. selec. sig.
[ 003 211 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
Reg.asg. sel. m.val.
[ 003 212 ]
COMM1:
Dead time monitoring
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Reg.asg. sel. param.
[ 003 213 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (MODBUS)
[ 003 152 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Autom.event confirm.
[ 003 249 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
MODBUS
[ 003 223 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
Commun. interface
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
19Z50FJB
3-15
P437
COMM1:
Selected protocol
3 Operation
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Link Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 244 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Link Max. Retries
[ 003 245 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
Appl.Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 246 ]
COMM1:
Dead time monitoring
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Appl. Need Time Del.
[ 003 247 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. bin. inputs
[ 003 232 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. bin.outputs
[ 003 233 ]
COMM1:
Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3
[ 003 240 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. bin. count.
[ 003 234 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. analog inp.
[ 003 235 ]
COMM1:
Phys. Charact. Delay
[ 003 241 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. analog outp
[ 003 236 ]
COMM1:
Phys. Char. Timeout
[ 003 242 ]
COMM1:
Delta meas.v. (DNP3)
[ 003 250 ]
COMM1:
Link Confirm. Mode
[ 003 243 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (DNP3)
[ 003 248 ]
304 415
COMM1:
DNP3
[ 003 230 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
Commun. interface
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
19Z50AZA
Fig. 3-11: Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
3-16
P437
3 Operation
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
COURIER
[ 103 041 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Command selection
[ 103 042 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
Signal selection
[ 103 043 ]
COMM1:
Dead time monitoring
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Meas. val. selection
[ 103 044 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Parameter selection
[ 103 045 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (COURIER)
[ 103 046 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
Commun. interface
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
19Z51BAA
3-17
P437
3.4.2.1
3 Operation
COMM1:
Sel.spontan.sig.test
[ 003 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM1:
Test spont.sig.start
[ 003 184 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. start
[ --- --- ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM1:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 003 186 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. end
[ --- --- ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z50FKA
3-18
P437
3 Operation
3.4.3
COMM2:
Line idle state
[ 103 165 ]
COMM2:
Baud rate
[ 103 071 ]
COMM2:
Parity bit
[ 103 171 ]
COMM2:
Dead time monitoring
[ 103 176 ]
COMM2:
Mon. time polling
[ 103 202 ]
COMM2:
Octet comm. address
[ 103 072 ]
COMM2:
Name of manufacturer
[ 103 161]
COMM2:
Octet address ASDU
[ 103 073 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 103 177 ]
COMM2:
Select. spontan.sig.
COMM2:
General enable USER
[ 103 170 ]
[ 103 179 ]
0
1
0: No
COMM2:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 103 074 ]
COMM2:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 103 175 ]
1: Yes
COMM2:
Delta V
[ 103 050 ]
COMM2:
Delta I
[ 103 051 ]
COMM2:
Sig./meas.block.USER
[ 103 076 ]
COMM2:
Delta P
[ 103 054 ]
0
COMM2:
Delta f
[ 103 052 ]
0: No
COMM2:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
1: Yes
[ 103 150 ]
COMM2:
Delta t
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 103 053 ]
[ 038 046 ]
COMM2:
Command block. USER
[ 103 172 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
Commun. interface
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
40Z5070A
3-19
P437
3.4.3.1
3 Operation
COMM2:
Sel.spontan.sig.test
[ 103 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM2:
Test spont.sig.start
[ 103 184 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. start
[ --- --- ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM2:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 103 186 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. end
[ --- --- ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z50FLA
3-20
P437
3 Operation
3.4.4
3.4.4.1
Application
The InterMiCOM protection signaling interface is designed to establish a digital
communication link between two MiCOM devices over which up to 8 binary
protection signals may be transmitted. Whereas communication interfaces 1
(Section 3.4.2, (p. 3-10)) and 2 (Section 3.4.3, (p. 3-19)) are designed as
information interfaces to connect to data acquisition subsystems and for remote
access, the InterMiCOM interface (also called communication interfaces 3 and 4)
is designed as a protection signaling interface that will transmit real time signals.
Its main application is to transmit signals from protective signaling (function
group PSIG). In addition, any other internal or external binary signals may also be
transmitted.
3.4.4.2
Physical Medium
COMM3 and COMM4 are provided as asynchronous, full-duplex communication
interfaces. To transmit data the following physical media are available for each:
Direct link without use of external supplementary equipment:
Digital network:
3.4.4.3
3.4.4.4
Telegram Configuration
For the remainder of this COMM3 / COMM4 description, COMM3 represents COMM4
as well, this means that the description is also valid for COMM4.
The parameter addresses given apply to COMM3. The corresponding addresses for
function group COMM4 are given in Chapter 7, (p. 7-1) and Chapter 8, (p. 81).
The communication baud rate is settable (COMM3 : Baud rat e) to adapt to the
transmission channel requirements. Sending and receiving addresses
3-21
P437
3 Operation
COMM 3: S ource ad dres s and COMM3: Rece i ving addr ess can be set to
different values, thus avoiding that the P437 communicates with itself.
The InterMiCOM protection signaling interface provides independent transmission
of eight binary signals in each direction. For the send signals COMM3: Fct .
a ssignm. send 1, ) any signal from the selection table of the binary outputs
(OUTP) can be chosen. For the receive signals (COMM3 : F ct . assignm . re c.
1, ) any signal from the selection table of the binary inputs (INP) can be
chosen.
For each receive signal, an individual operating mode can be set
C OMM3: Op er. mode re ce ive 1, ), thus defining the required checks for
accepting the received binary signal. In addition a specifically selected telegram
structure subdivides the 8 binary signals into two groups. The signal encoding
along with the set operating mode for the telegram check defines the actual
balance of Speed, Security and Dependability for each signal:
Binary signals 1 to 4:
Operating mode settable to Blocking or Direct intertrip
Binary signals 5 to 8:
Operating mode settable to Permissive or Direct intertrip
Preference:
Security.
Implication:
Recommended setting:
Preference:
Dependability.
Implication:
Recommended setting:
Preference:
Speed.
Implication:
Recommended setting:
3-22
P437
3 Operation
Speed
Blocking
Permissive
slow
low
high
Security
Direct
Intertrip
high
Dependability
47Z1030A
Fig. 3-16: Comparison of speed, security and dependability offered by the three operating modes.
3.4.4.5
Communication Monitoring
Timer stage C OMM3 : Time -out comm.f aul t is used for monitoring the
transmission channel (this timer is re-triggered with each complete and correct
received telegram). The wide setting range allows adaptation to the actual
channel transmission times and above all this is needed for time-critical schemes
such as the blocking scheme. After the timer has elapsed, signals
COMM3: C ommu nicati ons fau lt and SFMON: Commun ic.fau lt COMM3
are issued and the received signals are automatically set to their user-defined
default values (COMM3: De fault value rec. 1, , CO MM3: D efault v alue
rec. 8). As the main application for this protective signaling the fault signal may
be mapped to the corresponding input signal in function group PSIG with the
COMM3: Si g.asg. comm.f ault setting.
Timer stage COMM3 : Time -ou t link fail .. is used to determine a persistent
failure of the data transmission channel. After the timer has elapsed, signals
COMM3: Comm. link fai l ur e and SFMON: Comm.lin k fail.COMM3 are
issued.
3-23
P437
3 Operation
Message
received
Blocking signals
accepted
Telegram
receive check
Permissive signals
accepted
(Re)start of the
monitoring
timer stages
COMM3:
Time-out comm.fault
[ 120 033 ]
COMM3:
Communications fault
[ 120 043 ]
COMM3:
Time-out link fail.
[ 120 035 ]
COMM3:
Comm. link failure
[ 120 044 ]
47Z1031B
3-24
P437
3 Operation
3.4.4.6
3.4.4.7
Commissioning Tools
The actual values of send and receive signals can be read from the P437 as
physical state signals (COMM3: State se nd 1 and C OMM3 : Stat e re ce iv e
1, with x = 1 to 8). In addition, InterMiCOM provides 2 test facilities for
commissioning of the protection interface.
For a loop-back test, the send output is directly linked back to the receive input.
After setting the bit pattern wanted (as an equivalent decimal number at
C OMM3: Loop back se nd) the test can be triggered via COMM3: Loop back
t est. This bit pattern is sent for the duration of the hold time set at
C OMM3: Hold ti me for te st. For this test only, the source address is set to
'0'; this value is not used for regular end-to-end communication. The test result
can be checked as long as the hold-time is running by reading the measured
operating data C OMM3 : L oop back re su lt and C OMM3: L oop back
receiv e. As soon as the hold-time has expired, the loopback test is terminated
and InterMiCOM reverts to the normal sending mode (e.g. sending the actual
values of the configured send signals, using the set source address).
Thus, in case of problems with the InterMiCOM protection signaling interface, the
loopback test can be used to verify or to exclude a defective device. The
transmission channel including the receiving device can be checked manually by
setting individual binary signals (COMM3: Se nd s ignal for t est) to userdefined test values (C OMM3: L og. state f or te st). After triggering the test by
C OMM3: Send signal, te st, the preset binary signal is sent with the preset
value for the set hold time COMM3: Hold time for t est. The 7 remaining
binary signals are not affected by this test procedure and remain to be sent with
their actual values. During the hold time, a received signal can be checked at the
receiving device, e.g. by reading the physical state signal. After the hold time
has expired, the test mode is reset automatically and the actual values of all
8 signals are transmitted again.
3-25
P437
3.4.5
3 Operation
3.4.5.1
3.4.5.1.1
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international
standard. The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This
includes the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED),
manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange data
for combined operation.
This communication standard IEC 61850 has now created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network
control level, for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field
device a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data
model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of
data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such
information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a
standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the
help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the
relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes
possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal
images.
Available is the following documentation providing the description of the
IEC 61850 data model which is used with the P437:
3-26
P437
3 Operation
3.4.5.1.2
Ethernet Module
The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic
interface where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of
the two interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by
setting the parameter [ IC]: Me di a.
Setting parameters identified by [ I C ] : in the IEC function group are set with the
IED Configurator. They cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or
with the operating program.
There are two ordering variants available for the fiber-optic interface: the ST
connector and the SC connector both for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm (a third variant
ST connector for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm is pending). The RJ45 connector
supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for
remote access with the MiCOM S1 support software (function group COMM2).
The P437 may be equipped with the optional Ethernet module only as an
alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the
Ethernet-based communication protocol IEC 61850 is available only as an
alternative to function group COMM1.
3.4.5.1.3
3-27
P437
3 Operation
System configurator
PACiS SCE
.iid
.scd
.icd
IED Configurator
IED Configurator
S&R 103
.mcl
.x3v
Operating program
19Z7001B
3-28
P437
3 Operation
IED
Control PC
Processor module
Operating program
Device
parameters
Parameter
switch
Parameter download
Ethernet module
IED
Configurator
Parameter upload
IEC 61850
parameter
IEC 61850
parameter
Bank 1
Bank 2
3.4.5.1.4
Client Log-on
Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system,
as is common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as
defined in the Abstract Communication Service Interface (ACSI, IEC 6187072),
are assigned to the devices. A server is always that device which provides
information to other devices. A client may log on to this server in order to receive
information, for instance reports. In its function as server the P437 can supply
up to 16 clients, linked into the network, with spontaneous or cyclic information.
3.4.5.1.5
Clock Synchronization
With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined
as standard for Ethernet. Here the P437 functions as an SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can choose between the operating modes Anycast
from SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode
synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all
devices in the network, and in the second operating mode the P437 requests a
device-specific time signal during a settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably
performed by the first server. The second server is only reverted to if no signal is
received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the
MAIN function then, by selecting COMM1, synchronization per IEC 61850 is
automatically active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
3-29
P437
3.4.5.1.6
3 Operation
3.4.5.1.7
Transmitting Modeled Signals Not Provided by the IEC 61850 Data Model
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional
number of up to 16 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the
P437 to be transmitted via reporting. A selection of state signals (shuttling to
communications) is made by setting I EC: SigGGI O1 selection. The data
object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the sequence given for the m
out of n selection for the state signals. The indexes SigGGIO1.ST.ind1 to
SigGGIO1.ST.ind16 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data
objects.
3.4.5.1.8
Single Commands
Single commands (e.g. short command, long command, persistent command)
are configured with the operating program. Sending commands to the P437 can
be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the P437. But
only one command at a time is carried out. The operating mode Direct control
with normal security is provided for single commands.
3-30
P437
3 Operation
3.4.5.1.9
Fault Transmission
Including fault transmission for the IEC 61850 in the configuration is only possible
with the IED Configurator.
Transmission of fault files is supported per File Transfer. COMTRADE fault files
in the P437 are transmitted uniformly either as ASCII or binary formatted files.
Fault transmission can be cancelled from the configuration.
3.4.5.1.10
3.4.5.1.11
Communication with the MiCOM S1 Support Software via the Ethernet Interface
Direct access by the MiCOM S1 support software via the Ethernet interface on
the P437 may occur through the tunneling principle. Transmission is carried
out by an Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the
associated MiCOM S1 support software (specific manufacturer solution). Such
transmission is accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is
used for server-client communication. Available are all the familiar functions
offered by the MiCOM S1 support software such as reading/writing of setting
parameters or retrieving stored data.
3-31
P437
3.4.5.2
3 Operation
3.4.5.2.1
3-32
P437
3 Operation
Device A
IEC 61850
Mapping
S1 Studio
Device B
S1 Studio
System/GosGGIO2
System/GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 ... 32
IED Configurator
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset x
System/GosGGIO1
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08
MCL
IED Configurator
System/DevGosGGIO3
Fixed assignment
S1 Studio
Ext.Dev 1 32
19Z7003A
3.4.5.2.2
Sending GOOSE
The GOOSE can send up to eight different GOOSE messages which are managed
in eight GOOSE Control Blocks (gcb01 to gcb08). Information content depends on
the respective dataset assigned to GOOSE. The maximum size of a dataset to be
sent by GOOSE is limited to 1500 bytes. A control display is shown by the IED
Configurator to check this limit.
When defining the datasets for GOOSE it is advised to select the individual data
attributes and not the overlapping data objects. By this the amount of data is
kept within a limit and decoding is guaranteed on the receiving end.
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional
number of up to 32 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the
P437 to be transmitted via GOOSE, as it is also possible with reporting.
Selection of binary state signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting
GO OSE: Outp ut 1 fct.ass ig.. (or Output 2, ..., Output 32). The data object
indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the function assignments for the
GOOSE outputs. The indexes GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 may then
be included in the datasets just as the other data objects.
When a state change occurs with a selected state signal or a measured value
changes which is greater than the dead band set for the relevant data point then
the complete GOOSE is sent. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending
3-33
P437
3 Operation
time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the
parameter [IC]: Minimum Cycle Time. The cycles for the following send
repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the
parameter [IC ] : I ncreme nt. Should no further state changes occur up to the
time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed [ IC]: Maximum Cycle Time,
then GOOSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the maximum cycle
time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GOOSE sent, characteristics
such as [IC ]: Mult icast MAC Addres s, [ IC]: Application ID (hex),
[I C]: VLA N I dent ifie r (h ex), [IC] : V LA N P r iority and
[I C]: GOOSE I de nt if ie r must be entered in the IED Configurator settings.
Further characteristics are [ IC ]: Datase t R ef e rence and
[IC]: Config urat ion Revis ion.
Each GOOSE is given the state change index and the number of send repetitions.
3.4.5.2.3
Receiving GOOSE
With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals as well as 32 two-pole contact
position signals from external devices (Ext.Devxx) can be received. For each
state signal or contact position signal to be received a specific GOOSE message
is to be selected, which will contain the information wanted, by setting
[IC ]: Mu lt icast MA C Addres s, [IC] : A ppl ication ID (hex),
[IC]: Source Pat h, [IC] : GOOSE Iden ti f ie r and [IC]: DataSet Refere nce.
With the further setting of [ IC]: Data Obj I nde x / Type, which corresponds to
the GOOSE position index and the information structure of the sending device,
the required information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The
identification features "VLAN identifier" and [IC] : Configuration Re vision
that are also included in the GOOSE received will not be evaluated.
These parameters characterizing the information may be taken either from
device or project planning documentation of the sending device or from a
configuration file which is conform to IEC 61850. The IED Configurator will
support the import of .IID, .SCD and .MCL files when the "browse function"
(virtual key) is applied. The selection and acceptance of parameters from an
existing project planning is distinguished by a simplified and very reliable data
input.
Should the data type of the selected data object provide quality information then
this can be evaluated. When activating [ IC]: Quality Obj Index the distance
of the quality descriptor to the data object (if not preset) must be given as well
as the quality criterion, which is to be tested. A signal is rejected when one of the
bits ([IC ]: Invalidit y Qu ality bits, see displayed bar with bit state) is received
as a set bit. These parameters are usually described in a configuration file and
are accepted from there during an import action.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its
information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE
repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this
GOOSE again (i.e. because of a fault in communications), the signals received
will automatically be set to their respective default value
[IC]: De fault I npu t Val ue. Which of the possible state values will set the
wanted security grade is dependent on the relevant application.
The following configuration (shuttling to the device functions) of the logic state
signals received from the logic node GosGGIO1 (GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig.
(or Input 2, , Input 32)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary
signal inputs (optocoupler inputs). Contact position signals received from
external devices (LN: DevGosGGIO3) are listed in the selection table for
interlocking equations of the function group ILOCK, which are available to design
a decentralized substation interlock.
3-34
P437
3 Operation
The virtual key "Unmap" may be used to remove the link of a binary signal input
to an external data point. In such a case all entries for this binary signal input are
deleted.
3.4.5.2.4
Device A
IED Configurator
Device B
S1 Studio
Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset
x
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08
IED Configurator
MCL
System/OrdRunGGIO1
19Z7004A
3-35
P437
3.4.5.3
3 Operation
3.4.5.3.1
3.4.5.3.2
Sending GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary
state signals is made by setting GSSE: Out put 1 fct.assig. (or Output 2, ,
Output 32). Each selected state signal is to be assigned to a bit pair in GSSE
(GSS E: Out pu t 1 b it pa ir (or Output 2, , Output 32)), which will transmit
this state signal.
GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal.
There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send
repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter GSSE: Min.
cycle. The cycles for the following send repetitions result from a conditional
equation with the increment set with the parameter GSSE: Increment. Should
no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum cycle time has
elapsed (GSSE: Max. cycl e), then GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as
set for the max. cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used
which was set in function group IEC.
3.4.5.3.3
Receiving GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of
the logic binary state signals received (GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig., or Input 2,
, Input 32) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto
coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the
required information, must be selected by setting the IED name (e.g.
GSSE: In put 1 IE D name). Selection of information wanted from the selected
GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair (e.g. GSSE: Input 1 bit pair).
Each GSSE includes time information on the validity duration of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the
3-36
P437
3 Operation
validity duration has elapsed without this GSSE being received again (i.e.
because of a communications fault), the signals received will automatically be
set to their respective default value (e.g. GSSE: In put 1 default).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
3-37
P437
3.5
3 Operation
IRIGB:
General enable USER
[ 023 200 ]
IRIGB:
Enabled
[ 023 201 ]
IRIGB:
Synchron. ready
[ 023 202 ]
47Z02BAA
3-38
P437
3 Operation
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
Handling Keys
If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when
a function key or the READ key is pressed. The assigned function will only be
3-39
P437
3 Operation
triggered when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for
the other keys.
F_KEY:
Fct. assignm. F1
[ 080 112 ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Selected function
&
Activate function
F_KEY:
Operating mode F1
[ 080 132 ]
F_KEY:
State F1
[ 080 122 ]
&
2
1: Key
2: Switch
&
&
S1 1
&
R1 0
1)
40Z5003A
Fig. 3-23: Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a
menu jump list.
3-40
P437
3 Operation
3.7
3-41
P437
3 Operation
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ XXX XXX ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Selected function
&
Activate function
INP:
Oper. mode U xxx
[ YYY XXX ]
0
1
2
3
0: Active "low"
1: Active "high"
2: Active "low", filt.
3: Active "high", filt.
-Uxxx
&
Input signal
&
INP:
Filter
[ 010 220 ]
&
&
&
INP:
State U xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
&
12Z6213A
Fig. 3-24: Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs.
3-42
P437
3 Operation
3.8
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
0
1
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
S8Z52H1A
3-43
P437
3 Operation
3.8.1
I DC,lin / I DC,nom
1.2
1.1
I DC,lin20
1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
I DC,lin1
0
0
0.1
0.2
I DC1
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
0.6
I DC / I DC,nom
I DC20
19Z5266A_EN
Fig. 3-26: Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin.
3-44
P437
3 Operation
IDC,lin / IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points
IDC,lin20
0.7
0.6
IDC,lin4
0.5
0.4
IDC,lin3
0.3
IDC,lin2
0.2
IDC,lin1
0.1
0
0
0.1
0.2
IDC1
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
IDC2 IDC3
0.7
0.8
0.9
IDC4
1
IDC20
1.1
1.2
IDC / IDC,nom
Fig. 3-27: Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of
0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken line).
3-45
P437
3 Operation
MEASI:
IDC 1
[ 037 150 ]
MEASI:
IDC 8
[ 037 164 ]
MEASI:
IDC 15
[ 037 178 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 1
[037 151 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 8
[037 165 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 15
[037 179 ]
MEASI:
IDC 2
[ 037 152 ]
MEASI:
IDC 9
[ 037 166 ]
MEASI:
IDC 16
[ 037 180 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 2
[ 037 153 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 9
[ 037 167 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 16
[ 037 181 ]
MEASI:
IDC 3
[ 037 154 ]
MEASI:
IDC 10
[ 037 168 ]
MEASI:
IDC 17
[ 037 182 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 3
[ 037 155 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 10
[ 037 169 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 17
[ 037 183 ]
MEASI:
IDC 4
[ 037 156 ]
MEASI:
IDC 11
[ 037 170 ]
MEASI:
IDC 18
[ 037 184 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 4
[ 037 157 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 11
[ 037 171 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 18
[ 037 185 ]
MEASI:
IDC 5
[ 037 158 ]
MEASI:
IDC 12
[ 037 172 ]
MEASI:
IDC 19
[ 037 186 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 5
[ 037 159 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 12
[ 037 173 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 19
[ 037 187 ]
MEASI:
IDC 6
[ 037 160 ]
MEASI:
IDC 13
[ 037 174 ]
MEASI:
IDC 20
[ 037 188 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 6
[ 037 161 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 13
[ 037 175 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 20
[ 037 189 ]
MEASI:
IDC 7
[ 037 162 ]
MEASI:
IDC 14
[ 037 176 ]
MEASI:
Enable IDC p.u.
[ 037 190 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 7
[ 037 163 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 14
[ 037 177 ]
MEASI:
IDC< open circuit
[ 037 191 ]
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
SFMON:
Invalid scaling IDC
[ 093 116 ]
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
Input channel 1(I-1)
SFMON:
Overload 20 mA input
[ 098 025 ]
MEASI:
Open circ. 20mA inp.
[ 040 192 ]
SFMON:
Open circ. 20mA inp.
[ 098 026 ]
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC p.u.
[ 004 135 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC
[ 004 134 ]
S8Z52H2A
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well
and are available for further processing by protection functions.
3-46
P437
3 Operation
MEASI:
Scaled val. IDC,lin1
[ 037 192 ]
MEASI:
Scaled val.IDC,lin20
[ 037 193 ]
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
MEASI:
Scaled value IDC,lin
[ 004 180 ]
Q9Z5029A
3.8.1.1
Zero Suppression
Zero suppression is defined by setting MEA SI: En able ID C p. u. If the direct
current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and
the current IDC,lin will be displayed as having a value of 0.
3.8.1.2
3.8.2
3-47
P437
3 Operation
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
MEASI:
PT100 faulty
[ 040 190 ]
SFMON:
PT100 open circuit
[ 098 024 ]
MEASI:
Temperature
[ 004 133 ]
MEASI:
Temperature p.u.
[ 004 221 ]
MEASI:
Temperature Tmax
[ 004 233 ]
19Z5262A
Fig. 3-30: Temperature measurement using a PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to the analog (I/O)
module.
3.8.2.1
Open-Circuit Monitoring
If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal
MEASI : PT100 faulty is issued.
3-48
P437
3 Operation
3.9
3-49
P437
3 Operation
OUTP:
Outp.rel.block USER
[ 021 014 ]
0
OUTP:
Outp. relays blocked
[ 021 015 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
OUTP:
Block outp.rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
OUTP:
Oper. mode K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1
2
3
-K xxx
4
5
6
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
OUTP:
State K xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
4: ES reset (syst.dist)
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
S1 1
R1
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
OUTP:
Latching reset
[ 040 088 ]
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
System disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP:
Reset latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1
100 ms
1: execute
OUTP:
Reset latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
64Z8038A
Fig. 3-31: Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays
P437
3 Operation
OUTP:
Relay assign. f.test
[ 003 042 ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx1
[ AAA AAA ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx2
[ BBB BBB ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx3
[ CCC CCC ]
-K yyy
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off)
Selected relay
OUTP:
Relay test
[ 003 043 ]
OUTP:
Hold-time for test
[ 003 044 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
47Z1050A
3-51
P437
3.10
3 Operation
3.10.1
General Settings
3.10.1.1
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
0
1
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
S8Z52H1A
3.10.1.2
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
036 085
MEASO:
Outp. enabled EXT
[ 036 085 ]
MEASO:
Enable
304 600
S8Z52H5A
3-52
P437
3 Operation
3.10.1.3
The measured data output function is reset from the integral local control
panel or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
MEASO:
Reset output USER
[ 037 116 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MEASO:
Reset output EXT
[ 036 087 ]
MEASO:
Output reset
[ 037 117 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MEASO:
Reset meas.val.outp.
304 601
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
47Z13H6A
3.10.1.4
Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the P437 inherent setting
range.
Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault
measurands, in particular fault location in percent.
3-53
P437
3.10.2
3 Operation
3.10.2.1
3.10.2.2
3.10.2.3
The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded. If
this should occur or if the measurand is outside the acceptable measuring range,
then the value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Measurands
Range
0 ... 1
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program S&R-103 - PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under minimum and
maximum.)
3-54
P437
3 Operation
Measurands to be output
Range
Measurands to be output
Measurands
Measurands in the range "Measurands to BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
be output"
(Valid BCD value)
Measurands:
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx:
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx:
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3.10.2.4
Measurands
Range
Fault measurand:
0 ... 1
Measurands to be output
Range
Measurands to be output
0% ... 200%
3-55
P437
3 Operation
Measurands
0 ... 200
Description
Current value
056 020
With
031 074
Yes
053 002
010 010
1.00 s
037 140
0.500
037 141
0.813
037 142
037 143
200
The following figure displays the values output as a function of the fault location.
The BCD value and the signal MEASO: Vali d BCD value = Yes are only issued
in the value range 0% to 200%.
BCD value
FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent
MEASO:
Valid BCD value
[004 027]
FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent
[004 027]
[037 050]
200
0
-320%
0%
200%
320%
FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent
[004 027]
47Z1040A
3-56
P437
3 Operation
Except from radial, single circuit lines the fault location value gives a reasonable
value only for faults up to the line end. For any fault on a subsequent line the fault
location is more or less incorrect due to unknown fault current infeed in the remote
substation.
It is recommended to limit the calculation of a fault location to a practical and
sensible range on the line by setting F T _ D A : O u t p . f l t . l o c a t . P S x = Only
aft.tr.t1/t1,ze.
MEASO:
Hold time output BCD
[ 010 010 ]
MEASO:
Enabled
[ 037 102 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 051 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 052 ]
Setting blocked
MEASO:
1-digit bit 2 (BCD)
[ 037 053 ]
MEASO:
Enable
MEASO:
1-digit bit 3 (BCD)
[ 037 054 ]
304 600
MEASO:
10-digit bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 055 ]
MEASO:
10-digit bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 056 ]
MEASO:
Reset meas.val.outp.
MEASO:
10-digit bit 2 (BCD)
[ 037 057 ]
304 601
MEASO:
10-digit bit 3 (BCD)
[ 037 058 ]
MEASO:
100-dig. bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 059 ]
Selected
meas. oper. value
MEASO:
100-dig. bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 060 ]
Selected
Meas. event value
being updated
Selected meas. val.
MEASO:
Valid BCD value
[ 037 050 ]
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. BCD
[ 053 002 ]
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
c1
Measured value n
c2
Scaling of the
BCD output
++
2
1...2
MEASO:
Output value x
[ * ]
0 . . . 100 %
++
Address
MEASO:
Scaled min. val. BCD
037 140
x: 1
037 120
MEASO:
Scaled max. val. BCD
037 141
x: 2
037 121
MEASO:
BCD-Out min. value
037 142
037 122
MEASO:
BCD-Out max. value
037 143
MEASO:
Output value x
x: 3
19Z5264A
Fig. 3-37: BCD measured data output. Overflow behavior is displayed in BCD example (see previous figure).
3-57
P437
3.10.3
3 Operation
3.10.3.1
3.10.3.2
3.10.3.3
3.10.3.4
3.10.3.5
MEA SO: S cale d min . val . A-1 or ME ASO: Scaled min. val. A- 2,
resp.
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
3-58
P437
3 Operation
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program S&R-103 PC Access Software MiCOM S1 under minimum and
maximum.)
Measurands
Range
0 ... 1
Measurands to be output
Range
Scaled measurands with a scaled knee-point to be Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
output
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data model
3.10.3.6
ME ASO: A nOu t min . val. A -1 or MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2, resp.
MEA SO: A nOu t max. val . A-1 or ME ASO: AnOut max. val. A-2,
resp.
Measurands
Measurands:
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx:
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx:
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3-59
P437
3.10.3.7
3 Operation
Measurands
Range
0 V ... 150 V
0 ... 1
Measurands to be output
Range
Measurands
4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA
3-60
P437
3 Operation
Address
Description
Current value
056 020
With
031 074
Yes
053 000
010 114
1.00 s
037 104
037 105
037 106
037 107
4 mA
037 108
16 mA
037 109
18 mA
By setting MEASO: A nOut m in . val. A-1, the user can specify the output
current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set
minimum measured value to be transmitted. The setting at MEASO: AnO ut
max . va l. A-1 defines the output current that is output for the maximum
measured value to be transmitted. By defining the knee-point, the user can
obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. When entering this
setting the user must keep in mind that only a rising/rising or falling/falling curve
sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed). If the setting was not
properly entered, the signal SFMON: In val i d s caling A -1 will be issued.
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the P437, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the P437 is switched on-line again (with the
setting M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e).
3-61
P437
3 Operation
Ia / mA
20
18
Max.
output value
Knee point 16
output value
14
12
10
8
6
4
Min.
output value
2
0
0
0.02
0.013
0.1
0.067
1
0.667
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.0
Vnom
Mx,scal
19Z5265A
Fig. 3-38: Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting
value is = 0; also possible is directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data
Output).
3-62
P437
3 Operation
MEASO:
Value A-1 output
[ 037 118 ]
MEASO:
Hold time output A-1
[ 010 114 ]
MEASO:
Enabled
[ 037 102 ]
R
c
Setting(s) blocked
MEASO:
Enable
304 600
MEASO:
Reset meas.val.outp.
304 601
Selected
meas. oper. value
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Selected
Meas. event value
being updated
c
K x1
K x2
K x3
K xx
MEASO:
Value A-1 output
[ 037 118 ]
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. A-1
[ 053 000 ]
Measured value 1
MEASO:
Scaled min. val. A-1
[ 037 104 ]
MEASO:
Scaled knee val. A-1
[ 037 105 ]
MEASO:
Scaled max. val. A-1
[ 037 106 ]
MEASO:
AnOut min. val. A-1
[ 037 107 ]
MEASO:
AnOut knee point A-1
[ 037 108 ]
MEASO:
AnOut max. val. A-1
[ 037 109 ]
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
SFMON:
Invalid scaling A-1
[ 093 114 ]
MEASO:
Output value x
[
*
]
0...100 %
MEASO:
Output value x
Address
AnOut value
X: 1
037 120
037 121
X: 3
037 122
c1
c2
c3
1
2
X: 2
MEASO:
Value A-1 valid
[ 069 014 ]
3
1...3
MEASO:
Current A-1
[ 005 100 ]
S8Z52H8B
3-63
P437
3.10.4
3 Operation
These external measured values are output by the P437 either in BCD data
form or as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured
data output function or the channels of the analog measured data output
function are configured accordingly.
3-64
P437
3 Operation
3.11
3.11.1
LED indicator
Label
Configuration
H 1 (green)
HEALTHY
H 17 (red)
EDIT MODE
H 2 (amber)
OUT OF SERVICE
H 3 (amber)
ALARM
H 4 (red)
TRIP
H 4 (green)
H 5 to H 16
For each of these LED indicators both colors (red & green) may
be configured freely and independently.
3.11.2
3-65
P437
3 Operation
TRIP
H18
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
H19
EDIT MODE
H20
H21
H22
H23
3.11.3
Therefore there are eight operating modes available, which are built from
combinations of the following components:
flashing
updating
energize-on-signal
(ES)
ES updating
ES manual reset
normally-energized
(NE)
NE updating
NE manual reset
energize-on-signal
(ES)
ES updating bl
ES manual reset bl
normally-energized
(NE)
NE updating bl
NE manual reset bl
P437
3 Operation
ES reset (fault)
ES reset (syst.dist)
flashing
ES reset (fault) bl
ES rst (syst.dst) bl
Finally, as the 13th operating mode, every LED (except the permanently
configured ones, see Section 3.11.1, (p. 3-65)) can be set to the mode ES
Alarmunit. This mode has the following flashing behavior:
The LED starts flashing with the first starting of the signal that has been
assigned to it.
The LED assumes the color that has been assigned via setting parameter. If
both colors (red and green) have been configured to different signals, and
these two signals both become active then the LED flashes in amber color.
If an LED reset is executed and the configured signal is still active the LED
changes to continuous light.
Important: If the LED was flashing in amber color then this color is kept,
even if one of the two signals is no longer active.
If all the configured signals are no longer active at the time of the LED
reset, or become inactive at a later time, the LED goes out.
If later, after the LED has gone out, any of the configured signals becomes
active again then the LED starts flashing again (in the assigned color).
If both colors have been configured and the LED shines continuously in
amber color, then it is possible that one of these two signals becomes
inactive and active again whilst the other signal stays active all the time. In
this case the LED starts flashing again with the starting of that signal. But
since the LED permanently keeps the amber color it is no longer possible to
tell the two signals from each other. Therefore general caution is
recommended whenever two different signals are configured to an LED
with this operating mode.
3-67
P437
3 Operation
LED:
Oper. mode H xx
[ xxx xxx ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist)
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
7: ES updating bl
8: ES manual reset bl
9: ES reset (fault) bl
10: ES rst (syst.dst) bl
11: NE updating bl
12: NE manual reset bl
13: ES Alarmunit
!G!
-Hxx (red)
&
LED:
State Hxx red
[ zzz zzz ]
&
LED:
Fct.assig. Hxx red
[ yyy yyy ]
&
Signal
Signal
Signal
Signal
1
2
3
n
&
&
m out of n
Selected signals
&
S1 1
&
R1
&
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
System disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
&
&
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
47Z8000A
Fig. 3-41: Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators, showing the example of the red LED color.
3-68
P437
3 Operation
3.12
3.12.1
3-69
P437
3 Operation
A
B
C
MAIN:
Vref,nom V.T. sec.
[ 031 052 ]
1U
Vref
2U
MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. IP
[ 010 004 ]
IA
MAIN:
Inom device
[ 010 003 ]
XY
IA
XY
IB
IC
XY
IC
IN
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
IB
(Y = -1)
MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. IN
[ 010 019 ]
X
MAIN:
IN,nom device
[ 010 026 ]
XY
IN
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
MAIN:
Conn.meas.crc.IN,par
[ 010 020 ]
MAIN:
IN,nom device
[ 010 023 ]
2IN
X
XY
IN,par
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
Parallel line
MAIN:
VNG,nom V.T. sec.
[ 010 028 ]
N(e)
E(n)
VN-G
U
V
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
Line
47Z0203B
Fig. 3-42: Connecting the P437 measuring circuits. (If markings P1 P2 and S1 S2 are used for CT polarity
then the dots shown here represent the P1 and S1 terminals.)
3-70
P437
3 Operation
3.12.2
Delayed and stored phase currents for all three phases demand values for
the three phases
Residual current of the parallel line, which is measured by the P437 at the
T 24 transformer
Phase-to-ground voltages
Phase-to-phase voltages
System frequency
3-71
P437
3.12.2.1
3 Operation
Negative-sequence current:
I neg = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |
Positive-sequence current:
I pos = 3 | (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |
Phase sequence A-C-B (anti-clockwise rotating field)
Negative-sequence current:
I neg = 3 | (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |
Positive-sequence current:
I pos = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |
Symbols used:
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
3-72
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. IP
[ 011 030 ]
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
IA
c1
IB
c2
IC
c3
c4
c5
c6
+
+
+
MAIN:
Current A p.u.
[ 005 041 ]
MAIN:
Current B p.u.
[ 006 041 ]
MAIN:
Current C p.u.
[ 007 041 ]
MAIN:
Current (IP) p.u.
[ 005 011 ]
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
Current IP,min p.u.
[ 005 056 ]
COMP
Imax
Imin
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Current A prim.
[ 005 040 ]
MAIN:
Current B prim.
[ 006 040 ]
MAIN:
Current C prim.
[ 007 040 ]
MAIN:
Current (IP) prim.
[ 005 010 ]
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max prim.
[ 005 050 ]
MAIN:
Curr. IP,min prim.
[ 005 055 ]
19Z6403A
3-73
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
IA p.u.,demand
[ 006 235 ]
MAIN:
IB p.u.,demand
[ 006 236 ]
MAIN:
IC p.u.,demand
[ 006 237 ]
MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,delay
[ 005 037 ]
MAIN:
IA p.u.,demand stor.
[ 006 232 ]
MAIN:
Current B p.u.
[ 006 041 ]
MAIN:
IB p.u.,demand stor.
[ 006 233 ]
MAIN:
Current C p.u.
[ 007 041 ]
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
Current A p.u.
[ 005 041 ]
MAIN:
IC p.u.,demand stor.
[ 006 234 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
IA prim,demand
[ 006 226 ]
MAIN:
IB prim,demand
[ 006 227 ]
MAIN:
IC prim,demand
[ 006 228 ]
MAIN:
IP,max prim.,delay
[ 005 036 ]
MAIN:
Reset IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
MAIN:
IA prim,demand stor.
[ 006 223 ]
0
1
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Rst IP,max,stor. EXT
[ 005 211 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
IB prim,demand stor.
[ 006 224 ]
MAIN:
IC prim,demand stor.
[ 006 225 ]
MAIN:
IP,max prim.,stored
[ 005 034 ]
19Z6404A
Fig. 3-44: Measured operating data - phase current, part 2: demand values (delayed and stored phase currents and
maximum phase current).
3-74
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. IN
[ 011 031 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
IN
MAIN:
Current IN p.u.
[ 004 044 ]
MAIN:
IN,nom C.T. prim.
[ 010 018 ]
MAIN:
Current IN prim.
[ 004 043 ]
S8Z5097A
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Meas.val.rel. IN,par
[ 011 043 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
IN,par
MAIN:
Current IN par p.u.
[ 008 001 ]
MAIN:
IN,nom,par C.T. prim
[ 010 152 ]
MAIN:
Current IN,par prim.
[ 008 000 ]
47Z0210A
Fig. 3-46: Measured operating data residual current of the parallel line.
3.12.2.2
3.12.2.3
3-75
P437
3.12.2.4
3 Operation
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,delay
[ 005 037 ]
MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]
MAIN:
Reset IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
MAIN:
Rst IP,max,stor. EXT
[ 005 211 ]
50Z0115A
Fig. 3-47: Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display display of demand values.
3-76
P437
3 Operation
3.12.2.5
COMP
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
VPG,max
VPG,max
VPG,min
VPG,min
+
+
+
(VPG)/3
(VPG)/3
VA-B
VB-C
VC-A
MAIN:
Phase sequence
COMP
[ 010 049 ]
VPP,max
VPP,max
VPP,min
VPP,min
1: A - B - C
2: A - C - B
Vneg
Vneg
Vpos
Vpos
47Z0106A
Fig. 3-48: Determining the minimum and maximum phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages as well as the
negative-sequence and positive-sequence voltages.
3-77
P437
MAIN:
General start. int.
3 Operation
306 539
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. V
[ 011 032 ]
VA-G
C1
VB-G
C2
VC-G
C3
VPG,max
C4
VPG,min
C5
(VPG)/3
C6
VA-B
C7
VB-C
C8
VC-A
C9
VPP,max
C10
VPP,min
C11
Vneg
C12
Vpos
C13
MAIN:
Voltage A-G p.u.
[ 005 043 ]
MAIN:
Voltage B-G p.u.
[ 006 043 ]
MAIN:
Voltage C-G p.u.
[ 007 043 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VPG,max p.u.
[ 008 043 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VPG,min p.u.
[ 009 043 ]
MAIN:
Volt. (VPG)/3 p.u.
[ 005 013 ]
MAIN:
Voltage A-B p.u.
[ 005 045 ]
MAIN:
Voltage B-C p.u.
[ 006 045 ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MAIN:
Voltage C-A p.u.
[ 007 045 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VPP,max p.u.
[ 008 045 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VPP,min p.u.
[ 009 045 ]
MAIN:
Voltage Vneg p.u.
[ 009 017 ]
MAIN:
Voltage Vpos p.u.
[ 009 018 ]
8
9
10
11
12
13
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN:
Voltage A-G prim.
[ 005 042 ]
MAIN:
Voltage B-G prim.
[ 006 042 ]
MAIN:
Voltage C-G prim.
[ 007 042 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPG,max prim.
[ 008 042 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPG,min prim.
[ 009 042 ]
MAIN:
Volt. (VPG)/3 prim.
[ 005 012 ]
MAIN:
Voltage A-B prim.
[ 005 044 ]
MAIN:
Voltage B-C prim.
[ 006 044 ]
MAIN:
Voltage C-A prim.
[ 007 044 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPP,max prim.
[ 008 044 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPP,min prim.
[ 009 044 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPP,min prim.
[ 009 044 ]
12Z6204B
3-78
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
MAIN:
Meas. val. rel. VNG
[ 011 033 ]
VN-G
MAIN:
Voltage VNG p.u.
[ 004 042 ]
MAIN:
VNG,nom V.T. prim.
[ 010 027 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VNG prim.
[ 004 041 ]
19Z5064A
MAIN:
Meas. val. rel. Vref
[ 011 034 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
Vref
MAIN:
Voltage Vref p.u.
[ 005 047 ]
MAIN:
Vref,nom V.T. prim.
[ 010 100 ]
MAIN:
Voltage Vref prim.
[ 005 046 ]
47Z0109A
3-79
P437
3.12.2.6
3 Operation
Values for active and reactive power will always be calculated and
displayed as these quantities are required for the subsequent energy
measurement. Greater deviations in measurements may occur with low
phase currents or a critical power factor value.
The active power factor will be calculated only if the apparent power value
exceeds 5% of the nominal apparent power Snom.
Load angles will be displayed only if the respective phase current exceeds
0.1Inom and if the phase-to-ground voltage exceeds 1.5 V.
The angle between the measured values for the residual current and the
neutral-point displacement voltage will only be displayed if the residual
current exceeds 0.02IN,nom and the neutral-point displacement voltage
exceeds 1.5 V.
The setting for MAIN : Meas . di recti on P,Q may be changed from Standard to
Opposite if the user wishes to have the following measured operating data
displayed with the opposite sign (see Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-81)):
This setting parameter does not influence the remaining measured operating
data. It must be noted that inverting the sign will only affect the display of
measured operating data, all protection functions will internally use non-inverted
measured values.
3-80
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN:
Appar. power S p.u.
[ 005 026 ]
MAIN:
Active power factor
[ 004 054 ]
IA
IB
MAIN:
Meas. direction P,Q
[ 006 096 ]
IC
VA-G
> 1.5 V
VB-G
> 1.5 V
VC-G
> 1.5 V
IN
X Y
X Y
X Y
X Y
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
&
VN-G
> 1.5 V
MAIN:
Appar. power S prim.
[ 005 025 ]
MAIN:
Active power P p.u.
[ 004 051 ]
MAIN:
Reac. power Q p.u.
[ 004 053 ]
MAIN:
Active power P prim.
[ 004 050 ]
MAIN:
Reac. power Q prim.
[ 004 052 ]
MAIN:
Load angle phi A p.u
[ 005 073 ]
MAIN:
Load angle phi A
[ 004 055 ]
&
MAIN:
Load angle phi B p.u
[ 005 074 ]
MAIN:
Load angle phi B
[ 004 056 ]
&
MAIN:
Load angle phi C p.u
[ 005 075 ]
MAIN:
Load angle phi C
[ 004 057 ]
&
MAIN:
Angle phi N p.u.
[ 005 076 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi N
[ 004 072 ]
&
+
+
+
MAIN:
Angle VPG/IN p.u.
[ 005 072 ]
MAIN:
Angle VPG vs. IN
[ 005 009 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
19Z8003A
Fig. 3-52: Measured operating data power, active power factor, and angle.
3-81
P437
3 Operation
3.12.2.7
Phase Relation IN
The P437 checks if the phase relations of calculated residual current and
measured residual current are coherent. If the phase displacement between the
two currents is 45, then the indication Equal phase is displayed.
IA
IB
IC
IN
1
MAIN:
Phase rel. IN vs IP
[ 004 073 ]
1: Equal phase
2: Reverse phase
47Z0112A
Fig. 3-53: Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current.
3.12.2.8
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
IN
>0.02 INnom
IN,par
>0.02 INnom
VA-G
> 1.5 V
&
&
MAIN:
Angle VAG, IN
[ 008 004 ]
MAIN:
Angle VAG, IN,par
[ 008 003 ]
47Z8013
Fig. 3-54: Phase relation between phase-to-ground voltage A and residual currents.
3.12.2.9
Frequency
The P437 determines the frequency from the voltage VA-B. This voltage needs to
exceed a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for frequency to be
determined.
3-82
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Hardware fault
>0.65Vnom
306 018
VA-G
VB-G
MAIN:
Frequency f p.u.
[ 004 070 ]
MAIN:
Frequency f
[ 004 040 ]
12Z6209A
3-83
P437
3.12.2.10
3 Operation
Value range: 0
6553500.00 MWh
(009 090)
MA IN: No.overfl .act.en.out
(009 091)
MA IN: No.overfl. act.e n.inp
3-84
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Op. mode energy cnt.
[ 010 138 ]
MAIN:
Active power P prim.
[ 004 050 ]
P(t) dt
MAIN:
Act.energy outp.prim
[ 005 061 ]
-P(t) dt
MAIN:
Act.energy inp. prim
[ 005 062 ]
Q(t) dt
MAIN:
React.en. outp. prim
[ 005 063 ]
-Q(t) dt
MAIN:
React. en. inp. prim
[ 005 064 ]
MAIN:
Reac. power Q prim.
[ 004 052 ]
MAIN:
Reset meas.v.en.USER
[ 003 032 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
Overflow
Transfer
MAIN:
Rst meas.v.ener. EXT
[ 005 212 ]
Overflow
Transfer
Overflow
Transfer
Overflow
Transfer
MAIN:
No.overfl.act.en.out
[ 009 090 ]
MAIN:
No.overfl.act.en.inp
[ 009 091 ]
MAIN:
No.ov/fl.reac.en.out
[ 009 092 ]
MAIN:
No.ov/fl.reac.en.inp
[ 009 093 ]
19Z8033A
Fig. 3-56: Determining the active and reactive energy output and input.
3-85
P437
3.12.2.11
Procedure
3 Operation
Applications
Fault
5%
2%
45
70
Phase Angle
S8Z0401B
Fig. 3-57: Error of measurement in the determination of energy output resulting from the phase angle error of the
P437.
Error of measurement:
For phase angles with |cos | < 0.3, or when the error of measurement
resulting from the maximum phase-angle error is not acceptable, external
counters should be used to determine the energy output.
3-86
P437
3 Operation
3.12.3
3.12.3.1
None of the signals of the P437 function can be assigned to a binary output
or an LED indicator.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the Configuration branch of
the menu tree to access the setting relevant for the P437 function to be
cancelled. If, for example, the LIMIT function group is to be cancelled, the
setting of LI MI T: Function gr ou p L IMI T is set to Without. To re-include the
LIMIT function in the P437 configuration, the same setting is accessed and its
value is changed to With.
The P437 function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is
defined by the function group designation (example: LIMIT). In the following
description of the P437 functions, it is presumed that the corresponding P437
function is included in the configuration.
3.12.3.2
3-87
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0
0: No (= off)
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
0: No (= off)
1: Yes (= on)
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
003 027
Address
003 026
MAIN:
Enable protect. EXT
[ 003 027 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. enabled
[ 003 028 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
MAIN:
Disable protect. EXT
[ 003 026 ]
D5Z5004A
3.12.4
>0.05Inom
IA
IB
MAIN:
Current flow A
[ 010 223 ]
MAIN:
Current flow B
[ 010 224 ]
IC
MAIN:
Current flow C
[ 010 225 ]
19Z8039A
3-88
P437
3 Operation
3.12.5
MAIN:
Protection active
&
MAIN:
I> lift rush r. PSx
[
*
]
MAIN:
t lift rush rstr.PSx
[
*
]
306 001
&
MAIN:
Rush restr. A trig.
&
&
[ 041 028 ]
&
[ 041 029 ]
[ 041 027 ]
IA
&
IB
&
MAIN:
Rush restr. B trig.
MAIN:
Rush restr. C trig.
IC
>0.1 Inom
&
MAIN:
Op. mode rush r. PSx
[
]
MAIN:
Inrush stabil. trigg
306 014
1
2
MAIN:
Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx
0: Without
1: Not phase-selective
2: Phase-selective
fnom
I(2fn)/I(fn)
2*fnom
Parameter
MAIN:
Op. mode rush r. PSx
MAIN:
I> lift rush r. PSx
set 1
017 097
017 095
set 2
001 088
001 085
set 3
001 089
001 086
set 4
001 090
001 087
fnom
2*fnom
I(2fn)/I(fn)
fnom
2*fnom
I(2fn)/I(fn)
Parameter
MAIN:
Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx
MAIN:
t lift rush rstr.PSx
set 1
017 098
019 001
set 2
001 091
019 002
set 3
001 092
019 003
set 4
001 093
019 004
12Z7306A
3-89
P437
3 Operation
3.12.5.1
Selection of Functions
The inrush stabilization is designed with respect to function groups DIST, BUOC,
DTOC and IDMT. Depending on the parameter MA IN: Funct.Rush restr. PSx
the starting of these function groups is blocked selectively.
MAIN:
Funct.Rush restr.PSx
m out of n
DIST:
Starting I>>
011 139
DIST:
Starting Z<
MAIN:
Inrush stabil. trigg
036 241
BUOC:
Starting
306 014
010 185
MAIN:
Rush restr. B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>>
450 209
035 021
DTOC:
Starting I>>>
450 207
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>
450 208
035 020
DTOC:
Starting I>>
450 205
BUOC:
Block. Starting
BUOC:
Bl.Zero-sequ.start.
BUOC:
Zero-sequ. starting
DTOC:
Starting I>
450 204
DIST:
Bl.Start. Z<
450 206
036 013
MAIN:
Rush restr. A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
DIST:
Bl.Start. I>>
035 022
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>>>
450 210
DTOC:
Starting I>>>>
035 023
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>
035 024
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>>>>
450 211
DTOC:
Block.Start. Ineg>
450 153
DTOC:
Block.Start. Ineg>>
450 154
035 025
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>>
DTOC:
Block.Start. Ineg>>>
450 155
035 026
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>>>
DTOC:
Bl.Start. Ineg>>>>
450 212
035 027
DTOC:
Starting IN>
035 028
DTOC:
Starting IN>>
035 029
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>
DTOC:
Block. Start. IN>
450 149
DTOC:
Block. Start. IN>>
450 150
DTOC:
Block. Start. IN>>>
450 151
035 030
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>>
Parameter
MAIN:
Funct.Rush restr.PSx
set 1
017 093
set 2
017 064
set 3
017 082
set 4
017 083
DTOC:
Block. Start. IN>>>>
035 031
450 152
IDMT:
Starting Iref,P>
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,P> Px
040 080
IDMT:
Starting Iref,N>
450 156
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,N>
040 081
450 160
IDMT:
Starting Iref,neg>
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,neg>
040 107
450 161
45Z8031A
Fig. 3-61: Selection of the stabilization criteria for the inrush stabilization.
3-90
P437
3 Operation
3.12.6
Multiple Blocking
Two multiple blocking conditions can be defined via m out of n parameters.
The functions defined by selection may be blocked via an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
MAIN:
Fct.assign. block. 1
[ 021 021 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function 3
Selected functions
MAIN:
Blck.1 sel.functions
306 022
MAIN:
Blocking 1 EXT
[ 040 060 ]
MAIN:
Fct.assign. block. 2
[ 021 022 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function 3
Selected functions
MAIN:
Blck.2 sel.functions
306 023
MAIN:
Blocking 2 EXT
[ 040 061 ]
D5Z50CLA
3-91
P437
3.12.7
3 Operation
Blocked/Faulty
If the protective functions are blocked, the condition is signaled by continuous
illumination of the amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a
signal from an output relay configured MA IN: B locked/fault y. In addition
functions can be selected that will issue the MA IN: Blocked/faulty signal by
setting a m out of n parameter.
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off)
MAIN:
Device not ready
[ 004 060 ]
MAIN:
Blocked/faulty
[ 004 065 ]
SFMON:
Blocking
304 951
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Fct. assign. fault
[ 021 031 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
D5Z50EHA
3.12.8
In order to suppress triggering during transient actions, the signal issued when a
plausibility discrepancy is detected has a generally delayed pickup of 100 ms.
Besides monitoring for signaling purposes, status signals are also processed in
these functions:
3-92
P437
3 Operation
3-93
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
CB open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
&
&
&
MAIN:
CB open 3p
[ 031 040 ]
&
[ 031 028 ]
configured
&
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN:
CB open >=1p
[ 031 039 ]
&
MAIN:
CB closed 3p
[ 031 042 ]
&
MAIN:
CB closed >= 1p
[ 031 038 ]
&
&
MAIN:
CB closed A
[ 031 035 ]
&
&
MAIN:
CB open A
[ 031 032 ]
&
&
MAIN:
CB closed B
[ 031 036 ]
&
&
MAIN:
CB open B
[ 031 033 ]
&
&
MAIN:
CB closed C
[ 031 037 ]
&
&
MAIN:
CB open C
[ 031 034 ]
&
&
&
[ 036 051 ]
configured
MAIN:
CB closed A EXT
[ 031 029 ]
[ 031 029 ]
configured
MAIN:
CB closed B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
[ 031 030 ]
configured
MAIN:
CB closed C EXT
[ 031 031 ]
[ 031 031 ]
configured
10
100 ms
0
MAIN:
CB pos.sig. implaus.
[ 031 041 ]
>0.05 Inom
Plausibility
check
IA
IB
IC
47Z1021C
3.12.9
Close Command
The circuit breaker can be closed by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC), by
a setting parameter or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. The
close command by setting parameters or a binary signal input is only executed if
there is no trip command 1 present and no trip has been issued by a protection
3-94
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Man. close cmd. USER
[ 018 033 ]
0
1
500ms
0: don't execute
[ 037 068 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. close cmd. EXT
[ 041 022 ]
MAIN:
Close cmd.pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
MAIN:
Man.cl.cmd.enabl.EXT
[ 041 023 ]
1
t
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
Close command
303 021
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
0
1
+
[ 009 055 ]
0: don't execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset.c.cl./tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ]
47Z1322A
3-95
P437
3 Operation
3.12.10
3.12.10.1
Starting Signals
The starting signals of the distance protection and backup overcurrent time
protection functions are linked to form common starting signals. The number of
general starting signals (GS) is counted.
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
+
R
MAIN:
No. general start.
[ 004 000 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
BUOC:
Starting
[ 036 013 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
DIST:
Starting A
MAIN:
Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
303 529
BUOC:
IA> triggered
304 750
DIST:
Starting B
MAIN:
Starting B
[ 036 002 ]
303 530
BUOC:
IB> triggered
304 751
DIST:
Starting C
MAIN:
Starting C
[ 036 003 ]
303 531
BUOC:
IC> triggered
304 752
DIST:
Signal block start.G
303 594
&
DIST:
Starting N1
MAIN:
Starting GF
[ 036 004 ]
303 535
BUOC:
SN
304 757
45Z63ASA
For solidly grounded systems (setting MAIN: Neu tr.pt. treat. PSx = Lowimped. grounding), it can be selected whether a ground fault is determined by an
'OR'-linked or an 'AND'-linked condition of the IN> and VNG> detectors in the
distance protection. The parameter setting MA IN : Ground starting PSx may
then be used.
3.12.10.2
3-96
P437
3 Operation
In addition the function must be enabled by setting the four parameters
MAIN : Enab le 1p trip PSx.
All trip signals issued by function groups DTOC, IDMT, PSB, GFSC, SOTF,
THERM, V<>, P<>, CBF
In addition the P437 now provides a time delayed 3-pole transfer trip feature.
This is issued if during the time period set at MA IN: 3p t rans f 1p trp PSx no
phase starting takes place and therefore no phase-selection is possible.
The internal ARC is also controlled by this trip logic.
If at least one phase starting takes place, then the ARC operative timer
stages are triggered, as usual, with general starting. The ARC dead time is
started if the trip signal is terminated within the set operative time. In this
case it is assumed that the operating mode HSR permits that the ARC dead
time is not triggered if only a singlepole HSR has been set and the trip is
multi-pole.
In case no starting takes place and the 3-pole trip is issued, then the ARC
operative timer stages are triggered together with the general trip signal 1.
The ARC dead time is started if the trip signal is terminated within the set
operative time. In this case it is assumed that a 3-pole HSR (for a 3-pole
trip) is permitted.
Phase-selective trip-logic
Number of
phases
selected
Trip decision
1-pole
1-/3-pole
3-pole
3-pole trip
no
yes (3-pole)
yes (3-pole)
yes (3-pole)
1-pole trip
yes
yes (1-pole)
yes (3-pole)
yes (3-pole)
>1
3-pole trip
no
yes (3-pole)
yes (3-pole)
no
3-97
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Fct.ass.1p trip cmd1
[ 002 060 ]
DTOC:
tI> elapsed
[ 040 010 ]
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>
[ 035 043 ]
MAIN:
Par. trip (1p) EXT
[ 002 066 ]
...
m out of n
Selected signals
MAIN:
* Parameter MAIN:
Enable 1p trip PSx
3p transf 1p trp PSx
set 1
002 061
002 184
set 2
002 062
002 185
set 3
002 063
002 186
set 4
002 064
002 187
MAIN:
Enable 1p trip PSx
[
*
]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
&
MAIN:
Trip A
306 009
MAIN:
Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
&
MAIN:
Trip B
306 010
MAIN:
Starting B
[ 036 002 ]
&
MAIN:
Trip C
306 011
MAIN:
Starting C
[ 036 003 ]
&
1
1
MAIN:
Blocking 1p trip EXT
[ 041 078 ]
MAIN:
3p transf 1p trp PSx
[
*
]
&
&
47Z1101A
3-98
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, A
BUOC:
Trip A
MAIN:
Trip A
303 623
306 009
304 754
PSIG:
Trip channel 1
402 575
PSIG:
Trip V<, A
305 159
ARC:
External trip A
303 016
ARC:
Test HSR A, internal
303 011
GSCSG:
Trip A
304 004
MAIN:
Manual trip signal A
[ 034 047 ]
MAIN:
Trip 1,A
310 003
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, B
MAIN:
Trip B
303 624
306 010
BUOC:
Trip B
304 755
PSIG:
Trip channel 2
402 576
PSIG:
Trip V<, B
305 160
ARC:
External trip B
303 017
ARC:
Test HSR B, internal
303 012
GSCSG:
Trip B
304 005
MAIN:
Manual trip signal B
[ 034 048 ]
MAIN:
Trip 1,B
310 004
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, C
MAIN:
Trip C
303 625
306 011
BUOC:
Trip C
304 756
PSIG:
Trip channel 3
402 577
PSIG:
Trip V<, C
305 161
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
=1
ARC:
External trip C
303 018
ARC:
Test HSR C, internal
303 013
&
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
=3
GSCSG:
Trip C
304 006
MAIN:
Manual trip signal C
[ 034 049 ]
MAIN:
Trip 1,C
310 005
MAIN:
3p tr.if HSR off PSx
[
*
]
0
1
&
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
Enabled
[ 015 064 ]
ARC:
3-pole transfer int.
Parameter
set
set
set
set
303 020
1
2
3
4
MAIN:
3p tr.if HSR off PSx
015 065
024 034
024 094
025 054
47Z1123A
3.12.10.3
Trip Command
The P437 provides two trip commands. The functions required to trip can be
selected by setting an m out of n parameter independently for each of the two
3-99
P437
3 Operation
trip commands. The minimum trip command time is settable. The trip signals are
present only as long as the conditions for the signal are met.
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, A
[ 036 006 ]
MAIN:
Trip A
306 009
MAIN:
Trip command 1, A
[ 036 072 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, B
[ 036 007 ]
MAIN:
Trip B
306 010
MAIN:
Trip command 1, B
[ 036 073 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, C
[ 036 008 ]
MAIN:
Trip C
306 011
MAIN:
Trip command 1, C
[ 036 074 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 2
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
303 585
DIST:
Trip zone 3
MAIN:
Min.dur. trip cmd. 1
[ 021 003 ]
303 586
DIST:
Trip zone 4
303 587
DIST:
Trip zone 5
303 588
DIST:
Trip zone 6
303 621
DIST:
Trip zone 7
303 622
DIST:
Trip zone 8
MAIN:
Fct.assig.trip cmd.1
[ 021 001 ]
303 626
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
m out of n
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN:
Trip signal 1
Selected signals
306 017
MAIN:
Fct.assig.trip cmd.2
[ 021 002 ]
m out of n
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
Selected signals
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. trip cmd. 2
[ 021 004 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
47Z10AUA
3-100
P437
3 Operation
3.12.10.3.1
This feature makes it possible to use direct transfer tripping and any classical
scheme logic (such as permissive or blocking schemes) concurrently.
3.12.10.3.2
MA IN : Se nd tran sf er trip B
These send signals were designed for applications with bi-directional transfer
tripping so as to avoid that, for instance, a transfer trip signal is sent only
because such a transfer trip signal was received from the remote station.
With a 3-pole trip, the MAIN: Se nd transf e r trip signal is sent as soon as the
MAI N: Gen . tri p command 1 signal has been issued, except when this trip
command was caused by receiving the MAI N: Tr ans fer t rip. EXT signal (see
Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-101)).
For the P437 with 1/3-pole tripping the same applies to 1-pole send signals.
The P437 should either be used with phase-selective transfer tripping (1-pole) or 3pole transfer tripping, but never with both transfer trip types used simultaneously.
The reason for this is that with each 1-pole trip command a 3-pole general trip
command 1 is issued. If, for instance, the M A I N : T r a n s f e r t r i p A E X T signal is
received without a local trip signal being present, then the P437 will issue a 1-pole
M A I N : T r i p c o m m a n d 1 , A as well as the 3-pole M A I N : G e n . t r i p c o m m a n d
1. Since no 3-pole transfer trip signal M A I N : T r a n s f e r t r i p . E X T was received,
the P437 will send the M A I N : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p signal (but not the
M A I N : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p A signal).
MAIN:
Send transfer trip
[ 001 207 ]
MAIN:
Send transfer trip
[ 001 207 ]
VG
VG
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
P437
&
11
P437
45Z6304A
3-101
P437
3.12.10.3.3
3 Operation
MAIN:
Man. trip cmd. USER
[ 003 040 ]
0
1
MAIN:
Man. trip cmd. EXT
[ 037 018 ]
100 ms
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
100 ms
MAIN:
Manual trip signal A
[ 034 047 ]
100 ms
MAIN:
Manual trip signal B
[ 034 048 ]
100 ms
MAIN:
Manual trip signal C
[ 034 049 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man.trip cmd. A USER
[ 003 017 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man def. trip A EXT
[ 038 030 ]
MAIN:
Man.trip cmd. B USER
[ 003 018 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man def. trip B EXT
[ 038 031 ]
MAIN:
Man.trip cmd. C USER
[ 003 019 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man def. trip C EXT
[ 038 032 ]
47Z11AVA
3.12.10.3.4
3.12.10.3.5
3-102
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Trip cmd.block. USER
[ 021 012 ]
0
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Trip cmd. block. EXT
[ 036 045 ]
47Z01AWA
3.12.10.3.6
ARC:
External trip A 303 016
ARC:
External trip B 303 017
ARC:
External trip C 303 018
DIST:
Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
BUOC:
Trip signal
[ 036 014 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
MAIN:
No. final trip cmds.
[ 004 005 ]
MAIN:
Final trip
[ 038 103 ]
S1 1
R1
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal A
[ 034 047 ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal B
[ 034 048 ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal C
[ 034 049 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1
306 017
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Trip command 1, A
[ 036 072 ]
MAIN:
Trip command 1, B
[ 036 073 ]
MAIN:
Trip command 1, C
[ 036 074 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
MAIN:
No. trip cmds. 1, A
[ 005 006 ]
MAIN:
No. trip cmds. 1, B
[ 005 007 ]
MAIN:
No. trip cmds. 1, C
[ 005 008 ]
MAIN:
No. gen.trip cmds. 1
[ 004 006 ]
MAIN:
No. gen.trip cmds. 2
[ 009 050 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset.c.cl./tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ]
47Z13AXA
3-103
P437
3.12.11
3 Operation
MAIN:
Date
[ 003 090 ]
MAIN:
Time of day
[ 003 091 ]
MAIN:
Time switching
[ 003 095 ]
MAIN:
Min-pulse clock EXT
[ 060 060 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
Setting
MAIN:
Time switching
0: Standard time
1: Daylight saving time
Q6Z0152B
Fig. 3-74: Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input.
3-104
P437
3 Operation
3.12.11.1
Synchronization Source
The P437 provides numerous options to synchronize the internal clock:
Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC
(full time)
Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC
(full time)
Minute pulse presented at a binary signal input (MAIN), see Fig. 3-74, (p. 3104) and previous paragraph
With older P437 versions these interfaces had equal ranking i.e. clock
synchronization was carried out regardless of which sub-function initiated
triggering. No conflicts have to be taken into account as long as synchronization
sources (communication master, IRIGB and minute pulse source) operate at the
same time of day. Should the synchronization sources operate with a different
time basis unwanted step changes in the internal clock may occur. On the other
hand a redundant time of day synchronization is often used so as to sustain time
synchronization via IRIGB interface even if and while the SCADA communication
is out of service.
With the current P437 versions a primary and a backup source for time of day
synchronization may now be set, where both provide the four options listed in
the above.
MAI N: Prim.Source Ti me Sync
MAI N: Backu pS ourceTi meSyn c
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as
long as time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set
at MAIN : Time sy n c. time -out The backup source is required if after the set
time-out there is no synchronization through the primary source.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the P437 will
expect time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1
has become defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out
stage is blocked.
3-105
P437
3.12.12
3 Operation
Resetting Actions
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in
several ways. The following types of resetting actions are possible:
Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local
control panel LCD by pressing the Clear key
located on the local
control panel. By selecting the required function at L OC: Assignme nt
reset ke y further memories may be assigned which will then also be
cleared when the Clear key is pressed.
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
via setting parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point
FT_R C: R ese t r e cord. U SER and set to execute, see also the exact stepby-step description in Section 6.11.7, (p. 6-28).)
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example:
Assign parameter FT_RC : Res e t record. EXT to the relevant binary
signal input e.g. INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx .)
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory
then they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal
battery and substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
3-106
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
0
1: execute
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
306 020
12Z6115A
Fig. 3-75: General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel
LOC:
Reset key active
&
310 024
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
LOC:
Assignment reset key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
MAIN:
Group reset 1 USER
[ * ]
MAIN:
Group reset 2 USER
[ * ]
0
1
MAIN:
Group reset 1 EXT
[
&
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
1: execute
&
MAIN:
Group reset 2 EXT
[
MAIN:
Fct.assign. reset 1
[
m out of n
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
MAIN:
Fct.assign. reset 2
[
m out of n
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
12Z61RMB
Fig. 3-76: CLEAR key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data
recording (e.g. as an example for the reset signal O P _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T.
A complete list of all resetting parameters that can be used in the way shown in
Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-107) can be obtained from the separately available
DataModelExplorer: Look up the setting parameter MAI N: F ct .as sign. re set 1
in the file P437650_en_Addresses.pdf, and there follow the link to the referenced
config. table.
3-107
P437
3.12.12.1
3 Operation
3-108
Alternatively one can assign one of the two menu jump lists (LO C: Tr ig.
menu jm p 1 EXT or LOC: Tri g. me nu jmp 2 EXT) to a function key
and include the relevant resetting action in the definition (LO C: Fct .
menu jm p list 1 or L OC: Fct. me nu j mp list 2) of the selected menu
jump list.
P437
3 Operation
3.12.13
MAIN:
Chann.assign.COMM1/2
[ 003 169 ]
1
2
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2)
2: COMM1->chann.2,(2-1)
"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM1
Comm. interface
Channel 1
"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM2
Comm. interface
Channel 2
45Z5171A
3-109
P437
3.12.14
3 Operation
Test Mode
If tests are run on the P437, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that
all incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be identified accordingly.
MAIN:
Test mode USER
[ 003 012 ]
0
1
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Test mode EXT
[ 037 070 ]
D5Z50EBA
3-110
P437
3 Operation
3.13
3-111
P437
3 Operation
PSS:
Control via USER
[ 003 100 ]
0
1
0: No
PSS:
Control via user
[ 036 102 ]
1: Yes
PSS:
Control via user EXT
[ 036 101 ]
PSS:
Param.subs.sel. USER
[ 003 060 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
1
2
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
1: Parameter subset 1
2: Parameter subset 2
Address
065 002
Address
065 003
3: Parameter subset 3
Address
065 004
4: Parameter subset 4
Address
065 005
1
2
3
4
1
PSS:
Actual param. subset
[ 003 062 ]
PSS:
PS 1 active
[ 036 090 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 1 EXT
[ 065 002 ]
PSS:
PS 2 active
[ 036 091 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 2 EXT
[ 065 003 ]
PSS:
PS 3 active
[ 036 092 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 3 EXT
[ 065 004 ]
PSS:
PS 4 active
[ 036 093 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 4 EXT
[ 065 005 ]
0
PSS:
Keep time
[ 003 063 ]
1
2
3
4
0
PSS:
Ext.sel.param.subset
[ 003 061 ]
PSS:
PS 1 activated ext.
[ 036 094 ]
PSS:
PS 2 activated ext.
[ 036 095 ]
PSS:
PS 3 activated ext.
[ 036 096 ]
PSS:
PS 4 activated ext.
[ 036 097 ]
D5Z5002A
3-112
P437
3 Operation
3.14
3.14.1
3.14.2
Cyclic Tests
After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will
be run during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified
monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile(NV) memory the
monitoring signal memory along with the assigned date and time (see
Section 3.16, (p. 3-117)).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the
minimum acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is
displayed, then the power supply module should be replaced within a month,
since otherwise there is the danger of data loss if the supply voltage should fail.
Section 12.1, (p. 12-2) gives further information on maintenance procedures.
3.14.3
Signal
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured
SFMON: Warning ( re la y). The output relay operates as long as an internal
fault is detected.
SFMON:
Fct. assign. warning
[ 021 030 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected monit. sig.
SFMON:
Hardware fault
SFMON:
Warning (LED)
[ 036 070 ]
SFMON:
Warning (relay)
[ 036 100 ]
304 950
Q6Z0154A
3-113
P437
3.14.4
3 Operation
Device Response
The response of the P437 is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The
following responses are possible:
Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a
signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation
exists, for example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective
functions, then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for
example, to the detection of a fault on the communication module or in the
area of the PC interface.
Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a
system restart such as a fault in the hardware , then a procedure called
a warm restart is automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any
start-up, the computer system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is
characterized by the fact that no stored data and, in particular, no setting
parameters are affected by the procedure. A warm restart can also be
triggered manually by control action. During a warm restart sequence the
protective functions and the communication through serial interfaces will
be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been
triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions
remain blocked but communication through the serial interfaces will usually
be possible again.
Cold Restart
If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed during the checksum test,
which is part of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried
out. This is necessary because the P437 cannot identify which parameter in
the subset is corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be
reset to a defined state. This means that all the protection device settings
are also erased after a cold restart. In order to establish a safe initial state,
the default values have been selected so that the protective functions are
blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the
value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring signal
memory.
3-114
P437
3 Operation
3.14.5
3.14.6
3-115
P437
3.15
3 Operation
OP_RC:
Operat. data record.
[ 003 024 ]
Operating memory
MAIN:
Oper.-relev. signal
306 024
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
OP_RC:
No. oper. data sig.
[ 100 002 ]
+
R
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 001 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z61CMA
Fig. 3-81: Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation.
3-116
P437
3 Operation
3.16
MT_RC:
Mon. signal record.
[ 003 001 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
MT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
1
0
1
0: don't execute
MT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
CT30
SFMON:
Overflow MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
MT_RC:
No. monit. signals
[ 004 019 ]
1: execute
12Z6155A
Fig. 3-82: Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter.
3-117
P437
3 Operation
3.17
3.17.1
Overload Duration
In the event of an overload, the P437 determines the overload duration. The
overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
FT_RC : R ecord. in pr ogre ss signal.
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
+
R
OL_DA:
Overload duration
[ 004 102 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
50Z0137A
3-118
P437
3 Operation
3.17.2
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
THERM:
Status THERM replica
[ 004 016 ]
R
THERM:
I
305 202
THERM:
Object temperature
[ 004 137 ]
R
THERM:
Coolant temperature
[ 004 149 ]
R
THERM:
Pre-trip time left
[ 004 139 ]
OL_DA:
Status THERM replica
[ 004 147 ]
OL_DA:
Load current THERM
[ 004 058 ]
OL_DA:
Object temp. THERM
[ 004 035 ]
OL_DA:
Coolant temp. THERM
[ 004 036 ]
OL_DA:
Pre-trip t.leftTHERM
[ 004 148 ]
R
THERM:
Temp. offset replica
[ 004 109 ]
OL_DA:
Offset THERM replica
[ 004 154 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
12Z6238A
Fig. 3-84: Measured overload values from the thermal overload protection.
3-119
P437
3 Operation
3.18
3.18.1
3.18.2
THERM:
Starting k*Iref>
[ 041 108 ]
+
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
OL_RC:
No. overload
[ 004 101 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
52Z01C3A
3.18.3
Time Tagging
The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are
likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an
overload event when the event begins can be read out from the overload
memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication
interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload) can be
retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or one of the
communication interfaces.
3-120
P437
3 Operation
3.18.4
Overload Logging
Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order
with reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each
involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the nonvolatile overload memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the
oldest overload log will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in
the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single
overload event, then OL _RC: Overl. me m. overflow will be entered as the
last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.
The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Signal 1
Signal 3
Signal n
Signal 2
OL_RC:
Overl. mem. overflow
[ 035 007 ]
CT200
OL_RC:
Overload recording 1
[
*
]
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
&
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
OL_RC:
Overload recording 1
033 020
033 021
033 022
033 023
033 024
033 025
033 026
033 027
0
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z6117A
3-121
P437
3.19
3 Operation
3.19.1
Running time
Fault duration
Fault distance
Fault location in km
!G!
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
FT_DA:
Running time
[ 004 021 ]
!G!
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA:
Fault duration
[ 008 010 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
1
1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
49Z64DMA
3-122
P437
3 Operation
3.19.2
Always: Calculation and output of the fault location always occurs if the
other measured fault data are also being determined.
Only after trip t1: Calculation and output of the fault location occurs if the
P437 decides in favor of a trip in impedance zone 1 with standard reach
(non-extended zone).
Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze: Calculation and output of the fault location occurs if the
P437 decides in favor of a trip in impedance zone 1 with standard and
extended reach.
3-123
P437
3 Operation
FT_DA:
Start data acqu. PSx
[
]
1
2
1: End of fault
2: Trigger/Trip/End
FT_DA:
Output meas. values
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
305 050
FT_DA:
Trigger EXT
[ 036 088 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
FT_DA:
Outp. flt.locat. PSx
[
]
1
2
3
1: Always
2: Only after trip t1
3: Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze
FT_DA:
Outp. fault location
305 051
DIST:
Trip signal zone 1
[ 035 072 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
FT_DA:
Trigger N
310 059
FT_DA:
Flt.loc. determ. PSx
[
]
0
1
0: with GS
1: with GS or N
Parameter
FT_DA:
Start data acqu. PSx
FT_DA:
Outp. flt.locat. PSx
FT_DA:
Flt.loc. determ. PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
008
008
008
008
1
2
3
4
011
042
043
044
032
033
034
035
007
008
009
027
49Z7005A
Fig. 3-88: Enabling of measured fault data acquisition and fault location output.
3.19.3
3-124
P437
3 Operation
| Zloop1 | | Zloop2 |
| Zmin |
If the ratio is smaller than 0.1, then the phase-to-phase loop is selected, and if
the ratio is 0.1, then the phase-to-ground loop having the lowest impedance is
selected.
The phase-to-ground impedances are determined depending on the setting
based on the residual current of the parallel line.
FT_DA:
Mutual comp. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
0: Without
1: Depend. on IN/IN,par
2: Always
C 1,2,3
DIST:
With mutual comp.
[ 038 039 ]
C 4,5,6
IA
IB
IC
DIST:
IkG,par
303 605
5
6
DIST:
IkG
303 604
1,4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
FT_DA:
Mutual comp. PSx
025 096
024 016
027 076
025 036
2,5
3,6
FT_DA:
IA,corr.
305 061
FT_DA:
IB,corr.
305 062
FT_DA:
IC,corr.
305 063
47Z01ANC
Fig. 3-89: Conditioning of the phase currents for determination of phase-to-ground impedances.
3-125
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Trip signal A
303 664
DIST:
Trip signal B
303 665
DIST:
Trip signal C
303 666
c1
c2
c3
||Zloop1|/|Zmin||Zloop2|/|Zmin||
< 0.1
||Zloop1|/|Zmin||Zloop2|/|Zmin||
0.1
DIST:
Multipole starting
303 534
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
Starting N1
VA-G
IA
IB
VC-G
IC
ZPP,min
ZPG,min
c 1,2,3
c 4,5,6
303 535
VB-G
2
1,2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A-B
B-C
C-A
A-G
B-G
B-G
4
5
6
FT_DA:
VMeas
305 053
8
1
FT_DA:
IA,corr.
305 063
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop A-B
305 058
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop B-C
1,4
1,5
305 062
FT_DA:
IC,corr.
305 054
1,3
305 061
FT_DA:
IB,corr.
2,6
2,7
FT_DA:
IMeas
2,8
305 059
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop C-A
305 060
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop A-G
305 055
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop B-G
305 056
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop C-G
305 057
FT_DA:
Select. meas.loop PG
305 064
47Z11AMA
Fig. 3-90: Selection of the measuring loop for determining fault data.
3.19.4
3-126
P437
3 Operation
One phase current is selected as the fault current in accordance with the
measuring loop selected by the fault data acquisition function. If a phase-tophase loop has been selected, then the fault current will be the current of the
leading phase in the cycle. The primary fault reactance is calculated from the
per-unit fault reactance using the nominal data for the set primary current and
voltage transformers.
The ground fault data are only determined if a phase-to-ground loop has been
selected for display. The geometric sums of the three phase currents of the line
being protected or of the parallel line are displayed as the ground fault current.
The ground fault angle is the phase displacement between ground fault current
and measuring voltage as selected by the fault data acquisition function.
If the fault is detected by the backup overcurrent-time protection function, then
only the fault current can be determined. The maximum phase current is
displayed.
Fault current and voltage are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom and
Vnom. If the measured or calculated values are outside the acceptable measuring
range, the Overflow indication will be displayed.
3-127
P437
3 Operation
FT_DA:
Output meas. values
C 1,2
305 050
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
FT_DA:
Select. meas.loop PG
C2
305 064
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
c 1,3,4,5
BUOC:
Starting
[ 036 013 ]
c 2
FT_DA:
IMeas
FT_DA:
Fault current P p.u.
[ 004 025 ]
FT_DA:
Flt.volt. PG/PP p.u.
[ 004 026 ]
FT_DA:
Fault loop angle P
[ 004 024 ]
305 054
R
IA
2
Imax
IB
IC
IN,par
IN
1
R
FT_DA:
Fault impedance, sec
[ 004 023 ]
5
1
FT_DA:
Fault reactance,sec.
[ 004 028 ]
FT_DA:
Fault react., prim.
[ 004 029 ]
FT_DA:
Fault loop angle N
[ 004 048 ]
FT_DA:
Fault curr. N p.u.
[ 004 049 ]
FT_DA:
Fault curr.N,par p.u
[ 004 059 ]
2 ... 3
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop A-G
1
c 1
305 055
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop B-G
5
R
c 2
305 056
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop C-G
c 3
305 057
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop A-B
305 058
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop B-C
R
c 1
c 2
305 059
FT_DA:
Select.meas.loop C-A
c 3
305 060
R
1
2
3
1 ... 3
FT_DA:
Meas. loop selected
[ 004 079 ]
FT_DA:
VMeas
305 053
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
47Z11APB
3.19.5
3-128
P437
3 Operation
FT_DA:
Line length PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
Line reactance PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
Output fault locat.
305 076
FT_DA:
Fault location
[ 004 022 ]
FT_DA:
Fault reactance,sec.
[ 004 028 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent
[ 004 027 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
Parameter
FT_DA:
Line length PSx
FT_DA:
Line reactance PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
306 020
1
2
3
4
005
006
007
008
012
013
014
015
50Z01B4B
3.19.6
3-129
P437
3 Operation
3.20
3.20.1
MAIN : Ge n. trip si gn al 1
FT_RC : Trigger
In addition, the user can set a logical OR combination of logic signals (m out of
n parameter) whose appearance will trigger fault recording.
3-130
P437
3 Operation
3.20.2
Fault Counting
Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
FT_RC:
Fct. assig. trigger
[ 003 085 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
FT_RC:
Trigger EXT
[ 036 089 ]
FT_RC:
Trigger
[ 037 076 ]
FT_RC:
Record. trig active
[ 002 002 ]
FT_RC:
Trigger USER
[ 003 041 ]
0
1
1 min
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
No. of faults
[ 004 020 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
No. system disturb.
[ 004 010 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
&
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
&
FT_RC:
System disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
S1 1
R1
45Z6325A
3.20.3
Time Tagging
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A faults
individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time
assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory
on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The
time information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals
can be retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication
interfaces.
3-131
P437
3.20.4
3 Operation
Fault Recordings
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and postfault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault.
A total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can
be stored in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been
recorded, the oldest fault recording will be overwritten, unless memories have
been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred
during a single fault, then FT_RC: Faul t me m. overf low will be entered as the
last signal. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal
FT_R C: Faul ty t ime tag is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured RMS fault data will also be entered
in the fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
FT_RC:
Fault mem. overflow
[ 035 001 ]
CT200
FT_RC:
Fault recording n
[
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
Fault memory n
FT_RC:
Fault recording n
003 000
033 001
033 002
Measured value 1
033 003
Measured value 2
033 004
Measured value 3
033 005
Measured value N
033 006
MAIN:
Time tag
033 007
306 021
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
&
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
0
1
1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z6161B
3-132
P437
3 Operation
3.20.5
Phase currents
Phase-to-ground voltages
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for
oscillography recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time
period of 16.4 s is available for recording. This period can be divided among a
maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a
fault, including the set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set
maximum recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum
recording time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum
recording time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording
time minus a sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time of 16.4 s is exceeded, the analog values for the
oldest fault are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults
have occurred since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are
overwritten.
The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through
the PC or communication interfaces.
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all
faults remain stored.
3-133
P437
3 Operation
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
Max. recording time
[ 003 075 ]
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
IA
IB
IC
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
IN
VN-G
Vref
IN,par
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
Analog channel 1
Analog channel 2
Analog channel 3
Analog channel 4
Analog channel 5
Analog channel 6
Analog channel 7
Analog channel 8
Analog channel 9
Analog channel 10
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
47Z1319A
3-134
P437
3 Operation
3.21
3.21.1
Overcurrent detection
Undervoltage detection
The fault detection decisions of the individual areas are linked by the fault
detection logic.
Short-circuit currents that are greater than the maximum operating load currents
can be detected by the overcurrent detection logic. Undervoltage detection logic
is provided for short circuits that cannot be identified by overcurrent detection. In
order to control difficult conditions for fault detection, the P437 is also equipped
with a highly angle-dependent true underimpedance detection logic function.
Ground fault detection logic distinguishes between grounded and ungrounded
faults.
The fault detection logic starts the timer stages of the trigger levels and as a
function of the phase-selective fault detection decision selects the measuring
loops in which the fault impedances are determined. The fault detection logic is
blocked if one of the following conditions is met:
DIST:
General enable USER
[ 031 073 ]
0
1
0: No
DIST:
Enabled
[ 036 104 ]
1: Yes
DIST:
Starting blocked
303 500
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
D5Z5029A
3-135
P437
3.21.1.1
3 Operation
Overcurrent Detection
Overcurrent fault detection monitors the phase currents for values in excess of
the threshold values I>> and I>>>. The I>> threshold can be set. I>>> is equal to
2I>>. The thresholds are identical for all three phases.
The output signals of the I>> trigger assume a logic value of 1 if the threshold
is exceeded in two consecutive half-waves. In the case of the I>>> trigger only
one halfwave must exceed the threshold for the output signals to assume a logic
value of 1. Triggering of inrush stabilization prevents operation of the I>>
trigger.
If I>> is exceeded in one phase, then it is sufficient for overcurrent detection if
I>>> is exceeded in the other phases. In this case the fault detection time is
shortened since there is no longer any need to wait for the second half-wave.
Evaluation of the trigger decisions is a function of the type of neutral-point
treatment set in the P437. If isolated neutral/resonant grounding or shortduration grounding is set, then I>> overcurrent detection occurs in the phase(s)
in which the I>> threshold is exceeded. With the setting Low-imped. grounding
the following condition must also be satisfied:
I
3-136
2
3
| I max |
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Low-imped. grounding
2: Isol./res.w.start.PG
3: Isol./res.w/o st. PG
4: Short-durat. ground.
MAIN:
Rush restr. A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
DIST:
I>> PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Starting blocked
303 500
IA
IB
IC
DIST:
I>> triggered
303 597
I>>> = 2I>>
DIST:
I>>> triggered
303 501
(2/3)Imax
Imax
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
DIST:
I>> PSx
010
001
001
001
010
010
010
011
048
076
077
078
054
074
094
014
47Z1155A
3.21.1.2
3-137
P437
3 Operation
5% of the current maximum phase current is added to the set threshold IN>,
which means that the operate value of the ground current function increases
with an increasing phase current level as a form of stabilization.
IA
COMP
IB
IC
DIST:
IN> PSx
Imax
DIST:
Start. IN> triggered
303 502
|Ix|
|Ix|+IN>
0.05|Imax|
DIST:
tIN> PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Starting blocked
DIST:
tIN> elapsed
303 500
303 503
DIST:
tIN> running
[ 036 105 ]
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
4: Short-durat. ground.
50ms
DIST:
VNG> PSx
[
DIST:
VNG>> exceeded
303 596
DIST:
Start.VNG> triggered
VA-G
VB-G
303 504
VC-G
DIST:
VNG>> PSx
[
DIST:
tVNG>> PSx
DIST:
tVNG>> elapsed
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
303 506
[ * ]
1: Low-imped. grounding
DIST:
VNG>> triggered
[ 036 015 ]
DIST:
tVNG>> elapsed
[ 036 016 ]
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
DIST:
IN> PSx
DIST:
tIN> PSx
DIST:
VNG> PSx
DIST:
VNG>> PSx
DIST:
tVNG>> PSx
010
001
001
001
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
010
010
011
011
010
010
011
011
048
076
077
078
055
075
095
015
057
077
097
017
056
076
096
016
062
082
002
022
061
081
001
021
45Z8056A
Fig. 3-98: Monitoring the residual current and the neutral-displacement voltage.
The ground fault detection mode is a function of the neutral-point treatment set
in the P437.
3-138
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
2: Isol./res.w.start.PG
3: Isol./res.w/o st. PG
4: Short-durat. ground.
DIST:
Starting G
1: Low-imped. grounding
303 507
DIST:
Start. IN> triggered
DIST:
Start. switch. to PG
[ 040 052 ]
303 502
DIST:
Start.VNG> triggered
303 504
100ms
FT_RC:
Trigger N
310 058
DIST:
tIN> elapsed
FT_DA:
Trigger N
303 503
310 059
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
* Parameter
DIST:
VPP< triggered
set
set
set
set
303 509
DIST:
Start.ZPP< triggered
303 510
1
2
3
4
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
010
001
001
001
048
076
077
078
49Z7004A
3.21.1.3
3-139
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Starting blocked
DIST:
I> (Ibl) PSx
303 500
IA
DIST:
IA>(Ibl) trigg.
303 598
IB
DIST:
IB>(Ibl) trigg.
IC
303 599
DIST:
IC>(Ibl) trigg.
303 600
DIST:
V< PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, A
303 514
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
15ms
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, B
303 515
15ms
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, C
303 516
VA-G3
VB-G3
VC-G3
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
2: Isol./res.w.start.PG
4: Short-durat. ground.
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST:
V< PSx
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
DIST:
I> (Ibl) PSx
010
010
011
011
010
001
001
001
010
010
011
011
069
089
009
029
048
076
077
078
068
088
008
028
45Z8029A
3.21.1.4
Undervoltage Detection
Undervoltage fault detection monitors the phase-to-ground voltages or the
phase-to-phase voltages to determine whether they fall below the set
threshold V<.
Operation of undervoltage fault detection can be determined by selecting the
operating mode. The following operating modes are possible:
3-140
Ground fault detection brings about a switch from phase-to-phase to phaseto-ground loops.
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Operat. mode V< PSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
0: W/o V< starting
1: With V< start. PG
2: With V< start.PG,PP
DIST:
Start. switch. to PG
[ 040 052 ]
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, A
303 514
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, B
303 515
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, C
303 516
DIST:
V< PSx
[ * ]
VA-G
VA-G3
VB-G
VB-G3
VC-G
VC-G3
DIST:
VA< triggered
303 517
DIST:
VB< triggered
303 518
DIST:
VC< triggered
303 519
DIST:
VPP< triggered
303 509
Parameter
DIST:
V< PSx
DIST:
Operat. mode V< PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
011
011
010
010
011
011
1
2
3
4
069
089
009
029
067
087
007
027
47Z0157A
3.21.1.5
With Z< start.PG,PP: Ground fault detection brings about a switch from
phase-to-phase to phase-to-ground loops.
All underimpedance fault detection measuring loops are blocked when the I>>>
trigger operates (see Section 3.21.1.1, (p. 3-136)). When overcurrent or
undervoltage fault detection operates, the corresponding measuring loops are
blocked phase-selectively.
3-141
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Operat. mode Z< PSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
DIST:
Start. switch. to PG
[ 040 052 ]
DIST:
I>>> triggered
303 501
DIST:
Enable ZA-G starting
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, A
303 514
303 520
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
VA< triggered
303 517
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, B
DIST:
Enable ZB-G starting
303 515
303 521
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
VB< triggered
303 518
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, C
DIST:
Enable ZC-G starting
303 516
303 522
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
DIST:
VC< triggered
303 519
DIST:
Enable ZA-B starting
303 523
DIST:
Enable ZB-C starting
303 524
Parameter
DIST:
Operat. mode Z< PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
011
011
1
2
3
4
066
086
006
026
DIST:
Enable ZC-A starting
303 525
D5Z5010A
3-142
P437
3 Operation
I P + kG I N
V PG
V PG
2 I P
V PG
I P (1 + kG )
The following values must be set in order to determine the underimpedance fault
detection characteristic:
Load angle
If, on the basis of the settings, the reach in the backward (reverse) direction is
greater than 3Znom, then the range is limited to 3Znom (where
Znom = Vnom / Inom).
3-143
P437
3 Operation
110
Rfw,PG
Forward direction
Rfw,PP
Backward direction
Xfw
Xfw
w
Zf
70
Zfw
, PP
Zf
w,
PG
bw
70
D5Z5212A
Fig. 3-103: Fault detection characteristic of the underimpedance fault detection function.
DIST:
Abs. value kG PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Angle kG PSx
[ * ]
+
+
+
IA
IB
IC
IN
INkG
DIST:
INkG
450 171
IA(1+kG)
DIST:
IA(1+kG)
450 168
IB(1+kG)
DIST:
IB(1+kG)
450 169
IC(1+kG)
DIST:
IC(1+kG)
450 170
Parameter
DIST:
Abs. value kG PSx
DIST:
Angle kG PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
1
2
3
4
037
087
037
087
036
086
036
086
47Z1458
3-144
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Enable ZP-G
303 508
DIST:
Z evaluation PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
INkG
450 171
DIST:
Xfw PSx
[ * ]
IA
IB
DIST:
PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zbw/Zfw PSx
[ * ]
IC
2IA
2IB
2IC
DIST:
Zfw,PG PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
IA(1+kG)
450 168
DIST:
Zfw,PP PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
IB(1+kG)
450 169
1. . .3
DIST:
IC(1+kG)
DIST:
Rfw,PG PSx
[ * ]
1: ZPG=VPG/(IP + kG*IN)
2: ZPG=VPG/2*IP
3: ZPG=VPG/IP*(1 + kG)
450 170
DIST:
Enable ZA-G starting
DIST:
Rfw,PP PSx
[ * ]
303 520
VA-G
COMP
ZA-G
DIST:
ZA< start. triggered
DIST:
ZB< start. triggered
DIST:
ZC< start. triggered
DIST:
Start.ZPP< triggered
303 526
COMP
DIST:
Enable ZB-G starting
303 527
COMP
303 521
VB-G
303 528
COMP
ZB-G
303 510
COMP
DIST:
Enable ZC-G starting
c
COMP
303 522
VC-G
ZC-G
DIST:
Enable ZA-B starting
303 523
ZA-B
DIST:
Enable ZB-C starting
303 524
ZB-C
DIST:
Enable ZC-A starting
303 525
+
ZC-A
Parameter
DIST:
Rfw,PG PSx
DIST:
Rfw,PP PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
1
2
3
4
051
071
091
011
Parameter
DIST:
Z evaluation PSx
DIST:
Xfw PSx
DIST:
PSx
DIST:
Zbw/Zfw PSx
DIST:
Zfw,PG PSx
DIST:
Zfw,PP PSx
set
set
set
set
025
024
024
025
010
010
010
011
010
010
011
011
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
1
2
3
4
093
013
073
033
050
070
090
010
063
083
003
023
053
073
093
013
101
102
103
104
052
072
092
012
105
106
107
108
47Z1459B
3-145
P437
3.21.1.6
3 Operation
MA IN : Transfe r f or 1 p P Sx = Ground
With single-phase overcurrent fault detection, SN1 is started and transferred
after the timer stage tIN> has elapsed (see Section 3.21.1.2, (p. 3-137) for
setting).
If there is a change from single-phase overcurrent fault detection without
ground to multi-phase fault detection or single-phase-to-ground fault
detection, starting will occur instantaneously.
3-146
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
VA< triggered
DIST:
Starting A
303 517
303 529
DIST:
ZA< start. triggered
303 526
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
VB< triggered
DIST:
Starting B
303 518
303 530
DIST:
ZB< start. triggered
303 527
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
VC< triggered
DIST:
Starting C
303 519
303 531
DIST:
ZC< start. triggered
303 528
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
DIST:
1-pole starting
303 533
DIST:
Multipole starting
DIST:
Starting G
303 534
303 507
DIST:
tIN> PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Starting N1
303 535
DIST:
Zero-sequ. starting
[ 036 021 ]
MAIN:
Transfer for 1p PSx
[ * ]
1: Ground
2: P or G =f(Imed,Imax)
IA
|Imedium|/|Imax|2/3
COMP
IB
IC
|Imedium|/|Imax|>2/3
Imax
Imedium
COMP
COMP
COMP
Parameter
DIST:
tIN> PSx
MAIN:
Transfer for 1p PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
011
010
001
001
001
1
2
3
4
057
077
097
017
040
079
080
081
45Z8030A
3-147
P437
DIST:
Bl.Start. I>>
3 Operation
450 204
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
Starting I>>
[ 011 139 ]
&
DIST:
Starting I>> A
[ 040 064 ]
&
DIST:
Starting I>> B
[ 040 065 ]
&
DIST:
Starting I>> C
[ 040 097 ]
&
DIST:
Starting V< A
[ 040 067 ]
&
DIST:
Starting V< B
[ 040 075 ]
&
DIST:
Starting V< C
[ 040 096 ]
&
DIST:
Starting Z< A
[ 040 070 ]
&
DIST:
Starting Z< B
[ 040 071 ]
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
DIST:
VA< triggered
303 517
DIST:
VB< triggered
303 518
DIST:
VC< triggered
303 519
DIST:
ZA< start. triggered
303 526
DIST:
ZB< start. triggered
DIST:
Starting Z< C
[ 040 072 ]
&
303 527
DIST:
ZC< start. triggered
303 528
DIST:
Bl.Start. Z<
DIST:
Starting Z<
[ 036 241 ]
450 205
45Z8032A
3.21.2
3-148
P437
3 Operation
Measuremen PG Loops
t with Phaseto-Ground
Fault
Detection
PP Loops or
No Loops
Measuring Loop 1
PG Loops
PP Loops
Measuring Loop 2
PG Loops
PP Loops
Measuring Loop 3
Starting
Vmea Imeas Vmea Imeas Vmea Imeas Vmea Imeas Vmea Imeas Vmea Imeas
s,1
,1
s,1
,1
s,2
,2
s,2
,2
s,3
,3
s,3
,3
A, B, C, G
VA-G
IA,cor VA-B
r
IA-B
VB-G
IB,cor VB-C
r
IB-C
VC-G
IC,cor VC-A
r
IC-A
A, B, C
VA-B
IA-B
VA-B
IA-B
VB-C
IB-C
IB-C
VC-A
IC-A
IC-A
A, B, G
VA-G
IA,cor VA-B
r
IA-B
VB-G
IB,cor /
r
B, C, G
VB-G
IB,cor VB-C
r
IB-C
VC-G
IC,cor /
r
A, C, G
VA-G
IA,cor VC-A
r
IC-A
VC-G
IC,cor /
r
A, B
VA-B
IA-B
VA-B
IA-B
B, C
VB-C
IB-C
VB-C
IB-C
A, C
VC-A
IC-A
VC-A
IC-A
A, G
VA-G
IA,cor /
r
B, G
VB-G
IB,cor /
r
C, G
VC-G
IC,cor /
r
VB-C
VC-A
Only one measuring loop is shown in the following block diagrams. If several
measurement loops are selected, the P437 links the measuring decisions with an
OR operator.
3-149
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Starting N1
303 535
DIST:
Starting A
303 529
DIST:
Starting B
303 530
DIST:
Starting C
303 531
DIST:
Meas. start. 1pG PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1: PG loops
2: None
DIST:
Select.meas.loop A-G
303 537
DIST:
Select.meas.loop B-G
303 538
DIST:
Select.meas.loop C-G
303 539
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-G
DIST:
Meas. start. 2pG PSx
[ * ]
303 543
1
2
1: PG loops
2: PP loops
DIST:
Select.meas.loop A-B
303 540
DIST:
Select.meas.loop B-C
303 541
DIST:
Select.meas.loop C-A
303 542
DIST:
Meas. start. 3pG PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-P
303 544
1
2
1: PG loops
2: PP loops
Parameter
DIST:
Meas. start. 1pG PSx
DIST:
Meas. start. 2pG PSx
DIST:
Meas. start. 3pG PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
012 172
012 173
012 174
012 175
012 176
012 177
012 178
012 179
012 180
012 181
012 182
012 183
47Z0161A
3.21.2.1
3-150
P437
3 Operation
3-151
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
IN,par> PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
IN,par> triggered
[ 037 210 ]
IN,par
DIST:
kG,par angle PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
kG,par abs.value PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
IkG,par
kG,par IG,par
303 605
MAIN:
kPar PSx
[ * ]
IA
IB
IC
|IN,par|kPar.line <
DIST:
With mutual comp.
[ 038 039 ]
|IN|
|IN,par|kPar.line
|IN|
DIST:
Mutual comp. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
c 1,2,3
0: Without
c 4,5,6
1: Depend. on IN/IN,par
1
DIST:
IkG
303 604
1,4
DIST:
IA,corr.
2,5
DIST:
IB,corr.
3,6
DIST:
IC,corr.
303 606
303 607
303 608
Parameter
DIST:
IN,par> PSx
DIST:
kG,par abs.value PSx
DIST:
kG,par angle PSx
DIST:
Mutual comp. PSx
MAIN:
kPar PSx
set 1
012 184
012 049
012 048
025 095
set 2
012 185
012 099
012 098
024 015
024 017
set 3
012 186
013 049
013 048
024 075
024 077
025 097
set 4
012 187
013 099
013 098
025 035
025 037
47Z0162B
3.21.2.2
CVT Stabilization
Only the fundamental component of the selected measuring voltages is
evaluated. If stabilization for capacitive voltage transformers (CVT stabilization)
3-152
P437
3 Operation
has been enabled, the device checks to determine whether the second harmonic
exceeds the threshold of 0.01Vnom. If so, a special filter designed specifically for
CVTs is activated.
DIST:
Select.meas.loop A-G
303 537
DIST:
Select.meas.loop B-G
303 538
DIST:
Select.meas.loop C-G
303 539
DIST:
Select.meas.loop A-B
303 540
DIST:
Select.meas.loop B-C
303 541
DIST:
Select.meas.loop C-A
303 542
DIST:
IA,corr.
DIST:
CVT stabilization
[ 010 031 ]
303 606
DIST:
IB,corr.
303 607
DIST:
IC,corr.
303 608
0: No
IA
1: Yes
IB
IC
VA-G
2fnom
VB-G
VC-G
fnom
1
Filter 1
fnom
2
Filter 2
DIST:
Vmeas
303 546
DIST:
Imeas
303 545
47Z0163A
3.21.3
3-153
P437
3.21.3.1
3 Operation
Voltage Memory
Voltage VA-B is the reference voltage for the voltage memory. If the voltage
exceeds the fixed value of 0.65Vnom and there is no starting of the distance
protection function, then the voltage memory will be synchronized.
Synchronization requires approximately 300 ms. Then a check is carried out to
determine whether the frequency satisfies the following condition:
0.95fnom < f < 1.05fnom
If the condition is satisfied, the voltage memory is enabled. The frequency
condition is checked cyclically. As soon as the frequency condition is no longer
met, the enable is canceled.
If the magnitude of the reference voltage drops below 0.65Vnom or if a starting of
the distance protection function occurs, synchronization of the voltage memory
will be terminated. The voltage memory is then free-running and remains
enabled for 2 s.
DIST:
I>> triggered
303 597
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
>0.65Vnom
DIST:
corr
corr
303 547
f/fnom = f
+
0.95fnom<f<1.05fnom
DIST:
Voltage mem. enabled
1
300ms
S1 1
303 549
R1
1
DIST:
tVmemory running
[ 040 034 ]
2s
DIST:
VA-B (stored)
VA-G
303 548
VB-G
49Z6433A
3.21.3.2
Angle Determination
When general starting of distance protection occurs, the angles F and S are
determined. Angle F is the fault angle that is determined using the selected
measuring voltage Vmeas and the selected measuring current Imeas. Angle S is
determined on the basis of the voltage stored in memory and the selected
measuring current Imeas. Since the frequency of the stored voltage can differ
from the nominal frequency, a phase correction must be made. This correction is
determined by the frequency deviation and the time that has elapsed since
synchronization was terminated. Furthermore, an angle correction based on the
selected measuring loop and the setting at MA IN: Phase sequence is
required. The resulting angle, X, is used for further processing.
3-154
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Voltage mem. enabled
303 549
DIST:
Vmeas
DIST:
F
303 546
303 550
DIST:
Imeas
303 545
DIST:
VA-B (stored)
303 548
DIST:
corr
303 547
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A - B - C
X1
2: A - C - B
X(-1)
DIST:
Select.meas.loop A-B
X = 0
303 540
DIST:
Select.meas.loop B-C
X = -120
303 541
DIST:
Select.meas.loop C-A
X = +120
303 542
DIST:
Select.meas.loop A-G
X = +150
303 537
DIST:
Select.meas.loop B-G
X = +30
303 538
DIST:
Select.meas.loop C-G
X = -90
303 539
DIST:
X
303 551
47Z0165A
3.21.3.3
Fault angle F
Angle X
Set angle
3-155
P437
3 Operation
Enabled
Not enabled
F
A decision is made for the forward direction if the angle selected for direction
determination is in this range:
45 < < +135
In the case of angles outside this range, a decision is made for the backward
(reverse) direction.
3-156
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Voltage mem. enabled
303 549
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
Forw. w/o meas. y
[ 1* ]
DIST:
Dir.using Vmeas y
[ 1* ]
DIST:
Vmeas
303 546
DIST:
Oper.val.Vmemory PSx
[
]
DIST:
Dir.using Vmem y
[ 1* ]
C1
C2
C3
DIST:
303 552
DIST:
F
2
303 550
DIST:
X
303 551
1 ... 3
set 1
010 109
set 2
010 116
set 3
010 117
set 4
010 118
y:
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, x
[ 2* ]
DIST:
Oper.val.Vmemory PSx
* Parameter
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, x
[ 2* ]
Starting
DIST:
Dir.using Vmeas y
DIST:
Dir.using Vmem y
DIST:
Forw. w/o meas. y
1p, 2p, 3p
Measuring loop 1
038 045
038 047
038 044
2p, 3p
Measuring loop 2
038 105
038 106
038 104
3p
Measuring loop 3
038 108
038 109
038 107
Possible signals
Vmeas
Imeas
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, x
VA-G
IA,corr.
038 010
038 011
VB-G
IB,corr.
038 012
038 013
VC-G
IC,corr.
038 014
038 015
VA-B
IA-B
038 010
038 012
038 011
038 013
VB-C
IB-C
038 012
038 014
038 013
038 015
IC-A
038 010
038 014
038 011
038 015
VC-A
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, x
47Z1162B
3.21.3.4
3-157
P437
3 Operation
3-158
the selected measuring voltage Vmeas < 0.002Vnom. In this case, the
impedance is calculated using set angle .
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Voltage mem. enabled
303 549
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
< 0,002 Vnom
DIST:
Vmeas
303 546
DIST:
Oper.val.Vmemory PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
F
DIST:
X
303 551
2
3
4
2
DIST:
180+
303 552
3
4
1 ... 4
1
2
3
1 ... 3
DIST:
Z
303 553
Parameter
DIST:
Oper.val.Vmemory PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
011
1
2
3
4
109
116
117
118
49Z6436A
3.21.3.5
Distance Measurement
One of the following types of characteristics may be selected for distance
measurement by way of the setting at DI ST: C haract erist ic PSx:
Circle
Polygon
3-159
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
[ * ]
1: Circle
2: Polygon
1: Circle
2: Polygon
Parameter
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
set
set
set
set
012
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
040
097
097
097
D5Z5019A
3.21.3.5.1
There is an enable.
The enable is issued from the local control panel or through an appropriately
configured binary signal input. If the enable signal is to be issued from the local
control panel, it is possible to define conditions that must be met so that the
enable signal is issued.
3-160
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Zone extens. for 1pG
[ 011 049 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
DIST:
Enable ZE f. 1pG PSx
[
Parameter
DIST:
Enable ZE f. 1pG PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
012 039
012 089
013 039
013 089
1
2
0: Without
1: If PSIG not ready
2: Always
DIST:
Zone ext. 1pG active
[ 039 028 ]
PSIG:
Not ready
[ 037 028 ]
DIST:
Enable ZE f. 1pG EXT
[ 038 025 ]
DIST:
Zone ext. HSR 1pG
[ 039 029 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
DIST:
1-pole starting
303 533
DIST:
Starting N1
303 535
47Z0175A
Fig. 3-116: Extending the measuring range for single-phase fault detection.
3.21.3.5.2
Circle Characteristic
The fault impedance value ZF is determined using the selected measuring
quantities Vmeas and Imeas. If the setting Arc compensation has been chosen
(DI ST: A rc comp . ci rcle P Sx = Yes), then a correction to the measured fault
impedance is calculated for angles Z in the range of 45 < Z < or
135 < Z < (+180) as follows:
| Z
F,corr
|=
| Z F |
1 + sin
3-161
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Arc comp. circle PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
-45<Z<
DIST:
Z
303 553
135<Z<(+180)
1
1
1 =-Z
DIST:
DIST:
|Zmeas|
303 567
303 552
2 =-Z+180
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
[ * ]
1: Circle
|ZF,corr|=
|ZF|/(1+sin)
DIST:
Vmeas
303 546
|ZF|=|Vmeas|/|Imeas|
DIST:
Imeas
303 545
Parameter
DIST:
Arc comp. circle PSx
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
012
012
012
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
038
090
091
092
040
097
097
097
D5Z5026B
In the R-X diagram, the characteristic shown in the following figure is obtained. If
the characteristic were to be measured with sine variables for the setting
Arc compensation, the dot-dash line would be obtained.
3-162
P437
3 Operation
Zn
Z
R
Backward direction
45 315
D5Z5025A
Fig. 3-118: P437 impedance and direction characteristic for the Circle setting.
The calculated impedance |Zmeas| is compared with the set impedance in the six
impedance zones. If the measured impedance is smaller than or equal to the set
impedance, then a distance decision is made for the corresponding zone(s).
3-163
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Z2 (circle) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
2 (circle) PSx
DIST:
[ * ]
DIST:
|Zmeas|
303 552
DIST:
Dist.decision zone n
|Zmeas|f(Zn, n)
303 567
303 561
Impedance zone2(n=2)
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
Impedance zone3(n=3)
DIST:
Z2 (circle) PSx
DIST:
2 (circle) PSx
012
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
043
092
092
092
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
set
set
set
set
095
095
095
095
1
2
3
4
DIST:
Z3 (circle) PSx
DIST:
3 (circle) PSx
012
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
044
093
093
093
096
096
096
096
Impedance zone5(n=5)
Impedance zone4(n=4)
* Parameter
* Parameter
DIST:
Z4 (circle) PSx
DIST:
4 (circle) PSx
012
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
045
094
094
094
* Parameter
099
099
099
099
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST:
Z5 (circle) PSx
DIST:
5 (circle) PSx
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
148
149
150
151
164
165
166
167
Impedance zone6(n=6)
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST:
Z6 (circle) PSx
DIST:
6 (circle) PSx
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
152
153
154
155
168
169
170
171
47Z1467A
In addition to the settings described above, the zone extension factors kze for
high-speed reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set
separately for phase-to-ground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for
impedance zone 1. The impedances modified by zone extension factor kze are
calculated as follows:
Z1,kze = kzeZ1
The increase in reach by zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the
following:
3-164
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
ARC:
Zone extension TDR
DIST:
Zone extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
303 000
ARC:
Zone extension HSR
303 001
DIST:
Zone extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
ARC:
Meas.r.extd. ext.ARC
303 025
PSIG:
Z1 extended
[ 035 075 ]
ARC:
Zone extension RC
DIST:
Zone extension
[ 036 065 ]
303 002
SOTF:
Z1 extended
[ 035 076 ]
DIST:
Zone extension EXT
[ 036 046 ]
DIST:
Z1 (circle) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
1 (circle) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zone ext. HSR 1pG
[ 039 029 ]
DIST:
303 552
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-G
DIST:
kze,PG TDR PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
kze,PP TDR PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
kze,PG HSR PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
kze,PP HSR PSx
[ * ]
303 543
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-P
303 544
|Zmeas|f(Z1,1)
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1, x
|Zmeas|f(Z1,1,kze)
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1ze,x
303 629
DIST:
|Zmeas|
303 630
303 567
S1 1
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
R1
ASC:
Manual close request
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
303 565
305 000
* Parameter
DIST:
Dist.decis.Z1 stored
DIST:
Z1 (circle) PSx
DIST:
1 (circle) PSx
DIST:
kze,PG TDR PSx
DIST:
kze,PP TDR PSx
DIST:
kze,PG HSR PSx
DIST:
kze,PP HSR PSx
012 042
073 091
074 091
075 091
072 090
073 090
074 090
075 090
012 046
012 096
013 046
013 096
012 047
012 097
013 047
013 097
012 034
012 084
013 034
013 084
012 035
012 085
013 035
013 085
47Z1468A
3.21.3.5.3
3-165
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
[ * ]
2: Polygon
DIST:
Vmeas
303 546
|ZF|=|Vmeas|/|Imeas|
DIST:
Imeas
DIST:
XF
|ZF|sinZ
303 555
303 545
DIST:
RF
|ZF|cosZ
303 554
DIST:
Z
303 553
Parameter
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
set
set
set
set
012
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
040
097
097
097
D5Z5021B
The calculated quantities, RF and XF, are compared with the reference quantities,
Rref and Xref, of the four impedance zones. The reference quantities are
determined using the settings for determining the impedance zone(s). If both
quantities lie within the set impedance zone(s), then a distance decision is made
for the corresponding zone(s).
The impedance zones are determined by the following settings:
Reactance X
Angle
Angle
Note that the specified precision of measurement can only be reached if the ratio
R / X is less than 8:
Rn,PG / Xn < 8, and
Rn,PP / Xn < 8
If the ratio is greater than this (i.e. the polygon becomes extremely flat), the
measurement conditions for high fault resistances become quite bad, because in
this case, the angle of the fault impedance gets small, which results in quite big
measurement deviations for the reactance.
Using these settings in the R-X diagram we obtain the characteristic shown in the
following figure.
3-166
P437
3 Operation
Xn
45
n
Rfw,PP
Rfw,PG
Backward direction
45 315
D5Z5022A
Fig. 3-122: P437 impedance and directional characteristics for the Polygon setting.
3-167
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-G
303 543
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-P
DIST:
R2,PP (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
X2,PG (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
X2,PP (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
303 544
DIST:
2 (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
2 (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Z
Rnref=f(Rn,n,n,Z)
Rn,ref RF
303 553
Xnref=f(Rn,n,n,Z)
DIST:
Dist.decision zone n
Xn,ref XF
303 561
DIST:
RF
303 554
DIST:
XF
303 555
Impedance zone2(n=2)
Parameter
DIST:
R2,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
R2,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X2,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X2,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
2 (polygon) PSx
DIST:
2 (polygon) PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
002
002
002
002
012
012
013
013
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
007
057
007
057
008
058
008
058
002
052
002
052
080
081
082
083
014
064
014
064
087
087
087
087
Impedance zone3(n=3)
Parameter
DIST:
R3,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
R3,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X3,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X3,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
3 (polygon) PSx
DIST:
3 (polygon) PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
002
002
002
002
012
012
013
013
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
009
059
009
059
010
060
010
060
003
053
003
053
084
085
086
087
015
065
015
065
088
088
088
088
Impedance zone4(n=4)
Parameter
DIST:
R4,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
R4,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X4,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X4,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
4 (polygon) PSx
DIST:
4 (polygon) PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
012
012
013
013
002
002
002
002
012
012
013
013
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
011
061
011
061
012
062
012
062
004
054
004
054
089
090
091
092
016
066
016
066
089
089
089
089
Impedance zone5(n=5)
Parameter
DIST:
R5,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
R5,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X5,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X5,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
5 (polygon) PSx
DIST:
5 (polygon) PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
002
002
002
002
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
1
2
3
4
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
100
101
102
103
093
094
095
096
124
125
126
127
156
157
158
159
Impedance zone6(n=6)
Parameter
DIST:
R6,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
R6,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X6,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X6,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
6 (polygon) PSx
DIST:
6 (polygon) PSx
set
set
set
set
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
002
002
002
002
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
012
1
2
3
4
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
104
105
106
107
097
098
099
126
128
129
130
131
160
161
162
163
45Z8069A
Fig. 3-123: Setting impedance zones 2 to 6 (showing the example of zone 2) and distance measurement.
In addition to the settings described above, the kze zone extension factors for
high-speed reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set
separately for phase-to-ground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for
impedance zone 1.
As a result of these settings, impedance zone 1 is extended accordingly in the R
and X directions. The R and X values modified by the kze zone extension factor
are calculated according to the following equations:
R1,kze = kzeR1
X1,kze = kzeX1
3-168
P437
3 Operation
The increase in reach by zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the
following:
This feature may be helpful with double-circuit lines without using mutual
compensation. In order to cope with effects of mutual coupling, the zone 1 reach
for faults with grounding can now be set to the smallest possible reactance value
(depending on possible switching states of the parallel circuit), while the phaseto-phase loop measurement is set to a "normal" underreaching reach.
A further application is to selectively block the phase-to-ground measurement in
protection schemes where backup protection for ground fault short circuits is
provided with time-graded directional neutral overcurrent protection elements.
Zone 1 extension already provides various factors for phase-to-phase and phasetoground measuring loops. Further precaution measures are therefore not required
here.
3-169
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Zone extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
ARC:
Zone extension TDR
303 000
ARC:
Zone extension HSR
303 001
DIST:
Zone extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
ARC:
Meas.r.extd. ext.ARC
303 025
PSIG:
Z1 extended
[ 035 075 ]
ARC:
Zone extension RC
DIST:
X1,PG (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zone extension
[ 036 065 ]
DIST:
X1,PP (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
303 002
SOTF:
Z1 extended
[ 035 076 ]
DIST:
Zone extension EXT
[ 036 046 ]
DIST:
1 (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zone ext. HSR 1pG
[ 039 029 ]
DIST:
303 552
DIST:
1 (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
kze,PG TDR PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-G
DIST:
kze,PP TDR PSx
[ * ]
303 543
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-P
DIST:
kze,PG HSR PSx
[ * ]
303 544
DIST:
kze,PP HSR PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
R1,PG (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
R1,PP (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Z
R1,ref1 =
303 553
R1,ref1 RF
f(R1, 1, 1, Z)
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1, x
X1,ref1 =
303 629
X1,ref1 XF
f(X1, 1, 1, Z)
R1,ref2 =
R1,ref2 RF
f(R1,1,1,Z,kze)
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1ze,x
X1,ref2 =
303 630
X1,ref2 XF
f(X1,1,1,Z,kze)
DIST:
RF
DIST:
Dist.decis.Z1 stored
S1 1
R1
303 554
303 565
DIST:
XF
303 555
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
306 012
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIST:
X1,PG (polygon) PSx
DIST:
X1,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
1 (polygon) PSx
DIST:
kze,PG HSR PSx
DIST:
kze,PP HSR PSx
DIST:
R1,PG (polygon) PSx
012 001
012 051
013 001
013 051
002 076
002 077
002 078
002 079
012 013
012 063
013 013
013 063
012 034
012 084
013 034
013 084
012 035
012 085
013 035
013 085
012 005
012 055
013 005
013 055
DIST:
R1,PP (polygon) PSx
DIST:
kze,PG TDR PSx
DIST:
kze,PP TDR PSx
DIST:
1 (polygon) PSx
012 006
012 056
013 006
013 056
012 046
012 096
013 046
013 096
012 047
012 097
013 047
013 097
072 086
073 086
074 086
075 086
47Z1457A
3.21.3.5.4
3-170
P437
3 Operation
the impedance is calculated by using the ground factor kG of the line, yet as no
line impedance is involved in the measuring loop any more and as the source
ground factor was significantly smaller than the line factor, thus one PG loop
impedance is misleading.
Therefore the following solution is implemented:
If starting identifies a 2pG fault condition, and PG loops evaluation is selected,
than the phase-phase voltage is used to determine whether it is a close fault,
which is the case for VPP < 10%Vnom. In this case, the PG-loop impedances (for
the distance and directional measurement) are calculated with kG = 0; otherwise
normal equation with set kG is used.
Additionally to the 2 PG impedances the PP impedance is calculated, too, to
secure simultaneous 3-pole tripping, because it could happen that the 2 PG
impedances settle in zone 1 (or Z1e) with different speed just depending on
the fault transients. Always all 3 impedances (e.g. BN, CN and BC for a BCN fault)
are calculated, and the zone decisions are then compared:
1.
2.
If one PG and the PP impedance are in zone 1 and the 2nd PG loop is in
forward direction, then P437 trips 3-pole, too.
Taking care for the directional decision acertains, that just in case of
cross-country and intersystem faults (2pGG faults) both PG faults are on
the protected line. The zone 1 decision of the PP loop then is sufficient to
secure that both faults are in zone 1, too.
In applications with parallel lines, during intersystem faults one PG fault
could be on the parallel line, but then either its direction is backwards or
the PP loop impedance is outside zone 1.
3.
If after the first calculation loop just one zone 1 decision is determined,
than the DIST processing task duration is prolonged and all 3 impedances
are calculated again.
This is done to make shure that normal 2pG faults are immediately
tripped 3-pole and the risk of staggered tripping is minimized.
The disadvantage is that for parallel line applications in case of crosscountry/intersystem faults the correct 1pole trip could be delayed by up to
~7 ms.
So in order to get a proper balance of speed and correct 1p/3p trip
decision, this measuring repitition is only done once.
3.21.3.5.5
3.21.3.5.6
3-171
P437
3 Operation
45
Setting
DIST:
Directional char PSx
[ * ]
R
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIST:
Directional char PSx
002 234
002 235
002 236
002 237
47Z1201A
3.21.4
Impedance-Time Characteristics
A maximum of six impedance zones and eight timer stages are available for
impedance time grading. All impedance zones can be operated in a forward
direction, backward (reverse) direction, or non-directionally. Distanceindependent timer stage t7 can also operate forward-directionally, backwarddirectionally, or non-directionally. Timer stage t8 operates independently of
distance and direction. All zone timer stages are triggered by the general starting
of distance protection if an appropriate setting has been selected at
DIST : Mode t im e r start (otherwise see Separate Zone Timer Start below).
3.21.4.1
3-172
P437
3 Operation
has elapsed or after the HSR tripping time of ARC has elapsed. (The shortest time
setting is effective.)
In the 1-pole ARC mode, a three-pole trip occurs in zone 1 after t1 has elapsed
and in extended zone 1 after timer stage t1,ze of distance protection has elapsed.
A single-pole trip is issued in extended zone 1 once the ARC tripping time has
elapsed, whereas with standard reach (non-extended zone) it is issued after
timer stage t1 of distance protection has elapsed or after the HSR tripping time
of ARC has elapsed. (The shortest time setting is effective.)
Separate Zone Timer Start
If at DI ST: Mode t ime r s tart the mode with zone starting has been selected,
then only the timer stage of the specific distance protection zone Zn is triggered
for which the measured loop impedance is inside the zone.
The trigger is issued by the respective signal DI ST: Zone 1 s tart ing (or
DI ST: Z one 2 startin g, D IST: Zone 8 s tar tin g, resp.)
These signals are only supported if the mode with zone starting has been
selected, otherwise as is mandatory in IEC 61850 modeling all zone startings
are still visible, but will have no influence on the functional sequence.
Compensation of Starting Time
The P437 automatically subtracts starting time from grading time.
3-173
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Zone extension RC
DIST:
t1 PSx
303 002
DIST:
Zone extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
C
DIST:
Zone extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
&
DIST:
t1,ze PSx
*
t1
t1,ze
DIST:
t1 elapsed
[ 036 026 ]
DIST:
t1,ze elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
DIST:
Mode timer start
[ 001 236 ]
0
1
0: With DIST gen.start.
1: With zone starting
&
DIST:
Zone 1 starting
[ 001 094 ]
&
DIST:
Zone 1,ze starting
[ 002 067 ]
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole
2: 1-/3-pole
3: 3-pole
4: 3-pole (only for 1p)
DIST:
Zone extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
DIST:
Timer st. 1 elapsed
DIST:
Zone extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
303 614
&
ARC:
Trip time elapsed
&
303 003
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
&
&
&
PSIG:
Trip time elapsed
305 150
SOTF:
Trip time elapsed
460 528
Parameter
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
DIST:
t1 PSx
DIST:
t1,ze PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
023
012
012
013
013
026
027
028
029
1
2
3
4
051
025
085
045
028
078
028
078
025
025
025
025
47Z8033
3-174
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
&
DIST:
t2 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Mode timer start
[ 001 236 ]
DIST:
t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
1
0
1
0: With DIST gen.start.
1: With zone starting
DIST:
t3 PSx
[ * ]
&
DIST:
Zone 2 starting
[ 001 095 ]
DIST:
t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
&
DIST:
t4 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zone 3 starting
[ 001 096 ]
DIST:
t4 elapsed
[ 036 029 ]
1
&
DIST:
Zone 4 starting
[ 001 097 ]
DIST:
t5 PSx
[ * ]
0
DIST:
t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
1
&
DIST:
Zone 5 starting
[ 001 098 ]
DIST:
t6 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
1
&
DIST:
Zone 6 starting
[ 001 099 ]
DIST:
t7 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
t7 elapsed
[ 037 127 ]
1
&
DIST:
Zone 7 starting
[ 001 100 ]
DIST:
t8 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
t8 elapsed
[ 037 128 ]
1
&
DIST:
Zone 8 starting
[ 001 101 ]
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
DIST:
t2 PSx
DIST:
t3 PSx
012
012
013
013
029
079
029
079
012
012
013
013
032
082
032
082
DIST:
t5 PSx
1
2
3
4
DIST:
t4 PSx
012
012
013
013
030
080
030
080
012
012
013
013
033
083
033
083
DIST:
t6 PSx
012
012
013
013
031
081
031
081
012
012
012
012
140
141
142
143
DIST:
t7 PSx
DIST:
t8 PSx
012
012
012
012
144
145
146
147
47Z1154A
3-175
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, A
DIST:
N1,fw
[ 038 010 ]
303 572
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, B
[ 038 012 ]
DIST:
N1,bw
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, C
303 571
[ 038 014 ]
DIST:
N1,fw, A
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, A
303 631
[ 038 011 ]
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, B
[ 038 013 ]
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, C
[ 038 015 ]
DIST:
N1,fw, B
DIST:
Direction N1 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
DIST:
Direction N1 PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
012 023
012 073
013 023
013 073
303 632
DIST:
N1,fw, C
1
2
3
DIST:
Direction N2 PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
012 024
012 074
013 024
013 074
303 635
303 636
DIST:
N2,fw
1
2
DIST:
Direction N3 PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
012 025
012 075
013 025
013 075
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
1
2
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIST:
Direction N4 PSx
DIST:
Direction N7 PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
012 136
012 137
012 138
012 139
303 579
DIST:
N6,fw
1
2
303 616
DIST:
N6,bw
303 615
DIST:
Direction N7 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
303 580
DIST:
N5,bw
DIST:
Direction N6 PSx
[ * ]
012 132
012 133
012 134
012 135
303 577
DIST:
N5,fw
1
012 027
012 077
013 027
013 077
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
303 578
DIST:
N4,bw
DIST:
Direction N5 PSx
DIST:
Direction N6 PSx
303 575
DIST:
N4,fw
1
012 026
012 076
013 026
013 076
Parameter
303 576
DIST:
N3,bw
DIST:
Direction N5 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
303 573
DIST:
N3,fw
DIST:
Direction N4 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
303 574
DIST:
N2,bw
DIST:
Direction N3 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
303 634
DIST:
N1,bw, B
DIST:
N1,bw, C
DIST:
Direction N2 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
303 633
DIST:
N1,bw, A
DIST:
N7,fw
1
2
303 618
DIST:
N7,bw
303 617
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
47Z0173A
3.21.5
3-176
P437
3 Operation
If several timer stages and directions are set to the same values, a distance trip
occurs in the zone having the highest number.
A trip signal is issued in zone 7 if the following conditions are satisfied
simultaneously:
The measured direction agrees with the directional setting for N7.
After timer stage t8 has elapsed, a trip signal for zone 8 is issued.
Trip signals from all zones may be blocked individually by the power swing
blocking function (P SB: Blocki ng in iti ated, see Section 3.26, (p. 3-212))
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1, A-G
303 637
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1, B-G
303 638
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1, C-G
303 639
DIST:
Dist. decision Z1, A
303 649
DIST:
Dist. decision Z1, B
303 650
DIST:
Dist. decision Z1, C
303 651
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1, A-B
303 640
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1, B-C
303 641
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1, C-A
303 642
DIST:
Dist. dec. Z1ze, A-G
303 643
DIST:
Dist. dec. Z1ze, B-G
303 644
DIST:
Dist. dec. Z1ze, C-G
303 645
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1ze, A
303 652
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1ze, B
303 653
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1ze, C
303 654
DIST:
Dist. dec. Z1ze, A-B
303 646
DIST:
Dist. dec. Z1ze, B-C
303 647
DIST:
Dist. dec. Z1ze, C-A
303 648
47Z0183A
3-177
P437
PSB:
Block. sel. zone
3 Operation
304 862
DIST:
Blocking Z1 EXT
[ 036 034 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z1,ze EXT
[ 036 036 ]
DIST:
Dist. decision Z1, A
303 649
DIST:
Timer st. 1 elapsed
303 614
DIST:
N1,fw, A
303 631
DIST:
N1,bw, A
303 634
DIST:
Dist. decision Z1, B
S11
11
S21
21
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
S12
DIST:
N1,bw, B
303 632
12
22
DIST:
Trip zone 1, C
S13
DIST:
N1,bw, C
303 633
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1ze, A
DIST:
t1,ze elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
23
303 652
S31
303 657
DIST:
Trip zone 1
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
31
303 584
DIST:
Trip signal zone 1
[ 035 072 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, A
303 658
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S41
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1ze, B
13
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S23
303 636
303 656
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
303 651
DIST:
N1,fw, C
DIST:
Trip zone 1, B
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S22
303 635
DIST:
Dist. decision Z1, C
303 655
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
303 650
DIST:
N1,fw, B
DIST:
Trip zone 1, A
41
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
303 653
S32
32
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, B
303 659
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S42
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1ze, C
42
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
303 654
S33
33
R50,70,90,110,130,150,170
S43
R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, C
303 660
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze
43
303 595
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
47Z8058A
3-178
P437
3 Operation
PSB:
Block. sel. zone
304 862
DIST:
Blocking Z2 EXT
[ 036 037 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z3 EXT
[ 036 039 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z4 EXT
[ 036 041 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z5 EXT
[ 036 044 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z6 EXT
[ 036 061 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z7 EXT
[ 036 067 ]
DIST:
Blocking Z8 EXT
[ 036 068 ]
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 2
DIST:
t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
DIST:
N2,fw
S50
DIST:
N3,bw
50
R1x,3x,70,90,110,130,150,170
303 574
DIST:
N2,bw
303 573
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 3
DIST:
t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
DIST:
N3,fw
DIST:
Trip zone 2
303 581
S60
60
R2x,4x,80,100,120,140,160,180
DIST:
Trip zone 3
303 582
S70
70
R1x,3x,50,90,110,130,150,170
303 576
S80
303 575
R2x,4x,60,100,120,140,160,180
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 4
DIST:
303 583
t4 elapsed
[ 036 029 ]
DIST:
N4,fw
S90
90
R1x,3x,50,70,110,130,150,170
S100
303 577
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 5303 619
DIST:
t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
DIST:
N5,bw
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 6
303 620
DIST:
t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
DIST:
N6,fw
303 616
DIST:
N6,bw
DIST:
t7 elapsed
[ 037 127 ]
DIST:
N7,fw
DIST:
N7,bw
303 615
S140
303 617
S160
150
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
160
R2x,4x,60,80,100,120,140,180
S170
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
303 621
DIST:
Trip signal zone 6
[ 040 059 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 7
303 622
DIST:
Trip signal zone 7
[ 037 129 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 8
170
R1x,3x,50,70,90,110,130,150
S180
303 588
DIST:
Trip signal zone 5
[ 040 058 ]
140
R2x,4x,60,80,100,120,160,180
R1x,3x,50,70,90,110,130,170
303 618
303 587
DIST:
Trip signal zone 4
[ 040 057 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 6
130
R1x,3x,50,70,90,110,150,170
S150
DIST:
t8 elapsed
[ 037 128 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, A
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, B
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, C
120
R2x,4x,60,80,100,140,160,180
S130
DIST:
Trip zone 4
DIST:
Trip zone 5
110
R1x,3x,50,70,90,130,150,170
S120
303 579
100
R2x,4x,60,80,120,140,160,180
S110
303 586
DIST:
Trip signal zone 3
[ 040 056 ]
80
303 578
DIST:
N4,bw
303 585
DIST:
Trip signal zone 2
[ 041 084 ]
180
R2x,4x,60,80,100,120,140,160
303 626
DIST:
Trip signal zone 8
[ 037 130 ]
DIST:
Trip sig. zone 2-8
[ 035 073 ]
303 623
DIST:
Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
303 624
303 625
47Z8059A
3-179
P437
3 Operation
t8
t8
t7
t7
t6
t6
t5
t5
t4
t4
t3
t3
t2
t2
t1
t1 = 0 s
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z2
Z1
Z1
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
t8
t8
t7
t6, t7
t6
t5
t5
t4
t4
t3
t3
t2
t2
t1 = 0 s
t1 = 0 s
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z6
Z5
Z4
Z3
Z2
t8
t8
t7
t6
t6
t5
t5
t4
t7
t4
t3
t3
t2
t2
t1 = 0 s
t1 = 0 s
Z5
Z3
Z1
Z1
Z1
Z2
Z4
Z6
Z1
Z1
Z2
47Z0176A
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Impedance in zone 6
[ 037 200 ]
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 6
303 620
DIST:
N6,fw
303 616
DIST:
N6,bw
303 615
47Z0185A
3.21.6
3-181
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Zone extension RC
303 002
SOTF:
Z1 extended
[ 035 076 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Zone extension EXT
[ 036 046 ]
PSIG:
Not
[ 037ready
028 ]
3: 3-pole
1: 1-pole
PSIG:
Trip enable
305 157
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 1
305 166
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, A
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 2
303 623
305 167
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, B
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 3
303 624
305 168
DIST:
Trip zone 1, A
303 655
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, A
DIST:
Trip signal Z1, C
303 658
DIST:
Trip zone 1, B
303 625
303 656
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, B
S1 1
303 659
DIST:
Trip zone 1, C
DIST:
Signal block start.G
R1
303 657
303 594
S1 1
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, C
R1
303 660
S1 1
R1
DIST:
General starting
[036 240 ]
1
100ms
DIST:
Starting N1
303 535
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
[
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
3: 3-pole
1
2
2: A - C - B
1: A - B - C
MAIN:
Blocking 1p trip EXT
[ 041 078 ]
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z1164A
3-182
P437
3 Operation
3.22
The user can block distance trip signals in selected distance zones by
PSB: Fct . assi gn. block.. These zones may be selected for blocking: Zx
(x=1 to 8) and Z1,ze. This will prevent unwanted tripping by apparent low
impedances during a power swing.
Moreover, PSB: Fct. ass ign . bl ock. allows for blocking undervoltage
stages of function group V<>.
PSB:
General enable USER
[ 014 050 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSB:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
PSB:
Enabled
[ 040 095 ]
0
1
0: No
PSB:
Ready
1: Yes
* Parameter
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
set
set
set
set
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
1
2
3
4
304 859
PSB:
Enable PSx
015
015
015
015
090
091
092
093
47Z11CBB
3.22.1
Measurement
The P437 continuously measures the positive-sequence impedance. Because of
this measurement in the positive-sequence system, the protection is also
available during a single-pole HSR.
Blocking of selected zones of the distance protection or a power swing starting
occurs only when the measured positive-sequence impedance lies within the
settable power swing polygon.
3-183
P437
3 Operation
PSB:
R
[ 014 060 ]
PSB:
posX
[ 014 061 ]
PSB:
negX
[ 006 185 ]
PSB:
PSB:
Asyn. power swing
[ 014 062 ]
304 860
VA-G
VB-G
Vpos
VC-G
PSB:
Z within polygon
Zpos
IA
[ 036 024 ]
Ipos
IB
IC
45Z80CCA
PSB:
posX
Zpos(t)
PSB:
PSB:
R
PSB:
negX
47Z13CFA
3.22.2
Rx = 5 for Inom = 1 A
Rx = 1 for Inom = 5 A.
P437
3 Operation
A power swing decision once made is stored until one of the following conditions
is met:
Zpos(t)
PSP:
Rx
T
R stab.
47Z1352A
3.22.3
Load Blinding
In the case of parallel lines (i.e. double-circuit lines) with a high rate of power
transmission to neighboring networks the failure of one three-phase system may
lead to a short-time (typically 20 to 30 minutes) increase in the power flow rate
on the remaining line. Here the positive-sequence impedance locus will then lie
3-185
P437
3 Operation
within the load blinding area of the distance protection starting characteristic.
This is displayed in the figure below, with the following fault sequence:
1.
2.
3.
4.
150
100
50
50
50
100
50
Load area
Load area
1 faulted system
2 operational systems
47Z2000A
It is therefore not possible to selectively set the power swing polygon where:
3-186
P437
3 Operation
The setting for the resistance reach Rfwd of the starting polygon is such that
the impedance locus could possibly not leave the power swing polygon
after the initial short-circuit fault has been cleared, and therefore power
swing blocking cannot be enabled when a power swing occurs.
It is also possible that because of load variations the impedance locus will
leave the power swing polygon for a short-time and then return, which
could cause power swing blocking to be enabled erroneously (resulting in a
protection malfunction if a chance short-circuit fault should then occur).
The setting for the starting impedance in the load area Zfwd (minimum load
impedance) is such that power swing blocking may occur too late if a power
swing has started in the normal blue area and then crosses the starting
characteristic in the power swing polygon area (above the angle ).
To cope with this problem a load blinding feature is now available for the power
swing polygon:
The time for a measurement sample to be taken to determine the speed of
resistance change may be set at P SB: A ctivation con d. dZ (with two
selection options Power Swing polygon and PS-polygon + 3pStart):
With the Power Swing polygon setting (entry into the power swing polygon),
the function will operate as before, i.e. when the positive-sequence impedance
locus enters the power swing polygon, the speed of change of the positivesequence impedances real component is measured and evaluated.
With the PS-polygon + 3pStart setting (power swing polygon + 3-phase start),
the speed of change of the positive-sequence impedances real component is
measured under these conditions only:
[The updated positive-sequence impedance locus determined lies within the
power swing polygon]
AND([A 3-phase - without ground - start has occurred]
OR([A 2-phase - without ground - start has occurred]
AND["The negative-sequence current value is sufficiently
small"]))
The result is that the state positive-sequence impedance locus in the power
swing polygon will now also be a simple enabling condition for the Z method.
In this case whether the positive-sequence impedance is now being measured for
the first time within the power swing polygon or it was already there during a
previous measurement is irrelevant.
Crucial for a measurement decision is the onset of the (distance) general start.
In theory, a 3-phase start (without ground) is to be expected, as power swing
occurrences are symmetrical (i.e. the same measurement conditions are to be
found in all 3 phases).The result is that with the onset of a phase-ground start
there will be no power swing occurence (i.e. when with the onset of a start there
is also a phase-ground start or it is already present, then the blocking effect can
no longer be set).
In practice all currents and voltages will be unbalanced (mainly because of
unbalanced lines, but asymmetrical loads and infeeds, as well as measurement
errors by transformers and even by the protection device itself are also to be
considered) so that possibly one of the three phase-phase starting systems will
trigger first. Therefore, with a high R1 reach for zone 1, the 2-phase start may
have already led to a trip command during a power swing event, even before a
3-phase start has activated power swing blocking. Therefore, in order to also
have control of this state, the power swing blocking function carries out the R
measurement at the onset of the 2-phase start, but only if currents are
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-187
P437
3 Operation
3.22.4
2.
P437
3 Operation
protection is lifted with a short release delay (100 ms), which will then give
preference to the selective differential protection.
Such a short release delay is of no use with protection systems where two
distance protection devices are used.
For this a new release delay for blocking is available. It is set at PSB: Abort
d elay (in the range from 0.00 s to 1.00 s with the default value = 0.00 s). This
release delay will become active when blocking is lifted because a current trigger
has operated (IP>, Ineg>, IN>). For technical reasons this release delay will also
be activated when the maximum blocking time has elapsed so that, including
this release delay, the set maximum blocking time may be exceeded.
3.22.5
PSB Blocking
The blocking of the distance zones and undervoltage stages that have been
selected via PSB: F ct. as s ign. bl ock.PSB: Fct. assign. block. is reset as soon
as the signal PSB: Blocked is issued.
The following signal flow diagram shows how this PSB blocking signal is set up.
A
B
C
PS condition
[008 234] PSB:
Abort delay
PS condition
reset
PSB:
Blocking initiated
[036 032]
set
reset
set
(re)trig.
reset
set
reset
set
(re)trig.
(re)trig.
(re)trig.
PSB:
Hold time running
[011 142] PSB:
Hold time
(B or C)
D
E
F
trigger
trigger
PSB:
Max.block.time runn.
PSB:
Blocked
[011 144]
trigger
The signal flow diagram is based on the assumption that PSB is enabled and not
blocked by an external input signal (i.e. by P SB: Blockin g E XT = Yes).
3-189
P437
3 Operation
A: The first line in the signal flow diagram represents the basic relevant
measuring and logic condition that is used to establish the power swing
blocking condition (i.e. Zpos is within the power swing polygon, the PSB
activation condition was fulfilled, and no unblocking condition is present, or
abort delay P SB: Abor t de lay).
C: When the signal P SB: Blocki ng in iti ate d falls back to No, a settable
hold timer is triggered or retriggered. It does not matter, whether the reset
of power swing blocking was caused because Zpos has left the power swing
polygon, or because of any unblocking condition (current triggers or
PS B: Max. PS cycl e du r. elapsed).
E: The raising edge of the signal D (i.e. the beginning of a measured power
swing condition) triggers a timer. If this timer reaches the set PSB: Max.
bl ocki ng ti me a further pulse timer (=signal F) is triggered, which is
running for the set time PSB: Bl ocking ti me int..
F: While this pulse timer is elapsing (i.e. during the time interval
PSB: Blocking ti me int.) the signal PSB: Blocked Is issued. It is also
issued along with external blocking of PSB (P SB: Blocking EXT) or with
internal blocking initiated from current trigger operation (PSB: IP >
t riggere d, P SB: In eg> tri gge re d, P SB: IN> trigge red). The blocking
of the distance zones and undervoltage stages that have been selected via
PSB: F ct. assign. bl ock. is reset as soon as this signal (PSB: Block ed)
is issued.
[036 032]
PSB:
Blocking initiated
= Yes
PSB:
Blocking EXT
not active
PSB:
Blocked
ext.
[008 248]
PSB:
Blocking
EXT
=
Yes
PSB:
Blocking EXT
active
Normal
[040 095]
PSB:
Enabled
= Yes
Block. time
elapsed
PSB:
Blocking time int.
PSB:
Blocking initiated
PSB:
Hold time
elapsed
[011 144]
PSB:
Blocked
PSB:
Abort delay
running
PSB:
Hold time running
PSB:
Max.block.time runn.
3-190
P437
3 Operation
3.22.6
Out-of-Step Tripping
A power swing starting may become necessary when a power swing with low
damping has to be terminated by deliberately splitting system sections. For such
a procedure the device has three independent methods available:
The trip signal of the 1st criterion is issued as PSB: Trip sign al.
The counting-based trip signals per 2nd criterion are available as individual
signals, described below. They are not linked into this PSB: Trip s ignal, but
could be individually linked into the general trip commands.
3.22.7
Source A
Line AB
AS
Source B
BS
DIST
Based on this equivalent circuit, the impedance plot per Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-192)
could be drawn. The origin of the complex plane is put at the location of the
distance protection device, that is at system bus A.
For this simplified description any apparent impedance Z measured from the
distance protection during a steady-state out-of-step condition moves along
circles with its origin in either AS or BS source, depending on the ratio of the
absolute values of the 2 source voltages. The rotation sense further depends on
which source is leading.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-191
P437
3 Operation
This description of power swings is rather simplified but sufficient to describe the
functionality as implemented in the P437.
BS
B
Z
AS
47Z1351A
The basic power swing detection zone of P437 is of quadrilateral shape. While
resistive reach in forward and backward direction is equal, the reactive reaches
can be set independently to provide coverage adjustable to the power system
impedances (essentially to cover differences in reverse source impedance and
forward line plus remote source impedances).
Power swing detection is done by measuring the rate of change of the resistance
(real part) of the positive sequence impedance. A power swing is detected, if a
resistance change of Rx = 5 (at Inom = 1 A) takes more time than a settable
timer T (see Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-185)).
Inside the power swing detection zone, 2 more lines are defined by a settable
resistance PSB: R (OOS) to determine an out-of-step condition. Thus this
decision could be taken before leaving the power swing detection zone.
3-192
P437
3 Operation
The relay checks that settings are valid:
The resistive lines have to be inside the power swing detection zone:
Rinst.P. Rstab.P
Otherwise the internal R(OOS) variable is limited to the R(PSB) value as per
Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-194) (left-hand part).
The resistive lines must not cross the X-axis.
Otherwise the lines are limited to the X-axis as per Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-194)
(right-hand part).
3.22.7.1
Counters
An out-of-step condition is determined if the apparent positive-sequence
impedance moves along its trajectory from the right side into the power swing
detection zone and then crosses the left side OOS detection line (trajectory in
Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-194) below), or vice versa (trajectory ). In both cases the outof-step counter nOOS is incremented by 1.
If the apparent positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing detection
zone on the same side as it entered, a stable power swing is determined (e.g.
trajectory ). In this case the power swing counter nPSB is incremented by 1.
By this definition, the counter values are only available during a power swing or
out-of-step condition, respectively. As it is desirable to have the counter values
available for post-mortem analysis, the values are stored as event counters, too.
The following counters are implemented to count unstable and stable swings as
described above:
3.22.7.2
Counter Reset
During a power swing a dedicated timer stage is triggered upon each
incrementing the counter. If this timer elapses while no further incrementing of
the same counter takes place, then it is assumed that the power swing condition
has stopped and this counter is reset to 0.
For this timer stage the setting PSB: Max. P S cycle dur. is used, which is
recommended to be set to the anticipated maximum power swing cycle time.
The counters are reset automatically with the detection of a new power swing. A
manual reset of the counters, however, can also be done by setting the
parameter PSB: R e se t cou nters to execute.
3-193
P437
3 Operation
BS
n instab.+1
n instab.+1
n stab.+1
Rinstab.
R
+Rinstab.
+Rstab.
AS
47Z1353A
BS
BS
Rinstab.
Rinstab.
R
+Rinstab.
AS
+Rinstab.
AS
47Z1354A
Fig. 3-145: Automatic limiting for the position of the resistive lines.
3-194
P437
3 Operation
3.22.7.3
Counter Comparators
Out-of-step tripping is raised, if the number of counted out-of-step swings nOOS
reaches a settable limit.
In order to take into account the electrical center of the oscillation, the
impedance area between the OOS detection lines inside the power swing
detection zone is split into 3 areas, divided by 2 settable reactances as per
Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-196). The reactances are set at:
P SB : posX (O OS)
P SB: ne gX (OOS)
The inner main area is used to identify swings with electrical center on the line.
The back-up area is the remaining part of this corridor. Typically the back-up
area counter is set to a higher number of swings to provide only back-up tripping
(system splitting) in case the protection system closest to the electrical center of
the oscillation failed to operate.
As the OOS counter is incremented when the positive-sequence impedance
trajectory crosses the resistive detection lines, the decision which counter limit to
compare with is practically linked to the section on this resistive detection line
rather than the area the impedance moved through.
Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-196) shows 2 cases:
In the same way, an additional power swing tripping is raised if the number of
counted power swings nPSB reaches a settable limit nPSB,trp (case ). This feature
may be used as back-up protection, if stable swings persist for too many power
swing cycles.
These counter thresholds are also known as permissible number of unstable or
stable power swings, respectively.
3.22.7.4
These binary signals remain active for a pulse duration of 100 ms.
All out-of-step and power swing trip signals are available in the selection list of
the general trip commands of the relay.
3-195
P437
3 Operation
X instab,
BS
n instab,b
n instab,a
n stab
X instab,
n instab,b
AS
47Z1355A
3-196
P437
3 Operation
3.23
10s
MCMON:
Zero-sequ. starting
[ 041 080 ]
DIST:
Starting G
SFMON:
Zero-sequ. starting
[ 098 015 ]
303 507
MCMON:
Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
300ms
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
SFMON:
M.c.b. trip V
[ 098 000 ]
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
MCMON:
Undervoltage
[ 038 038 ]
SFMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 098 017 ]
MCMON:
Vneg> triggered
[ 041 079 ]
MCMON:
FF, V triggered
[ 035 081 ]
MCMON:
M.circ. V,Vref flty.
[ 040 078 ]
MCMON:
FF, Vref triggered
[ 038 100 ]
SFMON:
M.circ. V,Vref flty.
[ 098 023 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip Vref EXT
[ 036 086 ]
300ms
SFMON:
M.c.b. trip Vref
[ 098 011 ]
MCMON:
Meas.circ.V,I faulty
[ 037 020 ]
SFMON:
Meas.circ.V,I faulty
[ 098 016 ]
MCMON:
Meas. circ. I faulty
[ 040 087 ]
GFSC:
Monitor. triggered
[ 038 095 ]
MCMON:
Peripheral fault
[ 038 024 ]
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty
[ 036 060 ]
SFMON:
Peripheral fault
[ 098 018 ]
47Z1145B
3.23.1
Current Monitoring
The current-measuring circuit monitoring function is enabled when the current
exceeds the settable value MC MO N: Imi n cu rr. monit or. in at least one
phase. Once monitoring is enabled, the absolute value of the negative-sequence
component of the current system is determined in accordance with the definition
of the symmetrical components. This is based on the setting at MAI N: Phase
seque nce.
3-197
P437
3 Operation
I neg = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |
Phase sequence A-C-B
I neg = 3 | (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |
Symbols used:
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
This value is divided by the maximum phase current |Imax| and compared with
the set threshold operate value. If the set operate value is exceeded, a
monitoring signal is issued once the operate delay + 300 ms have elapsed.
MCMON:
General enable USER
[ 014 001 ]
0
MCMON:
Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MCMON:
Current monitoring
[ 014 006 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MCMON:
Imin curr. monitor.
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
[ 010 183 ]
IA
IB
IC
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
|Ineg|
MCMON:
Operate delay
[ 017 011 ]
MCMON:
Ineg>
[ 014 002 ]
|Ineg|/|Imax|
Imax
+ 300 ms
SFMON:
Meas. circ. I faulty
[ 098 005 ]
MCMON:
Meas. circ. I faulty
[ 040 087 ]
45Z8022A
3.23.2
Voltage Monitoring
The voltages used by distance protection as measured values are monitored for
plausibility by the voltage-measuring-circuit monitoring function.
3-198
P437
3 Operation
Phase-to-phase voltages are monitored for voltages that fall below the
default threshold of 0.4Vnom. This monitoring function is enabled when the
current exceeds MCMON: Imin Vn eg monit oring in one phase.
Negative-sequence voltage
V
neg
1
3
| (V
A-G
+ a2 V
+ aV
B-G
)|
C-G
Negative-sequence voltage
V
neg
1
3
| (V
A-G
+ aV
B-G
+ a2 V
)|
C-G
Symbols used:
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
This value is compared with the default threshold operate value 0.2Vnom / 3. If
the threshold operate value is exceeded, a monitoring signal is issued after the
operate delay has elapsed.
If one of the monitoring functions described above operates, then distance
protection is blocked, and the device switches to backup overcurrent time
protection provided the appropriate setting has been selected.
In addition, the MC MON: Me as . voltage o.k. monitoring signal is issued if all
phase-to-phase voltages exceed the default threshold of 0.65Vnom and negativesequence monitoring has not operated.
3-199
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
MCMON:
Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
0.7Vnom/3
VA-G
VB-G
>0.2Vnom/3
C
VC-G
|Vneg|
MCMON:
Operate delay
[ 017 011 ]
SFMON:
Vneg> triggered
[ 098 014 ]
0
MCMON:
Vneg> triggered
[ 041 079 ]
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
S11
SFMON:
Undervoltage
[ 098 009 ]
R1
MCMON:
Undervoltage
[ 038 038 ]
BUOC:
Starting
[ 036 013 ]
MCMON:
Op. mode volt. mon.
MCMON:
Phase sequ. V faulty
[ 038 049 ]
[ 014 007 ]
SFMON:
Phase sequ. V faulty
[ 098 001 ]
1
2
3
1: Vneg
2: Vneg with curr. enab
3: Vneg w.CB cont.enab.
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MCMON:
Imin Vneg monitoring
[ 010 184 ]
IA
IB
IC
<0.4Vnom
C
>0.65Vnom
C
0
5s
MCMON:
Meas. voltage o.k.
[ 038 048 ]
45Z8041B
3.23.3
Phase-Sequence Monitoring
Phase-sequence monitoring is enabled only if the following conditions are
simultaneously met:
3-200
P437
3 Operation
3.23.4
Distance protection has started. (This signal has a time delayed reset of
30 ms so as to avoid startings by transients that may occur at the end of a
short circuit.)
The P437 uses different criteria to detect single- or two-phase faults or threephase faults in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer.
The phase currents exceed the distance protection's I> thresholds either
in none or in all of the three phases (= symmetrical load condition).
A current increase I/t > 10% occurs during 3 cycles (= 3T) in not
exactly one phase.
The negative-sequence current does not exceed an internal threshold.
The negative-sequence voltage has exceeded an internal threshold.
At least one of the phase currents exceeds the distance protection's I>
threshold.
The positive-sequence voltage has fallen below an internal threshold.
The positive-sequence current may only vary less than 10% or +5%
within 3 cycles after the positive-sequence voltage has fallen below this
threshold.
3-201
P437
3 Operation
Fuse failure monitoring for 3-phase faults in the measuring circuit is only active
within a 50 ms time window after a positive sequence undervoltage condition is
detected.
If the above conditions are satisfied, a memory is set. The settable operate delay
timer should remain at 0 s to ensure that fuse failure monitoring is able to
prevent false pick up of distance protection.
The memory is reset when the positive-sequence voltage exceeds the fixed
threshold of 0.5Vnom and the negative-sequence voltage falls below an internal
threshold.
If the buffer memory has been set the P437 decides that the secondary circuit of
the voltage transformer is faulty if the following conditions are met:
At least one of the phase currents exceeds the I> threshold, or:
The set threshold of the negative-sequence voltage has been exceeded and
three cycles previously at least one phase-to-ground voltage had been
above 50% Vnom/3.
In this case distance protection is blocked, and the device switches to backup
overcurrent time protection provided that the appropriate setting has been
selected.
3-202
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
IA>(Ibl) trigg.
>1 &
>1
303 598
303 599
>1
DIST:
IC>(Ibl) trigg.
303 600
&
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
MCMON:
FF, V triggered
[ 035 081 ]
DIST:
IB>(Ibl) trigg.
30ms
1 1
SFMON:
FF, V triggered
[ 098 021 ]
>1
MAIN:
CB open >=1p
[ 031 039 ]
>2
&
MCMON:
Blocking FF, V EXT
[ 002 182 ]
>1
IC(t) < 0.9IC(t-3T)
>1
&
&
IB
IC
=1
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
Ipos(t) > 0.9Ipos(t-3T)
Ipos
& >1
&
&
Ineg
1
50 ms
VA-G
&
VB-G
Vneg
VC-G
&
VA-G(t-3T)>0.5 Vnom/3 >1
VB-G(t-3T)>0.5 Vnom/3
VC-G(t-3T)>0.5 Vnom/3
Vpos
|Vpos| > 0.5 Vnom
45Z8025A
3-203
P437
3.23.4.1
3 Operation
At least one CB pole is open i.e. MA IN: CB open >=1 p is set to Yes.
This blocking prevents false operation based on discharge-transients of line
reactors, or if the line is energized from the remote end while the fault is
still present. The device at the open CB end then may determine a fuse
failure condition due to a sudden asymmetric change of voltage with no
current. This operation of fuse failure monitoring is basically non-critical (as
the local CB is still open), but jeopardizes faster fault clearance at the
remote end, aided by protection signaling, because PSIG/Echo logic is also
blocked, if MCMON determines a voltage measuring circuit failure.
3-204
P437
3 Operation
3.23.5
The voltage difference between the line side and the busbar must exceed
0.1Vnom.
MCMON:
FF,Vref enabled USER
[ 014 013 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
Vref
|Vref|-|VMeas|
ASC:
Vmeas
0.1 Vnom
305 007
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
MCMON:
Oper. delay FF, Vref
[ 014 012 ]
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
MCMON:
FF, Vref triggered
[ 038 100 ]
036 051
MAIN:
CB closed 3p
[ 031 042 ]
SFMON:
FF, Vref triggered
[ 098 022 ]
47Z0178B
3-205
P437
3.24
3 Operation
3-206
P437
3 Operation
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
BUOC:
General enable USER
[ 014 011 ]
SFMON:
BUOC not active
[ 098 002 ]
0
1
0: No
BUOC:
Enabled
1: Yes
[ 040 093 ]
DIST:
Enabled
[ 036 104 ]
BUOC:
Operating mode
[ 014 000 ]
SFMON:
BUOC active w/o ARC
[ 098 003 ]
1
2
SFMON:
BUOC active with ARC
[ 098 004 ]
1: Without ARC
2: With ARC, 3p HSR
BUOC:
Active
[ 037 021 ]
MAIN:
Blocking 1p trip EXT
[ 041 078 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
BUOC:
tI> PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
BUOC:
Trip A
MAIN:
Rush restr. C trig.
304 754
[ 041 029 ]
BUOC:
Trip B
304 755
BUOC:
Trip C
BUOC:
I> PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Protection active
304 756
BUOC:
IA> triggered
306 001
304 750
IA
BUOC:
IB> triggered
IB
304 751
IC
BUOC:
IC> triggered
304 752
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
BUOC:
tIN> PSx
[ * ]
BUOC:
IN> PSx
[ * ]
BUOC:
Trip signal
[ 036 014 ]
80ms
0
BUOC:
Starting
BUOC:
Block. Starting
[ 036 013 ]
BUOC:
SN
450 206
BUOC:
Bl.Zero-sequ.start.
304 757
BUOC:
Zero-sequ. starting
[ 010 185 ]
450 207
Parameter
BUOC:
I> PSx
BUOC:
tI> PSx
BUOC:
IN> PSx
BUOC:
tIN> PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
011
010
010
010
011
010
010
011
011
010
010
011
011
1
2
3
4
058
078
098
018
059
079
099
019
064
084
004
024
065
085
005
025
45Z8024B
3-207
P437
3.25
3 Operation
3-208
P437
3 Operation
SOTF:
Active
[ 006 146 ]
SOTF:
Evaluation IN PSx
[*]
SOTF:
tIN> PSx
[*]
0
SOTF:
tIN> elapsed
[ 001 188 ]
2
1: Calculated
2: Measured
SOTF:
IN> (meas.) PSx
[*]
SOTF:
Starting IN>
[ 001 187 ]
&
IN(meas.)
SOTF:
tI> PSx
SOTF:
IN> (calc.) PSx
[*]
[*]
IN(calc.)
SOTF:
tI> elapsed
[ 006 129 ]
SOTF:
I> PSx
[*]
SOTF:
Starting I>
[ 006 128 ]
&
IA
IB
IC
Parameter
SOTF:
Evaluation IN PSx
SOTF:
IN> (meas.) PSx
SOTF:
IN> (calc.) PSx
SOTF:
I> PSx
SOTF:
tIN> PSx
SOTF:
tI> PSx
set 1
set 2
001 191
001 192
001 189
001 195
001 190
001 198
001 177
001 178
set 3
set 4
001 193
001 194
001 196
001 197
001 199
001 202
006
006
006
006
006
006
006
006
130
131
132
133
001 179
001 180
134
135
136
137
47Z1306A
Fig. 3-153: Switch on to fault protection function, overcurrent stage in the residual current system.
3-209
P437
3 Operation
SOTF:
General enable USER
[*]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
SOTF:
Enable PSx
Parameter
SOTF:
Enable PSx
SOTF:
Man. close timer PSx
SOTF:
Operating mode PSx
SOTF:
Activation mode PSx
set
set
set
set
001
001
001
001
011
001
001
001
011
001
001
001
006
006
006
006
1
2
3
4
203
204
205
206
Parameter
SOTF:
Tripping time PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
010
1
2
3
4
060
181
182
183
061
184
185
186
**
218
219
221
222
142
143
144
145
PSU:
PS y active
1
2
3
4
036
036
036
036
090
091
092
093
[*]
SOTF:
Enabled
[ 040 069 ]
&
1
0: No
PSU:
PS y active
[**]
1: Yes
SOTF:
tI> elapsed
[ 006 129 ]
SOTF:
Trip signal
[ 036 064 ]
SOTF:
tIN> elapsed
[ 001 188 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
&
&
SOTF:
Par. ARC running EXT
[ 039 063 ]
SOTF:
Man. close timer PSx
[*]
MAIN:
Protection active
&
SOTF:
Z1 extended
[ 035 076 ]
306 001
SOTF:
Line dead trig. en.
&
310 006
MAIN:
Manual close EXT
[ 036 047 ]
SOTF:
Active
[ 006 146 ]
SOTF:
tManual-close runn.
[ 036 063 ]
&
SOTF:
Trigger EXT
[ 002 127 ]
SOTF:
ARC blocked
ARC:
Close command
305 650
303 021
SOTF:
Activation mode PSx
[*]
SOTF:
Operating mode PSx
[*]
1
2
&
1: Trigger
SOTF:
Line dead
[ 006 147 ]
SOTF:
Tripping time PSx
[*]
&
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
SOTF:
Trip time elapsed
460 528
45Z8040A
3.25.1
3-210
P437
3 Operation
Moreover, the decision Line dead is set only if also all 3 phase currents are
below an undercurrent threshold. This threshold is fixed to 0.05Inom.
A settable timer SO TF : Oper ate de lay PSx makes the SOTF function active (in
permanent modes) or triggered (in trigger modes) only after the conditions for
Line dead are present for a sufficiently long time. This time delay should be set
longer than the slowest delayed auto-reclose dead time, but shorter than the
time in which the system operator might re-energize a circuit once it had
opened/tripped. 110 seconds is the default setting.
SOTF:
With V< enable PSx
[*]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
SOTF:
Operate delay PSx
[*]
SOTF:
Release delay PSx
[*]
t
&
VA-G
SOTF:
Line dead trig. en.
310 006
&
&
VB-G
VC-G
SOTF:
Line dead
[ 006 147 ]
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
I < 0.05 Inom
IA
IB
IC
&
Parameter
SOTF:
With V< enable PSx
SOTF:
Operate delay PSx
SOTF:
Release delay PSx
set
set
set
set
006
006
006
006
006
006
006
006
002
002
002
002
1
2
3
4
005
006
007
008
138
139
140
141
128
129
133
134
47Z1304B
Fig. 3-155: Decision Line dead in the Switch on to fault protection function.
3-211
P437
3.26
3 Operation
3.26.1
3.26.2
3-212
It must be enabled.
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
General enable USER
[ 015 004 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSIG:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
1
PSIG:
Enabled
[ 015 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
037 025
Address
037 026
PSIG:
Ext./user enabled
[ 037 023 ]
PSIG:
Enable EXT
[ 037 025 ]
PSIG:
Enable USER
[ 003 132 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
PSIG:
Disable EXT
[ 037 026 ]
PSIG:
Disable USER
[ 003 131 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
PSIG:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 049 ]
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty
[ 036 060 ]
PSIG:
Not ready
[ 037 028 ]
Parameter
PSIG:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
015
015
015
015
1
2
3
4
014
015
016
017
45Z5032C
With extended reach: after the protective signaling tripping time has
elapsed.
3-213
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
2: PUTT
8: Direction comparison
ARC:
Zone extension RC
303 002
SOTF:
Z1 extended
[ 035 076 ]
PSIG:
Tripping time PSx
[ *
]
DIST:
Zone extension EXT
[ 036 046 ]
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed
305 164
&
PSIG:
Trip time elapsed
305 150
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
Parameter
PSIG:
Tripping time PSx
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
011
003
063
023
000
000
060
020
47Z8042A
3.26.3
3-214
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
3ended line prot PSx
[ * ]
0
1
Parameter
PSIG:
3ended line prot PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
006 039
006 046
006 047
006 048
0: No
1: Yes
&
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
Receive (B) EXT
[ 006 037 ]
&
PSIG:
Chan. B1 receive EXT
[ 008 241 ]
&
&
PSIG:
Chan. B3 receive EXT
[ 008 243 ]
&
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
&
&
PSIG:
Chan. A3 receive EXT
[ 038 093 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
&
&
PSIG:
Chan. A2 receive EXT
[ 038 092 ]
PSIG:
Chan. B2 receive EXT
[ 008 242 ]
&
&
PSIG:
Chan. A1 receive EXT
[ 038 091 ]
PSIG:
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
&
47Z2004B
3.26.4
3-215
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ *
]
6: DC loop operat. mode
&
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
[ *
]
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty
[ 036 060 ]
SFMON:
Telecom. faulty/PSIG
[ 098 006 ]
Set value+600ms
PSIG:
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
&
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty int.
305 151
PSIG:
Telec.faulty (A) EXT
[ 004 064 ]
&
&
&
PSIG:
Telec.faulty (B) EXT
[ 008 094 ]
PSIG:
Blk.f.telcom.flt PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1: Ch. (A)OR(B) faulty
2: Ch. (A)AND(B) faulty
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
PSIG:
Blk.f.telcom.flt PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
012
012
012
012
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
002
001
061
021
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty (A)
[ 012 244 ]
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty (B)
[ 012 245 ]
246
247
248
249
47Z8047A
3.26.5
Frequency Monitoring
Failure of frequency transmission may be signaled to the P437 via an
appropriately configured binary signal input (PSIG: F req. m on. trig. EX T). If
frequency monitoring is enabled, the P437 once a time-delay of approximately
20 ms has elapsed will generate a receive signal for a duration of 150 ms.
PSIG:
Frequency monit. PSx
[
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
20ms
PSIG:
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
1
150ms
305 152
PSIG:
Freq. mon. trig. EXT
[ 038 080 ]
Parameter
PSIG:
Frequency monit. PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
025
011
071
031
45Z6348A
3.26.6
Transient Blocking
In the event of a direction change, protective signaling will be blocked for the
time set at PSI G: tBlock PSx.
3-216
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
tBlock PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
S1 1
R1
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
S1 1
1
t
PSIG:
tBlock PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Transient blocking
305 154
R1
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
Parameter
PSIG:
tBlock PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
024
010
070
030
49Z6444A
3.26.7
Zone extension (setting: Zone extension, see Section 3.26.7.5, (p. 3-222))
Blocking scheme (setting: Blocking scheme, see Section 3.26.7.7, (p. 3228))
3-217
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
0: Without
1: Dir.trans.trip.under
2: PUTT
3: Zone extension
4: Release scheme
5: Blocking scheme
7: Reverse interlocking
8: Direction comparison
8
0: Without
1: Dir.trans.trip.under
2: PUTT
3: Zone extension
4: Release scheme
5: Blocking scheme
6: DC loop operat. mode
7: Reverse interlocking
8: Direction comparison
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
070
020
D5Z5061A
3.26.7.1
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
4: Release scheme
5: Blocking scheme
GSCSG:
Operating mode
[ 023 079 ]
1: Signal comp. release
& 1
&
&
SFMON:
Op.mode PSIG inval.
[ 098 019 ]
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
2: Common channel
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
47Z8037A
3-218
P437
3 Operation
3.26.7.2
3.26.7.3
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
1: Dir.trans.trip.under
&
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
[ * ]
&
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1
303 584
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1, A
303 655
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1, B
303 656
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1, C
PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 send
[ 038 081 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 send
[ 038 082 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 send
[ 038 083 ]
303 657
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
026
012
072
032
002
001
061
021
47Z8088B
Fig. 3-164: Protective signaling transmission with the Dir.trans.trip.under operating mode.
3-219
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
1: Dir.trans.trip.under
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
1
3
1: 1 channel
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
Parameter
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG:
Transient blocking305 154
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1305 169
PSIG:
Ch. 1 transient bl. 305 172
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2305 170
PSIG:
Ch. 2 transient bl. 305 173
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3305 171
PSIG:
Ch. 3 transient bl. 305 174
PSIG:
Receive (signal)
[ 037 029 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
PSIG:
Trip channel 1
1: 1-pole
402 575
PSIG:
Trip channel 2
402 576
PSIG:
Trip channel 3
402 577
PSIG:
Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole leading phase
2: 1-pole trailing phas
3: 3-pole
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
2: A - C - B
1: A - B - C
47Z0189C
3.26.7.4
3-220
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
2: PUTT
&
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
[ * ]
1
3
&
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1
303 584
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1, A
303 655
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1, B
303 656
&
DIST:
Trip zone 1, C
PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 send
[ 038 081 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 send
[ 038 082 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 send
[ 038 083 ]
303 657
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
026
012
072
032
002
001
061
021
47Z8090A
Fig. 3-166: Protective signaling transmission with operating mode PUTT (permissive underreaching transfer
tripping).
3-221
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
2: PUTT
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
Parameter
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed
305 164
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG:
Transient blocking
305 154
DIST:
Starting A
303 529
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch.
1
305 169
PSIG:
Ch. 1 transient305
bl.172
DIST:
Starting B
303 530
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2305 170
PSIG:
Ch. 2 transient bl. 305 173
DIST:
Starting C
303 531
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3305 171
PSIG:
Ch. 3 transient bl. 305 174
PSIG:
Receive (signal)
[ 037 029 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
PSIG:
Trip channel 1
1: 1-pole
402 575
PSIG:
Trip channel 2
402 576
PSIG:
Trip channel 3
402 577
PSIG:
Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole leading phase
2: 1-pole trailing phas
3: 3-pole
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
2: A - C - B
1: A - B - C
47Z0191C
Fig. 3-167: Protective signaling trip with operating mode PUTT (permissive underreaching transfer tripping).
3.26.7.5
3-222
P437
3 Operation
Direct.-dependent
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in
the phase(s) in which there is a receive signal and distance protection has
decided in favor of forward direction. The D IST: Trip zon e 1 PG PSx and
DIST: Trip zo ne 1 PP PSx settings are taken into account by the P437. If
transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal will be ignored.
Dist.-dependent
If the fault is located within the extended zone, then the protection device
of the remote station also decides in favor of a trip after the protective
signaling tripping time has elapsed. If transient blocking is operating, then
the receive signal will be ignored.
Dashed line: measuring range extended by zone extension factor kze HSR
Zone 1, prot.dev. a
Zone 1, prot.dev. b
D5Z5053A
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
3: Zone extension
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
1
3
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
DIST:
Trip zone 1
303 584
DIST:
Trip zone 1, A
303 655
DIST:
Trip zone 1, B
303 656
DIST:
Trip zone 1, C
303 657
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
026
012
072
032
002
001
061
021
47Z8092A
Fig. 3-169: Protective signaling transmission with operating mode Zone extension.
3-223
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
PSIG:
Trip channel 1
1: 1-pole
402 575
PSIG:
Trip channel 2
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
[ * ]
402 576
PSIG:
Trip channel 3
402 577
ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR
[ 038 007 ]
1: Direct.-dependent
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole leading phase
2: Dist.-dependent
PSIG:
Trip enable
305 157
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 1
305 166
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 2
305 167
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 3
305 168
PSIG:
Receive (signal)
[ 038 029 ]
* Parameter
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
3
1
3: 3 channels
1: 1 channel
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
015 107
015 108
015 113
015 114
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z0293D
Fig. 3-170: Protective signaling trip and trip enable in operating mode Zone extension.
3.26.7.6
3-224
P437
3 Operation
'Direct.-dependent'
The measuring range of zone 1 of distance protection is not extended.
'Dist.-dependent'
In the idle state, the measuring range of zone 1 in both protection devices
is extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR (see Fig. 3-177, (p. 3232)). The distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is blocked in both
protection devices.
Dashed line: measuring range extended by zone extension factor kze HSR.
Nfw, b
Zone 1, prot.dev. a
Nfw, b
Zone 1, prot.dev. b
D5Z5054A
The setting at PSIG: Ope r. mode se nd P Sx defines when the P437 sends a
signal to the remote station.
Direct.-dependent
If the distance protection function detects a fault in the forward direction,
the P437 sends a signal to the remote station.
Dist.-dependent
If the distance protection function detects a fault within extended zone 1,
the P437 sends a signal to the remote station.
Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on the setting.
The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the
setting at PSIG: Oper. mode tri p PSx in the remote station.
3-225
P437
3 Operation
Direct.-dependent
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in
the phase(s) in which there is a receive signal and distance protection has
decided in favor of forward direction.
Detected fault type phase phase with ground will cause a 3-pole trip.
Detected fault type phase phase without ground will cause a 1-pole or
3-pole trip, depending on the setting at DIST: Trip zone 1 PP PSx.
Detected fault type 1p phase ground will cause a 1-pole or 3-pole trip,
depending on the setting at DI ST: Trip zone 1 PG PSx.
Dist.-dependent
If the fault is located within the extended zone 1, then the protection device
of the remote station also decides in favor of a trip after the protective
signaling tripping time has elapsed and a receive signal is present. The
receive signal is ignored during transient blocking.
If for a 2pG fault or for an inter-system fault on double circuit lines there
are forward and backward (reverse) decisions present at the same time,
then the send signal is based on the selective Z1 decision only (not on
Z1e). This, however, is not the case with the setting PSIG: 3ended line
p rot PSx = Yes, because this functionality could result in an underfunctioning of the Protective Signaling in case of 3-ended line applications
(different lengths of the line parts, different feed-in power).
3-226
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Send internal signal
304 002
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
4: Release scheme
&
PSIG:
Oper. mode send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
1: Direct.-dependent
1: 1 channel
2: Dist.-dependent
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
[ * ]
&
PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 send
[ 038 081 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 send
[ 038 082 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 send
[ 038 083 ]
& 1
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
&
1
& 1
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, A
[ 038 010 ]
&
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1ze, A
& 1
303 652
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, B
[ 038 012 ]
&
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1ze, B
& 1
303 653
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, C
[ 038 014 ]
&
DIST:
Dist. decis. Z1ze, C
303 654
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
Oper. mode send PSx
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
015
015
015
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
036
037
040
041
026
012
072
032
002
001
061
021
47Z8094A
Fig. 3-172: Protective signaling transmission with operating mode Signal comparison release scheme.
3-227
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
PSIG:
Trip channel 1
1: 1-pole
402 575
PSIG:
Trip channel 2
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
[ * ]
402 576
PSIG:
Trip channel 3
402 577
ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR
[ 038 007 ]
1: Direct.-dependent
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole leading phase
2: Dist.-dependent
PSIG:
Trip enable
305 157
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 1
305 166
303 658
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, B
[ 038 012 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2 305 170
PSIG:
Ch. 2 transient bl. 305 173
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, B 303 659
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, C
[ 038 014 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3 305 171
PSIG:
Ch. 3 transient bl. 305 174
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, C 303 660
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 2
305 167
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 3
305 168
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
PSIG:
Receive (signal)
[ 038 029 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
3
1
3: 3 channels
1: 1 channel
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
015 107
015 108
015 113
015 114
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z0295C
Fig. 3-173: Protective signaling trip and trip enable in operating mode 'Signal comparison release scheme'.
3.26.7.7
3-228
P437
3 Operation
Direct.-dependent
The measuring range of zone 1 of distance protection is not extended.
Dist.-dependent
In the idle state, the measuring range of zone 1 in both protection devices
is extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR (see Fig. 3-177, (p. 3232)). The distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is enabled in both
protection devices.
Dashed line: measuring range extended by zone extension factor kze HSR.
Nbw, a
Zone 1, prot.dev. a
Nbw, b
Zone 1, prot.dev. b
D5Z5055A
The setting at PSI G: Ope r. mode s en d P Sx defines when the P437 sends a
signal to the remote station.
Direct.-dependent
If distance protection detects a fault in the backward (reverse) direction
or for a directional change for the transient blocking time (setting at
PSI G: t Block PSx), a signal is sent to the remote station.
Dist.-dependent
If the distance protection function detects a fault within zone 6 and if the
measured impedance lies in zone 6 (signal DI ST: I mpedance in zone
6), then the P437 sends a signal to the remote station. A signal is also sent
to the remote station during transient blocking.
Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on the setting.
The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the
setting at PSI G: Oper. mode trip P Sx in the remote station.
Direct.-dependent
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in
the phase(s) in which there is no receive signal and distance protection has
decided in favor of forward direction. If transient blocking is operating, then
the receive signal will be ignored.
Dist.-dependent
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in
the phase(s) in which there is no receive signal and distance protection
detects a fault within extended zone 1. If transient blocking is operating,
then the receive signal will be ignored.
3-229
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Send internal signal
304 002
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
5: Blocking scheme
PSIG:
Oper. mode send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
1
3
2
1: Direct.-dependent
1: 1 channel
2: Dist.-dependent
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
PSIG:
Transient blocking
PSIG:
Channel 1 send
[ 038 081 ]
305 154
PSIG:
Channel 2 send
[ 038 082 ]
DIST:
Impedance in zone 6
[ 037 200 ]
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, A
[ 038 011 ]
PSIG:
Ch. 1 transient bl.
PSIG:
Channel 3 send
[ 038 083 ]
305 172
DIST:
Impedance zone 6, A
303 661
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, B
[ 038 013 ]
PSIG:
Ch. 2 transient bl.
305 173
DIST:
Impedance zone 6, B
303 662
DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, C
[ 038 015 ]
PSIG:
Ch. 3 transient bl.
305 174
DIST:
Impedance zone 6, C
303 663
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
Oper. mode send PSx
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
015
015
015
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
000
000
060
020
036
037
040
041
026
012
072
032
002
001
061
021
47Z8096A
Fig. 3-175: Protective signaling transmission with operating mode Signal comparison blocking scheme.
3-230
P437
3 Operation
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
PSIG:
Trip channel 1
1: 1-pole
402 575
PSIG:
Trip channel 2
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
[ * ]
402 576
PSIG:
Trip channel 3
402 577
ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR
[ 038 007 ]
1: Direct.-dependent
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
2: Dist.-dependent
[ * ]
1: 1-pole leading phase
2: 1-pole trailing phas
3: 3-pole
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A - B - C
2: A - C - B
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
5: Blocking scheme
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed305 164
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg. 305 152
PSIG:
Transient blocking 305 154
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze
303 595
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, A
[ 038 010 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1 305 169
PSIG:
Ch. 1 transient bl. 305 172
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, A 303 658
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, B
[ 038 012 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2 305 170
PSIG:
Ch. 2 transient bl. 305 173
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, B 303 659
DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, C
[ 038 014 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3 305 171
PSIG:
Ch. 3 transient bl. 305 174
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, C 303 660
PSIG:
Trip enable
305 157
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 1
305 166
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 2
305 167
PSIG:
Trip enable, ch. 3
305 168
PSIG:
Receive (signal)
[ 038 029 ]
* Parameter
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
3
1
3: 3 channels
1: 1 channel
* Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
015 107
015 108
015 113
015 114
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z0297C
Fig. 3-176: Protective signaling trip and trip enable in operating mode Signal comparison blocking scheme.
3-231
P437
3 Operation
3.26.8
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
PSIG:
Transient blocking
305 152
305 154
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1
PSIG:
Ch. 1 transient bl.
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2
PSIG:
Ch. 2 transient bl.
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3
PSIG:
Ch. 3 transient bl.
305 169
305 172
305 170
305 173
PSIG:
Z1 extended
[ 035 075 ]
305 171
305 174
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
3: Zone extension
4: Release scheme
5: Blocking scheme
PSIG:
Oper. mode send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
[ * ]
1: Direct.-dependent
1: Direct.-dependent
2: Dist.-dependent
2: Dist.-dependent
Parameter
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
PSIG:
Oper. mode send PSx
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 000
024 000
024 060
025 020
015 036
015 037
015 040
015 041
015 107
015 108
015 113
015 114
47Z0298A
3.26.9
Weak-Infeed Logic
The P437 features a weak-infeed logic function. Weak-infeed logic can either
be triggered by a binary signal input configured to PSIG: We ak inf. trig g. EXT
or by binary signal inputs configured to either P SIG: Receive (A) EXT or
PSI G: Receiv e (B) EXT.
The weak-infeed logic checks the phase-to-ground voltages to determine
whether they fall below the P SI G: V < we ak in fe e d PSx set threshold. If the
voltage in one phase falls below the set threshold, then a timer stage is started.
If PSIG: St art cond . tV < P Sx is set to V< & WI start, then the timer stage is
only started if both the undervoltage condition and the weak-infeed starting are
present. Once the set time has elapsed provided that the appropriate setting
has been selected a protective signaling trip is issued. The DIST: Trip zone 1
PG PSx setting is taken into account.
If the device has not issued its own protective starting the receive signal
(PS IG: R eceiv e ( A) EXT or PSIG: Re ceive ( B) EXT) is reset after the set
time delay (PSI G: tV < PSx + 100 ms). This will always ensure that weak-infeed
logic trips independently of the reset time of the send signal.
3-232
P437
3 Operation
The weak-infeed logic function is blocked by a 3-pole open circuit breaker, when
this status is either signaled by the CB auxiliary contacts or when the newly
implemented monitoring function detects this state from a 3p undervoltage
condition.
The phase selective starting signals are stored in RS flip-flops, which are only
reset after the received signal has ended. This excludes an over reaction during a
reset of its own starting when the received signal from the other end is still
present.
Detection
of
dead line by
undervoltage
criterion (only with
line side
VT connection)
V < 0.35Vnom/3
VA-G
5s
&
VB-G
PSIG:
Weak inf. blocked
310 015
VC-G
MAIN:
CB open 3p
[ 031 040 ]
Detection
of
dead line by
CB status contact
47Z1014C
&
PSIG:
Weak inf. ready
310 014
PSIG:
Weak inf. blocked
310 015
GSCSG:
Bl. PSIG weak infeed
304 003
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
47Z1143B
3-233
P437
3 Operation
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
1
3
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Weak inf. trigg. EXT
[ 043 062 ]
&
[ 043 062 ] is
configured
to a
binary input
&
1
1
&
PSIG:
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG:
Ch. 1 receive weak inf.
310 011
&
1
1
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
305 152
&
PSIG:
Channel 1 receive
[ 008 244 ]
310 012
&
PSIG:
Ch. 2 receive weak inf.
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1
305 169
&
PSIG:
Ch. 3 receive weak inf.
310 013
PSIG:
Channel 2 receive
[ 008 245 ]
&
1
1
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2
305 170
&
PSIG:
Channel 3 receive
[ 008 246 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3
305 171
Parameter
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
47Z1011C
3-234
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
4: 3-pole (only for 1p)
&
ARC:
3p trip for 1p fault
310 019
MAIN:
Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
S 1 1
PSIG:
Ch. 1 receive weak inf.
&
50ms
PSIG:
Inhibit weak inf. A
PSIG:
Inhibit weak inf. B
PSIG:
Inhibit weak inf. C
310 016
R 1
310 011
MAIN:
CB closed A
[ 031 035 ]
S 1 1
MAIN:
Starting B
[ 036 002 ]
&
0
PSIG:
Ch. 2 receive weak inf.
R 1
310 017
50ms
310 012
MAIN:
CB closed B
[ 031 036 ]
1
MAIN:
Starting C
[ 036 003 ]
S 1 1
&
0
PSIG:
Ch. 3 receive weak inf.
R 1
310 018
50ms
310 013
MAIN:
CB closed C
[ 031 037 ]
*
Parameter
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 051
024 025
024 085
025 045
47Z1203B
If the ARC operating mode (A RC: HSR ope r . mode PSx) is set to 3-pole (only
for 1p) and ARC issues a 3-pole trip for this reason, then the weak infeed logic is
blocked.
This refinement was necessary based on the following application:
Assuming a weak infeed condition and the P437 receives a signal from the
remote end device because of a ground fault short-circuit, it then issues a singlepole PSIG trip as soon as weak infeed timer tV< has elapsed. According to the
operating mode being set to 3-pole (only for 1p) the ARC now converts this
single-pole trip into a 3-pole trip. As soon as the CBs are open on both sides, the
undervoltage condition becomes true for the remaining 2 phases. Consequently
the week-infeed trip condition becomes true for the 2 healthy phases, and PSIG
raised a 3-pole trip. This in turn leads to aborting the HSR.
In this example it is assumed that blocking of the weak infeed logic by CB auxiliary
contacts is not generally fast enough to prevent the 3-pole tripping.
3-235
P437
PSIG:
Weak inf. ready
3 Operation
PSIG:
V< weak infeed PSx
[ * ]
310 014
PSIG:
V< triggered
VA-G
310 020
VB-G
VC-G
PSIG:
tV< PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Start cond. tV< PSx
[
&
1
2
&
1: V<
PSIG:
Trip signal V< PSx
[ * ]
&
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSIG:
Trip V<, A
[ 006 152 ]
&
&
&
&
PSIG:
Trip V<, B
[ 006 153 ]
&
&
PSIG:
Trip V<, C
[ 006 154 ]
&
PSIG:
Trip V<
PSIG:
Ch. 1 receive weak inf.
310 011
PSIG:
Inhibit weak inf. A
310 016
PSIG:
Ch. 2 receive weak inf.
310 012
PSIG:
Inhibit weak inf. B
310 017
PSIG:
Ch. 3 receive weak inf.
310 013
PSIG:
Inhibit weak inf. C
310 018
305 158
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole
&
3p-trip in case
of 2-/3-pole faults
or 3p-transfer trip,
with
setting
no 1p-trip
PSIG:
Weak infeed start.
[ 043 064 ]
Parameter
PSIG:
V< weak infeed PSx
PSIG:
Start cond. tV< PSx
PSIG:
tV< PSx
PSIG:
Trip signal V< PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PG PSx
set 1
015 020
006 148
015 019
015 021
011 050
set 2
024 006
006 149
024 005
024 007
011 051
set 3
024 066
006 150
024 065
024 067
011 052
set 4
025 026
006 151
025 025
025 027
011 053
47Z8014A
3.26.10
Echo Function
If operation with the echo function is desired, then the user may specify whether
the receive signal alone is to be employed in activating the echo pulse or
whether the receive signal and the triggering signal of the weak-infeed logic are
to be used. The conditions for activation of the echo pulse must persist for a
period in excess of the set time-delay, and distance protection starting must be
3-236
P437
3 Operation
absent for the echo pulse to be activated. This time-delay is ineffective with an
open circuit breaker (i.e. when the signal MA IN: CB ope n 3 p is present).
The echo pulse is then transmitted to the remote station for the set pulse
duration. Thereafter, the transmission of the receive signal is blocked for the set
pulse duration + 1 s. This prevents a permanent signal from being transmitted.
The echo function may be disabled.
If the P437 is operating with ground fault protective signaling and if directional
measurement of ground fault protection has been enabled, the echo signal will
be blocked if protective signaling (distance schemes) and ground fault protective
signaling are sharing a common transmission channel.
3-237
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
2: Common channel
GFSC:
Direct.determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
PSIG:
Op. delay echo PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
Echo on receive PSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
0: Without
1: On receive
2: On receive & V<
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
1
3
PSIG:
Pulse dur. echo PSx
[ * ]
1: 1 channel
PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
V< triggered
305 162
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG:
Receive (B) EXT
[ 006 037 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
t+1s
PSIG:
Channel 1 send
[ 038 081 ]
1
0
305 152
PSIG:
A1 receive
EXT
[Chan.
038 091
]
t+1s
PSIG:
Channel 2 send
[ 038 082 ]
PSIG:
Chan. B1 receive EXT
[ 008 241 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1
t+1s
305 169
PSIG:
Channel 3 send
[ 038 083 ]
PSIG:
Chan. A2 receive EXT
[ 038 092 ]
PSIG:
Chan. B2 receive EXT
[ 008 242 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2
t+1s
305 170
PSIG:
Chan. A3 receive EXT
[ 038 093 ]
PSIG:
Chan. B3 receive EXT
[ 008 243 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3
305 171
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
MAIN:
CB open 3p
[ 031 040 ]
*
Parameter
PSIG:
Echo on receive PSx
PSIG:
Op. delay echo PSx
PSIG:
Pulse dur. echo PSx
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
003
002
062
022
022
008
068
028
023
009
069
029
026
012
072
032
47Z8097A
3.26.11
3-238
P437
3 Operation
the reset time-delay of the send signal. The remote station receives this signal if
the transmission link is in order.
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
&
1
3
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
1: 1 channel
3: 3 channels
PSIG:
Test telecom. EXT
[ 036 038 ]
PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
1
PSIG:
Test telecom. USER
[ 015 009 ]
1
500ms
PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
Channel 1 send
[ 038 081 ]
PSIG:
Channel 2 send
[ 038 082 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
PSIG:
Test telecom. 1 EXT
[ 038 085 ]
PSIG:
Channel 3 send
&
1
500ms
[ 038 083 ]
PSIG:
Test telecom. chann.
PSIG:
Test telecom. 1 USER
[ 015 027 ]
[ 034 016 ]
PSIG:
Test telecom. ch. 1
[ 034 026 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
PSIG:
Test telecom. 2 EXT
[ 038 086 ]
1
500ms
1
500ms
PSIG:
Test telecom. 2 USER
[ 015 028 ]
PSIG:
Test telecom. ch. 2
&
[ 034 027 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
PSIG:
Test telecom. 3 EXT
[ 038 087 ]
PSIG:
Test telecom. 3 USER
[ 015 029 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
PSIG:
Test telecom. ch. 3
&
[ 034 028 ]
Parameter
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
026
012
072
032
002
001
061
021
47Z80ABA
3-239
P437
3.27
3 Operation
3.27.1
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: HSR/TDR permitted
Parameter
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
set
set
set
set
015
015
015
015
1
2
3
4
100
101
102
103
D5Z5095A
3-240
P437
3 Operation
3.27.2
3-241
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
General enable USER
[ 015 060 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Enabled
[ 015 064 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
037 010
Address
037 011
ARC:
Ext./user enabled
[ 037 013 ]
ARC:
Enable EXT
[ 037 010 ]
ARC:
Enable USER
[ 003 134 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Disable EXT
[ 037 011 ]
ARC:
Disable USER
[ 003 133 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
Parameter
ARC:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
015
015
015
015
1
2
3
4
046
047
048
049
45Z5039A
3-242
The circuit breaker must be capable of opening and closing again (CB
opening and closing mechanism ready).
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
CB clos.pos.sig. PSx
[
]
0
1
0: Without
ARC:
CB closed
1: With
303 004
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
ARC:
CB drive ready EXT
[ 004 066 ]
ARC:
Blocked
[ 004 069 ]
ARC:
Not ready
[ 037 008 ]
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
Parameter
ARC:
CB clos.pos.sig. PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
050
024
084
044
D5Z5066A
3.27.3
ARC Blocked
ARC will be blocked if one of the following conditions applies:
A ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling trip occurs, but no autoreclosing is to occur.
The binary signal input configured to ARC : Block ing EXT is triggered.
After all blocking conditions have dropped out, the relevant blocking time is
started, and when this time has elapsed, the block is canceled.
3-243
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Blocked
[ 004 069 ]
ARC:
Enabled
[ 015 064 ]
SOTF:
ARC blocked
305 650
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
ARC:
Block. time int. PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal A
[ 034 047 ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal B
[ 034 048 ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal C
[ 034 049 ]
ARC:
Block. time running
[ 037 004 ]
SFMON:
BUOC active w/o ARC
[ 098 003]
CBF:
Trip signal
[ 040 026 ]
GFSC:
Trip
[ 039signal
092 ]
GSCSG:
Blocking ARC
ARC:
Block. time ext. PSx
[ * ]
304 008
ARC:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 050 ]
Parameter
ARC:
Block. time int. PSx
ARC:
Block. time ext. PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 043
024 021
024 081
025 041
015 058
024 032
024 092
025 052
47Z11ADA
3.27.4
3-244
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
PSIG:
Not ready
[ 037 028 ]
SFMON:
BUOC active with ARC
[ 098 004 ]
ARC:
Trip time HSR PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
TDR
ARC:
Trip time HSR PSx
[ * ]
303 006
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
ARC:
Trip time elapsed
303 003
ARC:
Trip time TDR PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
ARC:
Trip time HSR PSx
ARC:
Trip time TDR PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
025
025
015
024
025
025
1
2
3
4
072
040
000
060
073
041
001
061
D5Z5068A
3.27.5
The general starting state formed internally or the general starting signal of
a parallel protection device, provided that a binary signal input has been
configured accordingly.
A test HSR.
The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time has elapsed.
3.27.6
3-245
P437
3 Operation
After starting drops out without a subsequent trip, ARC is immediately ready
again. Operative time 1 has priority over operative time 2. Selection of the HSR
operating mode determines which dead time is started. The following settings
are possible:
3.27.6.1
1-pole
1-/3-pole
3-pole
With the operating mode 3-pole (only for 1p) only a three-pole HSR will result
from single-pole ground faults.
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
1:
2:
3:
4:
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole
2: 1-/3-pole
3: 3-pole
1-pole
1-/3-pole
3-pole
3-pole (only for 1p)
Parameter
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
051
025
085
045
45Z8094
3.27.6.1.1
3-246
P437
3 Operation
ARC: 3p-HSR(1p)
enab. EXT
Trip-dependent HSR:
single-pole HSR with
single-pole trip decision,
three-pole HSR with
three-pole trip decision
0 or 1
0 or 1
Logic input signals may be fed from physical binary signal inputs, signal
assignment within the LOGIC or through the InterMiCOM communication
interface. If not all the available operating modes are required, it is not necessary
to configure all 3 signals. Signals that are not configured are internally used with
their default value 0.
3.27.6.1.2
3-247
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
4
1: 1-pole
2: 1-/3-pole
3: 3-pole
4: 3-pole (only for 1p)
ARC:
HSR oper. mode 2 PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
ARC:
HSR oper. mode 2 PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 051
024 025
024 085
025 085
015 044
024 022
024 082
025 042
1
2
1: Trip-dependent
2: Start-dependent
47Z1067A
Fig. 3-191: Setting the HSR operating mode and HSR operating mode 2.
3.27.6.1.3
1-pole
If HSR operating mode 2 is set for Start-dependent then the single-pole HSR is
only executed if there is a single-pole starting signal when the trip occurs. If
there is a multipole starting signal when the trip occurs, then there is a threepole final trip, and the reclaim time is started.
If the setting is Trip-dependent then the HSR is only executed if a single-pole trip
decision is reached. In the event of a three-pole trip, no HSR is executed, and
instead a final trip occurs. In addition, the HSR is started by a single-pole test
HSR.
A single-pole trip can occur as the result of the following protective functions:
Protective signaling.
3-248
P437
3 Operation
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur (depending on the
setting or with ASC disabled or blocked), then the reclaim time is started and a
three-pole trip occurs (final trip).
Plausibility check on single-pole HSR: If pole selective status signals have
been configured (see Section 3.12.8, (p. 3-92)) then the device will check that
just this CB contact will be opened during a single-pole HSR. The single-pole HSR
is terminated and a three-pole trip command is issued when at least one further
CB contact is opened. This trip command is final when the discrimination time
has elapsed (timer stage ARC: tDis crim. P Sx) or if this timer stage is set to
0 s. The same procedure is carried out should the multiple signal MAI N: CB
open 3 p EXT occur during the dead time of a single-pole HSR.
3-249
P437
3 Operation
Close reject
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
ARC:
Dead time 1p running
[ 037 066 ]
ARC:
Max. dead time runn.
[ 037 069 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR
[ 037 007 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
ARC:
Reclaim time running
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
Operative time 1 PSx
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
Operative time 2 PSx
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
MAIN:
Close cmd.pulse time
ARC:
Dead time 1p PSx
015 055
024 029
024 089
025 049
[ 015 067 ]
4
ARC:
Dead time max PSx
015 084
024 043
025 003
025 063
5
ASC:
Operative time PSx
018 010
077 034
078 034
079 034
7
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
47Z1061A
3.27.6.1.4
1-/3-pole
If HSR operating mode 2 is set for Start-dependent then a single-pole HSR is
executed if there is a single-pole starting signal when the trip occurs. If there is a
multipole starting signal when the trip occurs, then a three-pole HSR is executed.
3-250
P437
3 Operation
With the Trip-dependent setting, the decision as to whether a single- or threepole HSR will be executed is contingent upon the trip decisions. In addition, a
single- or three-pole HSR is started by a corresponding test HSR.
A single-pole trip can occur as the result of the following protective functions:
Protective signaling.
3-251
P437
3 Operation
1-pole trip
3-pole trip
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
ARC:
Dead time 1p running
[ 037 066 ]
ARC:
Dead time 3p running
[ 037 067 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR
[ 037 007 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
Reclaim time running
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
Operative time 1 PSx
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
Operative time 2 PSx
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
3
ARC:
Dead time 1p PSx
015 055
024 029
024 089
025 049
4
ARC:
Dead time 3p PSx
015 056
024 030
024 090
025 050
5
ASC:
Operative time PSx
018 010
077 034
078 034
079 034
MAIN:
[ 015 067 ]
Close cmd.pulse time
7
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
47Z1062A
Fig. 3-193: Signal flow with the operating mode 1-/3-pole, tripping during operative time 1.
3-252
P437
3 Operation
Close reject
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
ARC:
Max. dead time runn.
[ 037 069 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
ARC:
Reclaim time running
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
Operative time 1 PSx
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
Operative time 2 PSx
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
MAIN:
Close cmd.pulse time
ARC:
Dead time max PSx
015 084
024 043
025 003
025 063
[ 015 067 ]
ASC:
Operative time PSx
018 010
077 034
078 034
079 034
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
47Z1063B
Fig. 3-194: Signal flow with the operating mode 1-/3-pole, tripping during operative time 2, and close rejection.
3.27.6.1.5
3-pole
The three-pole HSR is executed both with a single-pole trip and a three-pole trip
irrespective of whether the setting is Start-dependent or Trip-dependent. If the
3-253
P437
3 Operation
3-254
P437
3 Operation
Close reject
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
ARC:
Dead time 3p running
[ 037 067 ]
ARC:
Max. dead time runn.
[ 037 069 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR
[ 037 007 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
ARC:
Reclaim time running
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
Operative time 1 PSx
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
Operative time 2 PSx
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
MAIN:
Close cmd.pulse time
ARC:
Dead time 3p PSx
015 056
024 030
024 090
025 050
[ 015 067 ]
ARC:
Dead time max PSx
015 084
024 043
025 003
025 063
ASC:
Operative time PSx
018 010
077 034
078 034
079 034
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
47Z1064A
3.27.6.1.6
3-255
P437
3.27.6.1.7
3 Operation
3.27.6.2
Test HSR
A single- or three-pole test HSR can be carried out using setting parameters or
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. If a single-pole test HSR is
triggered in the 3-pole operating mode, then a three-pole trip occurs.
3-256
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
2: TDR only permitted
ARC:
Reject test HSR
[ 036 055 ]
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole
ARC:
Test-HSR A USER
[ 011 063 ]
ARC:
Test HSR A, internal
303 011
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Test HSR A EXT
[ 037 014 ]
ARC:
Test HSR A
[ 034 020 ]
ARC:
Test-HSR B USER
[ 011 064 ]
ARC:
Test HSR B, internal
303 012
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Test HSR B
[ 034 021 ]
ARC:
Test HSR B EXT
[ 037 015 ]
ARC:
Test-HSR C USER
[ 011 065 ]
ARC:
Test HSR C, internal
303 013
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Test HSR C EXT
[ 037 016 ]
ARC:
Test HSR C
[ 034 022 ]
ARC:
Test HSR A-B-C USER
[ 011 066 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Test HSR A-B-C
[ 034 023 ]
ARC:
Test HSR A-B-C EXT
[ 037 017 ]
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole
Parameter
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
set
set
set
set
015
015
015
015
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
100
101
102
103
051
025
085
045
47Z01AFA
3.27.7
3-257
P437
3 Operation
zero. The TDR is always a three-pole process. This means that three-pole transfer
tripping will occur in the event of a single-pole trip.
The TDR is started if either a new general starting condition or the trip of an
external protection device (if configured accordingly) occurs while the reclaim
time is elapsing. Operative times 1 and 2 are started. If the starting conditions
for the TDR drop out while operative time 1 or 2 is elapsing, then the TDR dead
time is started. After the dead time has elapsed, a close request is sent to the
automatic synchronism check function (ASC). The ASC checks to determine
whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC
operative time, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued.
If ASC is disabled or blocked a close command may be issued immediately
(ASC: C los.re j.w.bl ock P Sx = No i.e. close rejection when blocked).
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur, then a final trip
occurs after the ASC operative time has elapsed, and the ARC reclaim time is
started.
If the fault is still present even after another reclosing, the TDR can be started
again. This process can be repeated as often as allowed by the number of
permitted TDRs. If the fault is still present after that, then a final trip occurs.
3-258
P437
3 Operation
Reclosure
Close reject
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
Reclaim time running
[ 036 042 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
ARC:
Dead time TDR runn.
[ 037 003 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ARC:
(Re)close signal TDR
[ 037 006 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
ARC:
Operative time 1 PSx
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
Operative time 2 PSx
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
ARC:
TDR dead time PSx
015 057
024 031
024 091
025 051
ASC:
Operative time PSx
018 010
077 034
078 034
079 034
MAIN:
Close cmd.pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
47Z1065A
3.27.8
3-259
P437
3 Operation
If the setting at MAI N: Ne utr.pt. tre at. PSx is Low-imped. grounding, then
both phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages are checked. If the setting is
either Isol./res.w.start.PG, Isol./res.w/o st. PG or Short-durat. ground., then only
the phasetophase voltages are checked.
ARC:
Enable RRC PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
V> RRC PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
V> for RRC triggered
VA-G3
VA-G
303 014
VB-G3
VB-G
VC-G
VC-G3
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Low-imped. grounding
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
ARC:
Enable RRC PSx
ARC:
V> RRC PSx
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
015
024
025
025
015
024
025
025
010
001
001
001
085
044
004
064
087
046
006
066
048
076
077
078
49Z64AHA
If the starting conditions for rapid reclosing drop out during operative time 1, the
RRC timer stage tRRC is started. After the timer stage has elapsed, the P437
checks to determine whether the voltages measured by distance protection were
greater than or equal to the set threshold value (A RC: V> RRC PSx) during the
last 100 ms. If this was the case, then a close request is sent to the automatic
synchronism check function (ASC). The ASC response depends on whether the
conditions for a single- or three-pole HSR are satisfied.
If the conditions for a single-pole HSR are satisfied then a close command is
immediately issued.
If the conditions for a three-pole HSR or TDR were satisfied the ASC checks to
determine whether reclosing can occur. If the ASC decision is positive, a close
enable and then a close command are issued. If reclosing is not permitted, there
is a final trip.
If the ASC is disabled or deactivated or if its decisions are to be ignored, then the
close request is immediately acknowledged and a close command is issued, even
in the case of a three-pole trip.
If it is determined after timer stage tRRC has elapsed that the voltages were not
greater or equal to the set threshold (ARC: V > RRC PSx), then the ARC cycle is
continued by the HSR or TDR.
3-260
P437
3 Operation
1-pole trip
3-pole trip
Close reject
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 1p
[ 037 252 ]
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
ARC:
tRRC running
303 015
ARC:
V> for RRC triggered
303 014
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
ARC:
Reclaim time running
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
Operative time 1 PSx
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
Operative time 2 PSx
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
ARC:
tRRC PSx
015 086
024 045
025 005
025 065
ASC:
Operative time PSx
018 010
077 034
078 034
079 034
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
[ 015 067 ]
47Z1066A
3.27.9
3-261
P437
3 Operation
3-262
P437
3 Operation
3.27.10
3-263
P437
3.27.10.1
3 Operation
The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the
functional sequence.
ARC : P aral le l trip P Sx = Parall. bloc.w/o ini
If the P437 has not started, the trip of the external protection device is
ignored. If a trip decision has been reached in the P437, then while the
operative times and the single-pole or maximum dead time are elapsing
the P437 checks to determine whether the trip of the external protection
device is in the same phase as the P437 trip. If this is the case, then the
ARC cycle is continued. If a trip decision of the external protection device
has been reached in another phase, then the ARC cycle is terminated
and the reclaim time is started.
ARC : P aral le l trip P Sx = Parall. bloc.w. init
If the setting at ARC: H SR oper. mode 2 PSx is Start-dependent and
if the P437 has started, then the trip of the external protection device
does not intervene in the HSR functional sequence. If the P437 has not
started then the trips of the external protection device are used as the
criterion for a single-pole HSR, irrespective of the Start-dependent
setting. If the setting is Trip-dependent the ARC cycle is started by the
trip of the external protection device and proceeds normally in the event
that the P437 does not reach a trip decision or not in the same phase.
However, if a trip decision has been reached by the P437 in a different
phase from that of the external protection device, then the reclaim time
is started and three-pole tripping occurs (final trip). Reclosing does not
occur.
If the trip of an external protection device occurs while the dead time is
elapsing, the process is the same as was described for secondary fault
treatment.
3-264
P437
3 Operation
The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the
functional sequence.
ARC : P aral le l tri p PSx = Parall. bloc.w/o ini
If the P437 has not started, the trip of the external protection device is
ignored.
If a single-pole trip decision has been reached in the P437, then while
operative time 1 and the time set at AR C: t Dis crim. PSx are elapsing
the P437 checks to determine whether the trip of the external protection
device is in the same phase as the P437 trip. If this is the case, then the
single-pole ARC cycle is continued. If a trip decision of the external
protection device has been reached in another phase while operative
time 1 was elapsing, then the three-pole dead time is started and the
ARC cycle is terminated as is the case with a three-pole HSR. If the trip
of the external protection device occurs while time tDiscrim. is elapsing,
then a switch is made to the three-pole dead time, and the ARC cycle is
continued as with a three-pole trip. If the trip of the external protection
device occurs after the time set at ARC : t Dis crim. PSx has elapsed,
then final three-pole tripping occurs, the ARC cycle is terminated, and
the reclaim time is started.
If a single-pole HSR with maximum dead time is carried out, then timer
stage tDiscrim. is started at the same time as the maximum dead time.
The P437 checks to determine whether, while operative time 2 or timer
stage tDiscrim. was elapsing, a trip of the external protection device has
occurred in the same phase as in the P437. If this is the case, then the
ARC cycle is continued. If the external protection device reaches a trip
decision in a different phase, then there is a three-pole trip transfer and
the ARC cycle is continued. If the trip of the external protection device
occurs after time tDiscrim. has elapsed, then three-pole final tripping
occurs and the reclaim time is started.
A RC : Parall el trip P Sx = Parall. bloc.w. init
If the setting at ARC: H SR oper. mode 2 PSx is Start-dependent and
if the P437 has started, then the trip of the external protection device
does not intervene in the HSR functional sequence. If the P437 has not
started, then the trips of the external protection device are used as the
criterion for a single- or three-pole HSR, irrespective of the Parall. bloc.w.
init setting. If the setting is Parall. bloc.w/o ini the ARC cycle is started by
the trip of the external protection device and proceeds normally if the
P437 does not reach a trip decision or has reached a trip decision in the
same phase. However, if the P437 has reached a trip decision in a
different phase from that of the external protection device, then threepole tripping occurs (3-pole transfer). The ARC cycle is terminated as
with a three-pole HSR.
If the trip of an external protection device occurs while the dead time is
elapsing, the process is the same as was described for secondary fault
treatment.
3-265
P437
3 Operation
The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the
functional sequence.
ARC : Parall el trip P Sx 'Parall. bloc.w/o ini'
The trip of the parallel protection device does not intervene in the HSR
functional sequence.
ARC : Parallel trip P Sx 'Parall. bloc.w. init'
As a result of the trip of the external protection device, the ARC cycle is
started and proceeds normally.
3.27.10.2
3.27.11
3-266
P437
3 Operation
BUOC:
Trip signal
[ 036 014 ]
DIST:
Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
ARC:
External trip A
303 016
ARC:
External trip B
ARC:
Zone ext. f. HSR PSx
[ * ]
303 017
ARC:
External trip C
303 018
0
ARC:
Reclaim time running
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Zone extension HSR
303 001
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running
[ 037 065 ]
ARC:
Zone ext.dur. RC PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR
[ 037 007 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
Zone extension RC
303 002
0: Without
1: Following HSR
2: Always
ARC:
Zone ext. f. TDR PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
ARC:
Zone extension TDR
303 000
1: Yes
ARC:
TDR permitted
303 019
ARC:
Dead time TDR runn.
[ 037 003 ]
Parameter
ARC:
Zone ext. f. HSR PSx
ARC:
Zone ext.dur. RC PSx
ARC:
Zone ext. f. TDR PSx
set
set
set
set
015
024
024
025
015
024
025
025
015
024
024
025
1
2
3
4
059
033
093
053
088
047
007
067
071
039
099
059
D5Z5099A
3.27.11.1
3-267
P437
3 Operation
Following HSR
If the two parameters are set for No or Without, respectively, then there is no
zone extension.
3.27.11.2
3.27.12
3-268
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Enabled
[ 015 064 ]
ARC:
Enable ext. ARC EXT
[ 038 003 ]
DIST:
Starting A
ARC:
Op. mode ext ARC PSx
[ * ]
303 529
DIST:
Starting B
303 530
DIST:
Starting C
303 531
BUOC:
IA> triggered
ARC:
Meas.r.extd. ext.ARC
303 025
304 750
BUOC:
IB> triggered
0: Without
304 751
1: 1-pole, trip-depend.
BUOC:
IC> triggered
2: 1-pole,start-depend.
304 752
3: 3-pole
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole leading phase
2: 1-pole trailing phas
ARC:
Enable dist.tripZ1ze
303 026
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, A
303 658
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, B
303 659
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze, C
303 660
Parameter
ARC:
Op. mode ext ARC PSx
DIST:
Trip zone 1 PP PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 045
024 043
024 083
025 043
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
47Z01ALA
3.27.13
3-269
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Mon. PSIG recv. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
ARC:
Switch to tPmax
1: Yes
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
[ * ]
1: 1 channel
303 024
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Dead time 1p running
[ 037 066 ]
ARC:
Dead time 3p running
[ 037 067 ]
ARC:
Max. dead time runn.
[ 037 069 ]
Parameter
ARC:
Mon. PSIG recv. PSx
PSIG:
No. telecom. ch. PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
015 082
024 050
025 010
025 070
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
47Z80AHA
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Ext. 1p trip perm.
[ 039 086 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running
[ 037 065 ]
100ms
&
ARC:
Dead time 1p running
[ 037 066 ]
47Z13AKB
3-270
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
Operative time 1 PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Operative time 2 PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Dead time 1p PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Dead time 3p PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Dead time max PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
No. permit. TDR PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
TDR dead time PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
HSR oper. mode 2 PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Enable RRC PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
HSR oper. mode 2 PSx
015 044
024 022
024 082
025 042
ARC:
tRRC PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
tDiscrim. PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
Parallel trip PSx
[ * ]
Setting
ARC:
Parallel trip PSx
0: Without function
1: Parall. bloc.w/o ini
2: Parall. bloc.w. init
ARC:
General starting EXT
[ 037 096 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
MAIN:
Starting B
[ 036 002 ]
MAIN:
Starting C
[ 036 003 ]
MAIN:
Trip A
306 009
MAIN:
Trip B
306 010
MAIN:
Trip C
306 011
MAIN:
Parallel trip A EXT
[ 036 052 ]
MAIN:
Parallel trip B EXT
[ 036 053 ]
MAIN:
Parallel trip C EXT
[ 036 054 ]
MAIN:
Parallel trip EXT
[ 037 019 ]
ARC:
3p transfer trip EXT
[ 038 043 ]
ARC:
Switch to tPmax
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
015 100
015 101
015 102
015 103
ARC:
HSR oper. mode PSx
015 051
024 025
024 085
025 045
ARC:
Enable RRC PSx
015 085
024 044
025 004
025 064
ARC:
Operative time 1 PSx
015 066
024 035
024 095
025 055
ARC:
Operative time 2 PSx
015 083
024 042
025 002
025 062
ARC:
Dead time 1p PSx
015 055
024 029
024 089
025 049
ARC:
Dead time 3p PSx
015 056
024 030
024 090
025 050
ARC:
Dead time max PSx
015 084
024 043
025 003
025 063
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running
[ 037 065 ]
ARC:
Dead time 1p running
[ 037 066 ]
ARC:
Dead time 3p running
[ 037 067 ]
ARC:
Max. dead time runn.
[ 037 069 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
Dead time TDR runn.
[ 037 003 ]
ARC:
tDiscrim running
[ 039 087 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ARC:
Close command
303 021
ARC:
Reclaim time running
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
ARC:
External trip A
303 024
303 016
ARC:
V> for RRC triggered
ARC:
External trip B
ASC:
Close enable w.block
ARC:
External trip C
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ASC:
Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
ARC:
CB closed
ARC:
TDR permitted
303 017
303 014
303 018
305 001
303 019
ARC:
3-pole transfer int.
303 020
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
ARC:
HSR A
303 004
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
ARC:
No. permit. TDR PSx
015 068
024 037
024 097
025 057
ARC:
tRRC PSx
015 086
024 045
025 005
025 065
ARC:
Parallel trip PSx
015 053
024 027
024 087
025 047
ARC:
TDR dead time PSx
015 057
024 031
024 091
025 051
ARC:
Reclaim time PSx
015 054
024 028
024 088
025 048
ARC:
tDiscrim. PSx
018 051
024 049
025 009
025 069
ARC:
HSR B
303 008
303 009
ARC:
HSR C
303 010
ARC:
HSR A-B-C
ARC:
TDR
303 005
303 006
ARC:
3-pole RRC
303 007
ARC:
tRRC running
303 015
ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR
[ 037 007 ]
ARC:
(Re)close signal TDR
[ 037 006 ]
ARC:
Reclosure successful
[ 036 062 ]
47Z01AJA
3-271
P437
3.27.14
3 Operation
ARC:
HSR A
303 008
ARC:
HSR B
303 009
ARC:
HSR C
303 010
ARC:
No. of HSR A
[ 004 001 ]
ARC:
No. of HSR B
[ 004 002 ]
ARC:
No. of HSR C
[ 004 003 ]
ARC:
Trip time elapsed
303 005
ARC:
No. of HSR A-B-C
[ 004 004 ]
ARC:
TDR
+
303 006
ARC:
Number TDR
[ 004 008 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ARC:
Reset counters EXT
[ 005 244 ]
ARC:
Reset counters USER
[ 003 005 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
45Z63ACA
3-272
P437
3 Operation
3.28
ASC:
Measurement loop PSx
[ * ]
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
ASC:
Select. meas.loop PG
305 008
1: Loop A-G
2: Loop B-G
ASC:
Vmeas
305 007
3: Loop C-G
4: Loop A-B
Parameter
ASC:
Measurement loop PSx
set
set
set
set
031
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
5: Loop B-C
6: Loop C-A
060
044
044
044
47Z0125A
3.28.1
3-273
P437
3 Operation
ASC:
General enable USER
[ 018 000 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
ASC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
1
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
037 049
Address
037 061
ASC:
Ext./user enabled
[ 037 092 ]
ASC:
Enable EXT
[ 037 049 ]
ASC:
Enable USER
[ 003 136 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC:
Disable EXT
[ 037 061 ]
ASC:
Disable USER
[ 003 135 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
Parameter
ASC:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
018
018
018
018
1
2
3
4
020
021
022
023
19Z5232A
3-274
P437
3 Operation
3.28.2
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip Vref EXT
[ 036 086 ]
ASC:
Blocking EXT
[ 037 048 ]
ASC:
Blocked
[ 038 018 ]
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC:
Ready
[ 037 079 ]
ASC:
Not ready
[ 037 082 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
ASC:
Clos.rej.w.block PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Close enable w.block
305 001
0
1
ASC:
Close reject.w.block
305 002
0: No
1: Yes
ASC:
Active for HSR PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Active
305 003
1
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
HSR
303 156
ASC:
Active for TDR PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
TDR
303 006
ASC:
Manual close request
305 000
Parameter
ASC:
Clos.rej.w.block PSx
ASC:
Active for HSR PSx
ASC:
Active for TDR PSx
set
set
set
set
018
077
078
079
018
077
078
079
018
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
003
032
032
032
001
030
030
030
002
031
031
031
19Z51BCA
3-275
P437
3.28.3
3 Operation
Close Request
The ASC function can be triggered by ARC, via setting parameters or from an
appropriately configured binary signal input. Close requests via a setting
parameter or the binary signal input are accepted only if no ARC cycle is running.
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ASC:
Manual close request
306 012
305 000
ASC:
MC close requ. USER
[ 018 004 ]
0
1
500ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC:
MC Close request
034 018 ]
ASC:
MC Close request EXT
[ 037 062 ]
50ms
ASC:
Enabl.close requ.EXT
[ 037 063 ]
50ms
1
500ms
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U x4
U xx
Address
037 063
ASC:
Test MC close r USER
[ 018 005 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
0
1
100ms
0: don't execute
1
500ms
1: execute
ASC:
Test MC close r. EXT
[ 037 064 ]
ASC:
Test MC close requ.
[ 034 019 ]
47Z8072
3-276
P437
3 Operation
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ASC:
Manual close request
306 012
305 000
ASC:
AR close requ. USER
[ 008 238 ]
0
1
500ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC:
AR close request
[ 008 239 ]
ASC:
AR close request EXT
008 236 ]
50ms
ASC:
Enabl.close requ.EXT
[ 037 063 ]
50ms
1
500ms
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U x4
U xx
Address
037 063
ASC:
Test AR close r.USER
[ 008 237 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
0
1
100ms
0: don't execute
1
500ms
1: execute
ASC:
Test AR close requ.
008 240 ]
ASC:
Test AR close r. EXT
[ 000 106 ]
47Z8073
The ASC operative time is started with the close request. If the close enable is
issued before the ASC operative time has elapsing, the close command is issued.
Otherwise an A SC : C lose r e j ecti on signal is generated for 100 ms.
3-277
P437
3 Operation
Close enable
Close reject
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
ASC:
Gen. close request
306 012
306 012
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ASC:
Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
Parameter
ASC:
Operative time PSx
set
set
set
set
018
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
010
034
034
034
MAIN:
Close cmd.pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
D5Z5073B
Fig. 3-211: Signal flow for a close enable and a close rejection.
3.28.4
3.28.5
Voltage-checked
Synchronism-checked
Voltage/synchronism-checked
3-278
P437
3 Operation
3.28.6
A SC: MC wit h tC B P Sx
ASC: MC del ta V m ax P Sx
The automatic reclosure setting parameters become active when a close request
is issued by the integrated ARC (for an RRC, HSR or TDR) or by a close request
from an external ARC device sent to the binary signal input function ASC: AR
close req ue st EXT.
3-279
P437
3 Operation
3.28.7
yes
yes
f < 10 mHz
no
no
Normal mode,
Asynchronous mode,
Synchronous mode,
close if:
close if:
close if:
V < Vmax
V < Vmax
V < Vmax
f < fmax
f < fmax
< max
< max
for tmin,synchr.
for tmin,synchr.
for tmin,synchr.
47Z1085A_EN
Fig. 3-212: Functional sequence and close conditions for the Synchronism check.
3-280
P437
3 Operation
3.28.8
Depending on the operating mode selected for the voltage check, all three
phase-to-ground voltages need to exceed or fall below the set value in order to
meet the condition for voltage-checked closing. If the conditions corresponding
to the set operating mode for the voltage synchronism check are met, then the
close enable is issued after the set minimum time has elapsed.
ASC: AR tm in v-ch eck PSx
The following operating modes for voltage checking can be selected separately
for each parameter subset:
Where the operating mode is set to Vref & Z1 but not V the significance of Z1
has been modified several times during the development of the P437. Basically
this condition should guarantee that the voltage-checked reclose control will only
occur after a highspeed trip issued to clear a line fault. With a time-delayed trip
(ARC start via operative time 2) the reclose control should only occur after a
voltage input is received from the remote end, including a synchronism check
(V, f, ).
Originally Z1 was actually the condition that would make distance protection
trip in zone 1. This was sufficient with plain protection systems. As of version
P437 611, the significance of &Z1 was then extended to [Trip with DIST Z1]
OR [Trip with Z1,ze and PSIG].
Perhaps this approach did not suffice for applications with line differential
protection operating concurrently. Causes for problems were for example:
States during the loss of the protective signaling interface and faults at the
remote end of the line.
Extremely short fault duration (2 periods) with a too fast trip command
by L-DIFF and CB, so that DIST starting has already dropped out before the
PSIG enable signal has been received.
High ohmic faults where DIST does not start but L-DIFF does.
The line selective trip signals from L-DIFF operating in parallel (or DIFF operating
in parallel) have been mapped to binary signal inputs on the P437
(MAIN : Parall el tri p EXT etc.). Together with this trip a start by the ARC will
also occur.
3-281
P437
3 Operation
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC:
Active
305 003
ASC:
AR op. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: Voltage-checked
ASC:
AR V> volt.check PSx
[ * ]
3: Volt.&sync.-checked
VA-G
VA-G3
VB-G
VB-G3
VC-G
VC-G3
ASC:
AR V< volt.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G3
VB-G3
VC-G3
ASC:
Select. meas.loop PG
305 008
Vref
ASC:
AR tmin v-check PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1
Vref3
2
1
6
1: Vref but not V
2: V but not Vref
3: Not V and not Vref
4: Not V or not Vref
5: Vref & Z1 but not V
6: N V&Vref or V&n Vref
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
DIST:
Dist.decis.Z1 stored
303 565
ASC:
Close enable,volt.ch
[ 037 085 ]
1
100ms
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
1
100ms
ARC:
HSR A
303 008
ARC:
HSR B
303 009
ARC:
HSR C
303 010
ASC:
Close enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
Parameter
ASC:
AR op. mode PSx
ASC:
AR V> volt.check PSx
ASC:
AR V< volt.check PSx
ASC:
AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx
ASC:
AR tmin v-check PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
018 025
018 026
018 027
018 028
026 017
077 043
078 043
079 043
018 017
077 040
078 040
079 040
018 029
018 030
018 031
018 032
018 018
077 041
078 041
079 041
47Z1380C
3-282
P437
3 Operation
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC:
Active
305 003
ASC:
MC op. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: Voltage-checked
ASC:
MC V> volt.check PSx
[ * ]
3: Volt./sync.-checked
VA-G
VA-G3
VB-G
VB-G3
VC-G
VC-G3
ASC:
MC V< volt.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G3
VB-G3
VC-G3
ASC:
Select. meas.loop PG
305 008
Vref
ASC:
MC tmin v-check PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
MC op.mode v-chk.PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1
Vref3
2
1
6
1: Vref but not V
2: V but not Vref
3: Not V and not Vref
4: Not V or not Vref
5: Vref & Z1 but not V
6: N V&Vref or V&n Vref
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
DIST:
Dist.decis.Z1 stored
303 565
ASC:
Close enable,volt.ch
[ 037 085 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
1
100ms
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
1
100ms
ARC:
HSR A
303 008
ARC:
HSR B
303 009
ARC:
HSR C
303 010
ASC:
Close enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
Parameter
ASC:
MC op. mode PSx
ASC:
MC V> volt.check PSx
ASC:
MC V< volt.check PSx
ASC:
MC op.mode v-chk.PSx
ASC:
MC tmin v-check PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
000 056
000 057
000 058
000 059
000 064
000 065
000 066
000 067
000 068
000 069
000 070
000 071
000 060
000 061
000 062
000 063
000 072
000 073
000 074
000 075
47Z1381C
3-283
P437
3.28.9
3 Operation
The three phase voltages and the reference voltage must exceed the set
threshold value.
(When with a three-phase voltage the setting of MAIN: Neutr.pt. t reat .
P Sx is Low-imped. grounding both the phase-to-ground and the phase-tophase voltages are checked. If the setting is Isol./res.w.start.PG only the
phase-to-phase voltages are checked.)
ASC : AR de lt a Vmax PS x
ASC: MC delta V m ax P Sx
ASC : AR de lt a ph i m ax P Sx
If these conditions are met for at least the set time ASC : A R tmin sync.chk
PS x or A SC: MC tmi n sync. chk P Sx, respectively, then a close enable signal
is issued. The ASC operating time for the determination of differences in voltage,
angle, and frequency is approximately 100 ms.
The voltage magnitude difference, angle difference, and frequency difference are
stored as measured synchronism data at the time the close request is issued. In
the event of another close request, they are automatically overwritten by the
new data.
3-284
P437
3 Operation
ASC:
Active
Parameter
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
ASC:
AR op. mode PSx
ASC:
Phi offset PSx
ASC:
AR V> sync.check PSx
set
set
set
set
010
001
001
001
018
018
018
018
018
077
078
079
018
077
078
079
305 003
ASC:
AR op. mode PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
4
048
076
077
078
025
026
027
028
034
042
042
042
011
035
035
035
1
*
2
3
1: Voltage-checked
2: Sync.-checked
Parameter
ASC:
AR delta Vmax PSx
ASC:
AR delta f max PSx
ASC:
AR delta phi max PSx
ASC:
AR tmin sync.chk PSx
set
set
set
set
018
077
078
079
018
077
078
079
018
077
078
079
018
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
012
036
036
036
014
038
038
038
013
037
037
037
015
039
039
039
3: Volt.&sync.-checked
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Low-imped. grounding
ASC:
AR V> sync.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G
VA-G3
VB-G
VB-G3
VC-G
VC-G3
ASC:
Select. meas.loop PG
305 008
Vref
1
2
ASC:
AR tmin sync.chk PSx
Vref3
[ * ]
2
1
100ms
ASC:
Close enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
ASC:
AR delta Vmax PSx
[ * ]
Vmax
ASC:
Volt. sel. meas.loop
[ 004 088 ]
ASC:
Volt. magn. diff.
[ 004 091 ]
ASC:
Frequ. difference
[ 004 090 ]
ASC:
AR delta f max PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Angle difference
[ 004 089 ]
fmax
ASC:
Phi offset PSx
ASC:
AR delta phi max PSx
[ * ]
[ * ]
max
- corr
47Z1112A
3-285
P437
3 Operation
ASC:
Active
Parameter
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
ASC:
MC op. mode PSx
ASC:
Phi offset PSx
ASC:
MC V> sync.check PSx
set
set
set
set
010
001
001
001
000
000
000
000
018
077
078
079
000
000
000
000
305 003
ASC:
MC op. mode PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
4
048
076
077
078
056
057
058
059
034
042
042
042
052
053
054
055
1
*
2
3
1: Voltage-checked
2: Sync.-checked
Parameter
ASC:
MC delta Vmax PSx
ASC:
MC delta f max PSx
ASC:
MC delta phi max PSx
ASC:
MC tmin sync.chk PSx
set
set
set
set
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
1
2
3
4
080
081
082
083
084
086
087
088
089
091
092
093
098
099
100
101
3: Volt./sync.-checked
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Low-imped. grounding
ASC:
MC V> sync.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G
VA-G3
VB-G
VB-G3
VC-G
VC-G3
ASC:
Select. meas.loop PG
305 008
Vref
ASC:
MC tmin sync.chk PSx
[ * ]
Vref3
2
1
100ms
ASC:
Close enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
ASC:
MC delta Vmax PSx
[ * ]
Vmax
ASC:
Volt. sel. meas.loop
[ 004 088 ]
ASC:
MC delta f max PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Volt. magn. diff.
[ 004 091 ]
ASC:
Frequ. difference
[ 004 090 ]
ASC:
Angle difference
[ 004 089 ]
fmax
ASC:
Phi offset PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
MC delta phi max PSx
[ * ]
max
- corr
47Z1113A
3-286
P437
3 Operation
3.28.10
ASC:
Operative time PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
306 012
ASC:
Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close reject.w.block
305 002
Parameter
ASC:
Operative time PSx
set
set
set
set
018
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
010
034
034
034
D5Z5076A
3.28.11
The ASC cycle and the operating time are started by the test close request.
The network synchronism is checked during the whole operating time and
ASC : Cl ose e nable is set accordingly. If at the end of the operate time no
network synchronism is registered, a 100 ms signal ASC : C lose r ejection is
issued.
3-287
P437
3 Operation
Close enable
Close reject
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
ASC:
Gen. close request
306 012
306 012
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ASC:
Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
ASC:
Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
Parameter
ASC:
Operative time PSx
set
set
set
set
018
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
>
100 ms
010
034
034
034
19Z5230A
3-288
P437
3 Operation
3.28.12
ASC Counters
The following ASC signals are counted:
The counters can either be reset individually (at the address at which they are
displayed) or as a group.
ASC:
Manual close request
>S 1 1
305 000
>R 1
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ASC:
Gen. close request
&
+
R
306 012
ASC:
No. RC aft. man.clos
[ 004 009 ]
ASC:
No. close requests
[ 009 033 ]
R
ASC:
Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
ASC:
No. close rejections
[ 009 034 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ASC:
Reset counters EXT
[ 006 074 ]
ASC:
Reset counters USER
[ 003 089 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
47Z1377A
3-289
P437
3.29
3 Operation
3.29.1
3-290
P437
3 Operation
GFSC:
General enable USER
018[ 060 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GFSC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
GFSC:
Enabled
[ 038 094 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
xxx[ xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U x4
Address
039 095
Address
039 096
GFSC:
Ext. enabled
[ 039 097 ]
GFSC:
Enable EXT
[ 039 095 ]
GFSC:
Enable USER
003[ 138 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
GFSC:
Disable EXT
[ 039 096 ]
GFSC:
Disable USER
003[ 137 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
GFSC:
Ready
[ 039 093 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
GFSC:
Not ready
[ 039 094 ]
GFSC:
Blocked
310 002
Parameter
GFSC:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
018
018
018
018
1
2
3
4
072
073
074
075
47Z1117A
3.29.2
3-291
P437
3 Operation
As a value for the calculated neutral-displacement voltage, ground fault (shortcircuit) protection uses measurements of the same phase-to-ground voltages
measured by distance protection. From these voltages the P437 calculates the
neutral-displacement voltage VNG.
With the second option (measured value), it is possible to establish ground fault
(short-circuit) protection (GFSC) and its associated ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling (GSCSG) irrespective of the installed system voltage
transformers.
As the measured value for the neutral-point displacement voltage, ground fault
(short-circuit) protection (GFSC) uses the neutral-displacement voltage formed
externally via the fourth voltage measuring input, for example the neutraldisplacement voltage from the open delta winding of the voltage transformers
(see Section 3.12.1, (p. 3-69)).
The residual current IN is drawn from a separate transformer in the P437 that is
looped into the phase current transformer neutral or connected to a Holmgreen
group. The connection example shown in Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-70) shows the
transformer looped into the current transformer neutral.
3.29.3
3-292
P437
3 Operation
GFSC:
Blocking EXT
[ 043 068 ]
GFSC:
Blocked
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023
310 002
GFSC:
Evaluation VNG
002 136 ]
1
2
1: Calculated
2: Measured
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip VNG EXT
[ 002 183 ]
300ms
GFSC:
Fct.assign. blocking
[ 006 020 ]
MAIN:
CB open >=1p
[ 031 039 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
SFMON:
M.c.b. trip VNG
[ 098 132 ]
m out of n
DIST:
Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
ARC:
Dead time 1p running
[ 037 066 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01
[ 042 032
. ]
.
.
LOGIC:
Output 32
[ 042 094 ]
Any of the
selected
conditions occurs
47Z1307 B
GFSC:
Evaluation VNG
[ 002 136 ]
VN-G
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
1 ... 2
1: Calculated
GFSC:
VNG
310 001
2: Measured
0.7Vnom/3
GFSC:
Voltage present
303 953
47Z1115A
3.29.4
Starting
The digitally filtered fundamental waves of current and voltage are measured.
They are monitored to determine whether they exceed set thresholds
(GFSC : IN > and GFSC: V NG>). If both thresholds have been exceeded, a
settable timer stage (GFSC: Start. ope r. de lay) is started. Once the trigger
3-293
P437
3 Operation
has dropped out, the starting persists until the settable release delay
(GFSC : St art. re le as. de lay) has elapsed. Directional measurement is
enabled if the current reaches 70% of the set threshold (GFSC : IN>) and the
voltage exceeds the trigger threshold (GFSC : VNG >).
GFSC:
IN>
[ 018 063 ]
GFSC:
Ready
[ 039 093 ]
f0
GFSC:
IN> triggered
IN
[ 039 088 ]
IN / 0.7
GFSC:
VNG>
[ 018 062 ]
f0
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
GFSC:
VNG> triggered
GFSC:
Start. oper. delay
[ 018 064 ]
[ 039 089 ]
GFSC:
Start. releas. delay
[ 018 065 ]
GFSC:
Starting
[ 038 096 ]
GFSC:
Direct.determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
GFSC:
IN filtered
303 951
GFSC:
VNG filtered
303 950
0.7Vnom/3
GFSC:
Voltage present
303 953
47Z0127A
3.29.5
Directional Tripping
The P437 determines the angle between the residual current and the neutraldisplacement voltage for the direction determination. The measured angle is
displayed. The position of the straight line separating forward and backward
(reverse) directions is determined by setting GFSC: Angle phi N. A forward or
backward (reverse)-directional decision results if the following angle conditions
are met:
Forward direction: (90+G) < (270+G)
Backward (reverse) direction: (90+G) > (270+G)
where:
: Measured angle between the residual current and the neutral-point
displacement voltage
G: Setting for GFS C: Angle phi N
3-294
P437
3 Operation
Backward direction
VC-G
90+(IN)
VG-N = -VN-G
VA-G
(IN)
IN
Forward direction
VB-G
47Z1090A
3.29.6
3-295
P437
3 Operation
The ground fault starting condition VNG> remains using the directly measured
neutral displacement voltage. In order to secure that directional measurement is
only done with a reliably high absolute value of the line-to-line voltage V(GFSC),
this value must always exceed a minimum of 50 mV.
To neg.-sequ.
system neutral
ZL0
Imeas = IN = 3 I0
Z S0(fwd)
Via RF
to pos.-sequ. system
Backward
Vmeas (capacitive, if Im{ZS0(fwd)} < XC0)
Forward
Typical directional characteristic
(for inductive OHL application)
Imeas= IN = 3 I0
Fig. 3-225: Zero-sequence fault measurands on series compensated lines, faults in forward direction.
3-296
P437
3 Operation
-jXC0
ZL0
Imeas = - IN = - 1/3 I0
ZS0(bwd)
Via RF
to pos.-sequ. system
Imeas
Backward
Vmeas (always inductive!)
Forward
Typical directional characteristic
(for inductive OHL application)
IN = 1/3 I0
Fig. 3-226: Zero-sequence fault measurands on series compensated lines, faults in backward (reverse) direction.
3.29.7
3.29.7.1
3-297
P437
3 Operation
measurement is only done at the IN> starting. Its valid result is memorized until
the IN> trigger resets.
The phase selection is further depending on the operation of the distance
function:
These signals are used to provide 1-pole tripping of ground fault signaling
function (GSCSG) if no phase selection by distance starting is available (initiating
1p HSR cycle, as previously guided by distance starting). They are also used to
apply the virtual current polarization technique (Section 3.29.7.2, (p. 3-298)).
3.29.7.2
3-298
P437
3 Operation
GFSC
GFSC:
IN> triggered
no
[ 039 088 ]
yes
Determination of faulty
phase
GFSC reset
DIST:
Starting
>2p(E)
multi-phase fault
DIST:
Starting
= AN [BN, CN]
Phase A [B, C]
DIST:
Starting
= only N
No DIST: Starting
GFSC:
VNG> triggered
[ 039 089 ]
yes
no
no
GFSC:
Virtual current pol.
[ 006 009 ]
yes
no
Faulty phase
determined?
yes
Calculation
of
Vpol = VPG
only the 2
healthy phases)
Direction cannot
be determined
Directional Determ.
Directional Determ.
= (Vpol,IN)
= (VNG,IN)
GFSC
47Z1205B
Fig. 3-227: GFSC Phase selection and optional virtual current polarization.
3.29.8
3-299
P437
3 Operation
Voltage-Dependent Tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection enables determination of the
voltage-dependent tripping time. Tripping time tS is calculated as follows.
tS =
2s
| VN-G |
10
V nom - 0.2
0.6364 1.1
3
Time-Voltage Characteristic (for Vnom = 100V)
45
s
40
35
Tripping Time tS
30
25
20
15
10
V
0
10
11
Voltage VN-G
47Z0129A
3-300
P437
3 Operation
GFSC:
Operating mode tS
[ 018 080 ]
1
2
1: VNG-dependent
2: IN-dependent
GFSC:
Criteria tS active
[ 018 071 ]
0: blocked
GFSC:
Starting
[ 038 096 ]
tA
GFSC:
Volt.-dep. trip sig.
GFSC:
VNG filtered
303 950
VNG
303 954
47Z0130A
3.29.8.2
Current-Dependent Tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection enables determination of the
current-dependent tripping time. The user can select from a large number of
characteristics (see table below). If the current exceeds 1.05 times the set
reference current, calculation of the tripping time begins. A trip signal is issued
as a function of the set characteristic. The tripping characteristics available for
selection are shown in figures Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-303) to Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-305).
3-301
P437
No.
Tripping
Characteristic
Characteristic
settable factor:
k = 0.05 ... 10.00
3 Operation
Definite Time
t=k
t =k
Standard Inverse
I
ref
0.02
Very Inverse
13.50
1.00
Extremely Inverse
80.00
2.00
120.00
1.00
t = k (
(I
Moderately Inverse
6
7
b
) -1
0.14
a
(I
Constants
I
ref
)b - 1
tr =
+ c)
k R
I 2
(I
) -1
ref
0.0515
0.0200
0.1140
4.85
Very Inverse
19.6100
2.0000
0.4910
21.60
Extremely Inverse
28.2000
2.0000
0.1217
29.10
Per ANSI
t = k (
(I
I
ref
+ c)
tr =
) -1
k R
I 2
(I
) -1
ref
Normally Inverse
8.9341
2.0938
0.17966
9.00
0.2663
1.2969
0.03393
0.50
10
5.6143
1.0000
2.18592
15.75
11
RI-Type Inverse
t =k
1
0.339 -
12
3-302
RXIDG-Type Inverse
0.236
I
)
(I
ref
t = k (5.8 - 1.35 ln I
I
ref
P437
3 Operation
1000
100
100
k=10
10
10
t/s
k=1
k=10
t/s
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
1000
1000
100
100
k=10
10
10
t/s
k=10
k=1
t/s
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
k=1
0.1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
3-303
P437
3 Operation
1000
100
100
10
10
k=10
t/s
k=10
t/s
1
k=1
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
3-304
P437
3 Operation
1000
100
100
10
10
t/s
k=10
t/s
1
k=10
k=1
0.1
0.1
k=1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 k=0.1
k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
100
k=10
10
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
1000
100
100
k=10
10
k=10
10
t/s
k=1
1
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
3-305
P437
3 Operation
GFSC:
Operating mode tS
[ 018 080 ]
2: IN-dependent
GFSC:
Criteria tS active
[ 018 071 ]
0: blocked
GFSC:
Starting
[ 038 096 ]
GFSC:
Iref,N
[ 018 076 ]
1.05 Iref,G
GFSC:
IN filtered
303 951
GFSC:
Characteristic N
[ 018 078 ]
GFSC:
Factor kt,N
[ 018 077 ]
GFSC:
Curr.-dep. trip sig.
|IN|/Iref,G
303 955
GFSC:
Characteristic N
0: Definite Time
1: IEC Standard Inverse
2: IEC Very Inverse
3: IEC Extr. Inverse
4: IEC Long Time Inv.
5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
6: IEEE Very Inverse
7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
8: ANSI Normally Inv.
9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
11: RI-Type Inverse
12: RXIDG-Type Inverse
47Z0131A
3.29.9
Non-Directional Tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection starts settable timer stage t3.
Once t3 and tS have elapsed, a trip signal is issued by ground fault (short-circuit)
protection.
3-306
P437
3 Operation
Note: After timer stage t1 or t2 has elapsed, a trip signal is issued and remains
present until the starting drops off even if the direction decision changes or is
reset. This latching is not shown in the diagram.
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
GFSC:
Direct.determ.enabl.
GFSC:
Angle phi N
[ 018 061 ]
[ 043 061 ]
GFSC:
IN filtered
303 951
GFSC:
t1 elapsed
GFSC:
t2 (backward)
[ 018 067 ]
GFSC:
t2 elapsed
[ 038 097 ]
[ 038 098 ]
GFSC:
Trip signal
(90+G)>(270+G)
GFSC:
VNG filtered
GFSC:
t1 (forward)
[ 018 066 ]
[ 039 092 ]
(90+G)<(270+G)
303 950
GFSC:
Starting
[ 038 096 ]
GFSC:
Criteria tS active
[ 018 071 ]
0
1
2
0: blocked
1: forward
2: non-directional
GFSC:
Volt.-dep. trip sig.
303 954
GFSC:
Curr.-dep. trip sig.
303 955
GFSC:
t3 (non-directional)
[ 018 068 ]
GFSC:
t3 elapsed
[ 038 099 ]
GFSC:
Angle VNG/IN
[ 009 098 ]
47Z0132A
3.29.10
Counters
The trip signals issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection are counted. The
counter can be reset either at the counter address or by a general reset action.
3-307
P437
3 Operation
GFSC:
Trip signal
[ 039 092 ]
GFSC:
No. of trip signals
[ 009 054 ]
+
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
47Z13AHA
3.29.11
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
GFSC:
VNG> triggered
[ 039 089 ]
& 1
10 s
GFSC:
Monitor. triggered
[ 038 095 ]
&
SFMON:
Meas. circuits GFSC
[ 098 013 ]
GFSC:
Voltage present
303 953
D5Z50AJB
3-308
P437
3 Operation
3.30
3.30.1
3-309
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
General enable USER
[ 023 069 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GSCSG:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
1
GSCSG:
Enabled
[ 023 070 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
043 050
Address
043 051
GSCSG:
Ext. enabled
[ 043 066 ]
GSCSG:
Enable EXT
[ 043 050 ]
GSCSG:
Enable USER
[ 003 140 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
GSCSG:
Disable EXT
[ 043 051 ]
GSCSG:
Disable USER
[ 003 139 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
Parameter
GSCSG:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
023
023
023
023
1
2
3
4
071
072
073
074
45Z5043A
3.30.2
3-310
P437
3 Operation
None of the conditions selected with GFSC: Fct .as sign . blocking has
been detected.
External blocking is carried out either via a binary signal input configured for
GSC SG: Block ing EXT or via a binary signal input configured for
PSIG: Blockin g E XT, depending on the operating mode setting for the
communication channel.
The fault signal from the external signal transmission device can be either
connected to a binary signal input, configured for GSCSG: Telecom. faulty
EX T or to a binary signal input, configured for P SIG: Te le c. fault y (A) EXT or
PSI G: Telec.fault y (B) EXT depending on the operating mode setting for the
communication channel.
The condition for blocking the ground fault protection scheme logic is user
settable at GSCSG: Fct.assign. blocking because of sometimes conflicting
application restraints. Some considerations about the various blocking conditions
are given below:
3-311
P437
3 Operation
If distance starting resets, but the trip signal is still present (e.g. because of
the presence of parallel or transfer trip signals), then the start of the 1-pole
dead time of internal autoreclosing is delayed. In order to prevent a 3-pole
trip decision from GSCSG now (as phase selection is no longer possible),
GSCSG needs to be blocked by using the CBs auxiliary contacts.
3-312
If one (strong infeed) end issues a fast zone 1 distance 1-pole trip, then
previously GSCSG was blocked almost immediately. At the remote (weak
infeed) end only GFSC senses the fault. In order to allow a fast tripping of
GSCSG at the remote end under this condition, the function must remain
P437
3 Operation
active at the strong infeed end as long as possible, i.e. until a "CB open"
condition is signaled.
GSCSG:
Not ready
MAIN:
Protection active
[ 043 058 ]
306 001
GSCSG:
Enabled
GFSC:
Not ready
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
GSCSG:
Ready
[ 043 057 ]
2
1: Independent channel
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Blocking EXT
[ 043 052 ]
PSIG:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 049 ]
SFMON:
Telecom.faulty/GSCSG
GSCSG:
Telecom. faulty EXT
[ 043 053 ]
[ 098 027 ]
PSIG:
Telec.faulty (A) EXT
[ 004 064 ]
PSIG:
Telec.faulty (B) EXT
[ 008 094 ]
COMM3:
Communications fault
[ 120 043 ]
GSCSG:
Telecom. faulty
[ 046 060 ]
COMM3:
Sig.asg. comm.fault
[ 120 034 ]
0
1
2
3
4
5
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
None
Telecom. flt.(A)PSIG
Telecom.faulty GSCSG
TCflt.(A)PSIG &GSCSG
Telecom. flt.(B)PSIG
TCflt.(B)PSIG &GSCSG
GSCSG:
Fct.assign. blocking
[ 002 180 ]
MAIN:
CB open >=1p
[ 031 039 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
DIST:
Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
ARC:
Dead time 1p running
[ 037 066 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01
m out of n
[ 042 032 ]
.
.
.
LOGIC:
Output 32
[ 042 094 ]
Any of the
conditions occurs
47Z8018A
3.30.3
3-313
P437
3.30.4
3 Operation
Tripping Time
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is ready, then the tripping timer
is started by ground fault (short-circuit) protection starting.
GSCSG:
Tripping time
[ 023 075 ]
GSCSG:
Ready
[ 043 057 ]
&
GSCSG:
Tripping time elaps.
[ 043 063 ]
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
&
GFSC:
Virtual current pol.
[ 006 009 ]
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
47Z1325 A
3.30.5
Frequency Monitoring
Failure of frequency transmission can be signaled to the P437 via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. Which inputs are activated is
determined by the channel operating mode setting at GSCSG: C hannel mode.
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling uses a different communication
channel than protective signaling, then the following occurs, as long as
frequency monitoring has been enabled: when the binary signal input configured
for GSC SG: Fre qu .mon .tri gd. E XT is triggered, the P437 allows an operate
delay of approximately 20 ms to elapse and then generates a receive signal for
150 ms.
3-314
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Frequency monitoring
[ 023 085 ]
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
2
1: Independent channel
0: No
2: Common channel
1: Yes
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon. triggered
304 000
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon.trigd. EXT
[ 043 054 ]
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1
305 169
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2
305 170
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3
305 171
47Z0135A
3.30.6
Transient Blocking
In the event of a directional change of ground fault (short-circuit) protection from
backward (reverse) to forward, ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
will generate a blocking signal for the time period set at GSCSG: tBlock.
GSCSG:
tBlock
[ 023 077 ]
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
S1 1
[ 039 091 ]
R1
&
1
t
GSCSG:
Transient blocking
304 001
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
GFSC:
Direct.determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
47Z0136B
3.30.7
3-315
P437
3.30.8
3 Operation
3-316
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG:
Operating mode
[ 023 079 ]
1
2
1: Signal comp. release
2: Signal comp. block.
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
2
1: Independent channel
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Release time send
[ 023 076 ]
GSCSG:
Send signal
[ 043 059 ]
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
GSCSG:
Send internal signal
[ 039 090 ]
304 002
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
GSCSG:
Transient blocking
GSCSG:
Trip signal
[ 043 060 ]
[ 037 254 ]
GSCSG:
Tripping time elaps.
[ 043 063 ]
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon. triggered
GSCSG:
Bl. PSIG weak infeed
304 000
304 003
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
45Z8038A
Fig. 3-243: GSCSG send signal and trip signal in the Signal comp. release (permissive) operating mode and
blocking of the weak indeed logic of distance protection protective signaling.
3.30.9
3-317
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG:
Operating mode
[ 023 079 ]
1
2
1: Signal comp. release
2: Signal comp. block.
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
2
1: Independent channel
GSCSG:
Release time send
[ 023 076 ]
2: Common channel
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
GSCSG:
Send signal
[ 043 059 ]
GSCSG:
Transient blocking
GSCSG:
Send internal signal
304 001
304 002
GSCSG:
Block. sig. nondir.
[ 023 089 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GFSC:
Direct.determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
GSCSG:
Trip signal
[ 043 060 ]
[ 039 090 ]
GSCSG:
Tripping time elaps.
[ 043 063 ]
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon. triggered
304 000
47Z0139A
Fig. 3-244: Send signal and trip signal in the operating mode Signal comp. block..
3.30.10
Weak-Infeed Logic
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling has a weak-infeed logic
function that makes tripping possible if ground fault (short-circuit) protection
does not start. The user has the option to choose whether in this case the trip
signal will be issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling when
there is a directional decision by ground fault (short-circuit) protection in the
forward direction or when the GFSC: VNG> trigger value is exceeded.
3-318
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Weak infeed trip
[ 023 084 ]
0
1
2
0: No
1: With directional r.
2: With VNG> release
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
2
GSCSG:
Op.delay weak infeed
[ 023 087 ]
1: Independent channel
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Trip signal
[ 043 060 ]
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon. triggered
304 000
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
GFSC:
VNG> triggered
[ 039 089 ]
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
GSCSG:
Transient blocking
[ 037 254 ]
45Z8039A
3.30.11
Trip Mode
Depending on the GSCSG: Trip mode setting, ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling can trigger a single-pole or three-pole trip that can activate
the ARC function. If the trip mode setting is 1/3-pole trip w.HSR then when there
is single-pole starting of the distance protection function there will be a trip in the
phase in which the starting condition is present. When there is multi-pole starting
of the distance protection function, ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling will reach a three-pole trip decision. If one of the other two operating
modes has been set, then ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling always
generates a three-pole trip. If the operating mode is 3p-pole trip w/o.HSR, then
the ARC will be blocked by a trip generated by ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling.
3-319
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Trip mode
[ 023 088 ]
1
2
3
1: 1/3-pole trip w.HSR
2: 3p-pole trip w.HSR
3: 3p-pole trip w/o.HSR
GSCSG:
Trip A
GSCSG:
Trip signal
304 004
[ 043 060 ]
DIST:
Starting A
GSCSG:
Trip B
303 529
304 005
DIST:
Starting B
GSCSG:
Trip C
303 530
304 006
DIST:
Starting C
303 531
GSCSG:
Blocking ARC
304 008
47Z0142A
3.30.12
Echo Function
When a signal is received, an echo pulse can be formed depending on the
setting if ground fault (short-circuit) protection has not detected a fault in the
backward direction. The receive signal must be present for a period longer than
the set operate delay in order for the echo pulse to be activated. If the circuit
breaker is in the open position, then the operate delay is not active. The echo
pulse is transmitted to the remote station for the set pulse duration. When the
echo pulse is activated, a set blocking time is also started, during the course of
which a new echo pulse is prevented. This prevents a permanent signal from
being transmitted.
3-320
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Echo on receive
[ 023 080 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
2
1: Independent channel
GSCSG:
Operate delay echo
[ 023 081 ]
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Pulse duration echo
[ 023 082 ]
GSCSG:
Send signal
[ 043 059 ]
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
S1 1
GSCSG:
Send internal signal
304 002
R1
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon. triggered
304 000
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p
[ 031 042 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
GSCSG:
tBlock echo
[ 023 083 ]
45Z6310A
3.30.13
3-321
P437
3 Operation
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
1: Independent channel
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Test telecom. USER
[ 023 086 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
GSCSG:
Test telecom. EXT
GSCSG:
Release time send
[ 023 076 ]
GSCSG:
Send signal
[ 043 059 ]
GSCSG:
Send internal signal
304 002
[ 043 056 ]
GSCSG:
Test telecom. chann.
[ 034 029 ]
47Z0143A
3-322
P437
3 Operation
3.31
Negative-sequence current
Residual current
The inrush stabilization function may intervene in the functional sequence of the
DTOC function.
3.31.1
DTOC:
General enable USER
[ 031 068 ]
0
DTOC:
Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
Parameter
DTOC:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
098
098
098
098
1: Yes
45Z8089A
3.31.2
3-323
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
Blocking tI> EXT
[ 041 060 ]
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>
&
450 208
MAIN:
Protection active
&
DTOC:
tI> PSx
[ * ]
306 001
DTOC:
Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
DTOC:
I> PSx
[ * ]
IA
DTOC:
tI> elapsed
[ 040 010 ]
IB
DTOC:
Starting I>
[ 035 020 ]
IC
DTOC:
Blocking tI>> EXT
[ 041 061 ]
DTOC:
tI>> PSx
[ * ]
c
c
&
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>>
DTOC:
I>> PSx
[ * ]
450 209
DTOC:
tI>> elapsed
[ 040 011 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>
[ 035 021 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tI>>> EXT
[ 041 062 ]
DTOC:
tI>>> PSx
[ * ]
c
c
&
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>>>
DTOC:
I>>> PSx
[ * ]
450 210
DTOC:
tI>>> elapsed
[ 040 012 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>>
[ 035 022 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tI>>>> EXT
[ 041 100 ]
DTOC:
tI>>>> PSx
[ * ]
c
c
&
DTOC:
Bl.Start. I>>>>
DTOC:
I>>>> PSx
[ * ]
450 211
DTOC:
tI>>>> elapsed
[ 035 032 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>>>
[ 035 023 ]
Parameter
DTOC:
I> PSx
DTOC:
I>> PSx
DTOC:
I>>> PSx
DTOC:
I>>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
007
007
007
007
008
008
008
008
009
009
009
009
010
010
010
010
Parameter
DTOC:
tI> PSx
DTOC:
tI>> PSx
DTOC:
tI>>> PSx
DTOC:
tI>>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
019
019
019
019
020
020
020
020
021
021
021
021
022
022
022
022
45Z80ALA
3.31.3
3-324
P437
3 Operation
I neg = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |
Phase sequence A-C-B
I neg = 3 | (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |
Symbols used:
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
3-325
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
Blocking tIneg> EXT
[ 041 102 ]
MAIN:
Inrush stabil. trigg
306 014
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
DTOC:
Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
DTOC:
Ineg> PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
DTOC:
tIneg> PSx
[ * ]
IA
IB
DTOC:
tIneg> elapsed
[ 035 033 ]
Ineg
IC
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>
[ 035 024 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tIneg>> EXT
[ 041 103 ]
DTOC:
tIneg>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
Ineg>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIneg>> elapsed
[ 035 034 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>
[ 035 025 ]
DTOC:
Block. tIneg>>> EXT
[ 041 104 ]
DTOC:
Ineg>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIneg>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIneg>>> elapsed
[ 035 035 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>>
[ 035 026 ]
DTOC:
Block. tIneg>>>> EXT
[ 041 105 ]
DTOC:
tIneg>>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
Ineg>>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIneg>>>> elapsed
[ 035 036 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>>>
[ 035 027 ]
Parameter
DTOC:
Ineg> PSx
DTOC:
Ineg>> PSx
DTOC:
Ineg>>> PSx
DTOC:
Ineg>>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
011
011
011
011
012
012
012
012
013
013
013
013
014
014
014
014
Parameter
DTOC:
tIneg> PSx
DTOC:
tIneg>> PSx
DTOC:
tIneg>>> PSx
DTOC:
tIneg>>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
023
023
023
023
024
024
024
024
025
025
025
025
026
026
026
026
D5Z52AMA
3.31.4
3-326
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
Evaluation IN PSx
[ * ]
IA
IB
IC
1
2
IN
1
1: Calculated
2: Measured
Parameter
DTOC:
Evaluation IN PSx
set
set
set
set
073
073
073
073
1
2
3
4
...
DTOC:
IN
402 625
189
190
202
219
45Z5045B
3-327
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
Blocking tIN> EXT
[ 041 063 ]
MAIN:
Inrush stabil. trigg
306 014
MAIN:
Protection active
DTOC:
IN> PSx
[ * ]
306 001
DTOC:
Enabled
DTOC:
tIN> PSx
[ * ]
[ 040 120 ]
DTOC:
tIN> elapsed
[ 035 037 ]
DTOC:
IN
402 625
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tIN>> EXT
[ 041 064 ]
DTOC:
IN>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>> elapsed
[ 035 038 ]
DTOC:
Starting IN>>
[ 035 029 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tIN>>> EXT
[ 041 065 ]
DTOC:
IN>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>>> elapsed
[ 035 039 ]
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>
[ 035 030 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tIN>>>> EXT
[ 041 101 ]
DTOC:
IN>>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>>>> elapsed
[ 035 040 ]
Parameter
DTOC:
IN> PSx
DTOC:
IN>> PSx
DTOC:
IN>>> PSx
DTOC:
IN>>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
015
015
015
015
016
016
016
016
017
017
017
017
018
018
018
018
Parameter
DTOC:
tIN> PSx
DTOC:
tIN>> PSx
DTOC:
tIN>>> PSx
DTOC:
tIN>>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
027
027
027
027
028
028
028
028
029
029
029
029
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>>
[ 035 031 ]
030
030
030
030
45Z5046A
3.31.4.1
Where:
3-328
P437
3 Operation
Backward direction
VC-G
90+(IN)
VG-N = -VN-G
VA-G
(IN)
IN
Forward direction
VB-G
47Z1090A
DTOC:
VNG> PSx
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>>
[ 035 031 ]
f0
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
DTOC:
Angle VNG/IN
[ 009 004 ]
DTOC:
IN
402 625
DTOC:
Angle phi N PSx
[
(90+G)>(270+G)
(90+G)<(270+G)
Parameter
DTOC:
VNG> PSx
DTOC:
Angle phi N PSx
set
set
set
set
010
010
010
010
004
004
004
004
1
2
3
4
045
060
080
139
092
247
248
249
DTOC:
Fault N forward
[ 035 047 ]
DTOC:
Fault N backward
[ 035 048 ]
42Z50CGA
3-329
P437
3 Operation
After the operate delay has elapsed, a trip signal of the respective residual
current stage is issued if the set direction matches the measured direction.
DTOC:
Fault N forward
[ 035 047 ]
DTOC:
Fault N backward
[ 035 048 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
[
]
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>
[ 035 043 ]
DTOC:
tIN> elapsed
[ 035 037 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN>> PSx
[
]
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>>
[ 035 044 ]
DTOC:
tIN>> elapsed
[ 035 038 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN>>> PSx
[
]
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>>>
[ 035 045 ]
DTOC:
tIN>>> elapsed
[ 035 039 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN>>>>PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
Trip sign. tIN>>>>
[ 035 046 ]
DTOC:
tIN>>>> elapsed
[ 035 040 ]
Parameter
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
DTOC:
Direction tIN>> PSx
DTOC:
Direction tIN>>> PSx
DTOC:
Direction tIN>>>>PSx
set
set
set
set
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
072
1
2
3
4
032
042
082
091
033
043
083
092
034
044
084
093
035
045
085
094
42Z50CHA
3-330
P437
3 Operation
3.31.4.2
Forward directional
Backward directional
Non-directional
Normal: No change for the DTOC timer stage during a 1-pole dead time.
Normal: The directional decision is ignored during the 1-pole dead time; the
DTOC timer stage operates as if it where set to 'Non-directional'
Normal: During a 1-pole dead time the DTOC timer stage is automatically
blocked. If a starting was present it will be reset. The time delay stage is
also reset.
The same is valid for the negative-sequence elements, but here there are only
two setting options available:
3.31.4.4
Normal
Blocked
3-331
P437
3 Operation
This input function may also be applied to block the directional operation should a
measuring circuit failure occur (by using the signal from the associated m.c.b.).
DTOC:
tIneg> (1pHSR) PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: Normal
& >1
DTOC:
tIneg> PSx
[ * ]
1: Blocked
ARC:
Dead time 1p running
[ 037 066 ]
0
DTOC:
tIneg> elapsed
DTOC:
Blocking tIneg> EXT
[ 041 102 ]
[ 035 033 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>
[ 035 024 ]
Parameter
DTOC:
tIneg> (1pHSR) PSx
DTOC:
tIneg> PSx
set
set
set
set
002
002
002
002
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
160
161
162
163
023
023
023
023
47Z1119A
Fig. 3-257: DTOC operation of negative-sequence elements show for the stage Ineg> with the setting
D T O C : t I n e g > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x to D T O C : t I n e g > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x = Blocked.
3-332
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
tIN> (1pHSR) PSx
[
* Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DTOC:
tIN> (1pHSR) PSx
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
DTOC:
tIN> PSx
002
002
002
002
072
072
072
072
072
073
074
075
144
145
146
147
032
042
082
091
027
027
027
027
1
2
& >1
0: Normal
1: Non-directional
ARC:
Dead time 1p running
[ 037 066 ]
2: Blocked
DTOC:
Blocking tIN> EXT
[ 041 063 ]
& >1
&
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>
[ 035 043 ]
DTOC:
Fault N forward
&
[ 035 047 ]
DTOC:
Fault N backward
&
[ 035 048 ]
DTOC:
Block. dir. tIN> EXT
[ 002 176 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
[
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
DTOC:
tIN> PSx
2: Backward directional
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
tIN> elapsed
[ 035 037 ]
47Z1108A
Fig. 3-258: DTOC operation of neutral OC elements show for the stage IN> with the setting D T O C : t I N t i m e r
s t a r t P S x = With starting and D T O C : t I N > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x set to Nondirectional or Blocked.
3-333
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
tIN> (1pHSR) PSx
[
Parameter
DTOC:
tIN> (1pHSR) PSx
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
DTOC:
tIN> PSx
set
set
set
set
002
002
002
002
072
072
072
072
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
144
145
146
147
032
042
082
091
027
027
027
027
1
2
& >1
0: Normal
1: Non-directional
2: Blocked
ARC:
Dead time 1p running
[ 037 066 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tIN> EXT
[ 041 063 ]
& >1
DTOC:
Fault N forward
[ 035 047 ]
&
DTOC:
Fault N backward
[ 035 048 ]
&
DTOC:
Block. dir. tIN> EXT
[ 002 176 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
[
1
2
3
DTOC:
tIN> PSx
1: Forward directional
DTOC:
Trip signal tIN>
[ 035 043 ]
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
t
&
DTOC:
tIN> elapsed
[ 035 037 ]
47Z1107A
Fig. 3-259: DTOC operation of neutral OC elements show for the stage IN> with the setting D T O C : t I N t i m e r
s t a r t P S x = With direction and D T O C : t I N > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x set to Nondirectional or Blocked.
3-334
P437
3 Operation
3.31.5
As the IN> starting in the residual current stage commences, the hold time
is reset. At the same time, the starting time is accumulated when IN>
starting commences.
As IN> starting ends, the timer stage DTOC: Puls .prol. IN>,int PSx is
started and the charging of the accumulation buffer is thereby lengthened
by the set value of the timer stage.
If the limit value is reached and a general starting is present, then a trip
results (D TOC: Trip s ig. tI N>,intm .), which can be configured to the
trip commands 1 and 2.
With each release of the trigger stage IN>, the set hold-time D TOC: Holdt . tI N>,int m P Sx is restarted. When the hold time has elapsed or after the
hold-time logic has issued a trip (D TO C: Tr ip s ig. tI N>,in tm.)
accumulation is stopped and the accumulation buffer is cleared.
DTOC:
Puls.prol.IN>,intPSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>,interm. PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
Hold-t. tIN>,intmPSx
[ * ]
&
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
Hold-time logic
DTOC:
Trip sig. tIN>,intm.
[ 039 073 ]
DTOC:
t2 N
305 454
DTOC:
Pulse prolong. runn.
0
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
305 462
DTOC:
H.-time tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]
DTOC:
tIN>,interm. elapsed
[ 040 099 ]
Parameter
DTOC:
Puls.prol.IN>,intPSx
DTOC:
tIN>,interm. PSx
DTOC:
Hold-t. tIN>,intmPSx
set
set
set
set
017
073
074
075
017
073
074
075
017
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
055
042
042
042
056
038
038
038
057
039
039
039
49Z6449A
3-335
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC:
Pulse prolong. runn.
305 462
DTOC:
H.-time tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]
DTOC:
t2 N
305 454
DTOC:
Trip sig. tIN>,intm.
[ 039 073 ]
Settings
DTOC:
Puls.prol.IN>,intPSx
DTOC:
tIN>,interm. PSx
DTOC:
Hold-t. tIN>,intmPSx
Setting = 80ms
Setting = 15ms
Setting = 300ms
49Z6450A
Fig. 3-261: Signal flow for values below the accumulation limit value.
3-336
P437
3 Operation
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC:
Pulse prolong. runn.
305 462
DTOC:
H.-time tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]
DTOC:
t2 N
305 454
DTOC:
Trip sig. tIN>,intm.
[ 039 073 ]
Settings
DTOC:
Puls.prol.IN>,intPSx
DTOC:
tIN>,interm. PSx
DTOC:
Hold-t. tIN>,intmPSx
Setting = 80ms
Setting = 15ms
Setting = 300ms
49Z6451A
Fig. 3-262: Signal flow for values at the accumulation limit value.
3-337
P437
3.32
3 Operation
Negative-sequence current
Residual current.
The inrush stabilization function may intervene in the functional sequence of the
IDMT function.
3.32.1
IDMT:
General enable USER
[ 017 096 ]
0
IDMT:
Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
IDMT:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter
IDMT:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
070
070
070
070
19Z5020A
Fig. 3-263: Disabling or enabling IDMT protection. (Only IDMT1 is shown; the logic, however, also applies to IDMT2
with different numerical addresses.)
3-338
P437
3 Operation
3.32.2
Time-Dependent Characteristics
The measuring systems for phase currents, residual current and negativesequence current operate independently of each other and can be set
separately. The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table
below). The measured variable is the maximum phase current, the negativesequence current, or the residual current, depending on the measuring system.
The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in the following
figures (Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-340) to Fig. 3-267, (p. 3-342)).
No.
Tripping
Characteristic
Characteristic
settable factor:
k = 0.05 ... 10.00
Definite Time
t=k
t =k
Standard Inverse
I
ref
0.02
Very Inverse
13.50
1.00
Extremely Inverse
80.00
2.00
120.00
1.00
t = k (
(I
Moderately Inverse
6
7
b
) -1
0.14
a
(I
Constants
I
ref
)b - 1
tr =
+ c)
k R
I 2
(I
) -1
ref
0.0515
0.0200
0.1140
4.85
Very Inverse
19.6100
2.0000
0.4910
21.60
Extremely Inverse
28.2000
2.0000
0.1217
29.10
Per ANSI
t = k (
(I
I
ref
+ c)
tr =
) -1
k R
I 2
(I
) -1
ref
Normally Inverse
8.9341
2.0938
0.17966
9.00
0.2663
1.2969
0.03393
0.50
10
5.6143
1.0000
2.18592
15.75
11
RI-Type Inverse
t =k
1
0.339 -
12
RXIDG-Type Inverse
0.236
I
)
(I
ref
t = k (5.8 - 1.35 ln I
I
ref
3-339
P437
3 Operation
1000
100
100
k=10
10
10
t/s
k=1
k=10
t/s
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
1000
1000
100
100
k=10
10
10
t/s
k=10
k=1
t/s
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
k=1
0.1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
3-340
P437
3 Operation
1000
100
100
10
10
k=10
t/s
k=10
t/s
1
k=1
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
3-341
P437
3 Operation
1000
100
100
10
10
t/s
k=10
t/s
1
k=10
k=1
0.1
0.1
k=1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 k=0.1
k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
100
k=10
10
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
1000
100
100
k=10
10
k=10
10
t/s
k=1
1
t/s
k=1
1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
I/Iref
3-342
P437
3 Operation
3.32.3
Enable Thresholds
t/s 10
neg
IDMT:
Iref,y PSx
IDMT:
Min. trip time y PSx
1
1
10
P
Parameter
IDMT:
Factor KI,P PSx
100
G
IDMT:
Factor KI,N PSx
neg
IDMT:
Factor KI,neg PSx
set 1
007 250
001 173
007 254
set 2
007 251
001 174
007 255
set 3
007 252
001 175
008 002
set 4
007 253
001 176
008 005
Parameter
IDMT:
Min. trip time P PSx
IDMT:
Min. trip time N PSx
set 1
072 077
072 079
072 078
set 2
073 077
073 079
073 078
neg
IDMT:
Min.trip time negPSx
set 3
074 077
074 079
074 078
set 4
075 077
075 079
075 078
45Z8004A
Fig. 3-268: Influence of the minimum operate value and the minimum trip time on the IDMT characteristics.
3-343
P437
3.32.4
3 Operation
3-344
P437
3 Operation
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,P> Px
450 156
IDMT:
Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
&
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
IDMT:
Starting A
IDMT:
Iref,P PSx
[
*
]
304 359
IDMT:
Starting B
304 360
IDMT:
Starting C
1.05 Iref
304 361
IA
&
IB
&
IC
&
Setting
IDMT:
Characteristic P PSx
IDMT:
Characteristic P PSx
[
0: Definite Time
IDMT:
Min. trip time P PSx
[
IDMT:
Factor kt,P PSx
[
Setting
IDMT:
Release P PSx
IDMT:
Hold time P PSx
[
1: Without delay
IDMT:
Release P PSx
IDMT:
Factor KI,P PSx
[
IDMT:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Block. tIref,P> EXT
[ 040 101 ]
c
IDMT:
Memory P clear
[ 040 110 ]
IP,max/Iref,P
IDMT:
Hold time P running
[ 040 053 ]
IDMT:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Parameter
IDMT:
Iref,P PSx
IDMT:
Characteristic P PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
050
050
050
050
056
056
056
056
Parameter
IDMT:
Factor kt,P PSx
IDMT:
Min. trip time P PSx
IDMT:
Hold time P PSx
IDMT:
Release P PSx
IDMT:
Factor KI,P PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
007
007
007
007
1
2
3
4
053
053
053
053
077
077
077
077
071
071
071
071
059
059
059
059
250
251
252
253
45Z8034A
3-345
P437
3.32.5
3 Operation
I neg = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |
Phase sequence A-C-B (alternative terminology: anti-clockwise rotating field):
I neg =
1
3
| (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
3-346
P437
3 Operation
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,neg>
450 161
IDMT:
Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
&
306 001
IDMT:
Iref,neg PSx
[
*
]
1.05 Iref
Ineg/Iref,neg
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
&
IA
IDMT:
Starting Iref,neg>
[ 040 107 ]
Ineg
IB
IC
Setting
IDMT:
Character. neg. PSx
IDMT:
Character. neg. PSx
[
*
]
IDMT:
Factor kt,neg PSx
[
*
]
Setting
IDMT:
Release neg. PSx
0: Definite Time
1: IEC Standard Inverse
IDMT:
Min.trip time negPSx
[
*
]
IDMT:
Hold time neg PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
Release neg. PSx
[
*
]
1: Without delay
2: Delayed as per char.
IDMT:
Factor KI,neg PSx
[
*
]
&
IDMT:
Block. tIref,neg>EXT
[ 040 102 ]
IDMT:
Memory neg clear
MAIN:
Bl. timer st. IN,neg
306 400
[ 040 111 ]
IDMT:
Hold time neg runn.
[ 040 113 ]
IDMT:
tIref,neg> elapsed
[ 040 109 ]
Parameter
IDMT:
Iref,neg PSx
IDMT:
Character. neg. PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
051
051
051
051
057
057
057
057
Parameter
IDMT:
Factor kt,neg PSx
IDMT:
Min.trip time negPSx
IDMT:
Hold time neg PSx
IDMT:
Release neg. PSx
IDMT:
Factor KI,neg PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
007
007
008
008
1
2
3
4
054
054
054
054
078
078
078
078
072
072
072
072
060
060
060
060
254
255
002
005
45Z8035A
3-347
P437
3 Operation
3.32.6
IDMT:
Evaluation IN PSx
[ * ]
IN
2
1
IA
IB
IC
1
1: Calculated
IDMT:
IN
307 100
2: Measured
Parameter
IDMT:
Evaluation IN PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
075
075
075
075
19Z5022A
3.32.7
3-348
P437
3 Operation
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,N>
450 160
IDMT:
Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
IDMT:
Iref,N PSx
c
1.05 Iref
IDMT:
Starting Iref,N>
[ 040 081 ]
&
IN/Iref,N
IDMT:
IN
307 100
IDMT:
Characteristic N PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
Characteristic N PSx
IDMT:
Factor kt,N PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
Min. trip time N PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
Hold time N PSx
[ * ]
Setting
IDMT:
Release N PSx
IDMT:
Release N PSx
[ * ]
Setting
0: Definite Time
2: IEC Very Inverse
3: IEC Extr. Inverse
4: IEC Long Time Inv.
5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
6: IEEE Very Inverse
7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
8: ANSI Normally Inv.
9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
1: Without delay
IDMT:
Factor KI,N PSx
[ * ]
&
IDMT:
Block. tIref,N> EXT
[ 040 103 ]
MAIN:
Bl. timer st. IN,neg
IDMT:
Memory N clear
[ 040 112 ]
306 400
IDMT:
Hold time N running
[ 040 054 ]
Parameter
IDMT:
Iref,N PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
IDMT:
tIref,N> elapsed
[ 040 083 ]
052
052
052
052
Parameter
IDMT:
Characteristic N PSx
IDMT:
Factor kt,N PSx
IDMT:
Min. trip time N PSx
IDMT:
Hold time N PSx
IDMT:
Release N PSx
IDMT:
Factor KI,N PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
001
001
001
001
1
2
3
4
058
058
058
058
055
055
055
055
079
079
079
079
073
073
073
073
061
061
061
061
173
174
175
176
45Z8036A
3.32.8
Holding Time
Depending on the current flow the P437 will determine the tripping time and a
timer stage is started. The setting of the hold time defines the time period during
which the IDMT protection starting time is stored after the starting has dropped
out. Should starting recur during the hold time period then the time of the
renewed starting will be added to the time period stored. When the starting
times sum reach the tripping time value determined by the P437 then the
corresponding signal will be issued. Should starting not recur during the hold
time period then, depending on the setting, the memory storing the accumulated
starting times value will either be cleared without delay or according to the
3-349
P437
3 Operation
characteristic set. In Fig. 3-273, (p. 3-350), the effect of hold time is shown by
the example of a phase current stage.
Case A
IDMT:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Hold time P running
[ 040 053 ]
Per characteristic
Non-delayed
IDMT:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Case B
IDMT:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Hold time P running
[ 040 053 ]
IDMT:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Parameter
IDMT:
Hold time P PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
071
071
071
071
19Z5025A
Fig. 3-273: Effect of hold time shown with a phase current stage as an example. Example A: Hold time determined
is not reached. Example B: Hold time determined is reached.
3-350
P437
3 Operation
3.33
THERM:
General enable USER
[ 022 050 ]
0
1
THERM:
Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
&
0: No
1: Yes
THERM:
Enable PSx
[
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSU:
PS y active
[ * ]
PSU:
PS y active
Parameter
THERM:
Enable PSx
1
2
3
4
036
036
036
036
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
090
091
092
093
1
2
3
4
175
175
175
175
19Z6112B
3.33.1
3.33.2
Operating Modes
Two operating modes can be selected for thermal overload protection.
Relative replica
Absolute replica
Either operating mode can be enabled or disabled individually. Only one of the
operating modes may be enabled for thermal overload protection. However, if
both operating modes are enabled at the same time, the thermal overload
protection is blocked and the error message TH ERM: Sett ing e rror,block . is
generated by the P437.
3-351
P437
3.33.3
3 Operation
The thermal model uses these signals as a criterion to determine a fault in the
coolant temperature measurement. A fault at both measured value inputs
selected will lead to the issuance of the signal THE RM: CTA er ror.
The setting for THERM: Fu nct.f .CTA fail .PSx determines how the thermal
overload protection is to continue functioning when the coolant temperature
measurement has failed. The following functions can be selected to guarantee
continued and stable performance of the thermal overload protection when the
coolant temperature measurement has failed.
Blocking:
The signals THERM: W arni ng and TH ER M: Trip signal are reset and
blocked. The thermal model will then be continued and displayed on the
basis of the measured current alone. All further measured values are issued
as Not measured.
3-352
P437
3 Operation
3.33.4
THERM:
Select meas.inputPSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
&
THERM:
With CTA
305 201
1: From PT100
2: From 20 mA input
&
MEASI:
PT100 faulty
[ 040 190 ]
&
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
MEASI:
Open circ. 20mA inp.
THERM:
CTA error
[ 039 111 ]
[ 040 192 ]
THERM:
CTA error EXT
[ 038 062 ]
SFMON:
CTA error
[ 098 034 ]
THERM:
Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx
[ * ]
1
2
&
THERM:
Block. by CTA error
305 200
Parameter
THERM:
Select meas.inputPSx
THERM:
Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
177
177
177
177
177
177
177
177
45Z8010A
3.33.5
Relative Replica
The rated operating current of the protected object and its overload tolerance for
maximum coolant (ambient) temperature are the basis of the relative thermal
replica.
In the Relative replica operating mode, the following settings have to be made
for thermal overload protection:
The rated operating current of the protected object: THE RM: Iref PSx
3-353
P437
3.33.6
3 Operation
Absolute Replica
The thermal limit current of the protected object is the reference current of the
absolute thermal replica. For this limit current, an overtemperature results at the
maximum coolant temperature.
In the Absolute replica operating mode, the following parameters have to be set
for thermal overload protection:
The thermal limit current of the protected object: IDMT: Min. trip time N
P Sx
The limit temperature for tripping max, THE RM: Max.object tem p. PSx
The overtemperature as a result of a persistent limit current (max c,max ), THERM: O/T f. Ire f pers . PSx
The maximum permitted coolant temperature c,max is derived from the difference
between the T H E R M : M a x . o b j e c t t e m p . P S x and T H E R M : O / T f . I r e f p e r s .
P S x settings.
3-354
P437
3 Operation
3.33.7
Tripping Characteristics
The maximum RMS phase current I is used to track a first-order thermal replica
as specified in IEC 255-8. Other than the operating mode dependent settings the
following parameters will govern the tripping time:
t = ln
(I
I
ref
)2 - 0
a - a,max
)2 - trip (1 -
)
ref
max - a,max
I
The trip tripping threshold is set to a fixed value of 100% if the operating mode
is Absolute replica.
/%
10000
1000
/ min
100
200
110
10
1000
50
t / min
1
200
110
30
50
0.1
200
110
0.01
50
0.001
0
I / I ref
10
11
D5Z50BEB_EN
Fig. 3-276: Tripping characteristics of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to P = 0 % and
identical settings for the maximum permissible coolant temperature and coolant temperature).
3-355
P437
3.33.8
3 Operation
Warning Signal
Depending on the selected operating mode, a warning signal can be set at one of
the following parameters:
3.33.9
Trip
The trip threshold is set according to the selected operating mode with the
following parameters:
If a trip command is issued, the trip signal is maintained until the status of the
thermal replica has decreased by the value set at TTHERM: Hystere s. ,tr ip
PS x, at least for a fixed time of 5 s.
3.33.10
Cooling
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the thermal replica is
applied with the time constant set at THERM: Ti m.const.2,<Ibl PSx. This
element in the thermal model takes account of the cooling characteristics of
stopped motors.
These two time constants should be set to the same value for transformers and
power lines.
3-356
P437
3 Operation
IA
THERM:
I
COMP
IB
305 202
IC
IP,max
MAIN:
Protection active
AR_MV
&
306 001
THERM:
Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM:
Starting k*Iref>
[ 041 108 ]
THERM:
Block replica EXT
[ 041 074 ]
THERM:
Block. by CTA error
&
305 200
THERM:
Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
[ * ]
c
THERM:
Iref PSx
[ * ]
<0.1 Iref
THERM:
Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
Start.fact.OL_RC PSx
[ * ]
kIref
THERM:
O/T f.Iref pers. PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
Warning temp. PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
c Max.object temp. PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
Absolute replica
[ 022 065 ]
THERM:
c Max. cool. temp. PSx
[ * ]
c
THERM:
warning PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
trip PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
Coolant temp. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
THERM:
Relative replica
[ 022 064 ]
THERM:
Within pre-trip time
[ 041 109 ]
SFMON:
Setting error THERM
[ 098 035 ]
THERM:
Setting error,block.
[ 039 110 ]
THERM:
Warning
[ 039 025 ]
THERM:
Trip signal
[ 039 020 ]
THERM:
Hysteres. ,trip PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
Warning pre-trip PSx
[ * ]
0
1
THERM:
Buffer empty
[ 039 112 ]
0: No
1: Yes
THERM:
With CTA
THERM:
Status THERM replica
[ 004 016 ]
305 201
Coolant temperature
THERM:
Object temperature
[ 004 137 ]
THERM:
Coolant temperature
[ 004 149 ]
I/Iref
THERM:
Reset replica
[ 039 061 ]
c
Parameter
THERM:
Iref PSx
THERM:
Start.fact.OL_RC PSx
THERM:
Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
179
179
179
179
180
180
180
180
THERM:
Pre-trip time left
[ 004 139 ]
THERM:
Temp. offset replica
[ 004 109 ]
THERM:
Coolant temp. p.u.
[ 004 178 ]
THERM:
Object temp. p.u.
[ 004 179 ]
187
187
187
187
Parameter
THERM:
Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
THERM:
O/T f.Iref pers. PSx
THERM:
Warning temp. PSx
THERM:
Max.object temp. PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
188
188
188
188
167
167
167
167
153
153
153
153
THERM:
Therm. replica p.u.
[ 004 017 ]
THERM:
Current I,therm prim
[ 007 220 ]
182
182
182
182
THERM:
Current I,therm p.u
[ 007 221 ]
Parameter
THERM:
Max. cool. temp. PSx
THERM:
warning PSx
THERM:
trip PSx
THERM:
Coolant temp. PSx
THERM:
Hysteres. ,trip PSx
THERM:
Warning pre-trip PSx
set
set
set
set
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
072
073
074
075
1
2
3
4
185
185
185
185
184
184
184
184
181
181
181
181
186
186
186
186
183
183
183
183
191
191
191
191
19Z8042A
3.33.11
Resetting
The thermal replica may be reset either via a setting parameter or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when
3-357
P437
3 Operation
THERM:
Reset replica USER
[ 022 061 ]
0
1
THERM:
Reset replica
[ 039 061 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
THERM:
Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM:
Reset replica EXT
[ 038 061 ]
Q9Z5020A
3-358
P437
3 Operation
3.34
3.34.1
3.34.2
V<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 030 ]
0
1
0: No
V<>:
Enabled
[ 040 066 ]
1: Yes
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
V<>:
Not ready
[ 042 004 ]
45Z8085A
3-359
P437
3 Operation
3.34.3
The undervoltage stages are blocked if during active monitoring the set
threshold of at least one phase is not exceeded by the phase currents.
V<>:
Op. mode V< mon. PSx
[
]
V<>:
V< ready
460 506
1
0: Without
1: With
V<>:
I enable V< PSx
[
IA
IB
IC
Parameter
V<>:
Op. mode V< mon. PSx
V<>:
I enable V< PSx
set
set
set
set
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
1
2
3
4
162
163
164
165
155
159
160
161
19Z8089A
3-360
P437
3 Operation
3.34.4
V<>:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
fnom
VA-G
VB-G
fnom
VC-G
fnom
fnom
VA-G 3
fnom
2
VB-G 3
fnom
VC-G 3
1VA(-B)
1
1VB(-C)
1VC(-A)
1: Delta
2: Star
Parameter
V<>:
Operating mode PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
001
001
001
001
47Z0147A
3-361
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV> elapsed
[ 041 034 ]
1VA(-B)
1VB(-C)
V<>:
Starting V>
[ 041 030 ]
1VC(-A)
V<>:
tV> 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Blocking tV> EXT
[ 041 068 ]
V<>:
tV> 3-pole elapsed
[ 041 098 ]
V<>:
Starting V> 3-pole
[ 041 097 ]
V<>:
tV>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV>> elapsed
[ 041 035 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>
[ 041 096 ]
V<>:
tV>> 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Blocking tV>> EXT
[ 041 069 ]
V<>:
tV>> 3-pole elapsed
[ 010 227 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>>
[ 010 231 ]
V<>:
Starting V>/>> A(-B)
[ 041 031 ]
V<>:
Starting V>/>> B(-C)
[ 041 032 ]
Parameter
V<>:
V> PSx
V<>:
tV> PSx
V<>:
tV> 3-pole PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
003
003
003
003
005
005
005
005
V<>:
Starting V>/>> C(-A)
[ 041 033 ]
027
027
027
027
Parameter
V<>:
V>> PSx
V<>:
tV>> PSx
V<>:
tV>> 3-pole PSx
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
011
011
011
011
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
004
004
004
004
006
006
006
006
092
094
095
096
048
048
048
048
19Z8091A
3-362
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV>>> PSx
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[
V<>:
V>>> PSx
[
]
V<>:
tV>>> elapsed
[ 010 233 ]
1VA(-B)
1VB(-C)
V<>:
Starting V>>>
[ 010 231 ]
1VC(-A)
V<>:
tV>>> 3-pole PSx
[
V<>:
Blocking tV>>> EXT
[ 010 246 ]
V<>:
tV>>> 3-pole elapsed
[ 010 234 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>> 3-pole
[ 010 232 ]
Parameter
V<>:
V>>> PSx
V<>:
tV>>> PSx
V<>:
tV>>> 3-pole PSx
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
set
set
set
set
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
099
105
117
118
048
048
048
048
19Z8092A
3-363
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tV< EXT
[ 041 070 ]
V<>:
tV< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V< ready
V<>:
tV< elapsed
[ 041 041 ]
V<>:
V< PSx
[
]
Setting(s) blocked
1VA(-B)
1VB(-C)
V<>:
Starting V<
[ 041 037 ]
V<>:
tV< 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
1VC(-A)
V<>:
Fault V<
[ 041 110 ]
V<>:
tV< 3-pole elapsed
[ 042 006 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting V< 3-pole
[ 042 005 ]
V<>:
tV<< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Fault V< 3-pole
[ 041 111 ]
V<>:
V<< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed
[ 041 042 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting V<<
[ 041 099 ]
V<>:
tV<< 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Fault V<<
[ 041 112 ]
V<>:
Blocking tV<< EXT
[ 041 071 ]
V<>:
tV>> 3-pole elapsed
[ 010 227 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
tV< elaps. transient
[ 042 023 ]
V<>:
Starting V<< 3-pole
[ 010 228 ]
V<>:
tV< 3p elaps. trans.
[ 042 024 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed trans.
[ 042 025 ]
V<>:
tV<< 3p elaps. trans
[ 010 230 ]
V<>:
Fault V<< 3-pole
[ 011 132 ]
Parameter
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
V<>:
Starting V</<< A(-B)
[ 041 038 ]
V<>:
Starting V</<< B(-C)
[ 041 039 ]
048
048
048
048
V<>:
Starting V</<< C(-A)
[ 041 040 ]
Parameter
V<>:
V< PSx
V<>:
tV< PSx
V<>:
tV< 3-pole PSx
V<>:
V<< PSx
V<>:
tV<< PSx
V<>:
tV<< 3-pole PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
011
011
011
011
1
2
3
4
007
007
007
007
009
009
009
009
028
028
028
028
008
008
008
008
010
010
010
010
119
124
125
126
19Z8093A
Fig. 3-284: Undervoltage monitoring, Part 1: stages V< and V<<. (Transient pulse: See following diagram.)
3-364
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tV<<< EXT
[ 010 247 ]
V<>:
tV<<< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V< ready
V<>:
tV<<< elapsed
[ 010 237 ]
V<>:
V<<< PSx
[ * ]
Setting(s) blocked
1VA(-B)
1VB(-C)
V<>:
Starting V<<<
[ 010 235 ]
V<>:
tV<<< 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
1VC(-A)
V<>:
Fault V<<<
[ 011 134]
V<>:
tV<<< 3-pole elapsed
[ 010 239 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting V<<< 3-pole
[ 010 236 ]
V<>:
Fault V<<< 3-pole
[ 011 133 ]
V<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[
*
]
V<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV< elapsed
[ 041 041 ]
V<>:
tV< elaps. transient
[ 042 023 ]
V<>:
tV< 3-pole elapsed
[ 042 006 ]
V<>:
tV< 3p elaps. trans.
[ 042 024 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed
[ 041 042 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed trans.
[ 042 025 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed
[ 041 042 ]
V<>:
tV<< 3p elaps. trans
[ 010 230 ]
V<>:
tV<<< elaps.transien
[ 010 238 ]
V<>:
tV<<< 3p elaps.trans
[ 010 240]
V<>:
tV</<</<<< el.trans
[ 042 007 ]
Parameter
V<>:
V<<< PSx
V<>:
tV<<< PSx
V<>:
tV<<< 3-pole PSx
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
V<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
set
set
set
set
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
076
077
078
079
076 029
1
2
3
4
083
083
083
083
088
088
088
088
127
127
127
127
048
048
048
048
077 029
078 029
079 029
19Z8094A
Fig. 3-285: Undervoltage monitoring, Part 2: stage V<<< and transient pulse for stages V</<</<<<.
3-365
P437
3.34.5
3 Operation
Negative-sequence voltage:
Vneg =
Positive-sequence voltage:
Vpos =
3-366
1
3
1
3
P437
3 Operation
Negative-sequence voltage:
Vneg =
Positive-sequence voltage:
Vpos =
1
3
1
3
Symbols used:
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
&
306 001
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
fnom
VA-G
V<>:
Vpos
305 250
fnom
VB-G
Vpos
fnom
VC-G
Vneg
V<>:
Vneg
305 251
D5Z50AYB
Fig. 3-286: Determination of positive- and negative-sequence voltages. (Note: The previous terminology for
MAIN: Phase sequence was MAIN: Rotary field.)
3-367
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tVpos> EXT
[ 041 090 ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVpos> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Vpos> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVpos> elapsed
[ 042 012 ]
V<>:
Vpos
305 250
V<>:
Starting Vpos>
[ 042 010 ]
V<>:
Blocking tVpos>> EXT
[ 041 091 ]
V<>:
tVpos>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Vpos>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVpos>> elapsed
[ 042 013 ]
V<>:
Blocking tVpos< EXT
[ 041 092 ]
V<>:
Starting Vpos>>
[ 042 011 ]
V<>:
tVpos< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V< ready
460 506
V<>:
Vpos< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVpos< elapsed
[ 042 016 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting Vpos<
[ 042 014 ]
V<>:
tVpos<< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Blocking tVpos<< EXT
[ 041 093 ]
V<>:
Fault Vpos<
[ 041 113 ]
V<>:
tVpos<< elapsed
[ 042 017 ]
V<>:
Vpos<< PSx
[ * ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting Vpos<<
[ 042 015 ]
V<>:
Fault Vpos<<
[ 041 114 ]
V<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
V<>:
Vpos> PSx
076 015
077 015
078 015
079 015
V<>:
tVpos> PSx
076 017
077 017
078 017
079 017
V<>:
Vpos>> PSx
076 016
077 016
078 016
079 016
V<>:
tVpos>> PSx
076 018
077 018
078 018
079 018
V<>:
Vpos< PSx
076 019
077 019
078 019
079 019
V<>:
tVpos< PSx
076 021
077 021
078 021
079 021
V<>:
tVpos< elaps. trans.
[ 042 026 ]
V<>:
tVpos<< elaps.trans.
[ 042 027 ]
V<>:
tVpos</<< elap.trans
[ 042 018 ]
V<>:
Vpos<< PSx
076 020
077 020
078 020
079 020
V<>:
tVpos<< PSx
076 022
077 022
078 022
079 022
V<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
076 029
077 029
078 029
079 029
V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
076 049
077 049
078 049
079 049
19Z80AZA
3-368
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tVneg> EXT
[ 041 094 ]
V<>:
tVneg> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Vneg> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVneg> elapsed
[ 042 021 ]
V<>:
Vneg
305 251
V<>:
Starting Vneg>
[ 042 019 ]
V<>:
Blocking tVneg>> EXT
[ 041 095 ]
V<>:
tVneg>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Vneg>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVneg>> elapsed
[ 042 022 ]
V<>:
Starting Vneg>>
[ 042 020 ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
V<>:
Vneg> PSx
076 023
077 023
078 023
079 023
V<>:
tVneg> PSx
076 025
077 025
078 025
079 025
V<>:
Vneg>> PSx
076 024
077 024
078 024
079 024
V<>:
tVneg>> PSx
076 026
077 026
078 026
079 026
V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
076 049
077 049
078 049
079 049
D5Z52BAA
3-369
P437
3 Operation
3.34.6
V<>:
Evaluation VNG PSx
[ * ]
VN-G
2
1
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
V<>:
VNG
305 252
1: Calculated
2: Measured
Parameter
V<>:
Evaluation VNG PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
002
002
002
002
47Z0148A
V<>:
Blocking tVNG> EXT
[ 041 072 ]
V<>:
tVNG> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
VNG> PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
V<>:
tVNG> elapsed
[ 041 045 ]
V<>:
Blocking tVNG>> EXT
[ 041 073 ]
V<>:
Starting VNG>
[ 041 044 ]
V<>:
VNG>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVNG>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVNG>> elapsed
[ 041 046 ]
V<>:
VNG
305 252
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
V<>:
VNG> PSx
076 011
077 011
078 011
079 011
V<>:
tVNG> PSx
076 013
077 013
078 013
079 013
V<>:
VNG>> PSx
076 012
077 012
078 012
079 012
V<>:
tVNG>> PSx
076 014
077 014
078 014
079 014
V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
076 049
077 049
078 049
079 049
V<>:
Starting VNG>>
[ 042 008 ]
D5Z52BCA
3.34.7
3-370
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tVref> EXT
[ 007 036 ]
V<>:
tVref> PSx
V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
[ * ]
[
C
V<>:
Vref> PSx
[
V<>:
tVref> elapsed
Vref
[ 007 047 ]
V<>:
Starting Vref>
V<>:
Blocking tVref>> EXT
[ 007 037 ]
[ 007 051 ]
V<>:
tVref>> PSx
[
C
V<>:
Vref>> PSx
[
V<>:
tVref>> elapsed
[ 007 048 ]
V<>:
Block. tVref>>> EXT
[ 010 248 ]
V<>:
Starting Vref>>
[ 007 052 ]
V<>:
tVref>>> PSx
[
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V<>:
Vref>>> PSx
[ * ]
MCMON:
M.circ. Vref faulty
[ 007 213 ]
V<>:
tVref>>> elapsed
[ 010 242 ]
V<>:
Starting Vref>>>
[ 010 241 ]
Parameter
V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
set
set
set
set
076
077
078
079
1
2
3
4
049
049
049
049
Parameter
V<>:
Vref> PSx
V<>:
tVref> PSx
V<>:
Vref>> PSx
V<>:
tVref>> PSx
V<>:
Vref>>> PSx
V<>:
tVref>>> PSx
set
set
set
set
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
1
2
3
4
064
071
075
079
066
069
073
077
065
068
072
076
067
070
074
078
065
068
072
076
067
070
074
078
19Z8095A
3-371
P437
3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tVref< EXT
[ 007 039 ]
V<>:
tVref< PSx
V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
[ * ]
[
C
V<>:
Vref< PSx
[ * ]
]
V<>:
tVref< elapsed
[ 007 053 ]
V<>:
Fault Vref<
[ 007 061 ]
Vref
V<>:
Blocking tVref<< EXT
[ 007 046 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting Vref<
[ 007 055 ]
V<>:
tVref<< PSx
[
C
V<>:
Vref<< PSx
[
V<>:
tVref<< elapsed
[ 007 054 ]
V<>:
Fault Vref<<
[ 007 062 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Block. tVref<<< EXT
[ 010 249 ]
V<>:
Starting Vref<<
[ 007 056 ]
V<>:
tVref<<< PSx
[
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V<>:
Vref<<< PSx
[
V<>:
tVref<< elapsed
[ 007 054 ]
MCMON:
M.circ. Vref faulty
[ 007 213 ]
V<>:
Fault Vref<<<
[ 011 135 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting Vref<<<
[ 010 243 ]
V<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVref< elaps. trans.
[ 007 057 ]
V<>:
tVref<< elaps.trans.
[ 007 060 ]
V<>:
tVref<<< elaps.trans
[ 010 245 ]
Parameter
V<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
076
077
078
079
076
077
078
079
029
029
029
029
V<>:
tVref</<</<<< el.tr.
[ 007 063 ]
049
049
049
049
Parameter
V<>:
Vref< PSx
V<>:
tVref< PSx
V<>:
Vref<< PSx
V<>:
tVref<< PSx
V<>:
Vref<<< PSx
V<>:
tVref<<< PSx
set
set
set
set
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
007
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
011
1
2
3
4
086
097
101
105
088
099
103
107
087
098
102
106
096
100
104
108
059
062
069
070
071
072
073
074
19Z8096A
3-372
P437
3 Operation
3.35
3.35.1
f<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 031 ]
0
1
0: No
f<>:
Enabled
[ 042 100 ]
1: Yes
f<>:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Ready
[ 042 101 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter
f<>:
Enable PSx
set
set
set
set
018
018
018
018
1
2
3
4
f<>:
Not ready
[ 042 140 ]
196
197
198
199
F5Z0104C
3-373
P437
3.35.2
3 Operation
f<>:
Selection meas. volt
[ 018 202 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
f<>:
Ready
[ 042 101 ]
fnom
VA-G
VA-G 3
VB-G
VB-G 3
VC-G
VC-G 3
fnom
2
fnom
3
fnom
4
fnom
5
fnom
6
f<>:
VMeas
305 725
1: Voltage A-G
2: Voltage B-G
3: Voltage C-G
4: Voltage A-B
5: Voltage B-C
6: Voltage C-A
47Z0150A
3-374
P437
3 Operation
3.35.3
f<>:
Undervolt. block. V<
[ 018 200 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
f<>:
VMeas
305 725
f<>:
Evaluation time
[ 018 201 ]
f<>:
No. periods reached
305 701
f<>:
fMeas
305 726
47Z0151A
3.35.4
3.35.5
Frequency monitoring
Frequency Monitoring
Depending on the setting, the P437 monitors the frequency to determine
whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess
of the set nominal frequency is set, the P437 checks to determine whether the
frequency exceeds the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set
nominal frequency is set, the P437 checks to determine whether the frequency
falls below the operate threshold. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a
set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-375
P437
3.35.6
3 Operation
3.35.7
3-376
P437
3 Operation
f<
t
Start t
Start t
Function blocked
Trip f/t
F5Z0128C
3-377
P437
3 Operation
f<>:
Blocking f1 EXT
[ 042 103 ]
f<>:
Oper. mode f1 PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: f
2: f with df/dt
f<>:
f1 PSx
[ * ]
3: f w. Delta f/Delta t
MAIN:
Nominal frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
f<>:
tf1 PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Ready
[ 042 101 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
f<>:
Trip signal f1
[ 042 111 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
f<>:
Starting f1
[ 042 107 ]
f<>:
df1/dt PSx
[
*
]
f<>:
No. periods reached
305 701
f<>:
fMeas
df/dt
305 726
f<>:
Starting f1/df1
[ 042 108 ]
SFMON:
Setting error f<>
[ 098 028 ]
f>
f<>:
Delta f1 PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Delta t1 PSx
[ * ]
df/dt
f<>:
Delta f1 triggered
[ 042 109 ]
Start. cond. met
f<>:
Delta t1 elapsed
[ 042 110 ]
Parameter
f<>:
Oper. mode f1 PSx
f<>:
f1 PSx
f<>:
df1/dt PSx
f<>:
Delta f1 PSx
f<>:
Delta t1 PSx
f<>:
tf1 PSx
set
set
set
set
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
018
1
2
3
4
120
121
122
123
100
101
102
103
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
104
105
106
107
47Z0152A
3-378
P437
3 Operation
3.35.8
fmin-/fmax Measurement
For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency
condition and for the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an
overfrequency condition, the two following measured event values are available:
Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new
overfrequency or underfrequency situation. A manual reset is also possible:
3-379
P437
3.36
3 Operation
3.36.1
P<>:
General enable USER
[ 014 220 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
P<>:
Enabled PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Enabled
[ 036 250 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter
P<>:
Enabled PSx
set
set
set
set
014
014
014
014
1
2
3
4
252
253
254
255
45Z5051A
3.36.2
Power Determination
The P437 determines the active and reactive power from the three phase
currents and the phase-to-ground voltages. If the measuring-circuit monitoring
function detects malfunctioning in the voltage measuring circuit, power
determination will be blocked.
3-380
P437
3 Operation
3.36.3
Power Monitoring
The P437 checks the determined power values to detect whether they exceed or
fall below set thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be
blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of power monitoring are to be included in the trip commands
when values have fallen below set thresholds, then it is recommended that
transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always be present
when the system voltage was disconnected, and it would therefore not be
possible to close the circuit breaker again.
P<>:
Enabled
[ 036 250 ]
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
fnom
P<>:
P
IA
402 631
fnom
IB
fnom
IC
fnom
VA-G
fnom
VB-G
fnom
VC-G
P<>:
P+
402 633
P<>:
P402 634
P<>:
Q
402 632
P<>:
Q+
402 635
P<>:
Q402 636
45Z5052A
3-381
P437
3 Operation
3.36.4
P<>:
Operate delay P> PSx
[
]
P<>:
Release delay P> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Blocking tP> EXT
[ 035 082 ]
P<>:
Signal P> delayed
[ 035 087 ]
P<>:
P> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
P
P<>:
Starting P>
[ 035 086 ]
402 631
P<>:
Operate delay P>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay P>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Blocking tP>> EXT
[ 035 083 ]
P<>:
Signal P>> delayed
[ 035 090 ]
P<>:
P>> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Starting P>>
[ 035 089 ]
Parameter
P<>:
P> PSx
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P> PSx
P<>:
Operate delay P> PSx
P<>:
Release delay P> PSx
set
set
set
set
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
1
2
3
4
120
200
201
202
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
Parameter
P<>:
P>> PSx
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P>>PSx
P<>:
Operate delay P>>PSx
P<>:
Release delay P>>PSx
set
set
set
set
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
1
2
3
4
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
19Z5271A
Fig. 3-300: Active power monitoring when the set thresholds are exceeded.
3-382
P437
3 Operation
3.36.5
P<>:
Direction P> PSx
[
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>:
Trip signal P>
[ 035 088 ]
P<>:
Signal P> delayed
[ 035 087 ]
P<>:
P+
402 633
P<>:
P402 634
P<>:
Direction P>> PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>:
Trip signal P>>
[ 035 091 ]
P<>:
Signal P>> delayed
[ 035 090 ]
Parameter
P<>:
Direction P> PSx
P<>:
Direction P>> PSx
set
set
set
set
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
1
2
3
4
136
137
138
139
156
157
158
159
45Z5054A
Fig. 3-301: Direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when the set thresholds are
exceeded.
3-383
P437
3 Operation
3.36.6
P<>:
Operate delay Q> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay Q> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Blocking tQ> EXT
[ 035 084 ]
P<>:
Signal Q> delayed
[ 035 093 ]
P<>:
Q> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q> PSx
[
P<>:
Starting Q>
[ 035 092 ]
P<>:
Q
402 632
P<>:
Operate delay Q>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay Q>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Blocking tQ>> EXT
[ 035 085 ]
P<>:
Signal Q>> delayed
[ 035 096 ]
P<>:
Q>> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Starting Q>>
[ 035 095 ]
Parameter
P<>:
Q> PSx
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q> PSx
P<>:
Operate delay Q> PSx
P<>:
Release delay Q> PSx
set
set
set
set
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
1
2
3
4
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
Parameter
P<>:
Q>> PSx
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx
P<>:
Operate delay Q>>PSx
P<>:
Release delay Q>>PSx
set
set
set
set
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
1
2
3
4
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
19Z5270A
Fig. 3-302: Reactive power monitoring when the set thresholds are exceeded.
3-384
P437
3 Operation
3.36.7
P<>:
Direction Q> PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>:
Trip signal Q>
[ 035 094 ]
P<>:
Signal Q> delayed
[ 035 093 ]
P<>:
Q+
P<>:
Q-
402 635
402 636
P<>:
Direction Q>> PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>:
Trip signal Q>>
[ 035 097 ]
P<>:
Signal Q>> delayed
[ 035 096 ]
Parameter
P<>:
Direction Q> PSx
P<>:
Direction Q>> PSx
set
set
set
set
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
017
1
2
3
4
176
177
178
179
196
197
198
199
45Z5056A
Fig. 3-303: The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when the set thresholds
are exceeded.
3-385
P437
3.36.8
3 Operation
3-386
P437
3 Operation
P<>:
Blocking tP< EXT
[ 035 050 ]
P<>:
P< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Operate delay P< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P< PSx
[
P<>:
P
P<>:
Release delay P< PSx
C
P<>:
Signal P< delayed
[ 035 055 ]
402 631
Setting(s) blocked
P<>:
Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]
&
P<>:
Blocking tP<< EXT
[ 035 051 ]
P<>:
Fault P<
[ 035 057 ]
&
P<>:
P<< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Operate delay P<<PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay P<<PSx
P<>:
Diseng.ratio P<< PSx
[
P<>:
Signal P<< delayed
[ 035 061 ]
Setting(s) blocked
P<>:
Starting P<<
[ 035 060 ]
&
P<>:
Fault P<<
[ 035 063 ]
&
P<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
tP< elapsed trans.
[ 035 056 ]
P<>:
tP<< elapsed trans.
[ 035 062 ]
P<>:
tP</tP<< elaps.trans
[ 035 178 ]
Parameter
P<>:
P< PSx
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P< PSx
set 1
017 030
017 034
017 060
set 2
set 3
017 031
017 032
017 033
017 035
017 036
017 037
017 061
Parameter
P<>:
P<< PSx
P<>:
Diseng.ratio P<< PSx
P<>:
Operate delay P<<PSx
P<>:
Release delay P<<PSx
P<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
set 1
set 2
017 234
017 238
017 242
017 246
017 235
017 236
017 237
017 239
017 240
017 241
017 243
017 244
017 245
017 247
017 248
017 249
018 246
018 247
set 4
set 3
set 4
P<>:
Operate delay P< PSx
017 062
017 063
P<>:
Release delay P< PSx
017 226
017 227
017 228
017 229
018 248
018 249
19Z5272B
Fig. 3-304: Active power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds.
3-387
P437
3.36.9
3 Operation
3-388
P437
3 Operation
P<>:
Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]
Apparent power S
P<>:
Direction P< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>:
Signal P< delayed
[ 035 055 ]
&
&
P<>:
Trip signal P<
[ 035 058 ]
&
P<>:
Trip signal P< trans
[ 035 059 ]
&
&
P<>:
tP< elapsed trans.
[ 035 056 ]
P<>:
P+
P<>:
P-
&
402 633
&
&
402 634
P<>:
Starting P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>:
Direction P<< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
&
P<>:
Signal P<< delayed
[ 035 061 ]
&
P<>:
Trip signal P<<
[ 035 064 ]
&
&
&
P<>:
tP<< elapsed trans.
[ 035 062 ]
&
P<>:
Trip sig. P<< trans.
[ 035 065 ]
&
Parameter
P<>:
Direction P< PSx
P<>:
Direction P<< PSx
set 1
017 230
017 250
set 2
set 3
017 231
017 232
017 233
017 251
017 252
017 253
set 4
&
19Z5273B
Fig. 3-305: The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when values fall below set
thresholds.
3-389
P437
3 Operation
1
P<>:
Starting P<
035 054
P<>:
Operate delay P< PSx
*
P<>:
Release delay P< PSx
*
P<>:
Signal P< delayed
035 055
P<>:
tP< elapsed trans.
035 056
P<>:
Fault P<
035 057
Parameter
P<>:
Operate delay P< PSx
P<>:
Release delay P< PSx
P<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
set 1
017 060
017 226
018 246
set 2
set 3
017 061
017 062
017 063
017 227
017 228
017 229
018 247
018 248
018 249
set 4
19Z5278A
Fig. 3-306: Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the active power monitoring.
3-390
P437
3 Operation
3.36.10
P<>:
Blocking tQ< EXT
[ 035 052 ]
P<>:
Q< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Operate delay Q< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q< PSx
[
P<>:
Q
P<>:
Release delay Q< PSx
C
P<>:
Signal Q< delayed
[ 035 067 ]
402 632
Setting(s) blocked
P<>:
Starting Q<
[ 035 066 ]
&
P<>:
Blocking tQ<< EXT
[ 035 053 ]
P<>:
Fault Q<
[ 035 069 ]
&
P<>:
Q<< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng.ratio Q<< PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Operate delay Q<<PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay Q<<PSx
C
P<>:
Signal Q<< delayed
[ 035 011 ]
Setting(s) blocked
P<>:
Starting Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
&
P<>:
Fault Q<<
[ 035 049 ]
&
P<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[
P<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
tQ< elapsed trans.
[ 035 068 ]
P<>:
tQ<< elapsed trans.
[ 035 016 ]
Parameter
P<>:
Q< PSx
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q< PSx
P<>:
Operate delay Q< PSx
P<>:
tQ</tQ<< elaps.trans
[ 035 179 ]
P<>:
Release delay Q< PSx
set 1
018 035
018 044
018 052
018 056
set 2
set 3
018 036
018 037
018 045
018 046
018 053
018 054
018 057
018 058
set 4
018 038
018 047
018 055
018 059
Parameter
P<>:
Q<< PSx
P<>:
Diseng.ratio Q<< PSx
P<>:
Operate delay Q<<PSx
P<>:
Release delay Q<<PSx
P<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
set 1
set 2
018 085
018 086
018 095
018 096
018 213
018 214
018 236
018 237
018 246
018 247
set 3
set 4
018 087
018 088
018 097
018 098
018 215
018 216
018 238
018 239
018 248
018 249
19Z5276B
Fig. 3-307: Reactive power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds.
3-391
P437
3.36.11
3 Operation
3-392
P437
3 Operation
P<>:
Starting Q<
[ 035 066 ]
Apparent power S
P<>:
Direction Q< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>:
Signal Q< delayed
[ 035 067 ]
&
&
P<>:
Trip signal Q<
[ 035 155 ]
&
&
P<>:
tQ< elapsed trans.
[ 035 068 ]
&
&
P<>:
Trip sig. Q< trans.
[ 035 156 ]
P<>:
Q+
&
402 635
P<>:
Q-
&
402 636
P<>:
Starting Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>:
Direction Q<< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
&
P<>:
Signal Q<< delayed
[ 035 011 ]
&
P<>:
Trip signal Q<<
[ 035 176 ]
&
P<>:
Trip sig. Q<< trans.
[ 035 177 ]
&
&
&
P<>:
tQ<< elapsed trans.
[ 035 016 ]
&
Parameter
P<>:
Direction Q< PSx
P<>:
Direction Q<< PSx
set 1
018 081
018 242
set 2
set 3
018 082
018 083
018 084
018 243
018 244
018 245
set 4
&
19Z5277B
Fig. 3-308: Direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when values fall below set
thresholds.
3-393
P437
3 Operation
1
P<>:
Starting Q<
035 066
P<>:
Operate delay Q< PSx
*
P<>:
Release delay Q< PSx
*
P<>:
Signal Q< delayed
035 067
P<>:
tQ< elapsed trans.
035 068
P<>:
Fault Q<
035 069
P<>:
Operate delay Q< PSx
P<>:
Release delay Q< PSx
P<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
set 1
018 052
018 056
018 246
set 2
set 3
018 053
018 054
018 055
018 057
018 058
018 059
018 247
018 248
018 249
Parameter
set 4
19Z5279A
Fig. 3-309: Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the reactive power monitoring.
3-394
P437
3 Operation
3.36.12
Apparent power S
P<>:
Starting P>
[ 035 086 ]
&
P<>:
Direction P forw.
[ 035 181 ]
&
P<>:
Direction P backw.
[ 035 191 ]
P<>:
Starting P>>
[ 035 089 ]
P<>:
Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]
P<>:
Starting P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>:
P+
402 633
P<>:
P-
402 634
19Z5274B
Fig. 3-310: Directional starting signal issued by the active power monitoring.
P<>:
Q+
402 635
P<>:
Q402 636
P<>:
Starting Q>
[ 035 092 ]
&
P<>:
Direction Q forw.
[ 035 193 ]
&
P<>:
Direction Q backw.
[ 035 194 ]
P<>:
Starting Q>>
[ 035 095 ]
P<>:
Starting Q<
[ 035 066 ]
P<>:
Starting Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
Apparent power S
19Z5275B
Fig. 3-311: Directional starting signal issued by the reactive power monitoring.
3-395
P437
3 Operation
3.37
3.37.1
&
CBF:
Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 038 041
&
&
&
CBF:
Enable EXT
[ 038 041 ]
&
&
1
1
S1
CBF:
Ext./user enabled
[ 038 040 ]
CBF:
Enable USER
[ 003 016 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
CBF:
Disable EXT
[ 038 042 ]
&
CBF:
Disable USER
[ 003 015 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
47Z1138B
3-396
P437
3 Operation
3.37.2
CBF:
Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
CBF:
Not ready
[ 040 025 ]
&
CBF:
Blocking EXT
[ 038 058 ]
CBF:
t1 1p
[ 022 164 ]
blocked
CBF:
t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
blocked
CBF:
t2
[ 022 166 ]
blocked
&
CBF:
Delay/starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
blocked
CBF:
Delay/fault beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
blocked
CBF:
Delay/CB sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
blocked
45Z6364A
3.37.3
Detecting a CB Tripping
A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB
tripping.
Protection functions that have tripping criteria not directly dependent on current
flow may additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts
for evaluation.
3-397
P437
3.37.4
3 Operation
CBF:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
IA
CBF:
Current flow A
[ 038 230 ]
IB
CBF:
Current flow B
[ 038 231 ]
IC
CBF:
Current flow C
[ 038 232 ]
CBF:
Current flow Phx
[ 038 233 ]
CBF:
Evaluation IN
[ 022 184 ]
0
1
2
0: Without
1: Calculated
2: Measured
c1
c2
+
+
+
IN
1
2
1 ... 2
CBF:
IN<
[ 022 180 ]
1
CBF:
Current flow N
[ 038 235 ]
CBF:
IN
460 394
64Z1103C
3-398
P437
3 Operation
3.37.5
The open signal from the circuit breaker, MAIN: CB open 3p EXT
The closed signal from the circuit breaker, MA IN: CB clos e d 3 p EXT
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx
Address
031 028
Address
036 051
MAIN:
CB open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
&
&
&
CBF:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
&
19Z6131C
3-399
P437
3.37.6
3 Operation
Startup Criteria
Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is
recognized as closed during a startup criterion. The following criteria are
evaluated as a startup criterion:
Internal startup criterion
After a CBF startup, the state of the general trip signal or the external trigger
signal is no longer taken into account. The CBF function will thus reset only if the
current criterion is met (current values to fall below I< with all three phases) or
the CB's state is open.
3.37.7
The signals C BF: Trip s ign al t 1, A, C BF: Tr ip signal t1, B, CBF: T rip
sign al t 1 , C will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the
time period, set at timer stage CBF: t1 1p, has elapsed. The output
command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil.
The C BF: t1 3p signal will be issued if the startup criterion is still present
when the time delay set at timer stage CBF: Trip signal t1. The output
command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil.
The CBF: t 2 signal will be issued if the startup criterion is still present
when the time delay set at timer stage CBF: Trip signal t 2, has elapsed.
The output command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit
breaker or protection system.
The trip signals will be issued as long as the current criterion is not met or the
CB's state is signaled as closed. Should a loss of gas pressure occur in the arcing
chambers of installed type SF-6 circuit breakers then all surrounding circuit
breakers must be immediately tripped without waiting for a reaction from the
damaged switch. In case of an external CB fault the elapsing of timer stage t2
may be interrupted by a signal to a binary signal input appropriately configured
at CBF : C B fault y EXT.
3-400
P437
3 Operation
CBF:
Fct.assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal n
Selected signals
CBF:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
&
CBF:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
&
&
IA
S 1
R 1
MAIN:
CB closed >= 1p
[ 031 038 ]
CBF:
Start with man. trip
[ 022 154 ]
&
&
CBF:
Startup A
[ 038 212 ]
1
0: No
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
&
1: Yes
&
&
MAIN:
Trip signal 1, A
[ 036 006 ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
&
U x01
U x02
U x03
&
U xxx
Address
038 209
&
CBF:
Start enable EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF:
Start A EXT
[ 038 206 ]
CBF:
Startup 3p
[ 038 211 ]
CBF:
Start A
310 007
>2
CBF:
Start B
CBF:
Start >1p
310 010
310 008
CBF:
Start C
310 009
45Z6363A
3-401
P437
3 Operation
CBF:
Trip 1p
[ 022 163 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
CBF:
Not ready
[ 040 025 ]
CBF:
Startup A
[ 038 212 ]
CBF:
Startup B
[ 038 213 ]
CBF:
Startup C
[ 038 214 ]
CBF:
t1 1p
&
&
&
CBF:
Startup 3p
[ 038 211 ]
CBF:
Trip signal t1, B
[ 038 217 ]
CBF:
Trip signal t1, C
[ 038 218 ]
CBF:
Trip signal t1
[ 038 215 ]
CBF:
t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
CBF:
Trip signal t1, A
[ 038 216 ]
CBF:
CB failure
[ 036 017 ]
CBF:
t2
[ 022 166 ]
CBF:
Trip signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
&
CBF:
CB faulty EXT
[ 038 234 ]
47Z1133A
3.37.8
Trip Commands
While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages
available, the user can set minimum time-delays for trip commands.
By appropriate setting it can be selected that trip commands, issued by the CB
failure protection function, will operate in latching mode. The corresponding trip
command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating
parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-402
P437
3 Operation
CBF:
Min.dur. trip cmd.t1
[ 022 167 ]
CBF:
Latching trip cmd.t1
[ 022 169 ]
0
1
0: No
CBF:
Trip command t1, A
[ 038 221 ]
1: Yes
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
&
CBF:
Trip signal t1, A
[ 038 216 ]
&
1 1
CBF:
Trip command t1, B
[ 038 222 ]
R 1
&
CBF:
Trip signal t1, B
[ 038 217 ]
&
1 1
R 1
CBF:
Trip command t1, C
[ 038 223 ]
&
CBF:
Trip signal t1, C
[ 038 218 ]
&
1 1
R 1
CBF:
Trip command t1
[ 038 220 ]
&
CBF:
Trip signal t1
[ 038 215 ]
&
1 1
R 1
CBF:
Min.dur. trip cmd.t2
[ 022 168 ]
CBF:
Latching trip cmd.t2
[ 022 170 ]
0
1
0: No
&
1: Yes
CBF:
Trip signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
0
CBF:
Trip command t2
[ 038 224 ]
>1
&
1 1
R 1
MAIN:
Rset.latch.trip USER
[ 021 005 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
MAIN:
Latch. trip c. reset
[ 040 139 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset latch.trip EXT
[ 040 138 ]
47Z1134B
3-403
P437
3.37.9
3 Operation
Starting Trigger
The signal CBF : St arti ng will be issued when the signal CBF: Starting tr ig.
EX T is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a
general starting condition is present. The signal C BF: Delay/starting tr ig. will
be issued after timer stage CBF : Tri p s ignal. has elapsed.
CBF:
Delay/starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
CBF:
Starting trig. EXT
[ 038 016 ]
&
CBF:
Trip signal
[ 040 026 ]
CBF:
Starting
[ 038 021 ]
45Z8037A
3.37.10
CBF:
Delay/fault beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
CBF:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
IA
IB
&
&
CBF:
Fault behind CB
[ 038 225 ]
IC
MAIN:
CB open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN:
CB closed A EXT
[ 031 029 ]
MAIN:
CB closed B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
MAIN:
CB closed C EXT
[ 031 031 ]
CBF:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
45Z6365A
3-404
P437
3 Operation
3.37.11
CB Synchronization Supervision
CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker
contacts are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and
evaluation of CB state signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge CB
operating times the time-delay CB F: D e lay/CB sy nc.su perv can be used.
When this time-delay has elapsed the signal CBF: TripSig CBs yn c.s uper is
issued. Poles that are recognized as being open will still be signaled.
CBF:
Delay/CB sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
CBF:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
&
CBF:
TripSig CBsync.super
[ 038 226 ]
MAIN:
CB closed A EXT
[ 031 029 ]
MAIN:
CB closed B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
MAIN:
CB closed C EXT
[ 031 031 ]
&
MAIN:
CB open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
<3
&
&
CBF:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
IA
&
CBF:
CBsync.superv A open
[ 038 227 ]
CBF:
CBsync.superv B open
[ 038 228 ]
CBF:
CBsync.superv C open
[ 038 229 ]
&
IB
IC
45Z6366A
3-405
P437
3.38
3 Operation
3.38.1
CBM:
General enable USER
[ 022 010 ]
0
CBM:
Enabled
[ 044 130 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5404A
3.38.2
Variants
The wear condition of a circuit breaker may be determined using a variety of
methods:
3-406
P437
3 Operation
3.38.3
CB Wear Characteristic
Manufacturers of circuit breakers usually provide wear characteristics displaying
the maximum number of permissible CB operations in relation to the ruptured
current.
Fig. 3-323, (p. 3-407) displays the wear characteristics for a circuit breaker with
a nominal current of 2000 A and a maximum ruptured current of 63 kA. The
mean ruptured current is 48 kA.
100000
10000
1000
100
10
0.1
10
100
Disconnection current in kA
19Z6123A_EN
The knee points in Fig. 3-323, (p. 3-407) are necessary to set the wear
characteristic for the circuit breaker:
The circuit breaker's nominal current (CBM: I nom, CB) and the permitted
number of CB operations at nominal current (CBM: Perm. CB op.
I nom,C B)
The circuit breaker's mean ruptured current (CBM: Med. cu rr. It rip,CB)
and the permitted number of CB operations at mean ruptured current
(C BM: P erm. CB op. I m ed,C B)
The mean ruptured current is not available for all types of circuit breakers.
In such a case the parameters for this knee point are to be set to Blocked. A knee
point is not considered in the characteristic when at least one of the parameters
for the knee point is set to Blocked.
For proper performance of circuit breaker monitoring it should be observed that
the knee points must be applied in a logically correct sequence (continuously
descending). When set currents and numbers of CB operations are not plausible
according to the characteristic the P437 will issue an error message and block
circuit breaker monitoring.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
3-407
P437
3.38.4
3 Operation
n(I nom,CB)
n(I d,CB)
Where:
3.38.5
Operating Modes
Setting the parameter CBM: Operati ng mode will select the condition under
which the function will be triggered:
With trip cmd. only: Function triggered only by the general trip command 1
Measured values and counters are re-determined with each triggering and
compared with set threshold values.
A correction value can be set in order to determine the trip time at CBM: Cor r.
acqu.t ime tr ip to be triggered by the open command. Another correction value
can be set at CB M: C orr. acqui s. time to be triggered by the position signal
issued by the CB auxiliary contacts. This enables to correctly evaluate the
leading or lagging auxiliary contacts or the delay between issuing the trip
command and opening of the CB contacts. In addition differing inherent time
delays from the two command chains can be configured independently of each
other so as to achieve optimum time adjustment.
3.38.6
3-408
P437
3 Operation
the maximum cycle time has elapsed. Measured values from the respective CB
tripping are canceled and the CBM: tmax> A (CBM: tmax> B, CBM: tmax >
C) signal is issued.
3-409
P437
3.38.7
3 Operation
The ruptured current is derived from the RMS current value detected before a
last zero crossing.
The integral of the current-time area is calculated between the trip time and the
current's disappearance. The current's disappearance is recognized when no
further current zero crossings are detected. An example for calculation of the
current-time integral is displayed in Fig. 3-324, (p. 3-411).
3-410
P437
3 Operation
20,00
15,00
10,00
5,00
0,00
-5,00
-10,00
-15,00
-20,00
Calculating the
current-time integral
Fig. 3-324: Calculation of the current-time integral when CBM is triggered by a general trip command 1.
3.38.8
3.38.9
3-411
P437
3 Operation
MAIN:
Protection active
&
306 001
CBM:
Enabled
[ 044 130 ]
CBM:
Operating mode
[ 022 007 ]
1
&
&
&
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
CBM:
Perm. CB op. Inom,CB
[ 022 013 ]
CBM:
Blocked
[ 044 199 ]
CBM:
internal trip cmd.
CBM:
Inom,CB
[ 022 012 ]
CBM:
Med. curr. Itrip,CB
[ 022 014 ]
CBM:
Perm. CB op. Imed,CB
[ 022 015 ]
310 025
CBM:
Internal CB trip
CBM:
Max. curr. Itrip,CB
[ 022 016 ]
310 030
fnom
I_x
CBM:
Perm. CB op. Imax,CB
[ 022 017 ]
CBM:
Corr. acquis. time
[ 022 018 ]
C
CBM:
Corr. acqu.time trip
[ 007 249 ]
CBM:
Set No. CB oper. A
[
*
]
CBM:
Set remain. CB op. A
[
*
]
CBM:
Set Itrip A
[
*
]
CBM:
Set Itrip**2 A
[
*
]
CBM:
Set I*t A
[
*
]
CBM:
Itrip A
[
*
CBM:
I*t A
[
*
CBM:
Itrip,prim A
[
*
]
CBM:
Itrip**2 A
[
*
]
CBM:
Itrip A
[
*
]
CBM:
Itrip**2 A
[
*
]
CBM:
I*t A
[
*
CBM:
No. of CB oper. A
[
*
]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. A
[
*
]
CBM:
Initialize values
[ 003 011 ]
CBM:
Reset meas.val. USER
[ 003 013 ]
Phase x /
Current Ix
CBM:
Set No. CB oper. A
CBM:
Set remain. CB op. A
CBM:
Set Itrip A
CBM:
Set Itrip**2 A
CBM:
Set I*t A
CBM:
No. of CB oper. A
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. A
A / IA
022 131
022 134
022 137
022 140
022 143
008 011
008 014
B / IB
022 132
022 135
022 138
022 141
022 144
008 012
008 015
C / IC
022 133
022 136
022 139
022 142
022 145
008 013
008 016
Phase x /
Current Ix
CBM:
Itrip A
CBM:
I*t A
CBM:
Itrip,prim A
CBM:
Itrip**2 A
CBM:
Itrip A
CBM:
Itrip**2 A
CBM:
I*t A
A / IA
009 047
009 061
009 212
009 051
009 071
009 077
009 087
B / IB
009 048
009 062
009 213
009 052
009 073
009 078
009 088
C / IC
009 049
009 063
009 214
009 053
009 076
009 079
009 089
52Z0145A
3-412
P437
3 Operation
3.38.10
CBM:
Remain No. CB op. <
[ 022 020 ]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. A
[ 008 014 ]
CBM:
Sig. Rem. No.CB op.<
[ 044 136 ]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. B
[ 008 015 ]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. C
[ 008 016 ]
19Z6121B
At the same time each switching operation will increment the P437's counter for
the number of CB operations. The number of CB operations performed is
displayed. A threshold value can be set with the parameter CBM: No. CB
ope rat ions >. An alarm is issued should the number of CB operations
performed exceed this threshold.
CBM:
No. CB operations >
[ 022 019 ]
CBM:
No. of CB oper. A
[ 008 011 ]
CBM:
Sig. No. CB op. >
[ 044 135 ]
CBM:
No. of CB oper. B
[ 008 012 ]
CBM:
No. of CB oper. C
[ 008 013 ]
19Z6122B
3.38.11
3-413
P437
3.38.12
3 Operation
CBM:
Blocked
[ 044 199 ]
CBM:
General enable USER
[ 022 010 ]
&
CBM:
Blocking EXT
[ 044 128 ]
CBM:
Blocking USER
[ 022 150 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5346B
3-414
P437
3 Operation
3.39
3.39.1
3.39.2
If any of the measured values exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or
lower limit values, then a signal is issued after the associated time period has
elapsed.
3-415
P437
3 Operation
LIMIT:
General enable USER
[ 014 010 ]
0
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
LIMIT:
I>
[ 014 004 ]
LIMIT:
tI>
[ 014 031 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
LIMIT:
tI> elapsed
[ 040 220 ]
LIMIT:
I>>
[ 014 020 ]
IA
IB
LIMIT:
tI>>
[ 014 032 ]
IC
LIMIT:
tI>> elapsed
[ 040 221 ]
Imax
Imin
LIMIT:
I<
[ 014 021 ]
LIMIT:
tI<
[ 014 033 ]
LIMIT:
tI< elapsed
[ 040 222 ]
LIMIT:
I<<
[ 014 022 ]
LIMIT:
tI<<
[ 014 034 ]
LIMIT:
tI<< elapsed
[ 040 223 ]
47Z0153A
Fig. 3-329: Limit Value Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current.
3-416
P437
3 Operation
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
&
LIMIT:
VPP>
LIMIT:
tVPP>
[ 014 027 ]
[ 014 039 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
VA-G
COMP
LIMIT:
VPP>>
LIMIT:
tVPP> elapsed
[ 040 228 ]
LIMIT:
tVPP>> elapsed
[ 040 229 ]
LIMIT:
tVPP< elapsed
[ 040 230 ]
LIMIT:
tVPP>>
[ 014 028 ]
VB-G
[ 014 040 ]
VC-G
t
VPP,max
VPP,min
LIMIT:
VPP<
LIMIT:
tVPP<
[ 014 029 ]
[ 014 041 ]
LIMIT:
VPP<<
LIMIT:
tVPP<<
[ 014 030 ]
[ 014 042 ]
LIMIT:
VPG>
LIMIT:
tVPG>
[ 014 023 ]
[ 014 035 ]
COMP
LIMIT:
VPG>>
LIMIT:
tVPG> elapsed
[ 040 224 ]
LIMIT:
tVPG>> elapsed
[ 040 225 ]
LIMIT:
tVPG>>
[ 014 024 ]
[ 014 036 ]
VPG,max
VPG,min
LIMIT:
VPG<
LIMIT:
tVPG<
[ 014 025 ]
[ 014 037 ]
LIMIT:
tVPP<< elapsed
[ 040 231 ]
LIMIT:
VPG<<
LIMIT:
tVPG<<
[ 014 026 ]
[ 014 038 ]
LIMIT:
tVPG< elapsed
[ 040 226 ]
LIMIT:
tVPG<< elapsed
[ 040 227 ]
47Z0154B
Fig. 3-330: Limit Value Monitoring of maximum and minimum phase-to-phase voltage and maximum and minimum
phase-to-ground voltage.
3-417
P437
3.39.3
3 Operation
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
VA-G
LIMIT:
VNG>
[ 014 043 ]
LIMIT:
tVNG>
[ 014 045 ]
LIMIT:
tVNG> elapsed
[ 040 168 ]
VB-G
VC-G
LIMIT:
VNG>>
[ 014 044 ]
LIMIT:
tVNG>>
[ 014 046 ]
LIMIT:
tVNG>> elapsed
[ 040 169 ]
S8Z52G8A
3-418
P437
3 Operation
3.39.4
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin>
[ 040 180 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
LIMIT:
IDC,lin>
[ 014 110 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>
[ 014 112 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin> elapsed
[ 040 182 ]
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin>>
[ 040 181 ]
LIMIT:
IDC,lin>>
[ 014 111 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>>
[ 014 113 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>> elapsed
[ 040 183 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<
[ 040 184 ]
LIMIT:
IDC,lin<
[ 014 114 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<
[ 014 116 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin< elapsed
[ 040 186 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<<
[ 040 185 ]
LIMIT:
IDC,lin<<
[ 014 115 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<<
[ 014 117 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<< elapsed
[ 040 187 ]
S8Z52G6A
3-419
P437
3 Operation
3.39.5
LIMIT:
General enable USER
[ 014 010 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
LIMIT:
Vref>
[ 042 144 ]
LIMIT:
tVref>
[ 042 148 ]
1: Yes (= on)
LIMIT:
tVref> elapsed
[ 042 152 ]
LIMIT:
Vref>>
[ 042 145 ]
LIMIT:
tVref>>
[ 042 149 ]
LIMIT:
tVref>> elapsed
[ 042 153 ]
Vref
LIMIT:
Vref<
[ 042 146 ]
LIMIT:
tVref<
[ 042 150 ]
LIMIT:
tVref< elapsed
[ 042 154 ]
LIMIT:
Vref<<
[ 042 147 ]
LIMIT:
tVref<<
[ 042 151 ]
LIMIT:
tVref<< elapsed
[ 042 155 ]
19Z5215A
3-420
P437
3 Operation
3.39.6
LIMIT:
Starting T>
[ 040 170 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
LIMIT:
T>
[ 014 100 ]
LIMIT:
tT>
[ 014 103 ]
MAIN:
Protection
306 active
001
MEASI:
Temperature
[ 004 133 ]
LIMIT:
tT> elapsed
[ 040 172 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T>>
[ 040 171 ]
LIMIT:
T>>
[ 014 101 ]
LIMIT:
tT>>
[ 014 104 ]
LIMIT:
tT>> elapsed
[ 040 173 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<
[ 040 174 ]
LIMIT:
T<
[ 014 105 ]
LIMIT:
tT<
[ 014 107 ]
LIMIT:
tT< elapsed
[ 040 176 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<<
[ 040 175 ]
LIMIT:
T<<
[ 014 106 ]
LIMIT:
tT<<
[ 014 108 ]
LIMIT:
tT<< elapsed
[ 040 177 ]
19Z5212A
3-421
P437
3.40
3 Operation
3-422
P437
3 Operation
WARNING
When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional
type test to conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control
application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for
the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time
performance during startup of the P437, during operation and when there is a
fault (blocking of the P437) are fulfilled.
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
0
1
0: No
LOGIC:
1 has been set
[ 034 067 ]
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
036 051
Address
036 059
LOGIC:
1 set externally
[ 034 075 ]
LOGIC:
Set 1 EXT
[ 034 051 ]
LOGIC:
Reset 1 EXT
[ 034 059 ]
D5Z52FAB
Fig. 3-335: Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals. (The logic does not apply to
LOG_2.)
3-423
P437
3 Operation
LOGIC:
General enable USER
[ 031 099 ]
LOGIC:
Enabled
[ 034 046 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Protection active
LOGIC:
Fct.assignm. outp. 1
[ 030 000 ]
306 001
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
LOGIC:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 030 001 ]
LOGIC:
Input 01 EXT
[ 034 000 ]
LOGIC:
Input 16 EXT
[ 034 015 ]
1
2
3
LOGIC:
1 has been set
[ 034 067 ]
4
5
0
LOGIC:
8 has been set
[ 034 074 ]
LOGIC:
1 set externally
[ 034 075 ]
3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
5
LOGIC:
Time t1 output 1
[ 030 002 ]
LOGIC:
Time t2 output 1
[ 030 003 ]
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt
5: Minimum time
LOGIC:
8 set externally
[ 034 082 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
LOGIC:
Set 8 USER
[ 034 037 ]
LOGIC:
Trigger 1
[ 034 038 ]
0
LOGIC:
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
LOGIC:
Trigger 8
[ 034 045 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
D5Z52CDA
Fig. 3-336: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOGIC (shown here for output 1).
3-424
P437
3 Operation
LOG_2:
General enable USER
[ 011 137 ]
LOG_2:
Enabled
[ 011 138 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
LOG_2:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 050 001 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
LOG_2:
Fct.assignm. outp. 1
[ 050 000 ]
306 001
0
1
2
Signal 1
3
Signal 2
Signal 3
5
0
Signal n
5
LOG_2:
Time t1 output 1
[ 050 002 ]
LOG_2:
Time t2 output 1
[ 050 003 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1 (t)
[ 052 033 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1
[ 052 032 ]
19Z80CDA
Fig. 3-337: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOG_2 (shown here for output 1).
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order, equation
as an input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The
equations are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation.
It should be noted that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is
provided by the equation with the highest order.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two
timer elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of
assigning a freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each
Boolean equation. In the Minimum time operating mode, the setting of timer
stage t2 has no effect. The following diagrams (Fig. 3-338, (p. 3-426) to
Fig. 3-342, (p. 3-428)) show the time characteristics for the various timer stage
operating modes.
If the P437 is switched to offline the equations are not processed and all outputs
are set to the 0 logic level.
3-425
P437
3 Operation
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2
t2
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t2
t1
t2
D5Z50BYA
Fig. 3-338: Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay (Oper./releas.delay). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2
t2
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t2
t1
t2
D5Z50BZA
Fig. 3-339: Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup (Oper.del./puls.dur.). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if
the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
3-426
P437
3 Operation
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t1
Retrigger pulse
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2
t2
t2
Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2
t1
t1
t2
t2
t2
D5Z50CAA
Fig. 3-340: Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable (Op./rel.delay,retrig). (This diagram is also valid for
LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2
t2
Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
D5Z50CBA
Fig. 3-341: Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable (Op.del./puls.dur.,rt). (This diagram is also valid
for LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
3-427
P437
3 Operation
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1
t1
D5Z50CCA
Fig. 3-342: Operating mode 5: Minimum time (Minimum time). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the signal
parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
3-428
P437
3 Operation
LOGIC:
Sig.assig. outp. 1
[ 044 000 ]
Signal 1 EXT
[ AAA AAA ]
Signal 2 EXT
[ BBB BBB ]
Signal 3 EXT
[ CCC CCC ]
Signal n EXT
[ NNN NNN ]
Address
AAA AAA
LOGIC:
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
Signal 1 EXT
[ AAA AAA ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address
AAA AAA
-Uxxx
LOGIC:
Sig.assig.outp. 1(t)
[ 044 001 ]
Address
BBB BBB
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
Signal 2 EXT
[ BBB BBB ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address
BBB BBB
-Uxxx
D5Z52FBA
Fig. 3-343: Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations. (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
parameters from LOGIC are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
3-429
P437
3.41
3 Operation
3.41.1
3.41.2
Debouncing
The first positive pulse edge of the binary input signal to be counted will trigger a
timer stage which will continue to run for the set debouncing time period. Each
positive pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage. The
binary input signal will be counted if it is stable during the set debouncing time
period.
The debouncing time can be set separately for each of the four counters.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it
is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, it will not be
counted.
Count
Signal sequence
19Z50APA
3.41.3
Counting Function
The debounced binary signal is counted by a 16 bit counter. The counters may
be set to a specific count value (preload function) by setting a parameter or via
the serial interfaces. The values of the counters can be shown on the LC-display
and read out via the PC interface or the communications interface.
For each of the four counters, there is a limit value that can be optionally set:
setting Blocked disables the limit check. (This setting is the default
value.)
A warning signal (COUNT: Warni ng coun t 1 and the same way for counters 2
to 4) is issued if the associated counter value exceeds the set limit.
3-430
P437
3 Operation
3.41.4
3.41.5
COUNT:
General enable USER
[ 217 000 ]
0
COUNT:
Enabled
[ 217 001 ]
1
0: No
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
1: Yes (= on)
1: Yes
COUNT:
Count 1
[ 217 100 ]
COUNT:
Debounce t. count. 1
[ 217 160 ]
COUNT:
Set counter 1 EXT
[ 217 130 ]
COUNT:
Count 1
[ 217 100 ]
CT=m
Debouncing
R
COUNT:
Transmit counts USER
[ 217 008 ]
0
COUNT:
Transmit counts
[ 217 010 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
C
COUNT:
Transmit counts EXT
[ 217 009 ]
C
COUNT:
Cycle t.count transm
[ 217 007 ]
COMM1:
Count 1
[ --- --- ]
G
COUNT:
Reset USER
[ 217 003 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
= 0 min
COUNT:
Reset
[ 217 005 ]
1: execute
COUNT:
Reset EXT
[ 217 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
19Z82ANA
Fig. 3-345: Binary Count. (This diagram shows counter 1 as an example. The displayed logic is also valid for
counters 2 to 4, where C O U N T : S e t c o u n t e r 1 E X T and C O U N T : C o u n t 1 have to be replaced by the
respective parameters.
3-431
P437
3-432
3 Operation
P437
4
Design
The P437 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations
of modules.
Irrespective of the type a P437 is equipped with a detachable HMI or a fixed local
control panel. The local control panel is covered with a tough film so that the
specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the essential
control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of multi-colored LED
indicators is also incorporated (see Section 6.2, (p. 6-2)). The meaning of the
various LED indications is shown in plain text on a label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged
cover at the bottom of the local control panel.
4-1
P437
4.1
4 Design
Designs
The P437 is available in a surface-mounted and a flush-mounted case. Depending
on the connection type pin-terminal or ring-terminal connection the case sizes
differ. The location diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-19)) show the available
combinations of case widths and connection types.
Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The
threaded terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the
front of the device after unscrewing the crosshead screws on the sides (see
Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ) and removing the local control panel. The local control
panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs in the slots in the left side wall
(see Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ). The flush-mounted case is connected at the back of
the case.
WARNING
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in
connecting cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the local control
panel by inserting it in the slots provided on the left.
WARNING
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be
opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger
that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the
insulation.
WARNING
For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for system current
transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit
the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
4-2
4 Design
P437
47Z14BBA
Fig. 4-1: Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel (or in case of a detachable HMI the case front
panel). The illustration shows the 84TE case with (fixed) local control panel.
4-3
P437
4 Design
Dimensional Drawings
4.2.1
147.5
177.5
184.5
4.2
X6
434.8
464.0
481.6
257.1
177.5
X6
434.8
227.9
253.6
159.0
168.0
284.9
259.0
25.9
5.0
410.0
5.0
Fig. 4-3: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).
(Dimensions in mm.)
4-4
P437
177.5
101.6
4 Design
X6
227.9
253.6
434.8
464.0
101.6
6.4
186.5
481.6
445.9
464.0
Fig. 4-4: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
(Dimensions in mm.)
The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with
angle brackets and frame) is used for the flush-mounted case.
4-5
P437
4.3
4 Design
Hardware Modules
The P437 is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table
gives an overview of the modules relevant for the P437.
Key:
4-6
: standard equipment,
: optional,
: depending on order,
P437
4 Design
Type
Item Number
Description
A(CH1 CH2)
009650356
A ff
A(CH1 CH2)
009650355
A(CH1 CH2)
Width
P437
412
P437
413
A ff
4TE
009650354
A ff
4TE
A(CH3)
009651567
D ff
4TE
A(CH3)
009651569
D ff
4TE
A(CH4)
4TE
A(CH4)
4TE
A(ETH CH2)
009651427
E ff
4TE
A(ETH CH2)
009651471
E ff
4TE
A(Red. ETH
CH2)
009651531
B ff
4TE
A(Red. ETH
CH2)
009651532
B ff
A(Red. ETH
CH2)
009651533
B ff
4TE
000336188
C ff
4TE
000336421
B ff
4TE
009651571
E ff
* Processor Unit
4TE
T(4I 4V)
009650307
A ff
8TE
T(4I 4V)
009650321
A ff
8TE
T(4I 5V)
009650308
A ff
8TE
T(4I 5V)
009650322
A ff
8TE
4-7
P437
4 Design
Type
Item Number
Description
Width
P437
412
T(1I)
009650313
8TE
T(1I)
009650327
8TE
V(4I 8O)
009651534
B ff
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651536
B ff
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651537
B ff
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651539
B ff
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651538
B ff
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651544
B ff
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651546
B ff
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651547
B ff
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651549
B ff
4TE
V(4I 8O)
009651548
B ff
4TE
X(4H)
009651493
B ff
4TE
X(6I 8O)
000336971
D ff
4TE
X(6I 8O)
009651306
A ff
X(6I 8O)
009651334
A ff
4-8
P437
413
P437
4 Design
Type
Item Number
Description
Width
P437
412
P437
413
X(6I 8O)
009651445
A ff
4TE
X(6I 8O)
009651362
A ff
4TE
X(6O)
000336973
B ff
4TE
Y(4I)
000337406
D ff
4TE
Y(4I)
009651307
A ff
4TE
Y(4I)
009651335
A ff
4TE
Y(4I)
009651446
A ff
4TE
Y(4I)
009651363
A ff
4TE
4-9
P437
4-10
4 Design
P437
5
WARNING
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the Warning page at the beginning of
this manual, may work on or operate this device.
WARNING
The instructions given in the Section 5.5, (p. 5-12) (Protective and
Operational Grounding) should be noted. In particular, check that the
protective ground connection is secured with a tooth lock washer, as per the
diagram Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal (Fig. 5-8,
(p. 5-12)).
If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the
protective grounding should be checked again.
WARNING
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected
at the same time.
5-1
P437
WARNING
Installation of the detachable HMI: A protective conductor (protective
earth) with a cross section at least 1.5 mm (US:AWG14 or thicker) must be
connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal on the detachable
HMI at one end and on the other end to the protective grounding conductor
terminal on the devices case. Both the detachable HMI and the device have
to be installed in the same substation.
In order to prevent personal injuries the communications cable installed to
the detachable HMI must never come in contact with parts that may be
subjected to dangerous live voltages.
It is prohibited to install or run the communications cable to the detachable
HMI next to high-voltage lines or high-voltage connections. This is to prevent
induced currents that would lead to electromagnetic interferences.
5-2
5.1
P437
5-3
P437
5.2
Fig. 5-1: Example of the type identification label of a MiCOM P3x3 device.
The P437 design version can be determined from the order number. A
breakdown of the order number is given in Chapter Order Information of this
manual.
5-4
P437
5.3
Location Requirements
The P437 has been designed to conform to EN 60255-6. Therefore it is important
when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the
operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several
of these important operating conditions are listed below.
5.3.1
Environmental Conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 C to +55 C [+23 F to +131 F]
Air pressure:
Relative humidity:
Ambient air:
Solar Radiation:
5.3.2
Mechanical Conditions
Vibration stress:
Earth quake resistance: 5 ... 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 ... 35 Hz, 5 m/s,
3 x 1 cycle
5.3.3
5.3.4
Electromagnetic Conditions
Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices,
especially with respect to grounding and EMC.
5-5
P437
5.4
Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given
in Section 4.2, (p. 4-4). When the P437 is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring
to the P437 is normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the
wiring is to be at the back, an opening can be provided above or below the
surface-mounted case. Fig. 5-2, (p. 5-6) shows such an opening.
D5Z50MBA
Fig. 5-2: Opening (cutout) for running the connecting leads to an 40 TE surface-mounted case.
The opening width for the 40 TE surface-mounted case: 213 mm (shown in this
figure), for the 84 TE surface-mounted case: 435 mm. The other dimensions are
the same for all cases.
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and
mounting dimensions are given in Chapter Design. When the P437 is mounted
on a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree
of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51).
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Protective and Operational
Grounding (Section 5.5, (p. 5-12))
Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:
The P437 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case
or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and
frame) is used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity
class of the shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of
the shock resistance test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
5-6
P437
For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
Before the P437 can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel (or
the front element of the case for devices with detachable display) must be taken
down. The local control panel is removed as described below:
1.
Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower
both hinged flaps 180 up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them
slightly. The side mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.)
2.
3.
WARNING
The local control panel (or front element) is connected to processor module P
by a plug-in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do
not bend the connecting cable!
Then remove the lower M4 screws and only loosen the upper M4 screws (see
Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-8)). Now insert the P437 into the panel opening from the rear
so that the upper M4 screws fit into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the
M4 screws. After this, replace the local control panel.
WARNING
When replacing the local control panel, take care not to tighten the M3.5
screws with too much strength! (Fastening torque 1.5 to 1.8 Newton meters.)
If the control panel thickness is 2 mm, the longer M3.5 and M4 bolts must be
used. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
5-7
P437
< 3 mm
M4
M3.5
12Y6181B
Fig. 5-3: Installation of a case into a control panel. Flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame ).
Example for a device with a 40 TE case.
WARNING
The P437 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted
case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle
brackets and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-9)) is used.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p. 5-12).
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
5-8
1.
Remove the screws as shown in Fig. 5-4, (p. 5-9), and mount the
enclosed angle brackets using these same screws.
2.
Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
3.
Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws
(see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-9)).
4.
Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
P437
45Z5058A
M6
B6
6.4
Height: 204mm
M6 x 15
Frame
for
280mm
Width:
E case
the 40T
12Y6183B
Fig. 5-5: Installation of a case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame). Example
for a device in a 40 TE case.
The cover frame width of the 40 TE surface-mounted case is: 280 mm, of the
84 TE case is: 486 mm. The cover frame height is for all cases: 204 mm.
5-9
P437
WARNING
The P437 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted
case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle
brackets and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-9)) is used.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p. 5-12).
Connection flange
Tapped bush
Bolt
61Y5077A
WARNING
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p. 5-12).
5-10
P437
Covering flange
Rack frame
61Y5078A
WARNING
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p. 5-12).
5-11
P437
5.5
1
2
2
3
4
PE terminal
PE terminal
surface-mount. case
flush-mount. case
Pos.
Description
Pos.
Description
Nut M4
Nut M4
Clamp bracket
Clamp bracket
Bolt M4
Bolt M4
19Y5220B
5-12
P437
5.6
Connection
The P437 Distance Protection Device must be connected in accordance with the
terminal connection diagram as indicated on the type identification label. The
relevant terminal connection diagrams that apply to the P437 are to be found
either in the supporting documents supplied with the device, or in Section 5.7,
(p. 5-19).
In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm (US:AWG12) are
sufficient to connect a system current transformer to a current input on the P437.
To reduce CT knee-point voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install
shorter copper conductors with a greater cross section between the system
current transformers and the current inputs on the P437. Copper conductors
having a cross section of 1.5 mm (US:AWG14) are adequate to connect binary
signal inputs, the output relays and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential.
Connections that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when
binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output
relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections
should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
5.6.1
5.6.1.1
Power Supply
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P437 power supply, it must be
ensured that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with
the nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage.
5.6.1.2
Current-Measuring Inputs
When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the
secondary nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
WARNING
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be
opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger
that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the
insulation.
WARNING
For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for system current
transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit
the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
5.6.1.3
5-13
P437
A
B
C
1U
2U
1IA
1IB
1IC
1IN
2IN
e
n
W
N
P437
Line
Parallel line
47Z01BCA
5-14
P437
5.6.1.4
PT 100
P437
S8Z52H9A
5.6.1.5
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.3.1
PC Interface
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a
personal computer (PC).
WARNING
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently,
the female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits
connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106, part 101.
5.6.3.2
Communication Interfaces
The communication interfaces are provided as a permanent connection of the
device to a control system for substations or to a central substation unit.
5-15
P437
WARNING
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the
supply voltage for the device is shut off.
An RS 485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices
can be established by using the optional communication interface. The
communication master could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices
linked to the communication master, e.g. P437, are set-up as slave devices.
The RS 485 interface available on the P437 was designed so that data transfer in
a full duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between
devices. Data transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only
for a half duplex transmission mode. To connect the RS 485 communication
interface the following must be observed:
Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in
telecommunication installations.
Conductor insulation and shielding must only be removed from the core in
the immediate vicinity of the terminal strips and connected according to
national standards.
P437
master device. The last device in line (master or slave device) on the data
transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver terminated with
a 200 to 220 resistor each. In MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in the P437, a
220 resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface hardware and can be
connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary.
The second resistor must be connected externally to the device (resistor order
number see Chapter Accessories and Spare Parts).
-X10
200 ... 220
D1[T]
D2[R]
D2[R]
D1[T]
P437
XXXX
First participant
Last participant
-X10
D2[R]
P437
D1[T]
D2[R]
D1[T]
XXXX
Device with halfduplex interface
19Z6480A
5-17
P437
-X10
D1[T]
D2[R]
D2[R]
D1[T]
P437
XXXX
First participant
Last participant
-X10
D2[R]
P437
D1[T]
D2[R]
D1[T]
XXXX
Device with halfduplex interface
19Z6481A
5-18
P437
5.7
5.7.1
01
02
03
04
05
CH1
CH2
4I
4V
06
07
08
09
1I
10
11
4I
12
13
6I
8O
15
6I
8O
17
18
19
6I
8O
20
21
4H
CH4
4I
5V
16
6I
8O
ETH
CH2
14
4I
8O
CH3
6O
Red.
ETH
CH2
01
02
03
04
01
02
03
05
05
ETH
CH2
06
07
4I
4V
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
16
17
18
19
20
21
CH1
CH2
06
08
09
1I
10
11
4I
12
13
6I
8O
14
15
6I
8O
6I
8O
4H
CH4
4I
5V
6I
8O
4I
8O
CH3
6O
Red.
ETH
CH2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
5.7.2
5-19
P437
Transformer
module
Type T
4I / 4/5V
Transformer
module
Type T
1I
Type Y
Analog
module
4I
Voltage measuring
Ring Pin
inputs
X051 X052
X031 X031
1
14
15
16
17
18
VAG
VBG
VCG
T5
T6
T7
VNG
T90
IN,par
T24
12
X032
1
Pin
X_1
X_1
Measuring outputs
K_01
valid
#
0..20 mA
Option:
11
Ring
VRef
T15
X_1
Output relays
K_07
17
18
U_09
Signal and
measuring inputs
Type X
Binary
module
4H
Ring
Pin
X_1
X_1
High-break
contacts
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
Pin
X_1
X_1
K_02
4
5
K_01
X_2
11
12
Vin
U_02
Vin
U_03
U_04
Vin
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
X_3
2
26
27
K_03
5-20
24
Type V
4I / 8O
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
25
24
26
27
9
25
26
27
U_02
Vin
U_03
Vin
U_04
Vin
U_05
Vin
U_06
Communication
Type A
module
Red. ETH / CH2
RX
X/Y
U17
X/Y
U18
X8
TX
K_02
K_03
X/Y
U28
X/Y
U29
X15
K_04
K_05
K_06
K_07
K_08
TX
X10
1
2
Vin
Serial [COMM2]
wire link only
X//Y
D2[R]
U20
U_01
X_3
K_04
Vin
X7
K_01
19
U_01
Output relays
Signal inputs
K_04
X_3
23
U_06
RX
1
PT100
19
X_2
10
20
0..20 mA
U_05
K_02
X_2
19
Vin
X_3
Power supply
module
Ring
K_08
Signal inputs
U_01
Vin
K_01
K_03
22
21
K_02
16
20
15
19
14
K_03
K_01
13
Pin
X_1
X_2
Ring
valid
X_3
6O
Output relays
K_02
0..20 mA
T4
Type X
K_04
K_05
K_06
18
Binary
module
IN
12
T3
X_1
12
11
IC
Pin
X_1
inputs
T2
Ring
X_2
1
IB
6I / 8O
11
10
T1
module
10
Current measuring
IA
U_08
13
Current measuring
input
Ring Pin
Type X
Binary
D1[T]
RS 422 / 485
Vin
Vin
K_05
Vin
U_02
U_03
Port supervision
7
8
Alarm Port 2
K22
IRIG-B
time synchronization
Power supply
+ Vaux
-
K21
U_04
K_06
PE
Alarm Port 1
X11
U100
#
#
U21
P437
Type A
Communication
module
CH1 / CH2
Per order
Serial [Channel 1]
optical fiber link
Ethernet [IEC]
optical fiber link ST
X7
X//Y U17
RX
X//Y U18
TX
X//Y
D2[R]
U19
4
5
U17
Communication Type A
module (InterMiCOM) CH3
X/Y
U18
TX
Per order
COMM4
optical fiber link ST
X36
X//Y U22
RX
U26
X/Y
X//Y U23
X//Y U31
1
2
U24
D1[T]
X//Y U32
or wire link
D2[R]
RS 485
RS 422 / 485
TX
X38
X//Y
3
4
D1[T]
RX
X37
or wire link
X33
X13
TX
Per order
X31
RX
Communication Type A
module (InterMiCOM) CH4
COMM3
optical fiber link ST
X32
or
optical fiber link SC
or wire link
X/Y
X8
X8
ETH / CH2
Per order
X7
X9
Type A
Communication
module
X//Y
D2[R]
3
4
5
U33
D1[T]
RS 485
Serial [Channel 2]
wire link only
X10
1
2
X//Y
D1[T]
X10
RS 422 / 485
IRIG-B
time synchronization
X11
1
Serial [COMM2]
wire link
U20
X//Y U25
RJ45
D2[R]
3
5
#
#
U21
1
2
X//Y
D2[R]
U20
4
5
D1[T]
RS 422 / 485
5-21
P437
5-22
P437
6
6.1
Control is also possible through the PC interface. This requires a suitable PC and
a specific operating program.
6-1
P437
6.2
6.2.1
Text Display
The local control panel as a text display includes an LC display containing 4 20
alphanumeric characters.
There are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the
LCD and six additional freely configurable function keys on the right hand side of
the LCD.
Furthermore the local control panel (HMI) is provided with 23 LED indicators. 17
of these are on the left hand side of the LCD. The other six LED indicators are
situated to the right of the six freely configurable function keys. (See
Section 3.11, (p. 3-65) for the configuration of the LED indicators.)
TRIP
H18
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
H19
EDIT MODE
H20
H21
H22
H23
Fig. 6-1: View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators for the text display.
6.2.2
Display Illumination
If none of the control keys are pressed, the display illumination will switch off
once the set return time illumination (setting in menu tree: Par/Conf/LOC)
has elapsed. Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on
again. In this case the control action that is normally triggered by that key will
not be executed. Reactivation of the display illumination is also possible by using
a binary input.
If continuous display illumination is required, the function return time
illumination (LO C : Re tu rn ti me i llu min.) is set to blocked.
6.2.3
6-2
P437
Keep the Enter key ( ) and the Clear key ( ) pressed simultaneously, then you
can press Up or Down (
,
) to raise or lower the contrast, respectively.
6.2.4
6.2.4.1
Panel Level: The up/down keys switch between the pages of the Measured
Value Panel.
Menu Tree Level: Press the up and down keys to navigate up and down
through the menu tree in a vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the
up and down keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the up and down keys in this
mode to change the setting value.
With list settings, press the up and down key to change the logic operator of
the value element.
6.2.4.2
Menu Tree Level: Press the left and right keys to navigate through the
menu tree in a horizontal direction. If the unit is in input mode, the left and
right keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the left and right keys are
pressed, the cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled
value moves one digit to the right or left.
Left key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
Right key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.
In the case of a list setting, press the left and right keys to navigate through
the list of items available for selection.
6.2.4.3
ENTER Key
Panel Level: Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level: Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the
ENTER key a second time to accept the changes as entered and exit the input
mode. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is
active.
6.2.4.4
CLEAR Key
6-3
P437
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event
data. The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode: When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected
and the input mode is exited.
6.2.4.5
READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel
level or from any other point in the menu tree.
6.2.4.6
6-4
6.3
P437
Display Levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels.
At the Panel level, data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that
provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level
below the panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals,
measured variables, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a
selected event recording from either the panel level or from any other point in
the menu tree, press the READ key:
6-5
P437
6.4
Display Panels
The text display of the P437 can display Measured Value Panels which are called
up according to system conditions.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The
system condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the
Operation Panel and the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant
for the particular design version of the given device and its associated range of
functions are actually available.
The Operation Panel is always provided.
Measured Value
Panel(s)
Record View
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record
+
Device type
Parameters
Operation
Device ID
Cyclic measurements
Configuration parameters
Function parameters
Global
Events
Event counters
Measured fault data
Event recordings
Main functions
Parameter subset 1
Parameter subset ...
Control
Menu tree
6-6
6.5
P437
6-7
P437
6.6
6-8
6.7
P437
6-9
P437
6.8
6-10
6.8.1
P437
6-11
P437
Step 0
Display example.
Step 1
Control
Action
Display
Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
********
Down
*
Right
*
Up
The display will change as shown in the right hand side
column.
Now press the ENTER key. If the correct password has
been entered, the active display will re-appear.
Function key [F1] is now effective for the set return
time.
*
Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
6-12
P437
Control
Action
Display
Step 3
Step 4
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
Yes
6-13
P437
6.9
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
From the Menu Tree Level, the user can jump to the
Panel Level from any position within the menu tree.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
No (=off)
Step 1
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
Step 1
P437
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: Par/Conf/LOC), the
display will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has
been configured.
6-14
P437
6.10
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
Step 1
or
6-15
P437
6.11
6.11.1
Unit
type
Folder
plane 1
PX yyy
PX yyy
Parameters
Folder
plane 2
Folder
plane 3
Function
groups
Data
points
PX yyy
Operation
PX yyy
Events
Oper/
Cyclic measurements
Oper/Cycl/
Meas. operating data
Oper/Cycl/Data/
MAIN
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Date
01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
6-16
P437
6.11.2
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device online
No (=off)
Step 1
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
0
or
6-17
P437
6.11.3
Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the
associated value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the
input mode. This safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.
Global change-enabling function: To activate the global changeenabling function, set the LOC: P aram. cha nge enabl. parameter to
Yes (menu tree: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered.
Thereafter, all further changes with the exception of specially protected
control actions (see Section 6.11.8, (p. 6-29)) are enabled without
entering the password.
6-18
P437
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
Step 1
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
********
Step 2
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
*
Left
Right
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
*
Up
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
*
Down
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
*
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
Yes
Step 4
Press the enter key again. The LED indicator will go out.
The unit is enabled for further setting changes.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
Yes
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global changeenabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single
setting change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global
change-enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global
change-enabling function has been activated.
6.11.3.1
Automatic Return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from
remaining activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set
return time (L O C: Aut om. re tur n ti me, menu tree Par/Conf/LOC) has
elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically deactivated, and the
6-19
P437
Forced Return
The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first
pressing the up key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
It is important to press the up key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be
changed. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function
(MAIN : D ev ice on-li ne, menu tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN). Such settings include
the configuration settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be
adapted to the system. The following entries in the Change column of the
Telegram Documentation (part of the separately available
DataModelExplorer) indicate whether values can be changed or not:
on: The value can be changed even when the protective function is
enabled.
off: The value can only be changed when the protective function is
disabled.
6-20
P437
6.11.4
Changing Parameters
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied, the desired setting can be
entered.
Control Step / Description
Step 0
Example of a display.
In this example, the change-enabling function is
activated and the protective function is disabled, if
necessary.
Control
Action
Display
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
Yes
Step 1
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Step 2
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Step 3
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Step 4
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50010 s
Step 5
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50010 s
Step 6
If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on),
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out and
the device will continue to operate with the old value.
A further setting can be selected for a value change by
pressing the keys.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
6-21
P437
6.11.5
List Parameters
6.11.5.1
6-22
P437
Control
Action
Display
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
Step 1
Press the down key. The first function and the first
selected signal will appear in the third and fourth lines,
respectively. The symbol #01 in the display indicates
the first item of the selection. If MA IN: Wi th out
funct ion appears for the first item, then this means
that no function assignment has yet been made.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#01 DIST
Trip zone 1
Step 2
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#05 MAIN
?????
Step 3
Press the ENTER key at any position in the list. The LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Step 4
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4
Step 5
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4
Step 6
Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator will go out. The
assignment has been made. The unit will now operate
with the new settings.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4
Step 0
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
Step 8
If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on),
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT
MODE will be extinguished.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
OR
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
6-23
P437
6.11.5.2
6-24
P437
6.11.6
Memory Readout
Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does
not necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the
protective functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not
possible.
The following memories are available:
Event memories
Step 0
Control
Action
Display
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record.
Step 1
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Step 2
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 PSIG
Enabled USER
Yes
Step 3
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Step 4
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record.
6-25
P437
6.11.6.2
Step 0
Control
Action
Display
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
First
Time when the signal first occurred
Updated
First:
13:33:59.744
Updated: Yes
Acknowledged:
No
Number:
5
Acknowledged
The fault was no longer detected by the selfmonitoring function and has been reset (Yes).
Number
The signal occurred x times.
Step 5
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
6-26
P437
6.11.6.3
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
Select the entry point for the first fault memory, for
example. If the memory contains entries, the third line
of the display will show the date and time the fault
began. If the third line is blank, then there are no entries
in the fault memory.
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
01.01.13 10:00:33
Step 1
Fault recording 1
FT_RC
Event
22
Step 2
Fault recording 1
200 ms
FT_DA
Running time
0.17 s
Once the end of the fault has been reached (after the
right key has been pressed repeatedly), pressing the
right key again will have no effect.
Fault recording 1
0 ms
FT_RC
Record. in progress
Start
Fault recording 1
241 ms
FT_RC
Record. in progress
End
Step 3
Fault recording 1
0 ms
FT_RC
Record. in progress
Start
Step 4
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
01.01.13 10:00:33
6-27
P437
6.11.7
Resetting
All information memories including the event memories and the monitoring
signal memory as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition,
the LED indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new
fault provided that the appropriate operating mode has been selected so that
they always indicate the latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which
is always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED
indicator test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by
this action, so that inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset
signal pattern is reliably prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight
consecutive events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should
not be necessary, in principle.
Deleting the event memories completely (e.g. after a function test), can be
accomplished by various resetting actions including the configuration of a group
resetting for several memories. An overview of all resetting actions can be found
in section Resetting Actions in Chapter Operation.
Resetting a single memory from the local control panel is described in the
following with the example of a fault memory. In this example the global changeenabling function has already been activated.
Control Step / Description
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Step 1
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Don't execute
Step 2
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Execute
Step 3
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
0
Step 4
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
6-28
6.11.8
P437
6-29
P437
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
Step 1
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
********
Step 2
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Left
Right
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Up
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Down
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
Step 3
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Execute
Step 4
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
Step 5
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
6-30
P437
6.11.9
6.11.9.1
4
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this
change is described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.
6-31
P437
Control
Action
Display
Step 0
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
Step 1
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
********
Step 2
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Step 3
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
_
Step 4
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
Step 5
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
_
Step 6
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
**
6-32
P437
Control
Action
Display
Step 7a
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
Step 7b
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
_
Step 8
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
6.11.9.2
6-33
P437
6.11.9.3
Step 0
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Control
Action
Display
TEST
Password
1234
6-34
P437
7
Settings
7.1
Parameters
The P437 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by
appropriate settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings,
which are located in the folder titled Parameters in the menu tree. The
sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter
corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
The P437 devices are supplied with a factory-set standard configuration of
settings that, in most cases, correspond to the default settings or become
apparent after a cold restart. The P437 is blocked in that case. All settings
must be re-entered after a cold restart.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 608705103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P437_en_P01.zip.
In contrast to P437 versions before P437630, the implementation of the IEC 61850
protocol now features parameters that cannot be modified from the local control
panel (HMI) or with the operating program. Instead, these parameters are set with
a special IEC 61850 operating software, named IED Configurator.
Therefore these settings are not listed in this chapter or the following chapter.
These parameters are described in Chapter IEC 61850 Settings via IED
Configurator.
None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals
by way of an m out of n parameter.
7-1
P437
7 Settings
The P437 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum
number possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing
binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function
can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from
several control points having different signal voltages.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering
signals must persist for at least 30 ms. The operating mode for each binary
signal input can be defined.
The user can specify whether the presence (active high mode) or absence
(active low mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic 1 signal.
General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group Binary Output (OUTP)
The P437 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and
connection schemes for the available binary output relays are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams. The DataModelExplorer (available as a separate
ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options for all binary
outputs.
The P437 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number
possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing output
relays are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. It is important to note that the contact rating
of the binary I/O modules (X) varies (see Chapter Technical Data). One signal
can also be assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of
contact multiplication.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the
selected operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-onsignal (ES) mode or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or
non-latching mode. For output relays operating in latching mode, the operating
mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
General Notes on the Configuration of the LED Indicators
The P437 has LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. LED indicator
H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled HEALTHY and signals the operational
readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). LED indicators H 2 and
H 3 are not configurable either. H 2 is labeled OUT OF SERVICE and signals a
blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled ALARM and signals a warning alarm.
LED indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the EDIT MODE. Section
Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED)
in Chapter Operation describes the layout of the LED indicators and the factory
setting for LED indicator H 4.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES)
mode (open-circuit principle) or normally-energized (NE) mode (closed-circuit
principle) and in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators
operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when
latching will be cancelled.
With the multi-color LED indicators (H 4 H 16) the colors red and green can be
independently assigned with functions. The third color amber results as a
mixture of red and green, i.e. when both functions assigned to the LED indicator
are simultaneously present.
7-2
P437
7 Settings
7.1.1
Device Identification
The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and
the design version of the P437. They have no effect on the device functions.
These settings should only be changed if the design version of the P437 is
modified.
7-3
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Device
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
000 000
1000
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
655.35
[spacer]
0.00
002 120
010 167
65535
010 168
65535
[spacer]
[spacer]
DVICE: S W date
01.01.97
[spacer]
002 122
[spacer]
0.00
002 103
655.35
[spacer]
Software version for the device's communication software. This display cannot
be altered.
[spacer]
002 059
65535
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
002 123
899.9
[spacer]
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
[spacer]
002 121
255
[spacer]
Using the text replacement tool' provided by the operating program, the user
can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and load them
into the device. These customized data models contain an identifier defined by
the user while preparing the data model. This identifier is displayed at this point
in the menu tree. Standard data models have the identifier 0' (factory-set
default).
[spacer]
DVICE: F numb er
0
[spacer]
7-4
002 124
9999
The F number is the serial number of the device. The display cannot be altered.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
001 000
0:
[spacer]
001 200
0:
[spacer]
Order numbers for the device. The user cannot alter this number.
[spacer]
[spacer]
000 010
999
000 011
999
000 012
999
000 013
999
000 014
999
000 015
999
000 016
999
[spacer]
999
[spacer]
000 009
[spacer]
999
[spacer]
000 008
[spacer]
999
[spacer]
000 007
[spacer]
999
[spacer]
000 006
[spacer]
999
[spacer]
000 005
[spacer]
999
[spacer]
000 004
[spacer]
999
[spacer]
000 003
000 017
999
000 018
999
7-5
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
999
000 023
999
000 024
999
000 025
999
000 026
999
000 027
999
[spacer]
000 022
[spacer]
999
[spacer]
000 021
[spacer]
999
[spacer]
000 020
[spacer]
000 028
999
Logic Diagram
999
[spacer]
Unit
000 019
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
000 029
999
[spacer]
[spacer]
086 050
1: Module P: 0336411
[spacer]
086 051
086 052
086 053
086 054
086 055
086 056
7-6
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
086 057
086 058
086 059
086 061
086 062
086 063
086 064
086 065
086 066
086 067
086 068
086 069
[spacer]
086 193
086 194
086 195
086 196
086 197
086 198
7-7
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
086 199
086 200
086 201
086 202
086 204
086 205
086 206
086 207
086 208
086 209
086 210
086 212
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
[spacer]
086 047
[spacer]
086 190
[spacer]
104 061
2:
[spacer]
7-8
MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This address is
introduced during manufacture and can only be read.
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
086 048
[spacer]
086 191
[spacer]
086 049
[spacer]
086 192
[spacer]
086 046
[spacer]
086 189
[spacer]
DVICE: IP addres s
111 000
2:
[spacer]
111 001
2:
[spacer]
DVICE: M AC address
111 003
2:
[spacer]
Display of the IP address (or subnet mask, MAC address, respectively) of the
Ethernet interface of the processor module. This can be useful for network
analysis, especially if these settings have been retrieved via DHCP.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
000 041
99.99
[spacer]
99.99
[spacer]
0.00
000 040
0.00
000 042
99.99
0.00
000 043
99.99
7-9
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.00
000 044
99.99
0.00
000 045
99.99
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
0.00
000 046
99.99
0.00
000 047
99.99
[spacer]
Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.
[spacer]
DVICE: Location
001 201
0:
[spacer]
[spacer]
DVICE: De vice I D
0
000 035
9999
[spacer]
ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting. Further
instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective
operating program.
[spacer]
000 036
9999
[spacer]
ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting. Further
instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective
operating program.
[spacer]
DVICE: Fee de r ID
0
000 037
9999
[spacer]
ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting. Further
instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective
operating program.
[spacer]
[spacer]
000 048
9999
000 049
9999
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-10
0.00
002 131
655.35
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
0.00
002 132
655.35
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LOC: Local HM I ex is ts
221 099
1: Yes
[spacer]
When set to Yes it is apparent that the device is fitted with the local control
panel (HMI).
7-11
P437
7.1.2
7 Settings
Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LOC: Languag e
003 020
2: Reference language
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 021
1: Dot
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 035
4444
[spacer]
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel can
be defined here.
[spacer]
005 251
[spacer]
Selection of counters and memories that are reset by pressing the RESET key on
the local control panel. (Resetting LED indicators and measured event values is
permanently assigned internally, so that they are always reset when the RESET
key is pressed.)
[spacer]
080 110
[spacer]
030 238
030 239
[spacer]
053 007
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-12
053 005
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
053 003
[spacer]
[spacer]
031 075
10
[spacer]
Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before switching to
the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are selected than can
be shown on the LC-Display.
[spacer]
60
003 014
60000
[spacer]
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time
period, the change-enabling function is deactivated.
[spacer]
[spacer]
60
003 023
60000
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time
period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.
7-13
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
PC link
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
003 068
254
003 069
255
[spacer]
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via
the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses.
[spacer]
003 081
Baud
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 181
1: Even
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P437.
[spacer]
003 187
0: None
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 189
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 084
0: Without
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
[spacer]
003 185
[spacer]
[spacer]
PC: De lta V
3.0
003 055
0.0
15.0
%Vnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
PC: De lta I
3.0
003 056
0.0
15.0
%Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
PC: IP addr es s
192
7-14
111 004
255
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Unit
Logic Diagram
255
PC: IP addr es s 2
111 006
255
PC: IP addr es s 3
2
[spacer]
Max
111 005
1
[spacer]
Min
PC: IP addr es s 1
168
[spacer]
Address
111 007
255
PC : IP add re ss,
PC: IP addr e ss 1,
PC: IP ad dres s 2,
PC: I P ad dres s 3.
Note: This interface can only be used if it has been configured (PC: IP
addr es s, PC: Subnet mas k, PC : IP addre ss mode) and activated via
PC: IP Enable co nf ig..
[spacer]
[spacer]
255
111 010
255
[spacer]
111 009
255
[spacer]
255
[spacer]
111 008
111 011
255
7-15
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
111 016
1: DHCP
[spacer]
[spacer]
Setting of the method how the IP address of the Ethernet interface of the
processor module shall be defined.
Device address: The setting of PC : IP addr ess shall be used for the
first three number values of the IP address, the fourth number value of the
IP address shall be the value of PC : De v ic e addr ess.
111 017
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
PC: De lta P
15.0
003 059
0.0
15.0
%Snom
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set
delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
PC: De lta f
2.0
003 057
0.0
2.0
%fnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
003 155
15.0
[spacer]
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity
from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
PC: De lta t
1
003 058
15
min
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this time
period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered by the
other delta conditions.
[spacer]
PC: Time-out
1
[spacer]
7-16
003 188
60
min
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module A.
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Logical
communication
interface 1
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 026
0: Without
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 170
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 215
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 216
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
[spacer]
003 217
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 220
003 231
103 040
003 167
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
7-17
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
003 178
1: Private
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
The user may select between two variants of the 103 protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
003 214
1: Compatible
[spacer]
The user may select between two variants of the MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
003 165
1: Light on / high
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 071
Baud
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 171
[spacer]
7-18
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P437.
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 176
1: Yes
[spacer]
The P437 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer]
003 202
254
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer]
254
003 072
[spacer]
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
ASDU: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer]
[spacer]
255
003 240
7-19
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
103 060
1: Single character E5
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 166
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 161
[spacer]
[spacer]
255
003 073
[spacer]
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
ASDU: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer]
003 177
[spacer]
7-20
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 179
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 074
0: Without
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 175
[spacer]
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta V
3.0
003 050
0.0
15.0
%Vnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta I
3.0
003 051
0.0
15.0
%Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta P
15.0
003 054
0.0
15.0
%Snom
[spacer]
7-21
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 1: Delta f
2.0
003 052
0.0
2.0
%fnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
003 150
15.0
[spacer]
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity
from the last measured value transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM 1: Delta t
1
003 053
15
min
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
003 151
15
min
[spacer]
The measured values for active energy and reactive energy are transmitted via
the communication interface after this time has elapsed.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
10
9000
003 077
[spacer]
A continuous or background general scan means that the P437 transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication interface
during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will
be data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be set defines
the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
7-22
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
003 201
Byte
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 200
255
[spacer]
003 192
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 193
Byte
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
ASDU: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 194
255
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of
telegram structures.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
ASDU: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 196
Byte
[spacer]
[spacer]
255
003 197
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 195
7-23
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
003 198
Byte
[spacer]
003 190
1: Single signal
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 191
1: Single signal
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 199
1: Yes
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 226
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 227
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.10
003 228
2.55
Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
7-24
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
003 210
Logic Diagram
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the selected
commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first command is given the register no. 00301, the second the register no.
00302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
003 211
MODBUS registers in the range 10301 to 10400 are assigned to the selected
signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
signal is given the register no. 10301, the second the register no. 10302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
003 212
MODBUS registers in the range 30301 to 30400 are assigned to the selected
measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that
the first measured value is given the register no. 30301, the second the register
no. 30302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
003 213
MODBUS registers in the range 40301 to 40400 are assigned to the selected
parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first parameter is given the register no. 40301, the second the register no.
40302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 152
120
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 249
7-25
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
254
003 241
Bit
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the start
of sending the 'response'.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
[spacer]
254
003 242
Bit
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
003 243
1: Multi-frame fragment
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.05
2.54
003 244
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 245
10
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.5
25.4
003 246
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
[spacer]
254
003 247
Time interval within which the slave requests time synchronization cyclically
from the master.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
7-26
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
003 232
Logic Diagram
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 binary inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
003 233
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 binary outputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
003 234
Selection of data points and data classes for object 20 binary counters.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
003 235
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 analog inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
003 236
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 analog outputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 250
255
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 248
120
7-27
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
103 042
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
103 043
[spacer]
103 044
[spacer]
103 045
[spacer]
[spacer]
103 046
120
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are again
transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the COURIER protocol is enabled.
7-28
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Logical
communication
interface 2
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 057
0: Without
[spacer]
[spacer]
103 170
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
103 165
1: Light on / high
[spacer]
[spacer]
103 071
Baud
[spacer]
[spacer]
103 171
2: Even
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P437.
[spacer]
103 176
1: Yes
[spacer]
The P437 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer]
103 202
254
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer]
103 203
0: No
[spacer]
7-29
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
103 072
254
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
ASDU: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer]
103 161
1: SE
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
103 073
255
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
ASDU: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer]
103 177
0: None
[spacer]
[spacer]
103 179
[spacer]
[spacer]
103 074
0: Without
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
[spacer]
103 175
[spacer]
[spacer]
COMM 2: Delta V
3.0
[spacer]
7-30
103 050
0.0
15.0
%Vnom
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COMM 2: Delta I
3.0
103 051
0.0
15.0
%Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
COMM 2: Delta P
15.0
103 054
0.0
15.0
%Snom
[spacer]
[spacer]
COMM 2: Delta f
2.0
103 052
0.0
2.0
%fnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
103 150
15.0
[spacer]
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity
from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
COMM 2: Delta t
1
[spacer]
103 053
15
min
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
7-31
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 058
0: Without
[spacer]
[spacer]
120 030
0: No
[spacer]
122 030
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
120 038
Baud
122 038
Baud
[spacer]
Adjustment of the baud rate for telegram transmission via the guidance
interface (InterMiCOM interface) so as to meet the requirements of the
transmission carrier.
[spacer]
120 031
1: 1
[spacer]
122 031
1: 1
[spacer]
[spacer]
120 032
2: 2
[spacer]
056 088
0: Without
[spacer]
122 032
2: 2
[spacer]
[spacer]
121 001
121 003
121 005
7-32
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
121 007
121 009
121 011
121 013
121 015
123 001
123 003
123 005
123 007
123 009
123 011
123 013
123 015
[spacer]
120 001
120 004
120 007
120 010
120 013
7-33
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
120 016
120 019
120 022
122 001
122 004
122 007
122 010
122 013
122 016
122 019
122 022
[spacer]
120 002
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
120 005
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
120 008
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
120 011
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 002
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 005
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 008
1: Direct intertrip
7-34
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
122 011
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
Selection of Blocking or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive signals
1 to 4 (single-pole transmission).
[spacer]
120 014
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
120 017
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
120 020
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
120 023
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 014
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 017
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 020
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
122 023
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
[spacer]
120 060
0: 0
[spacer]
120 061
0: 0
[spacer]
120 062
0: 0
[spacer]
120 063
0: 0
[spacer]
120 064
0: 0
[spacer]
120 065
0: 0
[spacer]
120 066
0: 0
[spacer]
120 067
0: 0
7-35
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
122 060
0: 0
[spacer]
122 061
0: 0
[spacer]
122 062
0: 0
[spacer]
122 063
0: 0
[spacer]
122 064
0: 0
[spacer]
122 065
0: 0
[spacer]
122 066
0: 0
[spacer]
122 067
0: 0
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
10
60000
120 033
ms
10
60000
122 033
ms
[spacer]
[spacer]
120 034
0: None
[spacer]
122 034
0: None
[spacer]
Using this setting, the alarm signal can be configured (assigned) to the
corresponding PSIG input signal.
[spacer]
7-36
120 035
600
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
122 035
600
[spacer]
Time indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. After this timer
stage has elapsed, alarm signals C OMM 3: C omm. link failure and
SFMO N: Comm .link fail.C OMM3 are raised. These can be mapped to
give the operator a warning LED or contact to indicate that maintenance
attention is required.
[spacer]
[spacer]
100
[spacer]
120 036
100
122 036
IRIGB interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 072
0: Without
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
023 200
7-37
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
IEC Generic
Substation Status
Events
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 060
0: Without
[spacer]
[spacer]
104 049
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
104 052
60
ms
Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition cycle
time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with this
formula:
Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))N-1 [ms]
The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state change of
a GSSE bit pair.
[spacer]
104 053
60
[spacer]
Maximum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in s. For the formula to
calculate the repetition cycle time see G SS E : Min. cycle. Should the
calculated value for the repetition cycle time be equal to or greater than the set
max. value then the GSSE message will be sent repeatedly at the set max. value
time.
[spacer]
104 054
999
[spacer]
Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the
repetition cycle time see GS SE: Min. c ycle.
[spacer]
104 055
0: Promiscuous
[spacer]
In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independent of their MAC address
(network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed. In the
operating mode Promiscuous and after all GSSE sending devices have loggedon, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have logged-on
successfully, are read and processed.
[spacer]
104 101
0: No selection
7-38
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 104
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 107
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 110
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 113
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 116
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 119
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 122
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 125
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 128
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 131
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 134
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 137
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 140
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 143
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 146
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 149
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 152
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 155
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 158
0: No selection
7-39
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 161
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 164
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 167
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 170
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 173
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 176
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 179
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 182
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 185
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 188
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 191
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 194
0: No selection
[spacer]
Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual GSSE
outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted consisting of a fixed
number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are used by this device (IED)
during a send operation.
[spacer]
104 102
104 105
104 108
104 111
104 114
7-40
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 117
104 120
104 123
104 126
104 129
104 132
104 135
104 138
104 141
104 144
104 147
104 150
104 153
104 156
104 159
104 162
104 165
104 168
104 171
7-41
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 174
104 177
104 180
104 183
104 186
104 189
104 192
104 195
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GSSE outputs.
The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as configured
above.
[spacer]
105 001
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 006
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 011
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 016
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 021
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 026
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 031
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 036
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 041
0: No selection
7-42
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 046
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 051
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 056
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 061
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 066
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 071
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 076
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 081
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 086
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 091
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 096
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 101
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 106
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 111
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 116
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 121
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 126
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 131
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 136
0: No selection
7-43
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 141
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 146
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 151
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 156
0: No selection
[spacer]
Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input. A GSSE is
always received consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a
maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).
[spacer]
105 002
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 007
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 012
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 017
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 022
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 027
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 032
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 037
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 042
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 047
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 052
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 057
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 062
1: Remote IED
7-44
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 067
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 072
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 077
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 082
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 087
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 092
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 097
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 102
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 107
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 112
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 117
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 122
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 127
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 132
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 137
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 142
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 147
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 152
1: Remote IED
7-45
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 157
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.
[spacer]
105 003
0: 0
[spacer]
105 008
0: 0
[spacer]
105 013
0: 0
[spacer]
105 018
0: 0
[spacer]
105 023
0: 0
[spacer]
105 028
0: 0
[spacer]
105 033
0: 0
[spacer]
105 038
0: 0
[spacer]
105 043
0: 0
[spacer]
105 048
0: 0
[spacer]
105 053
0: 0
[spacer]
105 058
0: 0
[spacer]
105 063
0: 0
[spacer]
105 068
0: 0
[spacer]
105 073
0: 0
[spacer]
105 078
0: 0
[spacer]
105 083
0: 0
7-46
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 088
0: 0
[spacer]
105 093
0: 0
[spacer]
105 098
0: 0
[spacer]
105 103
0: 0
[spacer]
105 108
0: 0
[spacer]
105 113
0: 0
[spacer]
105 118
0: 0
[spacer]
105 123
0: 0
[spacer]
105 128
0: 0
[spacer]
105 133
0: 0
[spacer]
105 138
0: 0
[spacer]
105 143
0: 0
[spacer]
105 148
0: 0
[spacer]
105 153
0: 0
[spacer]
105 158
0: 0
[spacer]
Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole GSSE
input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side)
is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
[spacer]
105 004
105 009
7-47
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 014
105 019
105 024
105 029
105 034
105 039
105 044
105 049
105 054
105 059
105 064
105 069
105 074
105 079
105 084
105 089
105 094
105 099
105 104
7-48
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 109
105 114
105 119
105 124
105 129
105 134
105 139
105 144
105 149
105 154
105 159
Function assignment of the virtual GSSE input to a binary logical state signal on
the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection or logic
functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the state of the bit
pair, as configured above, and which was received with GSSE.
7-49
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
IEC 61850
Communication
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 059
0: Without
[spacer]
[spacer]
104 000
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
104 043
0: don't execute
[spacer]
This parameter can only be sent individually. Accepting the previously set
communication parameters as the active communication settings.
[spacer]
104 045
2:
[spacer]
[spacer]
104 046
2:
[spacer]
[spacer]
104 047
2:
[spacer]
[spacer]
104 048
2:
[spacer]
7-50
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 057
2:
[spacer]
Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the
Logical Device Name.
Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and neither a digit
nor the underscore character must be the first character. Note that a nonstandard name causes problems with the IEC 61850 communication.
[spacer]
IEC: IP address
104 001
2:
[spacer]
Assigned IP address of the device for the server function in the system.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator" with Communications: IP Address.
[spacer]
104 005
2:
[spacer]
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the subnetwork and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask.
[spacer]
104 011
2:
[spacer]
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address.
[spacer]
104 202
2:
[spacer]
[spacer]
104 210
2:
[spacer]
7-51
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 064
[spacer]
104 206
-1440
1440
min
[spacer]
Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation (IED).
[spacer]
-1440
104 207
1440
min
[spacer]
[spacer]
104 219
1: Yes
[spacer]
[spacer]
104 220
5: Last
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s t. d
104 221
7: Sunday
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s t. m
104 222
3: March
[spacer]
These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s tar t are the values First, Second, Third, Fourth, and
Last. For IEC: Dayl.sav.ti me st . d the seven weekdays are available so
that for example a setting like on the last Sunday in March may be used.
[spacer]
104 223
1440
min
[spacer]
Time period in minutes after midnight when daylight saving time is switched to
standard time. If for example the clock is advanced one hour from 2:00 AM to
3:00 AM the parameter IE C: D ayl.sav .t .st .0:00 + is set to 120 (minutes).
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd
104 225
5: Last
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd d
104 226
7: Sunday
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd m
104 227
10: October
7-52
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
[spacer]
Address
Logic Diagram
104 228
1440
min
This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover from
daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for the clock
changeover to daylight saving time.
7-53
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Generic Object
Orientated
Substation Events
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 068
0: Without
[spacer]
[spacer]
106 001
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
106 011
106 013
106 015
106 017
106 019
106 021
106 023
106 025
106 027
106 029
106 031
106 033
7-54
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
106 035
106 037
106 039
106 041
106 043
106 045
106 047
106 049
106 051
106 053
106 055
106 057
106 059
106 061
106 063
106 065
106 067
106 069
106 071
7-55
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
106 073
[spacer]
107 006
107 016
107 026
107 036
107 046
107 056
107 066
107 076
107 086
107 096
107 106
107 116
107 126
107 136
107 146
107 156
7-56
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
107 157
107 158
107 159
107 160
107 161
107 162
107 163
107 164
107 165
107 166
107 167
107 168
107 169
107 170
107 171
107 172
7-57
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Binary input
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
INP: Filter
0
010 220
20
[spacer]
Input filter which is activated when either the mode Active "high", filt. or Active
"low", filt. has been selected for INP: Ope r. mode U xxx. In order to
suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to
set this parameter to 6 [steps].
[spacer]
184 002
184 006
184 010
184 014
184 018
184 022
152 163
152 166
152 169
152 172
152 175
152 178
152 199
152 202
152 205
152 208
7-58
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
152 211
152 214
190 002
190 006
190 010
190 014
190 018
190 022
192 002
192 006
192 010
192 014
192 018
192 022
153 087
153 090
153 093
153 096
7-59
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
184 003
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 007
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 011
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 015
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 019
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 023
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 164
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 167
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 170
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 173
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 176
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 179
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 200
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 203
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 206
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 209
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 212
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 215
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
190 003
1: Active "high"
7-60
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
190 007
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
190 011
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
190 015
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
190 019
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
190 023
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 003
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 007
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 011
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 015
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 019
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 023
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
153 088
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
153 091
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
153 094
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
153 097
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
7-61
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 030
0: Without
[spacer]
[spacer]
011 100
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
037 190
0.200
IDC,nom
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P437 to display a
measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
[spacer]
0.0
037 191
10.0
mA
[spacer]
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P437 will issue an open
circuit signal.
[spacer]
MEASI: I DC 1
0.000
[spacer]
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC 10
Blocked
7-62
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC 9
Blocked
[spacer]
1.200
MEASI: I DC 8
Blocked
[spacer]
0.000
MEASI: I DC 7
Blocked
[spacer]
037 152
MEASI: I DC 6
Blocked
[spacer]
MEASI: I DC 5
Blocked
[spacer]
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC 4
Blocked
[spacer]
1.200
MEASI: I DC 3
Blocked
[spacer]
0.000
MEASI: I DC 2
Blocked
[spacer]
037 150
037 168
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC 19
Blocked
[spacer]
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC 18
Blocked
[spacer]
1.200
MEASI: I DC 17
Blocked
[spacer]
0.000
MEASI: I DC 16
Blocked
[spacer]
037 170
MEASI: I DC 15
Blocked
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
MEASI: I DC 14
Blocked
[spacer]
Unit
MEASI: I DC 13
Blocked
[spacer]
Max
MEASI: I DC 12
Blocked
[spacer]
Min
MEASI: I DC 11
Blocked
[spacer]
Address
037 186
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC 20
1.200
037 188
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
[spacer]
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that has
been set accordingly.
[spacer]
MEASI: I DC ,lin 1
0.000
[spacer]
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC ,lin 7
Blocked
[spacer]
037 153
MEASI: I DC ,lin 6
Blocked
[spacer]
MEASI: I DC ,lin 5
Blocked
[spacer]
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC ,lin 4
Blocked
[spacer]
1.200
MEASI: I DC ,lin 3
Blocked
[spacer]
0.000
MEASI: I DC ,lin 2
Blocked
[spacer]
037 151
037 163
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC ,lin 8
Blocked
037 165
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
7-63
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC ,lin 19
Blocked
[spacer]
037 169
MEASI: I DC ,lin 18
Blocked
[spacer]
MEASI: I DC ,lin 17
Blocked
[spacer]
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC ,lin 16
Blocked
[spacer]
1.200
MEASI: I DC ,lin 15
Blocked
[spacer]
0.000
MEASI: I DC ,lin 14
Blocked
[spacer]
037 167
MEASI: I DC ,lin 13
Blocked
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
MEASI: I DC ,lin 12
Blocked
[spacer]
Unit
MEASI: I DC ,lin 11
Blocked
[spacer]
Max
MEASI: I DC ,lin 10
Blocked
[spacer]
Min
MEASI: I DC ,lin 9
Blocked
[spacer]
Address
037 187
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
MEASI: I DC ,lin 20
1.200
037 189
0.000
1.200
IDC,nom
[spacer]
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
[spacer]
-32768
037 192
32767
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-64
-32768
32767
037 193
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
150 169
150 172
150 175
150 178
150 181
150 184
150 187
150 190
150 217
150 220
150 223
150 226
150 229
150 232
150 235
150 238
151 009
151 012
7-65
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
151 015
151 018
151 021
151 024
151 027
151 030
169 002
169 006
169 010
169 014
169 018
169 022
169 026
169 030
171 002
171 006
171 010
171 014
171 018
7-66
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
171 022
171 026
171 030
173 002
173 006
173 010
173 014
173 018
173 022
151 201
151 204
151 207
151 210
151 213
151 216
151 219
151 222
[spacer]
150 170
1: ES updating
7-67
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
150 173
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 176
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 179
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 182
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 185
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 188
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 191
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 218
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 221
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 224
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 227
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 230
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 233
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 236
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 239
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 010
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 013
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 016
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 019
1: ES updating
7-68
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
151 022
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 025
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 028
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 031
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 003
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 007
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 011
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 015
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 019
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 023
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 027
1: ES updating
[spacer]
169 031
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 003
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 007
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 011
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 015
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 019
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 023
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 027
1: ES updating
7-69
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
171 031
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 003
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 007
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 011
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 015
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 019
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 023
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 202
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 205
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 208
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 211
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 214
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 217
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 220
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 223
1: ES updating
[spacer]
7-70
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Measured data
output
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 020
0: Without
[spacer]
[spacer]
031 074
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
053 002
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.10
10.00
010 010
[spacer]
Setting for the transmission time of the selected measured value in BCD form.
[spacer]
[spacer]
1.000
[spacer]
0.000
0.000
037 141
1.000
037 140
037 142
399
7-71
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
037 143
399
Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Designation of the set values in the data model: Scaled min. val. BCD ...
Scaled max. val. BCD
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
BCD display values for measured values in the range measured values to be
issued; range: BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
BBCD display values for measured values Mx,min; range: BCD-Out min.
value
BCD display values for measured values Mx,max; range: BCD-Out max.
value
[spacer]
053 000
053 001
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.10
10.00
010 114
0.10
10.00
010 115
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay for output of the selected measured value.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
1.000
0.000
1.000
7-72
[spacer]
1.000
[spacer]
0.000
037 104
0.000
037 106
1.000
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.000
037 111
1.000
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
0.000
037 112
1.000
Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Designation of the set values in the data model: Scaled min. val. Ax ...
Scaled max. val. Ax
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Designation of this set value in the data model: Scaled knee val. Ax
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
20.00
037 108
mA
0.00
20.00
037 109
mA
[spacer]
mA
[spacer]
20.00
[spacer]
0.00
037 107
0.00
20.00
037 113
mA
0.00
20.00
037 114
mA
7-73
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
[spacer]
Address
0.00
20.00
Logic Diagram
037 115
mA
Output current range for measured values in the range measured values to be
issued; designation in the data model: An-Out min. val. Ax ... An-Out max.
val. Ax
Output current to be set for measured values Mx,min; designation in the data
model: An-Out min. val. Ax
Output current to be set for measured values Mx,max; designation in the data
model: An-Out max. val. Ax
Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,knee; designation in the data
model: AnOut knee point Ax
with:
Mx,min ... Mx,max: measured values to be issued
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-74
0.00
037 121
100.00
[spacer]
100.00
[spacer]
0.00
037 120
0.00
037 122
100.00
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
LED indicators
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
085 184
[spacer]
085 001
[spacer]
085 004
[spacer]
085 007
085 057
085 010
085 060
085 013
085 063
085 016
085 066
085 019
085 069
085 022
085 072
7-75
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
085 025
085 075
085 028
085 078
085 031
085 081
085 034
085 084
085 037
085 087
085 040
085 090
085 043
085 093
085 131
085 161
085 134
085 164
085 137
7-76
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
085 167
085 140
085 170
085 143
085 173
085 146
085 177
[spacer]
085 185
[spacer]
085 182
1: ES updating
[spacer]
[spacer]
085 002
1: ES updating
[spacer]
[spacer]
085 005
1: ES updating
[spacer]
[spacer]
085 008
3: ES reset (fault)
[spacer]
085 011
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 014
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 017
1: ES updating
7-77
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
085 020
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 023
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 026
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 029
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 032
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 035
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 038
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 041
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 044
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 132
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 135
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 138
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 141
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 144
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 147
1: ES updating
[spacer]
[spacer]
085 183
1: ES updating
[spacer]
7-78
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 169
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2)
[spacer]
[spacer]
103 210
0: COMM1
[spacer]
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
[spacer]
103 211
1: COMM2/PC
[spacer]
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. The
backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by the
primary source after MAIN: Time s ync. time-out has elapsed.
[spacer]
[spacer]
103 212
60
min
Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary source.
7-79
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Fault recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
035 160
1: Current IA
[spacer]
035 161
2: Current IB
[spacer]
035 162
3: Current IC
[spacer]
035 163
5: Voltage A-G
[spacer]
035 164
6: Voltage B-G
[spacer]
035 165
7: Voltage C-G
[spacer]
035 166
4: Current IN
[spacer]
035 167
8: Voltage VNG
[spacer]
035 168
035 169
0: Without
[spacer]
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
Parameter
Default
Distance protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 014
1: With
[spacer]
7-80
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Power swing
blocking
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 001
0: Without
[spacer]
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 015
0: Without
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 002
0: Without
[spacer]
Switch on to fault
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 003
0: Without
[spacer]
7-81
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Protective signaling
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 004
0: Without
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing
control
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 005
0: Without
[spacer]
Automatic
synchronism check
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 006
0: Without
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 011
0: Without
[spacer]
7-82
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 028
0: Without
[spacer]
Definite-time over
current protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 008
0: Without
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 009
0: Without
[spacer]
Thermal overload
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 023
0: Without
[spacer]
7-83
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 010
0: Without
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 033
0: Without
[spacer]
Power directional
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 045
0: Without
[spacer]
Circuit breaker
failure protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 007
0: Without
[spacer]
7-84
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 062
0: Without
[spacer]
Limit value
monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 025
0: Without
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 017
0: Without
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
056 089
0: Without
[spacer]
7-85
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Binary counts
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
217 047
0: Without
[spacer]
7-86
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Configurable func
tion keys
003 036
030 242
4444
030 243
4444
030 244
4444
030 245
4444
Logic Diagram
4444
[spacer]
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
030 246
4444
[spacer]
[spacer]
080 112
080 113
080 114
080 115
080 116
080 117
[spacer]
080 132
1: Key
[spacer]
080 133
1: Key
[spacer]
080 134
1: Key
[spacer]
080 135
1: Key
7-87
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
080 136
1: Key
[spacer]
080 137
1: Key
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
60000
003 037
Once the password has been entered, the function keys remain active for no
longer than this time. Thereafter, the function keys are disabled until the
password is entered again.
7.1.3
Function Parameters
7.1.3.1
Global
Parameter
Default
PC link
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 182
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-88
003 086
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Logical
communication
interface 1
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 172
1: Yes
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 076
0: No
[spacer]
Logical
communication
interface 2
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
103 172
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
103 076
0: No
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
021 014
7-89
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 030
0: No (= off)
[spacer]
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Some parameters can only be changed
when protection is disabled.
[spacer]
003 012
0: No
[spacer]
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
[spacer]
010 030
50: 50 Hz
Hz
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 049
1: A - B - C
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 001
10000
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformers for
measurement of phase currents.
[spacer]
010 018
10000
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of residual current.
[spacer]
10000
010 152
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of the residual current of the parallel line.
[spacer]
0.1
010 002
1000.0
kV
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-90
0.1
010 027
1000.0
kV
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.1
010 100
1000.0
kV
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
[spacer]
010 003
1.0: 1.0 A
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of phase currents. This also corresponds to the nominal device
current.
[spacer]
010 026
1.0: 1.0 A
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of residual current. This also corresponds to the nominal device
current.
[spacer]
010 023
1.0: 1.0 A
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of the residual current of the parallel line. This also corresponds
to the nominal device current.
[spacer]
50
010 009
130
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
[spacer]
50
010 028
130
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
[spacer]
50
031 052
130
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 004
7-91
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
010 019
1: Standard
[spacer]
[spacer]
006 096
1: Standard
[spacer]
[spacer]
This parameter allows inverting the sign for the following measured operating
values:
010 020
1: Standard
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
011 030
0.200
Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents are
displayed.
[spacer]
0.000
011 031
0.200
IN,nom
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the residual current is displayed.
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-92
0.000
011 043
0.200
IN,nom
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating value of the residual current of the parallel line to be
displayed.
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.000
011 032
0.200
Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages, and,
if applicable, derived voltages are displayed.
[spacer]
0.000
011 033
0.200
VNG,nom
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the neutral-point displacement voltage is displayed.
[spacer]
0.000
011 034
0.200
Vref,nom
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the reference voltage for the automatic synchronism check is
displayed.
[spacer]
010 138
1: Procedure 1
[spacer]
Selection of the procedure to determine the active and reactive energy output.
1st procedure: Data acquisition every 2s (approximately). 2nd procedure: Data
acquisition every 100ms (approximately)
[spacer]
MAIN: Se tt l. t. IP,max,de l
15.0
0.1
010 113
60.0
min
[spacer]
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall
reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
[spacer]
005 248
[spacer]
[spacer]
005 249
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
021 021
7-93
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
021 022
[spacer]
[spacer]
021 012
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
021 001
[spacer]
[spacer]
021 002
[spacer]
[spacer]
002 060
[spacer]
Selecting signals for the phase-selective trip logic. Available are these signals:
0.10
021 003
10.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.10
021 004
10.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
021 023
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
021 024
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-94
0.100
10.000
015 067
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: tCB,clos e
0.060
000 032
0.000
1.000
[spacer]
[spacer]
015 042
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the reclose command will be inhibited as soon
as the Circuit breaker closed signal starts.
[spacer]
3600
003 088
[spacer]
Setting for the release time of the enable for the manual close command.
[spacer]
021 031
Parameter subset
selection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 100
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 060
1: Parameter subset 1
[spacer]
[spacer]
PSS: Ke ep tim e
Blocked
[spacer]
003 063
0.000
65.000
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection is
carried out via the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may occur
during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no binary
signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected from the local
control panel shall apply.
7-95
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Self-monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
021 030
[spacer]
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals Warning
(LED) and Warning (relay) and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled
ALARM. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading to blocking of the
device are not configurable. They always result in the above signals and
indication.
[spacer]
[spacer]
021 018
240
This setting defines the duration (in hours) for which a device-internal fault is
stored, so that a decision may be taken between an automatic warm restart and
an automatic device blocking. (Setting to Blocked may be considered the same
as unlimited storage.)
Parameter
Default
Fault recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 085
[spacer]
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording.
[spacer]
FT_RC: I>
Blocked
017 065
0.01
40.00
Inom
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the phase currents that will trigger
fault recording and fault data acquisition.
[spacer]
003 078
50
Periods
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a
fault (pre-fault recording time).
[spacer]
003 079
750
Periods
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault
(post-fault recording time).
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-96
750
003 075
Periods
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and
post-fault recording times.
P437
7 Settings
7.1.3.2
General Functions
Parameter
Default
Distance protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
[spacer]
031 073
010 031
[spacer]
This setting defines whether distance protection will operate with or without
stabilization against transient transformation errors of capacitive voltage
transformers.
[spacer]
011 049
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
001 236
[spacer]
If the mode With zone starting has been selected, then only the timer stage of
the specific distance protection zone Zn is triggered for which the measured
loop impedance is inside the zone.
7-97
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Power swing
blocking
Address
Min
Max
Unit
014 050
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
PSB: R
50 | 10 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
PSB: ne gX
50 | 10 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
014 060
PSB: p osX
50 | 10 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
006 185
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
PSB:
75
014 062
40
90
[spacer]
[spacer]
PSB: Op e r. value D el ta T
20
014 090
60
ms
[spacer]
Setting of the timer stage for operating mode PSB: Oper ating mode =
Delta Z.
[spacer]
008 235
Setting of the Activation condition for the power swing detection based on
impedance variation.
[spacer]
012 017
[spacer]
0.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
014 055
60.00
011 142
0.00
60.00
[spacer]
Setting of the timer stage by which the signal for power swing blocking condition
is extended.
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-98
0.00
011 143
60.00
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.00
010 179
60.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
PSB: IP>
3.00
014 058
1.00
20.00
Inom
[spacer]
If the phase current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is cancelled without
time delay.
[spacer]
014 057
0.10
1.00
IP,max
[spacer]
[spacer]
PSB: IN>
0.40
014 056
0.10
1.00
IP,max
[spacer]
If the residual current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is cancelled without
time delay.
[spacer]
008 234
0.00
1.00
[spacer]
Setting of the extension of the blocking effect, which will become active after a
current trigger has started or after the maximum blocking time period has
elapsed.
[spacer]
PSB: R (OOS )
50 | 10 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
[spacer]
006 184
006 186
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
PSB: ne gX ( OOS)
50 | 10 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
006 187
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
[spacer]
Settings for the power swing polygon that is used for the enhanced countingbased tripping.
[spacer]
006 028
10
[spacer]
Tripping threshold value of the instable power swing counter, that counts power
swings crossing the inner zone (a).
[spacer]
[spacer]
006 189
10
Tripping threshold value of the instable power swing counter, that counts power
swings crossing the outer zone (b).
7-99
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
7-100
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
006 027
10
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
014 001
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
014 006
1: Yes
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.050
2.000
010 183
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
014 002
0.10
1.00
Imax
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value Ineg> (permissible unbalance threshold in the
current-measuring circuit).
[spacer]
014 007
1: Vneg
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.050
2.000
010 184
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
017 011
10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay after which the 'Meas. circ. (V/I) faulty' signals will
be issued.
[spacer]
014 009
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
014 013
7-101
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
0.00
10.00
014 012
Setting for the time delay for Fuse Failure monitoring of the reference voltage
Vref.
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
014 011
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
014 000
1: Without ARC
[spacer]
Switch on to fault
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
011 068
0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Protective signaling
Address
Min
Max
7-102
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
015 004
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Auto-reclosing
control
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
015 060
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
000 107
1: Yes
[spacer]
Setting this parameter to No enables selection of ARC operating mode via binary
signal inputs. This is possible only if the required binary signal inputs have been
configured.
[spacer]
015 033
Automatic
synchronism check
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
018 000
7-103
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
018 060
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
006 020
[spacer]
Select those binary signals that will if present block the GFSC protection.
[spacer]
002 136
1: Calculated
[spacer]
Setting how the GFSC protection will determine the neutral-point displacement
voltage: It will either be internally calculated from the three measured phase-toground voltages, or measured from the open-delta VT.
[spacer]
006 009
0: No
[spacer]
Set to Yes if you want the device to apply virtual current polarization, i.e.
calculate the polarizing voltage as sum of the 2 healthy phase voltages. The
default is No to provide backwards compatibility.
[spacer]
0|0
002 135
200 | 40
[spacer]
[spacer]
GFS C: IN>
0.050
018 063
0.002
0.500
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
GFS C: VNG>
0.030
018 062
0.010
0.500
Vnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
018 061
-90
[spacer]
Setting for the position of the straight line separating forward and backward
(reverse) directions.
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-104
0.00
018 064
10.00
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.00
018 065
10.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
GFS C: t1 (forward)
Blocked
018 066
0.00
60.00
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal in the event of a forward
decision.
[spacer]
GFS C: t2 (backward)
Blocked
018 067
0.00
60.00
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal in the event of a backward
(reverse) decision.
[spacer]
0.00
018 068
60.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
018 071
1: forward
[spacer]
[spacer]
018 080
1: VNG-dependent
[spacer]
[spacer]
018 076
0.01
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.80
Inom
018 078
0: Definite Time
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
018 077
0.05
10.00
7-105
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
023 069
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
002 180
[spacer]
Select those binary signals that will if present block the GFSC protection.
[spacer]
023 078
1: Independent channel
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether GSCSG and PSIG operate with independent
communication channels or with a common communication channel.
Note: Operation with a common communication channel is only possible, if the
same operating mode is set for both PSIG and GSCSG. The correct assignment
of signals to the functions must be done by setting the time delays
appropriately.
[spacer]
023 079
[spacer]
[spacer]
023 088
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether there shall be a single-pole or three-pole trip and
whether an HSR shall be triggered.
[spacer]
0.00
023 075
10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the delay of the send signal (of the signal comparison release
scheme) and the trip signal. This delay shall be used for coordinating GSCSG
with the other protection functions.
[spacer]
0.00
023 076
10.00
[spacer]
7-106
This setting specifies extension of the send signal after starting of ground fault
(short-circuit) protection has dropped out.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GSCSG: t Block
1.00
023 077
0.00
10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the transient blocking time of ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling in the event of a change in fault direction.
[spacer]
023 080
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
10.00
023 081
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
10.00
023 082
023 083
0.00
10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the transient blocking time of the echo signal in the event of a
change in fault direction.
[spacer]
GSCSG: W eak in fe ed tr ip
023 084
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weakinfeed logic is triggered.
Note: Use of the weak-infeed logic only makes sense if the signal comparison
release scheme has been selected as the operating mode.
[spacer]
0.00
10.00
023 087
[spacer]
[spacer]
023 089
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the blocking signal will be transmitted only in the
event of a backward (reverse) decision by ground fault (short-circuit) protection
or whether it will be transmitted as long as there is no forward decision.
[spacer]
[spacer]
023 085
7-107
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Definite-time over
current protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
031 068
0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
017 096
0: No
[spacer]
Thermal overload
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
022 050
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
022 064
1: Yes
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
022 065
0: No
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
7-108
023 030
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
023 031
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
018 202
4: Voltage A-B
[spacer]
Setting for the voltage that shall be used for frequency measurement.
[spacer]
f<> : Evaluation ti me
5
018 201
Periods
[spacer]
Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be issued.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.20
018 200
1.00
Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this
threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
Parameter
Default
Power directional
protection
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
014 220
7-109
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Circuit breaker
failure protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
022 080
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
022 154
0: No
[spacer]
Setting that permit a manual trip signal to also be used as a start criterion.
[spacer]
022 159
[spacer]
[spacer]
CBF: I <
1.00
022 160
0.05
20.00
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
CBF: Evaluation IN
022 184
0: Without
[spacer]
Select whether the measured or the calculated residual current shall be used for
residual current monitoring function. This choice is only possible when a
measuring input for the residual current is available, otherwise the internally
derived value of the residual current is always used, regardless of the setting.
[spacer]
CBF: I N<
1.00
022 180
0.05
20.00
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
CBF: T r ip 1p
022 163
0: No
[spacer]
Setting to Yes allows 1-pole monitoring and re-tripping of the CB. Then a 1-pole
general trip triggers the 1-pole startup of CBF (see section CBF 1-pole operating
mode).
[spacer]
CBF: t 1 1p
Blocked
022 164
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
CBF: t 1 3p
0.15
[spacer]
7-110
022 165
0.00
100.00
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBF: t 2
0.25
022 166
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.10
022 167
10.00
[spacer]
Setting the 1st timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
[spacer]
0.10
022 168
10.00
[spacer]
Setting the 2nd timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
[spacer]
022 169
0: No
[spacer]
The 1st timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
[spacer]
022 170
0: No
[spacer]
The 2nd timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
[spacer]
0.00
022 155
100.00
[spacer]
The signal CB F: Trip si gnal is issued when this timer stage's time duration
has elapsed.
[spacer]
0.00
022 171
100.00
[spacer]
If during this delay time period the circuit breaker does not provide a signal from
its auxiliary contacts that it is closed, then faults behind the CB are recognized
through the current criterion (see section Fault behind CB protection).
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
022 172
100.00
Setting for the time delay to bridge circuit breaker operate times during CB
synchronization supervision.
7-111
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
022 010
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
022 152
Using the setting for external devices the trip command issued by the control
function may be linked to the trip command 1 issued by the protection by
assigning the trip command issued by the control function by this parameter.
[spacer]
022 007
[spacer]
This setting defines starting criteria for circuit breaker monitoring. To evaluate
all trip commands issued by the protection device With trip cmd. only must be
selected. For further evaluation of operational trip commands the additional CB
auxiliary contact CB sig. EXT or trip is used.
[spacer]
CBM: I nom,CB
2000
022 012
65000
[spacer]
[spacer]
022 013
65000
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
022 014
65000
[spacer]
[spacer]
022 015
65000
[spacer]
022 016
65000
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-112
65000
022 017
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
022 019
65000
[spacer]
[spacer]
022 020
65000
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the number of remaining CB operations at CB
nominal current.
[spacer]
022 022
65000
Inom,CB
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection (ruptured)
current values.
[spacer]
022 081
65000
Inom,CB**
2
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection (ruptured)
current values to the second power.
[spacer]
CBM: I* t>
1000.0
022 096
1.0
4000.0
kAs
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the sum of the current-time integrals of the
CB disconnection (ruptured) current values
[spacer]
0.000
007 249
0.200
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
-0.200
022 018
0.200
7-113
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Limit value
monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
014 010
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
LIMIT : I>
1.10
014 004
0.10
2.40
Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
014 020
0.10
2.40
Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tI>
1
014 031
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tI>>
1
014 032
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : I<
0.90
014 021
0.10
2.40
Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the first undercurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
014 022
0.10
2.40
Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the second undercurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tI<
1
014 033
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first undercurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tI<<
1
[spacer]
7-114
014 034
1000
Setting for the operate delay of the second undercurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : VPG>
1.10
014 023
0.10
2.50
Vnom/3
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VPG>>
1.20
014 024
0.10
2.50
Vnom/3
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPG>
1
014 035
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPG>>
1
014 036
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VPG<
0.90
014 025
0.10
2.50
Vnom/3
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VPG<<
0.80
014 026
0.10
2.50
Vnom/3
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG<< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPG<
1
014 037
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPG<<
1
014 038
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG<< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VPP>
1.10
[spacer]
014 027
0.10
1.50
Vnom
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP> of limit value
monitoring.
7-115
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : VPP>>
1.20
014 028
0.10
1.50
Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPP>
1
014 039
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPP>>
1
014 040
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VPP<
0.90
014 029
0.10
1.50
Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VPP<<
0.80
014 030
0.10
1.50
Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP<< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPP<
1
014 041
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVPP<<
1
014 042
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP<< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VNG>
0.050
014 043
0.010
1.000
Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : VNG>>
0.100
[spacer]
7-116
014 044
0.010
1.000
Vnom
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG>> of limit value
monitoring.
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : tVNG>
1
014 045
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVNG>>
1
014 046
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
042 144
0.10
2.50
Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
042 145
0.10
2.50
Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVref>
1
042 148
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVref>>
1
042 149
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
042 146
0.10
2.50
Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
042 147
0.10
2.50
Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tVref<
1
[spacer]
042 150
1000
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
monitoring.
7-117
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : tVref<<
1
042 151
1000
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT : IDC,lin>
Blocked
014 110
0.100
1.100
IDC,nom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer]
LIMIT : IDC,lin>>
Blocked
014 111
0.100
1.100
IDC,nom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tIDC,lin>
Blocked
014 112
0.00
20.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
LIMIT : tIDC,lin>>
Blocked
014 113
0.00
20.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
LIMIT : IDC,lin<
Blocked
014 114
0.100
1.100
IDC,nom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer]
LIMIT : IDC,lin<<
Blocked
014 115
0.100
1.100
IDC,nom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer]
LIMIT : tIDC,lin<
Blocked
014 116
0.00
20.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
LIMIT : tIDC,lin<<
Blocked
014 117
0.00
20.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
LIMIT : T>
200
[spacer]
7-118
014 100
-20
200
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : T>>
200
014 101
-20
200
[spacer]
[spacer]
LIMIT : tT >
Blocked
014 103
1000
[spacer]
[spacer]
LIMIT : tT >>
Blocked
014 104
1000
[spacer]
[spacer]
LIMIT : T<
-20
014 105
-20
200
[spacer]
[spacer]
LIMIT : T<<
-20
014 106
-20
200
[spacer]
[spacer]
LIMIT : tT <
Blocked
014 107
1000
[spacer]
[spacer]
LIMIT : tT <<
Blocked
[spacer]
014 108
1000
7-119
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
031 099
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 1 US ER
034 030
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 2 US ER
034 031
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 3 US ER
034 032
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 4 US ER
034 033
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 5 US ER
034 034
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 6 US ER
034 035
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 7 US ER
034 036
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 8 US ER
034 037
0: No
[spacer]
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
[spacer]
030 000
[spacer]
030 004
s
030 008
030 012
030 016
030 020
030 024
030 028
7-120
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
030 032
030 036
030 040
030 044
030 048
030 052
030 056
030 060
030 064
030 068
030 072
030 076
030 080
030 084
030 088
030 092
030 096
031 000
031 004
7-121
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
031 008
031 012
031 016
031 020
031 024
030 100
030 104
030 108
030 112
030 116
030 120
030 124
030 128
030 132
030 136
030 140
030 144
030 148
030 152
7-122
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
030 156
030 160
030 164
030 168
030 172
030 176
030 180
030 184
030 188
030 192
030 196
030 200
030 204
030 208
030 212
030 216
030 220
030 224
046 000
7-123
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 004
045 008
045 012
045 016
045 020
045 024
045 028
045 032
045 036
045 040
045 044
045 048
045 052
045 056
045 060
045 064
045 068
045 072
045 076
7-124
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 080
045 084
045 088
045 092
045 096
045 100
045 104
045 108
045 112
045 116
045 120
045 124
045 128
045 132
045 136
045 140
045 144
045 148
045 152
7-125
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 156
045 160
045 164
045 168
045 172
045 176
045 180
045 184
045 188
045 192
045 196
045 200
045 204
045 208
045 212
045 216
045 220
045 224
045 228
7-126
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 232
045 236
045 240
045 244
045 248
045 252
[spacer]
[spacer]
030 001
030 009
030 013
030 017
030 021
030 025
030 029
030 033
030 037
030 041
030 045
7-127
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
030 049
030 053
030 057
030 061
030 065
030 069
030 073
030 077
030 081
030 085
030 089
030 093
030 097
031 001
031 005
031 009
031 013
031 017
031 021
7-128
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
031 025
030 101
030 105
030 109
030 113
030 117
030 121
030 125
030 129
030 133
030 137
030 141
030 145
030 149
030 153
030 157
030 161
030 165
030 169
7-129
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
030 173
030 177
030 181
030 185
030 189
030 193
030 197
030 201
030 205
030 209
030 213
030 217
030 221
030 225
046 001
045 005
045 009
045 013
045 017
7-130
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 021
045 025
045 029
045 033
045 037
045 041
045 045
045 049
045 053
045 057
045 061
045 065
045 069
045 073
045 077
045 081
045 085
045 089
045 093
7-131
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 097
045 101
045 105
045 109
045 113
045 117
045 121
045 125
045 129
045 133
045 137
045 141
045 145
045 149
045 153
045 157
045 161
045 165
045 169
7-132
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 173
045 177
045 181
045 185
045 189
045 193
045 197
045 201
045 205
045 209
045 213
045 217
045 221
045 225
045 229
045 233
045 237
045 241
045 245
7-133
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
045 249
045 253
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
030 022
600.00
0.00
030 026
600.00
0.00
030 030
600.00
0.00
030 034
600.00
0.00
030 038
600.00
0.00
030 042
600.00
0.00
030 046
600.00
0.00
030 050
600.00
0.00
030 054
600.00
0.00
030 058
600.00
7-134
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 018
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 014
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 010
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 002
030 062
600.00
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
030 086
600.00
0.00
030 090
600.00
0.00
030 094
600.00
0.00
030 098
600.00
0.00
031 002
600.00
0.00
031 006
600.00
0.00
031 010
600.00
0.00
031 014
600.00
0.00
031 018
600.00
0.00
031 022
600.00
0.00
031 026
600.00
0.00
030 102
600.00
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 082
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 078
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 074
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 070
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
030 106
600.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 066
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
030 110
600.00
7-135
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
030 134
600.00
0.00
030 138
600.00
0.00
030 142
600.00
0.00
030 146
600.00
0.00
030 150
600.00
0.00
030 154
600.00
0.00
030 158
600.00
0.00
030 162
600.00
0.00
030 166
600.00
0.00
030 170
600.00
0.00
030 174
600.00
0.00
030 178
600.00
0.00
030 182
600.00
7-136
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 130
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 126
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 122
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 118
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 114
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
030 186
600.00
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
030 210
600.00
0.00
030 214
600.00
0.00
030 218
600.00
0.00
030 222
600.00
0.00
030 226
600.00
0.00
046 002
600.00
0.00
045 006
600.00
0.00
045 010
600.00
0.00
045 014
600.00
0.00
045 018
600.00
0.00
045 022
600.00
0.00
045 026
600.00
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 206
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 202
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 198
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 194
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
045 030
600.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 190
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
045 034
600.00
7-137
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
045 058
600.00
0.00
045 062
600.00
0.00
045 066
600.00
0.00
045 070
600.00
0.00
045 074
600.00
0.00
045 078
600.00
0.00
045 082
600.00
0.00
045 086
600.00
0.00
045 090
600.00
0.00
045 094
600.00
0.00
045 098
600.00
0.00
045 102
600.00
0.00
045 106
600.00
7-138
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 054
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 050
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 046
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 042
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
045 038
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
045 110
600.00
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
045 134
600.00
0.00
045 138
600.00
0.00
045 142
600.00
0.00
045 146
600.00
0.00
045 150
600.00
0.00
045 154
600.00
0.00
045 158
600.00
0.00
045 162
600.00
0.00
045 166
600.00
0.00
045 170
600.00
0.00
045 174
600.00
0.00
045 178
600.00
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 130
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 126
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 122
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 118
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
045 182
600.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
045 114
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
045 186
600.00
7-139
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
045 206
600.00
0.00
045 210
600.00
0.00
045 214
600.00
0.00
045 218
600.00
0.00
045 222
600.00
0.00
045 226
600.00
0.00
045 230
600.00
0.00
045 234
600.00
0.00
045 238
600.00
0.00
045 242
600.00
0.00
045 246
600.00
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 202
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 198
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 194
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 190
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
0.00
045 250
600.00
0.00
045 254
600.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-140
0.00
030 003
600.00
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
030 027
600.00
0.00
030 031
600.00
0.00
030 035
600.00
0.00
030 039
600.00
0.00
030 043
600.00
0.00
030 047
600.00
0.00
030 051
600.00
0.00
030 055
600.00
0.00
030 059
600.00
0.00
030 063
600.00
0.00
030 067
600.00
0.00
030 071
600.00
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 023
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 019
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 015
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 011
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
030 075
600.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 007
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
030 079
600.00
7-141
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
031 003
600.00
0.00
031 007
600.00
0.00
031 011
600.00
0.00
031 015
600.00
0.00
031 019
600.00
0.00
031 023
600.00
0.00
031 027
600.00
0.00
030 103
600.00
0.00
030 107
600.00
0.00
030 111
600.00
0.00
030 115
600.00
0.00
030 119
600.00
0.00
030 123
600.00
7-142
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 099
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 095
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 091
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 087
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 083
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
030 127
600.00
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
030 151
600.00
0.00
030 155
600.00
0.00
030 159
600.00
0.00
030 163
600.00
0.00
030 167
600.00
0.00
030 171
600.00
0.00
030 175
600.00
0.00
030 179
600.00
0.00
030 183
600.00
0.00
030 187
600.00
0.00
030 191
600.00
0.00
030 195
600.00
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 147
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 143
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 139
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 135
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
030 199
600.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 131
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
030 203
600.00
7-143
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
030 227
600.00
0.00
046 003
600.00
0.00
045 007
600.00
0.00
045 011
600.00
0.00
045 015
600.00
0.00
045 019
600.00
0.00
045 023
600.00
0.00
045 027
600.00
0.00
045 031
600.00
0.00
045 035
600.00
0.00
045 039
600.00
0.00
045 043
600.00
0.00
045 047
600.00
7-144
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 223
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 219
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 215
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
030 211
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
030 207
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
045 051
600.00
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
045 075
600.00
0.00
045 079
600.00
0.00
045 083
600.00
0.00
045 087
600.00
0.00
045 091
600.00
0.00
045 095
600.00
0.00
045 099
600.00
0.00
045 103
600.00
0.00
045 107
600.00
0.00
045 111
600.00
0.00
045 115
600.00
0.00
045 119
600.00
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 071
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 067
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 063
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 059
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
045 123
600.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
045 055
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
045 127
600.00
7-145
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
045 151
600.00
0.00
045 155
600.00
0.00
045 159
600.00
0.00
045 163
600.00
0.00
045 167
600.00
0.00
045 171
600.00
0.00
045 175
600.00
0.00
045 179
600.00
0.00
045 183
600.00
0.00
045 187
600.00
0.00
045 191
600.00
0.00
045 195
600.00
0.00
045 199
600.00
7-146
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 147
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 143
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 139
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 135
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
0.00
Logic Diagram
045 131
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
045 203
600.00
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
0.00
045 219
600.00
0.00
045 223
600.00
0.00
045 227
600.00
0.00
045 231
600.00
0.00
045 235
600.00
0.00
045 239
600.00
0.00
045 243
600.00
0.00
045 247
600.00
0.00
045 251
600.00
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 215
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 211
[spacer]
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
0.00
045 207
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
0.00
045 255
600.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
044 000
044 004
044 006
044 008
7-147
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 010
044 012
044 014
044 016
044 018
044 020
044 022
044 024
044 026
044 028
044 030
044 032
044 034
044 036
044 038
044 040
044 042
044 044
044 046
7-148
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 048
044 050
044 052
044 054
044 056
044 058
044 060
044 062
044 064
044 066
044 068
044 070
044 072
044 074
044 076
044 078
044 080
044 082
044 084
7-149
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 086
044 088
044 090
044 092
044 094
044 096
044 098
044 100
044 102
044 104
044 106
044 108
044 110
044 112
044 114
044 116
044 118
044 120
044 122
7-150
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 124
044 126
048 128
048 002
048 004
048 006
048 008
048 010
048 012
048 014
048 016
048 018
048 020
048 022
048 024
048 026
048 028
048 030
048 032
7-151
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 034
048 036
048 038
048 040
048 042
048 044
048 046
048 048
048 050
048 052
048 054
048 056
048 058
048 060
048 062
048 064
048 066
048 068
048 070
7-152
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 072
048 074
048 076
048 078
048 080
048 082
048 084
048 086
048 088
048 090
048 092
048 094
048 096
048 098
048 100
048 102
048 104
048 106
048 108
7-153
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 110
048 112
048 114
048 116
048 118
048 120
048 122
048 124
048 126
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
[spacer]
[spacer]
044 001
044 005
044 007
044 009
044 011
044 013
044 015
044 017
7-154
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 019
044 021
044 023
044 025
044 027
044 029
044 031
044 033
044 035
044 037
044 039
044 041
044 043
044 045
044 047
044 049
044 051
044 053
044 055
7-155
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 057
044 059
044 061
044 063
044 065
044 067
044 069
044 071
044 073
044 075
044 077
044 079
044 081
044 083
044 085
044 087
044 089
044 091
044 093
7-156
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 095
044 097
044 099
044 101
044 103
044 105
044 107
044 109
044 111
044 113
044 115
044 117
044 119
044 121
044 123
044 125
044 127
048 129
048 003
7-157
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 005
048 007
048 009
048 011
048 013
048 015
048 017
048 019
048 021
048 023
048 025
048 027
048 029
048 031
048 033
048 035
048 037
048 039
048 041
7-158
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 043
048 045
048 047
048 049
048 051
048 053
048 055
048 057
048 059
048 061
048 063
048 065
048 067
048 069
048 071
048 073
048 075
048 077
048 079
7-159
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 081
048 083
048 085
048 087
048 089
048 091
048 093
048 095
048 097
048 099
048 101
048 103
048 105
048 107
048 109
048 111
048 113
048 115
048 117
7-160
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
048 119
048 121
048 123
048 125
048 127
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
7-161
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
011 137
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
050 000
[spacer]
050 004
050 008
050 012
[spacer]
050 001
050 005
050 009
050 013
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer]
LOG_2: T im e t 1 output 1
0
[spacer]
050 006
60000
LOG_2: T im e t 1 output 3
0
[spacer]
60000
LOG_2: T im e t 1 output 2
0
[spacer]
050 002
050 010
60000
LOG_2: T im e t 1 output 4
0
050 014
60000
[spacer]
[spacer]
LOG_2: T im e t 2 output 1
0
[spacer]
60000
LOG_2: T im e t 2 output 3
0
7-162
60000
LOG_2: T im e t 2 output 2
0
[spacer]
050 003
050 011
60000
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LOG_2: T im e t 2 output 4
0
[spacer]
Address
050 015
60000
[spacer]
064 000
064 002
064 004
064 006
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
[spacer]
064 001
064 003
064 005
064 007
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
7-163
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Binary counts
Address
Min
Max
Unit
217 000
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
1000
ms
1000
217 161
ms
[spacer]
217 160
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
1000
217 162
ms
1000
217 163
ms
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
217 222
65000
[spacer]
65000
[spacer]
217 221
217 223
65000
217 224
65000
[spacer]
Setting a limit for the counter value. A warning signal is issued if the counter
value exceeds the set limit. Setting this parameter to Blocked disables the limit
check.
[spacer]
217 007
[spacer]
Setting the cycle time for the periodic transmission of the counts.
[spacer]
[spacer]
221 096
1000
Setting the scaling factor to transmit the counter value via IEC 61850. According
to the standard the resulting value is calculated as:
Value transmitted = actual value pulsQty
(see IEC 61850: Value = actVal pulsQty).
7-164
P437
7 Settings
7.1.3.3
Main function
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
010 048
001 076
001 077
001 078
001 250
001 251
002 001
1: Low-imped. grounding
[spacer]
[spacer]
001 249
1: IN> OR VNG>
[spacer]
Setting whether a ground fault is determined by an 'OR'-linked or an 'AND'linked condition of the IN> and VNG> thresholds.
[spacer]
010 040
001 079
001 080
001 081
1: Ground
[spacer]
[spacer]
017 097
0: Without
001 088
001 089
001 090
017 082
017 083
[spacer]
[spacer]
017 093
017 064
[spacer]
Select the protection elements that shall be blocked when the inrush
stabilization is triggered.
[spacer]
10
017 098
35
[spacer]
[spacer]
1.0
Inom
001 092
001 093
001 086
001 087
017 095
20.0
001 091
001 085
[spacer]
Setting for the current threshold for disabling the inrush stabilization.
[spacer]
MAIN: kPar PS x
0.70
025 097
0.70
024 017
024 077
025 037
2.00
[spacer]
Setting for a correction factor by which the different grounding conditions for
line and parallel line shall be equalized.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.01
019 001
10.00
019 002
019 003
019 004
7-165
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
015 065
024 034
024 094
025 054
1: Yes
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
002 184
10.00
002 185
002 186
002 187
[spacer]
Setting the time delay period for the 3-pole transfer trip feature. This is issued if
no phase starting takes place and therefore no phase-selection is possible.
[spacer]
MAIN: Enable 1p t ri p PS x
002 061
002 062
002 063
002 064
0: No
[spacer]
7-166
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Fault data
acquisition
Address
Min
Max
Unit
0.01
Logic Diagram
010 005
500.00
km
010 006
010 007
010 008
[spacer]
This setting defines the distance in km that the fault locator interprets as 100 %
when calculating the fault distance.
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
010 012
200 | 40
010 013
010 014
010 015
[spacer]
This setting defines the reactance X that the fault locator interprets as 100 %
when calculating the fault distance.
[spacer]
008 007
008 008
008 009
008 027
[spacer]
Select whether the fault location shall be determined only for short-circuits with
a general starting (with GS) or also in case of a sole neutral starting, e.g. during
a short-duration grounding (with GS or N).
[spacer]
010 011
010 042
010 043
010 044
[spacer]
This setting determines at what point during a fault the acquisition of fault data
should take place.
[spacer]
010 032
010 033
010 034
010 035
[spacer]
[spacer]
025 096
024 016
024 076
025 036
0: Without
[spacer]
Setting for the conditions under which the residual current of the parallel line is
used to calculate the fault location.
7-167
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Distance protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
DIST: I>> PS x
1.00
010 054
0.10
20.00
Inom
[spacer]
DIST: I> ( Ib l) PS x
010 068
0.05
1.00
Inom
010 094
011 014
[spacer]
0.20
010 074
010 088
011 008
011 028
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 067
[spacer]
DIST: V< PS x
010 069
0.10
0.90
[spacer]
010 066
010 089
011 009
011 029
010 086
011 006
011 026
[spacer]
[spacer]
DIST: Xfw PS x
010 050
0.1 |
0.02
300 | 60
[spacer]
DIST: Rfw,PG PS x
010 051
0.1 |
0.02
300 | 60
010 070
010 090
011 010
[spacer]
011 027
[spacer]
011 007
[spacer]
0.70
010 087
010 071
010 091
011 011
[spacer]
[spacer]
DIST: Rfw,PP PS x
10 | 2 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
010 052
0.1 |
0.02
300 | 60
010 072
010 092
011 012
[spacer]
[spacer]
DIST: PS x
30
[spacer]
7-168
010 063
15
65
010 083
011 003
011 023
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
010 101
0|0
300 | 60
010 102
010 103
010 104
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 105
0|0
300 | 60
010 106
010 107
010 108
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 053
0.00
4.00
010 073
010 093
[spacer]
[spacer]
025 093
1: ZPG=VPG/(IP + kG*IN)
[spacer]
011 013
024 013
024 073
025 033
This setting determines whether the P437 will carry out the starting impedance
calculation of the phase-to-ground loops using the phase current corrected by
the set ground factor or using twice the phase current.
Note: Calculation with twice the phase current may be necessary in lowimpedance-grounded networks in order to avoid inadvertent starting in healthy
lines as the result of the high ground fault current. Impedance is calculated by
the distance measuring system using solely the phase current corrected by the
set ground factor.
[spacer]
DIST: IN> PS x
0.20
010 055
0.05
2.00
Inom
010 075
010 095
[spacer]
Operate value setting for the residual current stage of ground starting.
[spacer]
DIST: tIN> PS x
0.100
010 057
0.000
0.500
011 015
010 077
010 097
011 017
[spacer]
[spacer]
DIST: VNG> PS x
0.10
[spacer]
010 056
0.02
1.00
Vnom
010 076
010 096
011 016
Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG> of ground starting.
7-169
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
DIST: VNG>> PS x
0.50
010 062
0.20
1.00
Vnom
010 082
011 002
[spacer]
Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG>> of ground starting.
[spacer]
010 061
0.000
60.000
010 081
011 001
011 021
[spacer]
[spacer]
012 172
1: PG loops
011 022
012 173
012 174
012 175
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the distance measuring system shall process
single-pole phase-to-ground faults.
[spacer]
012 176
1: PG loops
012 177
012 178
012 179
[spacer]
[spacer]
012 180
1: PG loops
012 181
012 182
012 183
[spacer]
[spacer]
DIST: Characteristic P Sx
012 040
2: Polygon
073 097
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
012 051
013 001
013 051
012 052
013 002
013 052
012 053
013 003
013 053
012 004
012 054
013 004
013 054
012 100
012 101
012 102
012 103
7-170
[spacer]
200 | 40
[spacer]
0.05 |
0.01
012 001
075 097
[spacer]
074 097
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
0.05 |
0.01
Logic Diagram
012 104
200 | 40
012 105
012 106
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.05 |
0.01
400 | 80
0.05 |
0.01
400 | 80
0.05 |
0.01
400 | 80
0.05 |
0.01
400 | 80
0.05 |
0.01
400 | 80
002 078
002 081
002 082
002 084
002 085
002 086
002 087
002 089
002 090
002 091
002 092
002 093
002 094
002 095
002 096
002 097
002 098
002 099
002 126
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
013 005
013 055
012 057
013 007
013 057
012 059
013 009
013 059
012 011
012 061
013 011
013 061
012 108
012 109
012 110
012 111
012 055
[spacer]
200 | 40
[spacer]
012 005
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
002 083
[spacer]
002 079
002 077
[spacer]
[spacer]
400 | 80
[spacer]
002 076
[spacer]
0.05 |
0.01
012 107
7-171
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
[spacer]
Address
0.1 |
0.02
Logic Diagram
012 116
200 | 40
012 117
012 118
012 119
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
0.1 |
0.02
200 | 40
013 006
013 056
012 058
013 008
013 058
012 060
013 010
013 060
012 012
012 062
013 012
013 062
012 112
012 113
012 114
012 115
012 120
012 121
012 122
012 123
[spacer]
200 | 40
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
012 056
[spacer]
[spacer]
200 | 40
[spacer]
0.1 |
0.02
012 006
[spacer]
[spacer]
90
7-172
40
012 013
40
013 013
013 063
90
012 063
012 064
013 014
013 064
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Unit
40
90
40
90
40
90
40
90
012 015
012 065
013 015
013 065
012 016
012 066
013 016
013 066
012 124
012 125
012 126
012 127
012 128
012 129
012 130
012 131
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
[spacer]
Setting for the slope angle of the tripping polygon of impedance zones 1 to 6 in
R-direction (resistance line).
[spacer]
DIST: 1 ( polygon) P Sx
0
[spacer]
20
-20
20
-20
20
-20
20
-20
20
075 086
073 087
074 087
075 087
073 088
074 088
075 088
072 089
073 089
074 089
075 089
012 156
012 157
012 158
012 159
012 160
012 161
012 162
012 163
DIST: 6 ( polygon) P Sx
0
074 086
DIST: 5 ( polygon) P Sx
0
[spacer]
-20
073 086
DIST: 4 ( polygon) P Sx
0
[spacer]
DIST: 3 ( polygon) P Sx
0
[spacer]
20
DIST: 2 ( polygon) P Sx
0
[spacer]
-20
072 086
[spacer]
Setting for the slope angle of the tripping polygon of impedance zones 1 to 6 in
X-direction (reactance line).
[spacer]
DIST: Z1 (circle) PS x
10 | 2 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
074 091
075 091
073 092
074 092
075 092
073 093
074 093
075 093
012 045
073 094
074 094
075 094
012 148
012 149
012 150
012 151
DIST: Z5 (circle) PS x
50 | 10 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
073 091
DIST: Z4 (circle) PS x
40 | 8 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
200 | 40
DIST: Z3 (circle) PS x
30 | 6 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
0.05 |
0.01
DIST: Z2 (circle) PS x
20 | 4 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
[spacer]
012 042
7-173
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
DIST: Z6 (circle) PS x
60 | 12 (For MAIN: Inom
device=1.0A | 5.0A)
Logic Diagram
012 152
0.05 |
0.01
200 | 40
012 153
012 154
[spacer]
[spacer]
DIST: 1 ( circle) PS x
75
[spacer]
90
10
90
10
90
10
90
10
90
073 095
074 095
072 096
073 096
074 096
075 096
072 099
073 099
074 099
075 099
012 164
012 165
012 166
012 167
012 168
012 169
012 170
012 171
This setting is only important if the setting With arc compensation is active
(DI ST : Arc comp. ci rc le P Sx=Yes). In this case, the setting at this
address determines the angle where arc compensation becomes active in
zones 1 to 6.
[spacer]
012 038
0: No
012 090
012 091
[spacer]
002 234
80
002 235
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-174
002 236
002 237
013 023
013 073
[spacer]
[spacer]
012 092
[spacer]
[spacer]
075 095
[spacer]
45
075 090
DIST: 6 ( circle) PS x
75
074 090
DIST: 5 ( circle) PS x
75
[spacer]
10
073 090
DIST: 4 ( circle) PS x
75
[spacer]
DIST: 3 ( circle) PS x
75
[spacer]
90
DIST: 2 ( circle) PS x
75
[spacer]
072 090
10
012 155
012 023
012 073
012 074
013 024
013 074
012 075
013 025
013 075
012 076
013 026
013 076
012 077
013 027
013 077
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
012 132
1: Forward directional
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
012 133
012 134
012 135
012 136
1: Forward directional
012 137
012 138
012 139
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.01
2.00
010 109
Vnom
010 116
010 117
010 118
[spacer]
Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded so that the measured
fault angle is used for the direction determination and the impedance
calculation.
[spacer]
DIST: t1 PS x
0.00
[spacer]
0.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
DIST: t8 PS x
7.00
60.00
012 080
013 030
013 080
012 081
013 031
013 081
012 082
013 032
013 082
012 083
013 033
013 083
012 141
012 142
012 143
0.00
013 079
0.00
013 029
0.00
012 079
0.00
013 078
0.00
013 028
DIST: t7 PS x
6.00
[spacer]
60.00
DIST: t6 PS x
5.00
[spacer]
0.00
012 078
DIST: t5 PS x
4.00
[spacer]
DIST: t4 PS x
3.00
[spacer]
60.00
DIST: t3 PS x
2.00
[spacer]
0.00
DIST: t2 PS x
1.00
[spacer]
012 028
012 145
012 146
012 147
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stages of impedance zones 1 to 6 and of directional and
non-directional backup timer stages 7 and 8.
[spacer]
012 039
012 089
013 039
013 089
0: Without
[spacer]
This setting defines the conditions under which the zone extension occurs in
zone 1 in the event of single-phase-to-ground fault detection.
[spacer]
DIST: kze,PG HS R PS x
1.50
1.00
012 034
450.00
012 084
013 034
013 084
7-175
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
1.00
012 035
450.00
012 085
013 035
013 085
[spacer]
Setting for the HSR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops or phase-tophase loops, respectively. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the
zone 1 reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The
following applies to the measurement:
X1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)X1
R1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)R1, if D IST: k ze (poly gon) PSx = R and X
R1,zeHSR = R1 (i.e. without extension), if DIS T : k ze (polygon) PSx = Only
X
X1,zeHSR: reactance modified by the zone extension factor
R1,zeHSR: resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:
Z1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)Z1
Z1,zeHSR: impedance modified by the zone extension factor
The zone extension HSR is controlled by
[spacer]
Protective signaling,
1.00
012 046
450.00
012 096
013 046
013 096
7-176
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
1.00
Logic Diagram
012 047
450.00
012 097
013 047
013 097
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops or phase-tophase loops, respectively. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the
zone 1 reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The
following applies to the measurement:
X1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)X1
R1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)R1, if DIST: kze (polygon ) PSx = R and X
R1,zeTDR = R1 (i.e. without extension), if DI S T: kz e (polygon) PSx = Only
X
X1,zeTDR: reactance modified by the zone extension factor
R1,zeTDR: resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:
Z1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)Z1
Z1,zeTDR: impedance modified by the zone extension factor
Zone extension takes place before a TDR (time-delay reclosure), as long as a
further TDR is permitted.
[spacer]
010 186
010 195
010 196
010 197
2: R and X
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
026 025
0.00
10.00
027 025
028 025
029 025
Setting for the timer stage of impedance zone 1 with extended reach.
Note: This timer is only used if zone extension is activated from binary input.
When controlled from internal function, extended zone trip time is set from that
function (e.g. PSIG trip time).
[spacer]
DIST: Ab s . value k G P Sx
1.00
0.00
012 037
8.00
012 087
013 037
013 087
7-177
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Address
Default
[spacer]
Min
Unit
[spacer]
Max
Logic Diagram
012 036
-180
180
012 086
013 036
013 086
Setting for the absolute value and angle of the complex ground factor kG.
kG =
Z0 - Zpos
3 Zpos
| kG |
X 0 - X pos
R0 - Rpos
- arctan
X pos
Rpos
7-178
0.00
012 049
8.00
012 099
013 049
013 099
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Address
Default
[spacer]
Min
Unit
[spacer]
Max
-180
Logic Diagram
012 048
180
012 098
013 048
013 098
Setting the absolute value and the angle of the complex ground factor kG,par
k G,par =
Z 00
3 ZL
| kG , par |
2
2
X 00
+ R00
3 X L2 + RL2
kG Anglepar = arctan
X 00
R00
- arctan
XL
RL
025 095
0: Without
024 015
024 075
025 035
[spacer]
[spacer]
012 184
0.10
2.00
Inom
012 185
012 186
012 187
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
011 050
011 051
011 052
011 053
010 172
010 173
010 174
3: 3-pole
[spacer]
For zone 1 and zone 2 the user can specify whether the distance trip in the
event of phase-to-ground faults shall be single-pole or three-pole.
Note: When the P437 is being operated with ARC, which will carry out a
reclosure in the event of a single-pole or three-pole trip, then the setting here
should be 1-pole.
[spacer]
011 054
011 055
011 056
011 057
7-179
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
010 175
010 176
010 177
010 178
3: 3-pole
[spacer]
For zone 1 and zone 2 the user can specify whether the distance trip in the
event of phase-to-phase faults shall be single-pole or three-pole. Where a singlepole trip has been selected, there is a choice as to whether the trip in the event
of a two-pole starting should be for the leading or the trailing phase.
Note: When the P437 is being operated with ARC, which will carry out a
reclosure in the event of a single-pole or three-pole trip, then the setting here
should be 1-pole leading phase or 1-pole trailing phas.
Parameter
Default
Power swing
blocking
Address
Min
Max
Unit
PSB: Enab le PS x
015 090
0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
015 091
015 092
015 093
This setting defines the setting group in which the power swing blocking function
is enabled.
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
010 058
0.10
20.00
Inom
010 078
010 098
011 018
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold I> of the phase current of the backup overcurrenttime protection.
[spacer]
BUOC: tI> PS x
1.00
010 059
0.00
10.00
010 079
010 099
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage I> of the backup overcurrent-time
protection.
[spacer]
BUOC: IN> PS x
0.20
[spacer]
010 064
0.10
20.00
Inom
011 019
010 084
011 004
011 024
Operate value setting for the residual current of the backup overcurrent-time
protection function.
Note: For isolated / compensated networks it is possible to use the residual
stage as a backup; in this case the operate threshold has to be set greater than
the maximum ground-fault current (earth-fault current).
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-180
010 065
0.00
10.00
010 085
011 005
011 025
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Switch on to fault
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
SOT F : Enab le PS x
Logic Diagram
001 203
0: No
001 204
001 205
001 206
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which function group SOTF is
enabled.
[spacer]
011 061
001 184
001 185
001 186
[spacer]
The setting of the operating mode defines whether, while the timer is running, a
general starting will lead to a trip command (Trip with starting) or if the
measuring range of the impedance zone 1 is extended by the set zone extension
factor DIST : k ze,PG HSR P S x (Trip with overreach).
[spacer]
006 142
1: Trigger
006 143
Select the SOTF activation mode (either Trigger or Line Dead State).
[spacer]
10.00
011 060
001 181
Setting for the timer stage that will be started by a manual close.
[spacer]
006 005
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
006 138
600.00
001 183
006 006
006 007
006 008
001 182
[spacer]
[spacer]
006 145
[spacer]
1.00
006 144
0.00
006 140
006 141
10.00
006 139
002 129
002 133
002 134
If SOT F: Wit h V< e nable P Sx is set to Yes, then a Line dead condition is
determined if all 3 measured voltages are below a fixed threshold, conditioned
by settable operate and release timer stages.
If the Line dead condition is fulfilled either triggering of SOTF through binary
input is enabled or SOTF is permanently activated, depending on the SOTF
activation mode.
[spacer]
0.00
010 218
10.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
20.00
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
SOT F : tI> PS x
0.00
[spacer]
10.00
010 222
006 131
006 132
006 133
006 134
0.00
010 221
006 130
0.10
010 219
006 135
006 136
006 137
7-181
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
SOT F : Evaluation IN PS x
Logic Diagram
001 191
1: Calculated
001 192
001 193
[spacer]
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored: the residual
current calculated from the three phase currents or the residual current
measured at the T 4 transformer.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.01
001 189
4.00
Inom
0.10
Inom
001 196
001 198
001 199
[spacer]
SOT F : tIN> PS x
[spacer]
7-182
001 177
10.00
001 202
Settings for operate values of neutral current IN> (meas.) and IN> (calc.).
0.00
001 197
4.00
001 195
[spacer]
0.00
001 194
001 178
001 179
001 180
Setting for the operate delay of stages IN> (meas.) or IN> (calc.).
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Protective signaling
Address
Min
Max
PSIG: Enab le PS x
0: No
Unit
Logic Diagram
015 014
015 015
015 016
[spacer]
[spacer]
015 017
015 026
024 012
024 072
025 032
[spacer]
[spacer]
012 246
012 247
012 248
012 249
[spacer]
[spacer]
015 000
024 060
025 020
[spacer]
[spacer]
024 000
015 036
015 037
015 040
015 041
[spacer]
This setting defines whether protective signaling generates the send signal as a
function of direction or distance.
[spacer]
015 107
015 108
015 113
015 114
[spacer]
7-183
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
0.00
Logic Diagram
015 011
10.00
024 003
024 063
[spacer]
The tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection when
protective signaling is ready.
[spacer]
0.00
015 002
10.00
025 023
024 001
024 061
025 021
[spacer]
[spacer]
015 003
0: Without
024 002
024 062
025 022
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
015 022
10.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
024 009
024 069
024 007
024 067
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weakinfeed logic is triggered.
[spacer]
015 020
0.90
[spacer]
PSIG: tV< PS x
015 019
0.00
10.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-184
025 027
024 006
024 066
025 026
[spacer]
0.20
025 029
[spacer]
0.60
025 028
015 021
0: No
024 068
015 023
10.00
024 008
024 005
024 065
025 025
006 148
006 149
006 150
006 151
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
015 024
0.00
10.00
024 010
025 030
[spacer]
[spacer]
024 070
006 039
006 046
006 047
006 048
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
015 025
024 011
024 071
025 031
7-185
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Auto-reclosing
control
Address
Min
Max
Unit
ARC: Enable PS x
Logic Diagram
015 046
0: No
015 047
015 048
015 049
[spacer]
[spacer]
015 050
0: Without
024 024
024 084
025 044
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the CB closed position will be taken into account or
not. If the setting is With, a binary signal input must be configured accordingly.
Then the ARC function is ready only if the CB is closed.
[spacer]
015 100
1: HSR/TDR permitted
015 101
015 102
015 103
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the ARC will carry out HSR and TDR, only TDR, or
only a test HSR.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
015 066
10.00
024 035
024 095
025 055
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
015 083
10.00
024 042
025 002
025 062
[spacer]
015 051
3: 3-pole
024 025
024 085
025 045
[spacer]
The selection for the HSR operating mode defines whether a single-pole, single-/
three-pole, or three-pole HSR shall take place.
Note: If a single-pole HSR is to be carried out, then the user must select the 1pole setting at either DIST : Tr ip z one 1 P G P Sx or DIST: Trip zone 1
PP PS x, and at either DIST : Trip zone 2 P G PSx or DIST: Trip zone
2 PP PS x.
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-186
0.00
015 072
10.00
024 040
025 000
025 060
The HSR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or the
operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection provided that the BUOC
operating mode is set accordingly if a HSR is permitted and protective
signaling is not ready.
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
015 044
2: Start-dependent
024 022
024 082
025 042
[spacer]
This setting defines whether ARC will be controlled by the starting decisions
(Start-dependent) or the trip decisions (Trip-dependent).
[spacer]
0.10
015 055
600.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.10
600.00
[spacer]
600.00
[spacer]
600.00
024 030
024 090
025 050
024 043
025 003
025 063
018 051
0.00
025 049
015 084
[spacer]
1.00
024 089
015 056
[spacer]
1.00
024 029
024 049
025 009
025 069
[spacer]
Setting for the discrimination time during which there will be a switch from a
single-pole HSR to a three-pole HSR when a secondary fault occurs.
[spacer]
ARC: Zone e x t . f. HS R P Sx
015 059
0: No
[spacer]
024 033
024 093
025 053
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended by the
zone extension factor kze HSR during normal system operation and while the
operative times are elapsing.
Note: This setting is only active if protective signaling is not ready.
[spacer]
015 068
024 037
024 097
025 057
[spacer]
Setting for the number of time-delayed reclosures permitted. With the 0 setting,
only one HSR is carried out.
[spacer]
0.00
015 073
10.00
024 041
025 001
025 061
[spacer]
The TDR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or the
operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection provided that the BUOC
operating mode is set accordingly if a TDR is permitted and protective
signaling is not ready.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.10
015 057
600.00
024 031
024 091
025 051
7-187
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
ARC: Zone e x t . f . T DR PS x
015 071
0: No
024 039
024 099
025 059
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended prior to
a TDR.
[spacer]
015 085
0: No
024 044
025 004
025 064
[spacer]
[spacer]
015 086
0.10
2.00
[spacer]
015 087
0.40
0.90
025 005
025 065
[spacer]
0.75
024 045
024 046
025 006
025 066
[spacer]
Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded in order for an RRC to
be carried out.
[spacer]
015 088
0: Without
[spacer]
[spacer]
024 047
025 007
025 067
A zone extension will be carried out during a close command by a HSR that
is not synchronism-checked.
1.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
015 054
600.00
024 088
025 048
015 043
600
024 028
024 021
024 081
025 041
[spacer]
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
cancellation of the blocks set by internal functions, such as SOTF.
[spacer]
015 058
600
024 032
024 092
025 052
[spacer]
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
blocking by a binary signal input.
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-188
015 045
024 023
024 083
025 043
This setting defines the operating mode for an external ARC working together
with the P437.
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
015 082
024 050
025 010
025 070
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the number of PSIG receive signals is monitored
during the dead time.
[spacer]
[spacer]
015 053
024 027
024 087
025 047
This setting defines whether and how the trip command(s) of a protection device
operating in parallel to the P437 will affect operation of the ARC function.
7-189
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Automatic
synchronism check
Address
Min
Max
Unit
ASC: Enab le PS x
Logic Diagram
018 020
0: No
018 021
018 022
018 023
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which automatic synchronism check
(ASC) is enabled.
[spacer]
018 001
0: No
077 030
078 030
079 030
[spacer]
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole HSR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
[spacer]
018 002
0: No
077 031
078 031
079 031
[spacer]
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole TDR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
[spacer]
018 006
077 033
078 033
079 033
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether enabling by the ASC function is required before
reclosing after a rapid reclosure can occur.
[spacer]
018 003
0: No
077 032
078 032
079 032
[spacer]
This setting defines whether reclosing is rejected after being blocked by ASC.
[spacer]
0.0
018 010
6000.0
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
078 034
079 034
031 060
4: Loop A-B
077 034
077 044
078 044
079 044
[spacer]
018 034
-180
180
077 042
078 042
079 042
[spacer]
Setting for a Phi offset that may be necessary so that determination of the
differential angle is correct.
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-190
018 025
018 026
018 027
018 028
Auto-reclosing control: Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the
operating mode.
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
000 038
000 039
000 050
000 051
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
018 029
018 030
018 031
018 032
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions
for a voltage controlled close enable.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.10
026 017
1.20
077 043
078 043
079 043
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.10
018 017
1.20
077 040
078 040
079 040
[spacer]
0.00
018 018
10.00
077 041
078 041
079 041
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which voltage conditions must be met so that the
close enable of the ASC is effected.
[spacer]
0.40
1.20
018 011
077 035
078 035
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.02
018 012
0.40
079 035
Vnom
077 036
078 036
079 036
7-191
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
0.01
Logic Diagram
018 014
2.00
Hz
077 038
078 038
079 038
[spacer]
[spacer]
018 013
100
077 037
078 037
079 037
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
018 015
10.00
077 039
078 039
079 039
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which synchronism conditions must be met so that
the close enable of the ASC is effected.
[spacer]
000 056
1: Voltage-checked
000 057
000 058
000 059
[spacer]
Manual close command: Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the
operating mode.
[spacer]
000 102
000 103
000 104
000 105
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
000 060
000 061
000 062
000 063
[spacer]
Manual close command: This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions
for a voltage controlled close enable.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.10
000 064
1.20
000 065
000 066
000 067
Manual close command: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as
Voltage present.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: MC
op.mode v-chk .PS x.
7-192
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
[spacer]
Address
0.10
Logic Diagram
000 068
1.20
000 069
000 070
000 071
Manual close command: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized
as No voltage.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: MC
op.mode v-chk .PS x.
[spacer]
ASC: MC tm in v-che ck P Sx
0.10
0.00
000 072
10.00
000 073
000 074
000 075
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which voltage conditions must be met so that the
close enable of the ASC is effected.
[spacer]
0.40
1.20
000 052
000 053
000 054
000 055
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to
obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
[spacer]
0.02
000 080
0.40
Vnom
000 081
000 082
000 083
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.01
000 084
2.00
Hz
000 086
000 087
000 088
[spacer]
[spacer]
000 089
100
000 091
000 092
000 093
[spacer]
[spacer]
ASC: MC tm in s ync.chk PS x
0.10
[spacer]
0.00
000 098
10.00
000 099
000 100
000 101
Manual close command: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which synchronism conditions must be met so that
the close enable of the ASC is effected.
7-193
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
018 072
0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
018 073
018 074
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground fault (short-circuit)
protection is enabled.
Parameter
Default
0: No
[spacer]
7-194
018 075
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
023 071
023 072
023 073
023 074
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling is enabled.
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Definite-time over
current protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
072 098
0: No
073 098
074 098
075 098
[spacer]
[spacer]
DTOC: I> PS x
1.00
[spacer]
20.00
Inom
0.10
20.00
Inom
20.00
Inom
20.00
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
Inom
0.10
20.00
Inom
20.00
Inom
0.10
Inom
074 010
075 010
073 019
074 019
075 019
073 020
074 020
075 020
073 021
074 021
075 021
073 022
074 022
075 022
073 011
074 011
075 011
073 012
074 012
075 012
073 013
074 013
075 013
20.00
073 010
0.10
075 009
[spacer]
20.00
[spacer]
072 011
0.10
074 009
[spacer]
1.00
073 009
0.00
075 008
0.00
074 008
[spacer]
[spacer]
30.00
073 008
072 019
0.00
075 007
0.10
074 007
0.10
073 007
DTOC: I>>> PS x
1.00
[spacer]
0.10
DTOC: I>> PS x
1.00
[spacer]
072 007
073 014
074 014
075 014
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the overcurrent stage of the negative-sequence
system.
[spacer]
072 023
0.00
30.00
073 023
074 023
075 023
7-195
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
072 024
0.00
30.00
072 025
0.00
30.00
0.00
072 026
30.00
074 024
075 024
073 025
074 025
075 025
073 024
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
073 026
074 026
075 026
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the overcurrent stage of the negative-sequence
system.
[spacer]
002 160
0: Normal
[spacer]
002 161
002 162
002 163
002 164
002 165
002 166
002 167
002 168
002 169
002 170
002 171
002 172
002 173
002 174
002 175
0: Normal
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the DTOC timer stages for the negativesequence system during the 1-pole dead time of the high-speed reclosure (HSR)
of an ARC cycle. (See: Settable operation mode during 1-pole dead time of
HSR.)
[spacer]
073 189
2: Measured
073 190
073 202
073 219
[spacer]
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual
current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or
the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
[spacer]
DTOC: IN> PS x
1.00
072 015
0.10
20.00
Inom
[spacer]
DTOC: IN>> PS x
072 016
0.10
20.00
Inom
[spacer]
DTOC: IN>>> PS x
[spacer]
7-196
072 017
0.10
20.00
Inom
075 015
073 016
074 016
075 016
[spacer]
1.00
074 015
[spacer]
1.00
073 015
073 017
074 017
075 017
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
DTOC: IN>>>> PS x
1.00
[spacer]
Address
Logic Diagram
072 018
0.10
20.00
Inom
073 018
074 018
075 018
Setting the operate value of the fourth overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
Caution! The range of setting values includes operate values that are not
permitted as continuous current values (see Chapter Technical Data).
[spacer]
002 138
002 139
002 142
002 143
1: With starting
[spacer]
With this setting the triggering of the timers for the residual current system can
now be set as direction-dependent.
[spacer]
072 027
0.00
30.00
073 027
074 027
075 027
[spacer]
[spacer]
072 028
0.00
30.00
[spacer]
072 029
0.00
30.00
[spacer]
072 030
0.00
30.00
073 029
074 029
075 029
073 030
074 030
075 030
[spacer]
[spacer]
075 028
[spacer]
1.00
074 028
[spacer]
1.00
073 028
002 144
002 145
002 146
002 147
[spacer]
002 148
002 149
002 150
002 151
002 152
002 153
002 154
002 155
002 156
002 157
002 158
002 159
0: Normal
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the DTOC timer stages for the residual current
system during the 1-pole dead time of the high-speed reclosure (HSR) of an ARC
cycle. (See: Settable operation mode during 1-pole dead time of HSR.)
7-197
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
010 045
0.010
0.500
Vnom
010 060
010 080
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value that the neutral-point displacement
voltage must exceed so that the direction determination is enabled.
[spacer]
-90
004 092
90
010 139
004 247
004 248
004 249
[spacer]
Setting for the position of the straight line separating forward and backward
(reverse) directions.
[spacer]
072 032
1: Forward directional
072 042
072 082
072 091
[spacer]
072 033
1: Forward directional
[spacer]
072 083
072 034
072 044
072 084
072 093
072 035
1: Forward directional
072 045
072 085
072 094
[spacer]
[spacer]
072 092
1: Forward directional
[spacer]
072 043
0.00
017 055
10.00
073 042
074 042
075 042
[spacer]
Setting for the pulse prolongation time of the hold-time logic for intermittent
ground faults.
[spacer]
0.00
017 056
100.00
073 038
074 038
075 038
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping time of the hold-time logic for intermittent ground faults.
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-198
0.0
600.0
017 057
073 039
074 039
075 039
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
072 070
0: No
073 070
074 070
075 070
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which IDMT protection is enabled.
[spacer]
072 050
0.10
4.00
Inom
[spacer]
007 250
10.00
074 050
075 050
[spacer]
1.00
073 050
007 251
007 252
007 253
[spacer]
Enable threshold for the IDMT protection starting for all types of characteristics.
This factor KI will result in a linear shifting of the enable threshold along the X
axis of the respective characteristic. The factor will not result in a shifting of the
characteristic itself.
[spacer]
072 056
0: Definite Time
073 056
075 056
[spacer]
[spacer]
074 056
0.05
072 053
10.00
073 053
074 053
075 053
[spacer]
Setting for the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer]
0.00
072 077
10.00
073 077
074 077
075 077
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time (phase current system). As a rule, this value
should be set as for the first DTOC stage (I>).
[spacer]
0.00
072 071
600.00
073 071
074 071
[spacer]
Setting for the holding time for intermittent short circuits (phase current
system).
[spacer]
IDMT: R e le as e P PS x
072 059
1: Without delay
073 059
074 059
[spacer]
[spacer]
075 059
[spacer]
1.00
075 071
072 051
0.01
4.00
Inom
073 051
074 051
075 051
7-199
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
1.00
Logic Diagram
007 254
10.00
007 255
008 002
008 005
[spacer]
Enable threshold for the IDMT protection starting for all Ineg types of
characteristics. This factor KI will result in a linear shifting of the enable
threshold along the X axis of the respective characteristic. The factor will not
result in a shifting of the characteristic itself.
[spacer]
IDMT: C haracter. ne g. P Sx
072 057
0: Definite Time
073 057
074 057
[spacer]
[spacer]
075 057
0.05
072 054
10.00
073 054
074 054
075 054
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
10.00
072 078
073 078
074 078
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
072 072
600.00
073 072
074 072
075 072
[spacer]
[spacer]
072 060
1: Without delay
075 078
073 060
074 060
075 060
[spacer]
[spacer]
IDMT: E valuatio n IN P Sx
072 075
2: Measured
073 075
074 075
075 075
[spacer]
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual
current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or
the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
[spacer]
IDMT: I ref ,N PS x
1.00
[spacer]
072 052
0.01
4.00
Inom
073 052
074 052
075 052
7-200
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
1.00
Logic Diagram
001 173
10.00
001 174
001 175
001 176
[spacer]
[spacer]
072 058
0: Definite Time
073 058
075 058
[spacer]
[spacer]
074 058
0.05
072 055
10.00
073 055
074 055
075 055
[spacer]
Setting for the factor kt,N of the starting characteristic (residual current system).
[spacer]
0.00
072 079
10.00
073 079
074 079
075 079
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time for the residual current measuring system.
This timer stage is started as soon as the minimum operate value is exceeded.
After the timer has elapsed, the trip signal is issued, regardless of the value of
the current.
[spacer]
0.00
072 073
600.00
073 073
074 073
[spacer]
Setting for the holding time for intermittent short circuits (residual current
system).
[spacer]
IDMT: R e le as e N PSx
1: Without delay
[spacer]
075 073
072 061
073 061
074 061
075 061
7-201
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Thermal overload
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
072 175
0: No
073 175
074 175
075 175
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload protection
is enabled.
[spacer]
THER M : Ir ef PSx
1.00
072 179
0.10
4.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
1.05
Inom
[spacer]
1000.0
075 179
073 180
074 180
075 180
[spacer]
30.0
074 179
072 180
1.50
073 179
072 187
min
073 187
074 187
075 187
[spacer]
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow
(Ibl: base line current).
[spacer]
[spacer]
1.0
1000.0
072 188
min
073 188
074 188
075 188
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (cooling time constant).
Note: This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all
other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
[spacer]
300
072 182
073 182
074 182
[spacer]
[spacer]
THER M : O/ T f .Iref pe r s. PS x
80
300
072 167
073 167
074 167
Setting for overtemperature resulting from a persistent limit current (max a,max).
[spacer]
[spacer]
300
072 153
075 167
[spacer]
95
075 182
073 153
074 153
075 153
[spacer]
[spacer]
70
072 185
073 185
074 185
075 185
7-202
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
072 177
073 177
074 177
075 177
[spacer]
[spacer]
-40
072 186
70
073 186
074 186
075 186
[spacer]
Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if
coolant temperature is not measured.
[spacer]
-40
100
076 178
077 178
078 178
079 178
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum coolant temperature to be used for trip time calculation
if a cable runs in an underground tunnel system.
[spacer]
076 177
3: Blocking
077 177
078 177
079 177
[spacer]
The setting defines how the thermal overload protection function will continue to
operate in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition. User can select
between Default temp. value, Last meas.temperat. and Blocking.
[spacer]
50
072 184
200
[spacer]
[spacer]
THER M : t rip PS x
100
[spacer]
200
074 184
075 184
072 181
50
073 184
073 181
074 181
075 181
[spacer]
30
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
1000.0
072 183
074 183
075 183
072 191
min
073 183
073 191
074 191
075 191
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between the
warning time and the trip time is set here.
7-203
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
THER M : R e tain re pl ic a PS x
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
009 019
009 030
009 032
009 039
0: No
[spacer]
7-204
With this parameter it can be configured whether the thermal replica is retained
in the non-volatile section of the device's memory so that it will still be available
after an interruption of the supply voltage.
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Address
Default
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
076 000
077 000
078 000
079 000
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which V<> protection is enabled.
[spacer]
076 001
1: Delta
[spacer]
077 001
078 001
079 001
operate value
80V
=
= 0.80
V nom
100V
Setting in the Star operating mode for an operate value of 46.2 V (phase-tophase):
Setting value =
[spacer]
operate value
46.2V
46.2V 3
=
=
= 0.80
V nom
100V
100V
3
3
076 003
0.20
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.20
[spacer]
[spacer]
V<>: tV> PS x
1.50
100.00
[spacer]
V<>: tV>> PS x
[spacer]
076 006
0.00
100.00
078 004
079 004
011 076
011 077
011 078
077 005
078 005
079 005
[spacer]
1.00
077 004
076 005
0.00
079 003
011 075
[spacer]
1.00
1.50
078 003
076 004
[spacer]
1.10
1.50
077 003
077 006
078 006
079 006
7-205
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
V<>: tV>>> PS x
1.00
Logic Diagram
011 079
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
076 027
0.00
100.00
011 081
011 082
[spacer]
1.00
011 080
077 027
078 027
079 027
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V> when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer]
0.00
011 092
100.00
011 094
011 095
011 096
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>> when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer]
0.00
011 099
100.00
011 105
011 117
011 118
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>> when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer]
076 007
0.20
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.20
[spacer]
[spacer]
V<>: tV< PS x
1.50
100.00
[spacer]
V<>: tV<< PS x
076 010
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
V<>: tV<<< PS x
[spacer]
7-206
011 088
0.00
100.00
079 008
011 084
011 085
011 086
077 009
078 009
079 009
077 010
078 010
079 010
[spacer]
1.00
078 008
[spacer]
1.00
077 008
076 009
0.00
079 007
011 083
[spacer]
1.00
1.50
078 007
076 008
[spacer]
0.80
1.50
077 007
011 089
011 090
011 091
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
076 028
0.00
100.00
077 028
078 028
079 028
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V< when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer]
0.00
011 119
100.00
011 124
011 125
011 126
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<< when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer]
0.00
011 127
100.00
011 128
011 129
011 130
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<< when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer]
076 015
0.20
[spacer]
[spacer]
Vnom/3
0.20
[spacer]
1.50
Vnom/3
100.00
[spacer]
076 018
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
076 019
0.20
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.20
[spacer]
[spacer]
Vnom/3
1.50
Vnom/3
100.00
077 017
078 017
079 017
077 018
078 018
079 018
077 019
078 019
079 019
077 020
078 020
079 020
076 021
0.00
079 016
076 020
[spacer]
1.00
1.50
078 016
[spacer]
0.80
077 016
[spacer]
1.00
079 015
076 017
0.00
078 015
076 016
[spacer]
1.00
1.50
077 015
077 021
078 021
079 021
7-207
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
076 022
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
V<>: Vneg> PS x
076 023
0.20
[spacer]
[spacer]
V<>: Vneg>> PS x
Blocked
Vnom/3
0.20
[spacer]
1.50
Vnom/3
100.00
[spacer]
076 026
0.00
100.00
078 023
077 024
078 024
[spacer]
076 002
1: Calculated
077 025
078 025
077 026
078 026
077 002
078 002
[spacer]
V<>: VNG> PS x
076 011
0.02
[spacer]
[spacer]
1.00
0.02
[spacer]
V<>: tVNG> PS x
1.00
076 013
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
V<>: tVNG>> PS x
076 014
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
V<>: Vref> PS x
[spacer]
7-208
007 064
1.50
078 011
079 011
077 012
078 012
079 012
077 013
078 013
079 013
077 014
078 014
079 014
[spacer]
0.20
077 011
1.10
079 002
[spacer]
1.00
079 026
076 012
[spacer]
1.00
079 025
[spacer]
Blocked
079 024
[spacer]
Blocked
079 023
[spacer]
1.00
077 023
076 025
0.00
079 022
076 024
[spacer]
1.00
1.50
078 022
[spacer]
Blocked
077 022
Vref,nom
007 071
007 075
007 079
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
007 065
0.20
[spacer]
[spacer]
V<>: Vref>>> PS x
1.10
1.50
Vref,nom
0.20
[spacer]
1.50
Vref,nom
100.00
[spacer]
007 067
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
010 254
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
V<>: Vref< PS x
007 086
0.20
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.20
[spacer]
V<>: Vref<<< PS x
1.50
Vref,nom
0.20
[spacer]
1.50
Vref,nom
100.00
[spacer]
007 096
100.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
011 071
0.00
100.00
007 070
007 074
007 078
010 255
011 020
011 035
007 097
007 101
007 105
007 098
007 102
007 106
011 062
011 069
011 070
007 099
007 103
007 107
007 100
007 104
007 108
[spacer]
1.00
007 077
0.00
007 073
[spacer]
1.00
007 069
007 088
0.00
010 253
011 059
[spacer]
1.00
Vref,nom
007 087
[spacer]
0.80
1.50
010 252
[spacer]
0.80
010 251
[spacer]
1.00
007 076
[spacer]
1.00
007 072
007 066
0.00
007 068
010 250
[spacer]
1.00
Logic Diagram
011 072
011 073
011 074
7-209
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
001 162
0: Without
001 163
001 164
001 165
[spacer]
Activation of the minimum current monitoring mode for undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer]
0.04
001 155
1.00
Inom
001 159
001 160
001 161
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the minimum current monitoring for
undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer]
0.00
076 029
100.00
077 029
078 029
079 029
[spacer]
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage stages.
[spacer]
076 048
10
077 048
078 048
079 048
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-210
10
076 049
077 049
078 049
079 049
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring deduced voltages
such as Vneg and VNG.
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
018 196
0: No
018 197
018 198
[spacer]
[spacer]
018 120
1: f
[spacer]
018 199
018 121
018 122
018 123
018 144
018 145
018 146
018 147
018 168
018 169
018 170
018 171
018 192
018 193
018 194
018 195
1: f
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
f<> : f1 PS x
49.80
[spacer]
70.00
Hz
40.00
70.00
40.00
70.00
40.00
70.00
018 102
018 103
018 125
018 126
018 127
018 148
018 149
018 150
018 151
018 172
018 173
018 174
018 175
Hz
f<> : f4 PS x
49.80
018 101
Hz
f<> : f3 PS x
49.80
[spacer]
40.00
f<> : f2 PS x
49.80
[spacer]
018 100
Hz
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
10.00
[spacer]
018 104
0.00
10.00
0.00
10.00
018 106
018 107
018 129
018 130
018 131
018 152
018 153
018 154
018 155
018 105
7-211
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
018 176
0.00
10.00
018 177
[spacer]
f<> : df1/dt PS x
[spacer]
0.1
10.0
0.1
10.0
0.1
10.0
018 109
018 110
018 111
018 133
018 134
018 135
018 156
018 157
018 158
018 159
018 180
018 181
018 182
018 183
Hz/s
Hz/s
f<> : df4/dt PS x
2.0
[spacer]
Hz/s
f<> : df3/dt PS x
2.0
[spacer]
10.0
f<> : df2/dt PS x
2.0
[spacer]
018 108
0.1
018 179
[spacer]
2.0
018 178
Hz/s
[spacer]
f<> : De lta f1 PS x
0.30
[spacer]
Hz
0.01
5.00
0.01
5.00
0.01
5.00
018 113
018 114
018 115
018 137
018 138
018 139
018 160
018 161
018 162
018 163
018 184
018 185
018 186
018 187
Hz
Hz
f<> : De lta f4 PS x
0.30
[spacer]
5.00
f<> : De lta f3 PS x
0.30
[spacer]
0.01
f<> : De lta f2 PS x
0.30
[spacer]
018 112
Hz
[spacer]
f<> : De lta t1 PS x
0.30
[spacer]
0.04
3.00
0.04
3.00
0.04
3.00
018 117
018 118
018 119
018 141
018 142
018 143
018 164
018 165
018 166
018 167
018 188
018 189
018 190
018 191
f<> : De lta t4 PS x
0.30
[spacer]
3.00
f<> : De lta t3 PS x
0.30
[spacer]
0.04
f<> : De lta t2 PS x
0.30
[spacer]
018 116
7-212
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
Power directional
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
014 252
0: No
014 253
014 254
014 255
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which power directional protection
is enabled.
[spacer]
P<>: P> PS x
0.500
017 120
0.010
1.500
Snom
Setting for the operate value P> for the active power.
[spacer]
100.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
017 128
[spacer]
[spacer]
017 129
017 130
017 131
017 133
017 134
017 135
017 136
1: Forward directional
017 202
017 132
100.00
017 201
[spacer]
0.10
017 200
017 137
017 138
017 139
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P>> trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer]
0.05
017 124
0.95
017 125
017 126
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P> of active power.
[spacer]
P<>: P>> PS x
0.500
017 140
0.010
1.500
Snom
Setting for the operate value P>> for the active power.
[spacer]
100.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
017 148
017 142
017 143
017 149
017 150
017 151
017 152
017 141
[spacer]
Blocked
017 127
017 153
017 154
017 155
017 156
017 157
017 158
017 159
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P>> trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
7-213
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
0.05
Logic Diagram
017 144
0.95
017 145
017 146
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P>> of active power.
[spacer]
P<>: Q> PS x
0.500
017 160
0.010
1.500
Snom
[spacer]
100.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
10.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
017 168
017 163
017 169
017 170
017 171
017 173
017 174
017 175
017 176
1: Forward directional
017 162
017 172
017 161
[spacer]
Blocked
017 147
017 177
017 178
017 179
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q> trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer]
0.05
017 164
0.95
017 165
017 166
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q> of reactive power.
[spacer]
P<>: Q>> PS x
0.500
017 180
0.010
1.500
Snom
[spacer]
100.00
017 188
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
017 183
017 189
017 190
017 191
017 193
017 194
017 195
017 196
1: Forward directional
017 182
017 192
017 181
[spacer]
Blocked
017 167
017 197
017 198
017 199
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q>> trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer]
[spacer]
7-214
0.05
017 184
0.95
017 185
017 186
017 187
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q>> of reactive power.
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
P<>: P< PS x
0.500
017 030
0.010
1.500
Snom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
017 061
017 062
017 063
017 227
017 228
017 229
[spacer]
[spacer]
017 230
1: Forward directional
017 033
017 226
100.00
017 032
017 060
017 031
017 231
017 232
017 233
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P< trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer]
1.05
017 034
20.00
017 035
017 036
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P< of active power.
[spacer]
P<>: P<< PS x
0.500
017 234
0.010
1.500
Snom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
100.00
017 037
017 243
017 244
017 245
017 247
017 248
017 249
[spacer]
[spacer]
017 250
1: Forward directional
017 237
017 246
017 236
017 242
017 235
017 251
017 252
017 253
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P<< trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer]
1.05
017 238
20.00
017 239
017 240
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P<< of active power.
[spacer]
P<>: Q< PS x
0.500
[spacer]
018 035
0.010
0.500
017 241
Snom
018 036
018 037
018 038
7-215
P437
7 Settings
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
100.00
Logic Diagram
018 052
018 055
018 057
018 058
018 059
[spacer]
[spacer]
018 081
1: Forward directional
018 054
018 056
018 053
018 082
018 083
018 084
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q< trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer]
1.05
018 044
20.00
018 045
018 046
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q< of reactive power.
[spacer]
P<>: Q<< PS x
0.500
018 085
0.010
0.500
Snom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
100.00
018 088
018 214
018 215
018 216
018 237
018 238
018 239
[spacer]
[spacer]
018 242
1: Forward directional
018 087
018 236
018 086
018 213
[spacer]
0.00
018 047
018 243
018 244
018 245
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q<< trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer]
1.05
018 095
20.00
018 096
018 097
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q<< of reactive power.
[spacer]
0.00
018 246
100.00
018 098
018 247
018 248
018 249
[spacer]
7.1.3.4
7-216
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by stages P<, P<<, Q< and
Q<< after the respective operate delays have elapsed.
Cont rol
P437
8
8.1
Operation
The P437 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals,
and acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object
as well as fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical
purposes. This information can be read out from the integrated local control
panel or via the operating program.
All this information can be found in the Operation and Events folders in the
menu tree.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 608705103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P437_en_P01.zip.
A list of the Logical Nodes that have been implemented for the IEC 61850 protocol
can be found in a separate document.
8.1.1
Cyclic Values
8.1.1.1
Device
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
25
100
104 099
MHz
8-1
P437
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Min
Max
Unit
[spacer]
Address
0.0
100.0
120 040
0.0
100.0
Logic Diagram
122 040
[spacer]
Display of the updated measured operating value for the number of corrupted
messages within the last 1000 received messages.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
100.0
120 041
0.0
100.0
122 041
[spacer]
Display of the updated measured operating value for the proportion of corrupted
messages within the last 1000 received messages.
[spacer]
120 057
[spacer]
120 056
255
122 057
[spacer]
8-2
122 056
255
While the hold time is running, the loop back test results can be checked by
reading out these values.
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
004 134
0.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
24.00
mA
004 135
1.20
IDC,nom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
004 136
1.20
IDC,nom
[spacer]
[spacer]
-32000
32000
[spacer]
[spacer]
004 180
004 133
-40.0
215.0
[spacer]
[spacer]
-0.40
004 221
2.15
100C
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
-40.0
004 233
215.0
Measured data
output
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
005 100
0.00
20.00
mA
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
0.00
20.00
mA
Display of the current on the analog measured data output (A1: channel 1; A2:
channel 2).
8-3
P437
Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
MAIN: Date
01.01.97
003 090
[spacer]
Date display. The date can also be set here. The centuries are not displayed.
The supported dates range from January 1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer]
003 091
[spacer]
Display of the time of day. The time can also be set here.
[spacer]
003 095
0: Standard time
[spacer]
[spacer]
004 040
40.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
MAIN: IA prim,demand
Not measured
[spacer]
Hz
006 226
25000
MAIN: IB prim,demand
Not measured
[spacer]
70.00
006 227
25000
006 228
25000
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
25000
[spacer]
006 223
25000
006 224
25000
006 225
[spacer]
Display the three stored phase currents (demand values) as primary quantities.
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-4
005 050
25000
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
005 036
25000
[spacer]
[spacer]
005 034
25000
[spacer]
[spacer]
005 055
25000
[spacer]
[spacer]
005 040
25000
[spacer]
[spacer]
006 040
25000
[spacer]
[spacer]
25000
[spacer]
007 040
[spacer]
Not measured
005 010
25000
[spacer]
[spacer]
004 043
25000
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the residual current as a primary quantity. The
measured residual current is displayed.
[spacer]
008 000
25000
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
008 042
2500.0
kV
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
009 042
2500.0
kV
8-5
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.0
005 042
2500.0
kV
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
006 042
2500.0
kV
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
007 042
2500.0
kV
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
005 012
2500.0
kV
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
004 041
2500.0
kV
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
005 046
3000.0
kV
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
008 044
2500.0
kV
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
009 044
2500.0
kV
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
005 044
2500.0
kV
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-6
0.0
006 044
2500.0
kV
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.0
007 044
2500.0
kV
[spacer]
[spacer]
-1399.9
1400.0
005 025
MVA
[spacer]
[spacer]
-3200.0
3200.0
004 050
MW
[spacer]
[spacer]
-3200.0
004 052
3200.0
Mvar
[spacer]
[spacer]
-1.000
004 054
1.000
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
008 065
MWh
[spacer]
008 066
MWh
008 067
Mvarh
8-7
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Logic Diagram
008 068
2:
[spacer]
Unit
Mvarh
Display of the updated active energy output (or active energy input, reactive
energy output, reactive energy input, respectively) as a primary quantity.
At run-time, the value is displayed with 32 bit precision. (But note that for
technical reasons, this value is internally stored as a text value.)
Value ranges:
Note: As an alternative, the same values also exist as numbers with 16 bit
precision:
[spacer]
[spacer]
MWh
0.00
005 062
655.35
MWh
8-8
655.35
[spacer]
0.00
005 061
0.00
655.35
005 063
Mvar h
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
0.00
005 064
655.35
Mvar h
Display of the updated active energy output (or active energy input, reactive
energy output, reactive energy input, respectively) as a primary quantity.
The value is displayed as a number with 16 bit precision.
The setting at M AIN: Op. mode e nergy cnt . decides which procedure
shall be used to determine the active and reactive energy:
Procedure 2 obviously gives more precise results but puts more strain on the
system.
Whenever the maximum value of 655.35 MWh or 655.35 MVAr h is exceeded,
the determination of the energy output is restarted, and the value that
exceeded the range is transferred to the new cycle. Moreover, a counter is
incremented:
(009 090) M AIN: No.ove rfl.act .e n.out: Counter for value overflow
of MAI N: Act .e nergy out p.pr im
(009 092) M AIN: No. ov/ fl.r e ac. en.out: Counter for value overflow
of MAI N: R eact .en. out p. prim
(009 093) MAIN: No.ov/ fl. r e ac.e n.i np: Counter for value overflow
of M AIN: Re act . en. i np. pr im
[spacer]
-180.0
004 055
180.0
[spacer]
[spacer]
-180.0
004 056
180.0
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
-180.0
004 057
180.0
8-9
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
004 072
-180.0
180.0
[spacer]
Display of the angle between the measured residual current system quantities IN
and VNG.
[spacer]
-180
005 009
180
[spacer]
[spacer]
MAIN: Phase re l. I N vs IP
004 073
[spacer]
Display of the phase relation of measured and calculated residual current. (The
phase relation is displayed as either Equal phase or Reverse phase.)
[spacer]
0.200
004 070
4.000
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
006 235
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
0.000
fnom
0.000
006 236
25.000
Inom
0.000
006 237
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
0.000
006 232
0.000
006 233
25.000
Inom
0.000
006 234
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
005 051
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-10
0.000
005 037
25.000
Inom
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.000
005 035
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
005 056
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
005 041
0.000
25.000
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
25.000
[spacer]
Inom
007 041
0.000
25.000
[spacer]
[spacer]
006 041
[spacer]
Not measured
Inom
0.000
Inom
009 016
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
009 015
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
005 011
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IN p. u.
Not measured
0.000
004 044
25.000
IN,nom
[spacer]
Display of the updated residual current value referred to Inom. The measured
residual current is displayed.
[spacer]
0.000
008 001
25.000
IN,nom
[spacer]
Display of the measured residual current of the parallel line referred to Inom.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
25.000
008 043
Vnom
8-11
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.000
25.000
009 043
Vnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
-1.80
005 072
1.80
phi,ref
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
005 043
25.000
Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
0.000
006 043
25.000
Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage C- G p. u.
Not measured
0.000
007 043
25.000
Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
0.000
009 018
25.000
Vnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
009 017
25.000
Vnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
005 013
12.000
Vnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
004 042
25.000
VNG,nom
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-12
0.000
005 047
3.000
Vnom
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.000
25.000
008 045
Vnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
25.000
009 045
Vnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
005 045
25.000
Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
0.000
006 045
25.000
Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
0.000
007 045
25.000
Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
-10.700
005 026
10.700
Snom
[spacer]
[spacer]
-7.500
004 051
7.500
Snom
[spacer]
Display of the updated active power value referred to nominal apparent power
Snom.
[spacer]
-7.500
004 053
7.500
Snom
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for reactive power referred to nominal apparent
power Snom.
[spacer]
-1.80
005 073
1.80
phi,ref
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
-1.80
005 074
1.80
phi,ref
8-13
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
-1.80
005 075
1.80
phi,ref
[spacer]
[spacer]
-1.80
005 076
1.80
phi,ref
[spacer]
Display of the angle between the measured residual current system quantities IN
and VNG referred to 100.
[spacer]
[spacer]
008 004
-180.0
180.0
-180.0
008 003
180.0
[spacer]
Display of the angle between VAG and the two residual currents for the purpose
of checking correct connection of the transformer for measuring IN,par.
[spacer]
0.000
004 074
25.000
Inom
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-14
000 031
0.000
25.000
P437
Parameter
Address
Default
Thermal overload
protection
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
-25000
25000
004 016
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
25000
007 220
0.000
2.400
007 221
Iref
Display of the thermal current (as a primary quantity, or as a per unit quantity,
respectively).
These measured operating values are calculated as follows:
I therm,prim =
I therm,p.u. =
Statustherm. repl.
100
I ref I nom,CT,prim
I therm,prim
I ref I nom,CT,prim
With:
-40
300
004 137
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
-40
200
004 149
Display of coolant temperature, dependent on the setting for THE RM: Sel ect
meas .inputPS x.
When set to Default temp. value the set temperature value will be displayed.
When set to From PT100 the temperature measured by the resistance
thermometer will be displayed. When set to From 20 mA input the temperature
measured via an external 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
004 139
1000.0
min
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function
will reach the tripping threshold (time-to-trip).
8-15
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
-2.50
2.50
004 017
100%
[spacer]
[spacer]
-0.40
004 179
3.00
100C
[spacer]
[spacer]
-0.40
004 178
2.00
100C
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
-25000
25000
004 109
Binary counts
Logic Diagram
217 100
65535
65535
217 081
65535
COUNT : Count 4
0
[spacer]
Unit
COUNT : Count 3
0
[spacer]
Max
COUNT : Count 2
0
[spacer]
Min
COUNT : Count 1
0
[spacer]
Address
217 082
65535
8-16
P437
8.1.1.2
InterMiCOM
interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
120 000
0: 0
[spacer]
120 003
0: 0
[spacer]
120 006
0: 0
[spacer]
120 009
0: 0
[spacer]
120 012
0: 0
[spacer]
120 015
0: 0
[spacer]
120 018
0: 0
[spacer]
120 021
0: 0
[spacer]
122 000
0: 0
[spacer]
122 003
0: 0
[spacer]
122 006
0: 0
[spacer]
122 009
0: 0
[spacer]
122 012
0: 0
[spacer]
122 015
0: 0
[spacer]
122 018
0: 0
[spacer]
122 021
0: 0
[spacer]
[spacer]
121 000
0: 0
8-17
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
121 002
0: 0
[spacer]
121 004
0: 0
[spacer]
121 006
0: 0
[spacer]
121 008
0: 0
[spacer]
121 010
0: 0
[spacer]
121 012
0: 0
[spacer]
121 014
0: 0
[spacer]
123 000
0: 0
[spacer]
123 002
0: 0
[spacer]
123 004
0: 0
[spacer]
123 006
0: 0
[spacer]
123 008
0: 0
[spacer]
123 010
0: 0
[spacer]
123 012
0: 0
[spacer]
123 014
0: 0
[spacer]
8-18
P437
Parameter
Default
IEC Generic
Substation Status
Events
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 100
0: 0
[spacer]
104 103
0: 0
[spacer]
104 106
0: 0
[spacer]
104 109
0: 0
[spacer]
104 112
0: 0
[spacer]
104 115
0: 0
[spacer]
104 118
0: 0
[spacer]
104 121
0: 0
[spacer]
104 124
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 10 st at e
104 127
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 11 st at e
104 130
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 12 st at e
104 133
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 13 st at e
104 136
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 14 st at e
104 139
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 15 st at e
104 142
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 16 st at e
104 145
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 17 st at e
104 148
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 18 st at e
104 151
0: 0
8-19
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
GSS E: Output 19 st at e
Logic Diagram
104 154
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 20 st at e
104 157
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 21 st at e
104 160
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 22 st at e
104 163
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 23 st at e
104 166
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 24 st at e
104 169
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 25 st at e
104 172
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 26 st at e
104 175
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 27 st at e
104 178
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 28 st at e
104 181
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 29 st at e
104 184
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 30 st at e
104 187
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 31 st at e
104 190
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Output 32 st at e
104 193
0: 0
[spacer]
[spacer]
105 000
0: 0
[spacer]
105 005
0: 0
[spacer]
105 010
0: 0
[spacer]
105 015
0: 0
8-20
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 5 st at e
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 020
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 6 st at e
105 025
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 7 st at e
105 030
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 8 st at e
105 035
0: 0
[spacer]
GSS E: Inp ut 9 st at e
105 040
0: 0
[spacer]
105 045
0: 0
[spacer]
105 050
0: 0
[spacer]
105 055
0: 0
[spacer]
105 060
0: 0
[spacer]
105 065
0: 0
[spacer]
105 070
0: 0
[spacer]
105 075
0: 0
[spacer]
105 080
0: 0
[spacer]
105 085
0: 0
[spacer]
105 090
0: 0
[spacer]
105 095
0: 0
[spacer]
105 100
0: 0
[spacer]
105 105
0: 0
[spacer]
105 110
0: 0
8-21
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 115
0: 0
[spacer]
105 120
0: 0
[spacer]
105 125
0: 0
[spacer]
105 130
0: 0
[spacer]
105 135
0: 0
[spacer]
105 140
0: 0
[spacer]
105 145
0: 0
[spacer]
105 150
0: 0
[spacer]
105 155
0: 0
[spacer]
8-22
P437
Parameter
Default
Generic Object
Orientated
Substation Events
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
106 010
0: 0
[spacer]
106 012
0: 0
[spacer]
106 014
0: 0
[spacer]
106 016
0: 0
[spacer]
106 018
0: 0
[spacer]
106 020
0: 0
[spacer]
106 022
0: 0
[spacer]
106 024
0: 0
[spacer]
106 026
0: 0
[spacer]
106 028
0: 0
[spacer]
106 030
0: 0
[spacer]
106 032
0: 0
[spacer]
106 034
0: 0
[spacer]
106 036
0: 0
[spacer]
106 038
0: 0
[spacer]
106 040
0: 0
[spacer]
106 042
0: 0
[spacer]
106 044
0: 0
8-23
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
106 046
0: 0
[spacer]
106 048
0: 0
[spacer]
106 050
0: 0
[spacer]
106 052
0: 0
[spacer]
106 054
0: 0
[spacer]
106 056
0: 0
[spacer]
106 058
0: 0
[spacer]
106 060
0: 0
[spacer]
106 062
0: 0
[spacer]
106 064
0: 0
[spacer]
106 066
0: 0
[spacer]
106 068
0: 0
[spacer]
106 070
0: 0
[spacer]
106 072
0: 0
[spacer]
[spacer]
106 200
0: 0
[spacer]
106 201
0: 0
[spacer]
106 202
0: 0
[spacer]
106 203
0: 0
8-24
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
106 204
0: 0
[spacer]
106 205
0: 0
[spacer]
106 206
0: 0
[spacer]
106 207
0: 0
[spacer]
106 208
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 10 st at e
106 209
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 11 st at e
106 210
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 12 st at e
106 211
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 13 st at e
106 212
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 14 st at e
106 213
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 15 st at e
106 214
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 16 st at e
106 215
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 17 st at e
106 216
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 18 st at e
106 217
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 19 st at e
106 218
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 20 st at e
106 219
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 21 st at e
106 220
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 22 st at e
106 221
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 23 st at e
106 222
0: 0
8-25
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
GOOSE: Input 24 st at e
Logic Diagram
106 223
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 25 st at e
106 224
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 26 st at e
106 225
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 27 st at e
106 226
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 28 st at e
106 227
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 29 st at e
106 228
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 30 st at e
106 229
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 31 st at e
106 230
0: 0
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 32 st at e
106 231
0: 0
[spacer]
8-26
P437
Parameter
Default
Binary input
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
184 001
0: "Low"
[spacer]
184 005
0: "Low"
[spacer]
184 009
0: "Low"
[spacer]
184 013
0: "Low"
[spacer]
184 017
0: "Low"
[spacer]
184 021
0: "Low"
[spacer]
152 162
0: "Low"
[spacer]
152 165
0: "Low"
[spacer]
152 168
0: "Low"
[spacer]
152 171
0: "Low"
[spacer]
152 174
0: "Low"
[spacer]
152 177
0: "Low"
[spacer]
152 198
0: "Low"
[spacer]
152 201
0: "Low"
[spacer]
152 204
0: "Low"
[spacer]
152 207
0: "Low"
[spacer]
152 210
0: "Low"
[spacer]
152 213
0: "Low"
[spacer]
190 001
0: "Low"
8-27
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
190 005
0: "Low"
[spacer]
190 009
0: "Low"
[spacer]
190 013
0: "Low"
[spacer]
190 017
0: "Low"
[spacer]
190 021
0: "Low"
[spacer]
192 001
0: "Low"
[spacer]
192 005
0: "Low"
[spacer]
192 009
0: "Low"
[spacer]
192 013
0: "Low"
[spacer]
192 017
0: "Low"
[spacer]
192 021
0: "Low"
[spacer]
153 086
0: "Low"
[spacer]
153 089
0: "Low"
[spacer]
153 092
0: "Low"
[spacer]
153 095
0: "Low"
[spacer]
"High": Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input mode.
8-28
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
150 168
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 171
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 174
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 177
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 180
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 183
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 186
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 189
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 216
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 219
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 222
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 225
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 228
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 231
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 234
0: Inactive
[spacer]
150 237
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 008
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 011
0: Inactive
8-29
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
151 014
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 017
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 020
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 023
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 026
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 029
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 001
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 005
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 009
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 013
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 017
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 021
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 025
0: Inactive
[spacer]
169 029
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 001
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 005
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 009
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 013
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 017
0: Inactive
8-30
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
171 021
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 025
0: Inactive
[spacer]
171 029
0: Inactive
[spacer]
173 001
0: Inactive
[spacer]
173 005
0: Inactive
[spacer]
173 009
0: Inactive
[spacer]
173 013
0: Inactive
[spacer]
173 017
0: Inactive
[spacer]
173 021
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 200
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 203
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 206
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 209
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 212
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 215
0: Inactive
[spacer]
151 218
0: Inactive
8-31
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
151 221
0: Inactive
[spacer]
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output relay.
8-32
P437
Parameter
Default
LED indicators
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
085 180
1: Active
[spacer]
085 000
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 003
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H 4 re d
085 006
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H 5 re d
085 009
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H 6 re d
085 012
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H 7 re d
085 015
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H 8 re d
085 018
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: S tat e H 9 re d
085 021
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 024
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 027
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 030
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 033
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 036
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 039
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 042
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 181
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 130
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 133
0: Inactive
8-33
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
085 136
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 139
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 142
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 145
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 056
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 059
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 062
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 065
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 068
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 071
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 074
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 077
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 080
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 083
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 086
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 089
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 092
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 160
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 163
0: Inactive
8-34
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
085 166
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 169
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 172
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 176
0: Inactive
[spacer]
Parameter
Default
Configurable func
tion keys
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
F_KEY: St ate F1
080 122
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: St ate F2
080 123
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: St ate F3
080 124
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: St ate F4
080 125
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: St ate F5
080 126
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: St ate F6
080 127
0: "Off"
[spacer]
8-35
P437
8.1.1.3
Address
Min
LOC: Ed it mode
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
080 111
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is in edit mode. As a standard this signal is linked
to LED: Fct.as sig. H1 7 r ed.
[spacer]
030 230
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 1 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 1.)
[spacer]
030 231
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 2 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 2.)
[spacer]
037 101
0: No
[spacer]
8-36
This signal shows that the backlighting for the front panel LCD is switched on.
P437
Parameter
Default
Logical
communication
interface 1
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 173
0: No
[spacer]
037 074
0: No
[spacer]
003 174
0: No
[spacer]
037 075
0: No
[spacer]
003 219
0: No
[spacer]
003 218
0: No
[spacer]
003 221
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 1: MODB US
003 223
0: No
[spacer]
COMM 1: DNP3
003 230
0: No
[spacer]
103 041
0: No
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
006 054
0: No
[spacer]
120 043
0: No
[spacer]
120 044
0: No
[spacer]
120 045
0: No
8-37
P437
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
011 243
0: No
[spacer]
122 043
0: No
[spacer]
122 044
0: No
[spacer]
122 045
0: No
Parameter
Default
IRIGB interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
IRIGB: Enabled
023 201
0: No
[spacer]
023 202
0: No
Parameter
Default
IEC Generic
Substation Status
Events
Logic Diagram
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 181
0: No
[spacer]
IEC 61850
Communication
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 180
0: No
[spacer]
8-38
Display when an Ethernet module is not operational, i.e. if the MAC address is
missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting.
P437
Parameter
Default
Generic Object
Orientated
Substation Events
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
107 180
0: No
[spacer]
107 181
0: No
[spacer]
107 182
0: No
[spacer]
107 183
0: No
[spacer]
107 184
0: No
[spacer]
107 185
0: No
[spacer]
107 186
0: No
[spacer]
107 187
0: No
[spacer]
107 188
0: No
[spacer]
107 189
0: No
[spacer]
107 190
0: No
[spacer]
107 191
0: No
[spacer]
107 192
0: No
[spacer]
107 193
0: No
[spacer]
107 194
0: No
[spacer]
107 195
0: No
[spacer]
107 200
0: No
[spacer]
107 201
0: No
8-39
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
107 202
0: No
[spacer]
107 203
0: No
[spacer]
107 204
0: No
[spacer]
107 205
0: No
[spacer]
107 206
0: No
[spacer]
107 207
0: No
[spacer]
107 208
0: No
[spacer]
107 209
0: No
[spacer]
107 210
0: No
[spacer]
107 211
0: No
[spacer]
107 212
0: No
[spacer]
107 213
0: No
[spacer]
107 214
0: No
[spacer]
107 215
0: No
[spacer]
8-40
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
107 250
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
107 251
2:
[spacer]
107 252
2:
[spacer]
107 248
2:
[spacer]
107 249
2:
[spacer]
GOOSE: Uniquene ss 1- 16
Not measured
[spacer]
007 217
65535
007 218
65535
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
006 076
0: No
[spacer]
MEASI: E nable d
0: No
035 008
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 190
040 191
040 192
8-41
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
040 014
0: No
[spacer]
OUTP: Re s e t latch. E XT
040 015
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-42
021 015
040 088
P437
Parameter
Default
Measured data
output
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
036 085
1: Yes
[spacer]
036 087
0: No
[spacer]
037 102
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 055
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 054
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 053
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 052
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 051
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 050
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 117
037 118
0: No
8-43
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
037 119
0: No
8-44
P437
Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 027
2: Not configured
[spacer]
003 026
2: Not configured
[spacer]
MAIN: General re s et E XT
005 255
0: No
[spacer]
005 209
0: No
[spacer]
005 252
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Re s e t indicat. EX T
065 001
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Re s e t latch.tr ip E X T
040 138
0: No
[spacer]
005 210
0: No
[spacer]
005 211
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Rs t me as.v.e ne r. E X T
005 212
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB open 3p E XT
031 028
0: No
[spacer]
036 051
0: No
[spacer]
031 029
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB close d B E XT
031 030
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB close d C EX T
031 031
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Blocking 1 E X T
040 060
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Blocking 2 E X T
040 061
0: No
[spacer]
004 061
0: No
[spacer]
002 183
0: No
8-45
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
036 086
0: No
[spacer]
036 045
0: No
[spacer]
037 018
0: No
[spacer]
038 030
0: No
[spacer]
038 031
0: No
[spacer]
038 032
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Paralle l tr ip EX T
037 019
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Paralle l tr ip A E XT
036 052
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Paralle l tr ip B E XT
036 053
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Paralle l tr ip C E XT
036 054
0: No
[spacer]
002 066
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Transf e r t ri p. E X T
120 046
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Transf e r t ri p A EX T
120 047
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Transf e r t ri p B EX T
120 048
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Transf e r t ri p C E X T
120 049
0: No
[spacer]
041 078
0: No
[spacer]
041 023
0: No
[spacer]
041 022
0: No
[spacer]
036 047
0: No
8-46
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
037 070
0: No
[spacer]
003 096
0: Standard time
[spacer]
060 060
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Healthy
060 001
1: Yes
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is operational. By default this signal is linked to
LED: F ct.ass ig. H 1 gre e n.
[spacer]
009 109
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Blocked/fault y
1: Yes
[spacer]
MAIN: CB open B
0: No
[spacer]
010 223
MAIN: CB open A
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
038 046
MAIN: CB open 3p
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 028
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 071
[spacer]
[spacer]
004 060
[spacer]
[spacer]
004 065
031 033
MAIN: CB open C
0: No
031 034
8-47
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
031 036
[spacer]
[spacer]
031 035
[spacer]
MAIN: CB close d C
0: No
[spacer]
031 038
MAIN: CB close d B
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB close d A
0: No
[spacer]
031 042
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
MAIN: CB close d 3 p
0: No
[spacer]
Unit
040 139
035 071
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 073
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 072
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 071
036 022
036 251
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-48
036 006
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 005
036 008
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
037 253
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 252
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
038 103
MAIN: Se nd tr ans fe r tr ip
001 207
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Se nd tr ans fe r tr ip A
001 208
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Se nd tr ans fe r tr ip B
001 209
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Se nd tr ans fe r tr ip C
001 210
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
034 047
[spacer]
[spacer]
034 017
034 049
0: No
[spacer]
037 068
0: No
[spacer]
037 009
0: No
[spacer]
037 012
0: No
[spacer]
041 027
0: No
[spacer]
041 028
0: No
[spacer]
041 029
0: No
8-49
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
036 000
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: St arting A
036 001
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: St arting B
036 002
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: St arting C
036 003
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: St arting GF
036 004
0: No
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
006 011
0: No
[spacer]
006 012
0: No
[spacer]
006 013
0: No
[spacer]
004 129
0: No
[spacer]
060 000
0: No
[spacer]
061 000
0: No
Parameter
Default
Fault data
acquisition
FT_DA: Tr igger EX T
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
036 088
0: No
8-50
P437
Parameter
Default
Parameter subset
selection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
036 101
0: No
[spacer]
PSS: Activate PS 1 EX T
065 002
2: Not configured
[spacer]
PSS: Activate PS 2 EX T
065 003
2: Not configured
[spacer]
PSS: Activate PS 3 EX T
065 004
2: Not configured
[spacer]
PSS: Activate PS 4 EX T
065 005
2: Not configured
[spacer]
[spacer]
PSS: PS 3 active
0: No
[spacer]
036 096
PSS: PS 2 active
0: No
[spacer]
PSS: PS 1 active
1: Yes
[spacer]
036 095
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 094
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 061
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 102
036 092
PSS: PS 4 active
0: No
036 093
8-51
P437
Parameter
Default
Self-monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
SFMO N: C B faulty E X T
098 072
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 070
036 100
0: No
[spacer]
041 201
0: No
[spacer]
093 024
0: No
[spacer]
093 025
0: No
[spacer]
090 019
0: No
[spacer]
041 200
0: No
[spacer]
093 040
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: B at te ry failure
090 010
0: No
[spacer]
093 026
0: No
[spacer]
093 081
0: No
[spacer]
093 082
0: No
[spacer]
093 080
0: No
[spacer]
096 100
0: No
[spacer]
096 101
0: No
[spacer]
096 102
0: No
[spacer]
096 103
0: No
8-52
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
096 104
0: No
[spacer]
096 105
0: No
[spacer]
096 106
0: No
[spacer]
096 107
0: No
[spacer]
096 108
0: No
[spacer]
096 109
0: No
[spacer]
096 110
0: No
[spacer]
096 111
0: No
[spacer]
096 112
0: No
[spacer]
096 113
0: No
[spacer]
096 114
0: No
[spacer]
096 115
0: No
[spacer]
096 116
0: No
[spacer]
096 117
0: No
[spacer]
096 118
0: No
[spacer]
096 119
0: No
[spacer]
096 120
0: No
[spacer]
096 123
0: No
[spacer]
096 124
0: No
8-53
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
096 125
0: No
[spacer]
096 126
0: No
[spacer]
097 000
0: No
[spacer]
097 001
0: No
[spacer]
097 002
0: No
[spacer]
097 003
0: No
[spacer]
097 004
0: No
[spacer]
097 005
0: No
[spacer]
097 006
0: No
[spacer]
097 007
0: No
[spacer]
097 008
0: No
[spacer]
097 009
0: No
[spacer]
097 010
0: No
[spacer]
097 011
0: No
[spacer]
097 012
0: No
[spacer]
097 013
0: No
[spacer]
097 014
0: No
[spacer]
097 015
0: No
[spacer]
097 016
0: No
8-54
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
097 017
0: No
[spacer]
097 018
0: No
[spacer]
097 019
0: No
[spacer]
097 020
0: No
[spacer]
093 110
0: No
[spacer]
093 111
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 01
097 086
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 02
097 087
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 03
097 088
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 04
097 089
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 05
097 090
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 06
097 091
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 07
097 092
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 08
097 093
0: No
[spacer]
097 102
0: No
[spacer]
097 103
0: No
[spacer]
097 104
0: No
[spacer]
097 105
0: No
[spacer]
097 106
0: No
8-55
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
097 107
0: No
[spacer]
097 108
0: No
[spacer]
097 109
0: No
[spacer]
097 118
0: No
[spacer]
097 119
0: No
[spacer]
097 120
0: No
[spacer]
097 121
0: No
[spacer]
097 122
0: No
[spacer]
097 123
0: No
[spacer]
097 124
0: No
[spacer]
097 125
0: No
[spacer]
097 134
0: No
[spacer]
097 135
0: No
[spacer]
097 136
0: No
[spacer]
097 137
0: No
[spacer]
097 138
0: No
[spacer]
097 139
0: No
[spacer]
097 140
0: No
[spacer]
097 141
0: No
8-56
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
097 150
0: No
[spacer]
097 151
0: No
[spacer]
097 152
0: No
[spacer]
097 153
0: No
[spacer]
097 154
0: No
[spacer]
097 155
0: No
[spacer]
097 156
0: No
[spacer]
097 157
0: No
[spacer]
097 166
0: No
[spacer]
097 167
0: No
[spacer]
097 168
0: No
[spacer]
097 169
0: No
[spacer]
097 170
0: No
[spacer]
097 171
0: No
[spacer]
097 182
0: No
[spacer]
097 183
0: No
[spacer]
097 184
0: No
[spacer]
097 185
0: No
[spacer]
097 186
0: No
8-57
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
097 187
0: No
[spacer]
097 188
0: No
[spacer]
097 189
0: No
[spacer]
093 010
0: No
[spacer]
093 030
0: No
[spacer]
093 031
0: No
[spacer]
093 032
0: No
[spacer]
093 033
0: No
[spacer]
093 034
0: No
[spacer]
093 011
0: No
[spacer]
093 012
0: No
[spacer]
093 013
0: No
[spacer]
090 021
0: No
[spacer]
090 003
0: No
[spacer]
093 041
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
090 012
0: No
[spacer]
093 112
0: No
[spacer]
096 121
0: No
8-58
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
093 145
0: No
[spacer]
093 075
0: No
[spacer]
093 079
0: No
[spacer]
093 113
0: No
[spacer]
093 118
0: No
[spacer]
093 124
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
093 114
093 115
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 035
[spacer]
[spacer]
093 116
098 028
098 020
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 132
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 000
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 018
098 014
098 009
8-59
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
098 022
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 021
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
SFMO N: F F, V trigge r ed
0: No
[spacer]
Unit
098 017
098 254
0: No
[spacer]
098 255
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 005
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 004
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 003
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 002
098 013
0: No
[spacer]
093 146
0: No
[spacer]
093 143
0: No
[spacer]
093 149
0: No
[spacer]
093 142
0: No
[spacer]
093 148
0: No
8-60
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
093 141
0: No
[spacer]
093 147
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 019
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 006
098 027
0: No
[spacer]
098 066
0: No
[spacer]
098 067
0: No
[spacer]
098 068
0: No
[spacer]
098 069
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B tm ax> A
098 070
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B tm ax> B
098 071
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B tm ax> C
098 077
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: I nv.inp.f.cloc k sy nc
093 120
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 30
098 053
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 30 ( t)
098 054
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 31
098 055
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 31 ( t)
098 056
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 32
098 057
0: No
8-61
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
SFMO N: O utput 32 ( t)
098 058
0: No
[spacer]
098 024
0: No
[spacer]
098 025
0: No
[spacer]
098 026
0: No
[spacer]
SFMO N: C T A error
098 034
0: No
Parameter
Default
Operating data
recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
005 213
0: No
Parameter
Default
Monitoring signal
recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
005 240
0: No
Parameter
Default
Overload recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
005 241
0: No
[spacer]
035 003
0: No
[spacer]
035 007
0: No
Parameter
Default
Ground fault
recording
Address
Min
GF_R C: Re se t recor d. E X T
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
005 242
0: No
8-62
P437
Parameter
Default
Fault recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
005 243
0: No
[spacer]
FT_RC: Trigg er E X T
036 089
0: No
[spacer]
FT_RC: Trigg er
0: No
[spacer]
037 076
040 063
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 000
[spacer]
[spacer]
002 002
035 001
0: No
8-63
P437
Parameter
Default
Distance protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
036 034
0: No
[spacer]
036 036
0: No
[spacer]
036 037
0: No
[spacer]
038 025
0: No
[spacer]
036 039
0: No
[spacer]
036 041
0: No
[spacer]
036 044
0: No
[spacer]
036 061
0: No
[spacer]
036 067
0: No
[spacer]
036 068
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: Enabled
0: No
[spacer]
040 065
8-64
[spacer]
040 064
[spacer]
[spacer]
011 139
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 240
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 104
040 096
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
040 052
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 072
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 071
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 070
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 241
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
036 018
038 010
0: No
[spacer]
038 012
0: No
[spacer]
038 014
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 019
0: No
[spacer]
038 013
0: No
[spacer]
038 015
0: No
[spacer]
038 045
0: No
[spacer]
038 105
0: No
8-65
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
038 108
0: No
[spacer]
038 047
0: No
[spacer]
038 106
0: No
[spacer]
038 109
0: No
[spacer]
038 044
0: No
[spacer]
038 104
0: No
[spacer]
038 107
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 034
036 065
[spacer]
036 046
0: No
[spacer]
036 103
[spacer]
[spacer]
039 029
038 022
[spacer]
[spacer]
039 028
0: No
[spacer]
002 067
0: No
[spacer]
001 095
0: No
[spacer]
001 096
0: No
8-66
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
001 097
0: No
[spacer]
001 098
0: No
[spacer]
001 099
0: No
[spacer]
001 100
0: No
[spacer]
001 101
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: t1 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
036 031
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 030
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 029
DIST: t8 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: t7 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
036 028
DIST: t6 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: t5 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
036 027
DIST: t4 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
DIST: t3 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
035 079
DIST: t2 elaps e d
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 026
035 073
041 084
8-67
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
040 059
8-68
[spacer]
040 058
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 057
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 056
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
037 210
P437
Parameter
Default
Power swing
blocking
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PSB: B locking E XT
008 248
0: No
[spacer]
PSB: B locked
011 144
0: No
[spacer]
036 069
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 095
036 024
0: No
[spacer]
036 025
0: No
[spacer]
006 035
0: No
[spacer]
006 192
0: No
[spacer]
006 030
0: No
[spacer]
036 012
0: No
[spacer]
036 011
0: No
[spacer]
036 010
0: No
8-69
P437
Parameter
Default
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
002 182
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
038 049
[spacer]
[spacer]
038 038
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 087
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 094
038 023
007 213
0: No
[spacer]
007 214
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 080
8-70
[spacer]
037 020
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 078
038 048
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
BUOC: Tr ip s ignal
0: No
[spacer]
037 021
BUOC: St arting
0: No
[spacer]
BUOC: Active
0: No
[spacer]
040 093
036 014
010 185
8-71
P437
Parameter
Default
Switch on to fault
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
002 127
0: No
[spacer]
039 063
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 069
006 147
0: No
[spacer]
SOT F : Active
0: No
[spacer]
8-72
006 128
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 076
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 063
SOT F : Z1 extended
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
006 146
036 064
P437
Parameter
Default
Protective signaling
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PSIG: Enab le EX T
037 025
2: Not configured
[spacer]
037 026
2: Not configured
[spacer]
PSIG: Blocking E X T
036 049
0: No
[spacer]
036 038
0: No
[spacer]
038 085
0: No
[spacer]
038 086
0: No
[spacer]
038 087
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
004 064
008 094
0: No
[spacer]
043 062
0: No
[spacer]
038 080
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Re ceive ( A) E XT
036 048
0: No
[spacer]
PSIG: Re ceive ( B ) EX T
006 037
0: No
[spacer]
038 091
0: No
[spacer]
038 092
0: No
[spacer]
038 093
0: No
[spacer]
008 241
0: No
[spacer]
008 242
0: No
8-73
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
008 243
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
015 008
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 023
[spacer]
PSIG: Re ady
0: No
[spacer]
008 246
PSIG: Enab le d
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
008 245
[spacer]
[spacer]
008 244
012 245
037 255
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
034 026
[spacer]
[spacer]
034 016
034 028
PSIG: Se nd
0: No
012 243
8-74
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
PSIG: Se nd (s ignal)
0: No
036 035
[spacer]
PSIG: Channe l 1 se nd
0: No
038 081
[spacer]
PSIG: Channe l 2 se nd
0: No
038 082
[spacer]
PSIG: Channe l 3 se nd
0: No
038 083
[spacer]
PSIG: Re ceive
0: No
[spacer]
006 036
037 029
[spacer]
PSIG: Z1 ex te nde d
0: No
[spacer]
043 064
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 075
006 152
006 153
8-75
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
006 154
038 007
8-76
P437
Parameter
Default
Auto-reclosing
control
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
005 244
0: No
[spacer]
037 010
2: Not configured
[spacer]
037 011
2: Not configured
[spacer]
ARC: T est HS R A E XT
037 014
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: T est HS R B E XT
037 015
0: No
[spacer]
037 016
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: T est HS R A- B- C E X T
037 017
0: No
[spacer]
037 096
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: Blocking E XT
036 050
0: No
[spacer]
004 066
0: No
[spacer]
000 108
0: No
[spacer]
000 109
0: No
[spacer]
000 110
0: No
[spacer]
038 003
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: 3p trans fe r t r ip E X T
038 043
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
ARC: Enable d
0: No
[spacer]
037 013
015 064
ARC: T est HS R A
0: No
034 020
8-77
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
ARC: Blocke d
0: No
[spacer]
034 021
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
ARC: T est HS R C
0: No
[spacer]
Unit
ARC: T est HS R B
0: No
[spacer]
Max
004 069
037 078
0: No
[spacer]
ARC: R eady
0: No
[spacer]
8-78
037 065
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 005
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 000
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 004
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 055
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 008
[spacer]
[spacer]
004 068
036 042
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Max
037 077
037 007
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 062
[spacer]
[spacer]
037 006
039 086
ARC: 3p final tr ip
0: No
036 043
8-79
P437
Parameter
Default
Automatic
synchronism check
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
ASC: R es et counter s E XT
006 074
0: No
[spacer]
037 049
2: Not configured
[spacer]
037 061
2: Not configured
[spacer]
037 048
0: No
[spacer]
ASC: Te s t AR clos e r . E XT
000 106
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a test triggering of the ASC in operating
mode automatic reclosure.
[spacer]
037 064
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a test triggering of the ASC in operating
mode manual reclosure.
[spacer]
037 063
1: Yes
[spacer]
037 062
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode
manual reclosure.
[spacer]
008 236
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode
automatic reclosure.
[spacer]
[spacer]
038 018
8-80
ASC: R eady
0: No
[spacer]
018 024
ASC: Blocked
0: No
[spacer]
ASC: Enab le d
0: No
[spacer]
037 092
037 082
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
008 240
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a test triggering of the ASC in operating mode
automatic reclosure.
[spacer]
034 019
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a test triggering of the ASC in operating mode
manual reclosure.
[spacer]
008 239
[spacer]
[spacer]
034 018
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
038 019
037 093
037 083
[spacer]
037 085
[spacer]
037 084
[spacer]
037 086
8-81
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
039 095
2: Not configured
[spacer]
039 096
2: Not configured
[spacer]
043 068
0: No
[spacer]
GFS C: Ex t. enabled
1: Yes
[spacer]
039 089
8-82
GFS C: t3 elaps ed
0: No
[spacer]
043 061
GFS C: t2 elaps ed
0: No
[spacer]
GFS C: t1 elaps ed
0: No
[spacer]
039 088
[spacer]
[spacer]
038 095
GFS C: St arting
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
039 094
[spacer]
[spacer]
039 093
[spacer]
[spacer]
038 094
GFS C: Re ady
0: No
[spacer]
GFS C: Enable d
0: No
[spacer]
039 097
039 092
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GSCSG: Enable E XT
043 050
2: Not configured
[spacer]
043 051
2: Not configured
[spacer]
GSCSG: Blocking E X T
043 052
0: No
[spacer]
043 053
0: No
[spacer]
GSCSG: Frequ.mon.trigd. E X T
043 054
0: No
[spacer]
043 055
0: No
[spacer]
043 056
0: No
[spacer]
GSCSG: Enable d
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
043 057
[spacer]
[spacer]
043 066
GSCSG: R eady
0: No
[spacer]
GSCSG: Ex t. enabled
1: Yes
[spacer]
023 070
046 060
043 059
[spacer]
043 060
[spacer]
043 063
8-83
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
037 254
0: No
8-84
P437
Parameter
Default
Definite-time over
current protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
002 176
0: No
[spacer]
002 177
0: No
[spacer]
002 178
0: No
[spacer]
002 179
0: No
[spacer]
041 060
0: No
[spacer]
041 061
0: No
[spacer]
041 062
0: No
[spacer]
041 100
0: No
[spacer]
041 102
0: No
[spacer]
041 103
0: No
[spacer]
041 104
0: No
[spacer]
041 105
0: No
[spacer]
041 063
0: No
[spacer]
041 064
0: No
[spacer]
041 065
0: No
[spacer]
041 101
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC: Enabled
0: No
[spacer]
040 120
035 020
8-85
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
040 011
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 010
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 023
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 022
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 021
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
035 027
035 033
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-86
035 036
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 035
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 034
035 030
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
[spacer]
035 031
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
035 048
035 037
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 039
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 038
035 040
035 043
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 046
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 045
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 044
040 099
039 073
8-87
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
040 101
0: No
[spacer]
040 102
0: No
[spacer]
040 103
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT: E nabled
0: No
[spacer]
040 109
8-88
[spacer]
040 107
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 110
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 053
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 082
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 080
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 100
040 112
P437
Parameter
Default
Thermal overload
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
041 074
0: No
[spacer]
THER M : R e s et re pli ca E XT
038 061
0: No
[spacer]
038 062
0: No
[spacer]
THER M : Enable d
0: No
[spacer]
040 068
040 035
1: Yes
[spacer]
THER M : R e s et re pli ca
0: No
[spacer]
039 025
THER M : Tr ip s ignal
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 108
THER M : Warning
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
039 061
039 020
039 024
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
039 112
039 111
039 110
8-89
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
041 068
0: No
[spacer]
041 069
0: No
[spacer]
010 246
0: No
[spacer]
041 070
0: No
[spacer]
041 071
0: No
[spacer]
010 247
0: No
[spacer]
041 090
0: No
[spacer]
041 091
0: No
[spacer]
041 092
0: No
[spacer]
041 093
0: No
[spacer]
041 094
0: No
[spacer]
041 095
0: No
[spacer]
041 072
0: No
[spacer]
041 073
0: No
[spacer]
007 036
0: No
[spacer]
007 037
0: No
[spacer]
010 248
0: No
[spacer]
007 039
0: No
8-90
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
007 046
0: No
[spacer]
010 249
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Enable d
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 031
[spacer]
[spacer]
042 004
[spacer]
[spacer]
042 003
[spacer]
V<>: Ready
0: No
[spacer]
040 066
041 096
010 231
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 097
010 226
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 034
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 232
010 233
041 098
8-91
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
010 227
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 235
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 099
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 037
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 040
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 039
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 038
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 234
010 237
042 023
[spacer]
042 025
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-92
010 238
042 007
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
042 006
010 229
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 239
042 024
[spacer]
010 230
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
011 132
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 111
[spacer]
[spacer]
011 134
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 112
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 110
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 240
042 014
042 015
8-93
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
042 020
8-94
[spacer]
042 019
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 114
[spacer]
[spacer]
041 113
[spacer]
[spacer]
042 018
[spacer]
[spacer]
042 027
[spacer]
[spacer]
042 017
[spacer]
[spacer]
042 026
[spacer]
[spacer]
042 016
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
007 047
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
007 055
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 242
[spacer]
[spacer]
007 048
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
007 054
010 244
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
010 245
[spacer]
[spacer]
007 060
[spacer]
[spacer]
007 057
007 062
011 135
8-95
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
006 075
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : Blocking f1 E XT
042 103
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : Blocking f2 E XT
042 104
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : Blocking f3 E XT
042 105
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : Blocking f4 E XT
042 106
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : Enable d
0: No
[spacer]
042 107
[spacer]
[spacer]
042 102
[spacer]
[spacer]
042 140
f<> : S tarting f1
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
042 101
[spacer]
f<> : R ead y
0: No
[spacer]
042 100
f<> : S tarting f2
042 111
0: No
[spacer]
042 116
0: No
[spacer]
042 117
0: No
[spacer]
042 118
0: No
8-96
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 119
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : S tarting f3
042 123
0: No
[spacer]
042 124
0: No
[spacer]
042 125
0: No
[spacer]
042 126
0: No
[spacer]
042 127
0: No
[spacer]
f<> : S tarting f4
042 131
0: No
[spacer]
042 132
0: No
[spacer]
042 133
0: No
[spacer]
042 134
0: No
[spacer]
042 135
0: No
8-97
P437
Parameter
Default
Power directional
protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
035 082
0: No
[spacer]
035 083
0: No
[spacer]
035 084
0: No
[spacer]
035 085
0: No
[spacer]
035 050
0: No
[spacer]
035 051
0: No
[spacer]
035 052
0: No
[spacer]
035 053
0: No
[spacer]
P<>: Enabled
0: No
[spacer]
8-98
035 090
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 087
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 089
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 086
[spacer]
[spacer]
036 250
035 093
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
[spacer]
035 056
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 061
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 055
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 060
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 054
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 097
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 094
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 096
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
035 010
035 067
8-99
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
8-100
035 049
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 069
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 179
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 016
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 068
[spacer]
[spacer]
035 011
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
035 194
P437
Parameter
Default
Circuit breaker
failure protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
038 041
2: Not configured
[spacer]
038 042
2: Not configured
[spacer]
038 058
0: No
[spacer]
038 209
1: Yes
[spacer]
038 205
0: No
[spacer]
038 016
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: C B f aulty EX T
038 234
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
CBF: Enabled
0: No
[spacer]
038 040
040 055
CBF: R eady
038 009
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 025
038 206
0: No
[spacer]
038 207
0: No
[spacer]
038 208
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
038 230
[spacer]
[spacer]
038 210
038 231
038 232
8-101
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Max
038 233
038 235
[spacer]
Signal that the residual current is greater than the set value CBF: IN<.
[spacer]
CBF: S tartup 3p
038 211
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: S tartup A
0: No
[spacer]
038 212
CBF: S tartup B
038 213
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: S tartup C
038 214
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: T r ip s ignal t1
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: S tarting
0: No
8-102
038 220
CBF: C B f ailure
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
038 219
[spacer]
[spacer]
038 218
[spacer]
[spacer]
038 217
CBF: T r ip s ignal t2
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: T r ip s ignal t1 , C
0: No
[spacer]
038 216
CBF: T r ip s ignal t1 , B
0: No
[spacer]
CBF: T r ip s ignal t1 , A
0: No
[spacer]
038 215
038 021
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
[spacer]
038 225
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 026
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
CBF: T r ip s ignal
0: No
[spacer]
Unit
038 228
038 229
8-103
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
005 247
0: No
[spacer]
044 128
0: No
[spacer]
CBM: Enabled
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
044 199
[spacer]
CBM: Blocked
0: No
[spacer]
044 130
044 136
0: No
[spacer]
044 138
0: No
[spacer]
044 139
0: No
[spacer]
044 205
0: No
[spacer]
044 206
0: No
[spacer]
044 207
0: No
[spacer]
044 177
0: No
[spacer]
044 178
0: No
[spacer]
044 179
0: No
[spacer]
044 201
0: No
[spacer]
044 202
0: No
[spacer]
044 203
0: No
8-104
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
CBM: S e tting e rr or C BM
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
044 204
0: No
8-105
P437
Parameter
Default
Limit value
monitoring
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LIMIT : Enabled
0: No
040 074
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 228
8-106
[spacer]
040 227
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 226
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 225
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 224
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 223
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 222
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 221
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 220
042 154
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
040 186
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 185
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 184
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 183
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 182
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 181
[spacer]
[spacer]
040 180
[spacer]
[spacer]
042 155
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
[spacer]
Max
040 177
0: Not triggered
[spacer]
221 233
0: Not triggered
8-107
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
221 234
0: Not triggered
[spacer]
221 235
0: Not triggered
[spacer]
221 237
0: Not triggered
8-108
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
034 000
0: No
[spacer]
034 001
0: No
[spacer]
034 002
0: No
[spacer]
034 003
0: No
[spacer]
034 004
0: No
[spacer]
034 005
0: No
[spacer]
034 006
0: No
[spacer]
034 007
0: No
[spacer]
034 008
0: No
[spacer]
034 009
0: No
[spacer]
034 010
0: No
[spacer]
034 011
0: No
[spacer]
034 012
0: No
[spacer]
034 013
0: No
[spacer]
034 014
0: No
[spacer]
034 015
0: No
[spacer]
034 086
0: No
[spacer]
034 087
0: No
[spacer]
034 088
0: No
8-109
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
034 089
0: No
[spacer]
034 090
0: No
[spacer]
034 091
0: No
[spacer]
034 092
0: No
[spacer]
034 093
0: No
[spacer]
034 094
0: No
[spacer]
034 095
0: No
[spacer]
034 096
0: No
[spacer]
034 097
0: No
[spacer]
034 098
0: No
[spacer]
034 099
0: No
[spacer]
034 100
0: No
[spacer]
034 101
0: No
[spacer]
034 102
0: No
[spacer]
034 103
0: No
[spacer]
034 104
0: No
[spacer]
034 105
0: No
[spacer]
034 106
0: No
[spacer]
034 107
0: No
8-110
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
034 108
0: No
[spacer]
034 109
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 1 EXT
034 051
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 2 EXT
034 052
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 3 EXT
034 053
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 4 EXT
034 054
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 5 EXT
034 055
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 6 EXT
034 056
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 7 EXT
034 057
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Se t 8 EXT
034 058
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Re s e t 1 E XT
034 059
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Re s e t 2 E XT
034 060
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Re s e t 3 E XT
034 061
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Re s e t 4 E XT
034 062
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Re s e t 5 E XT
034 063
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Re s e t 6 E XT
034 064
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Re s e t 7 E XT
034 065
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Re s e t 8 E XT
034 066
2: Not configured
[spacer]
034 067
8-111
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
034 068
0: No
[spacer]
034 069
0: No
[spacer]
034 070
0: No
[spacer]
034 071
0: No
[spacer]
034 072
0: No
[spacer]
034 073
0: No
[spacer]
034 074
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: 1 se t e xternally
0: No
[spacer]
034 075
LOGIC: 2 se t e xternally
034 076
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: 3 se t e xternally
034 077
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: 4 se t e xternally
034 078
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: 5 se t e xternally
034 079
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: 6 se t e xternally
034 080
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: 7 se t e xternally
034 081
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: 8 se t e xternally
034 082
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Enabled
0: No
[spacer]
042 032
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 01
0: No
[spacer]
034 046
LOGIC: Output 02
042 033
0: No
8-112
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 035
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 3
042 036
0: No
[spacer]
042 037
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 4
042 038
0: No
[spacer]
042 039
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 5
042 040
0: No
[spacer]
042 041
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 6
042 042
0: No
[spacer]
042 043
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 7
042 044
0: No
[spacer]
042 045
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 8
042 046
0: No
[spacer]
042 047
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 0 9
042 048
0: No
[spacer]
042 049
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 1 0
042 050
0: No
[spacer]
042 051
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 1 1
042 052
0: No
[spacer]
042 053
0: No
8-113
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 12
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 054
0: No
[spacer]
042 055
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 13
042 056
0: No
[spacer]
042 057
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 14
042 058
0: No
[spacer]
042 059
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 15
042 060
0: No
[spacer]
042 061
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 16
042 062
0: No
[spacer]
042 063
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 17
042 064
0: No
[spacer]
042 065
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 18
042 066
0: No
[spacer]
042 067
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 19
042 068
0: No
[spacer]
042 069
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 20
042 070
0: No
[spacer]
042 071
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 21
042 072
0: No
8-114
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 073
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 2
042 074
0: No
[spacer]
042 075
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 3
042 076
0: No
[spacer]
042 077
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 4
042 078
0: No
[spacer]
042 079
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 5
042 080
0: No
[spacer]
042 081
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 6
042 082
0: No
[spacer]
042 083
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 7
042 084
0: No
[spacer]
042 085
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 8
042 086
0: No
[spacer]
042 087
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 9
042 088
0: No
[spacer]
042 089
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 3 0
042 090
0: No
[spacer]
042 091
0: No
8-115
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 31
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 092
0: No
[spacer]
042 093
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 32
042 094
0: No
[spacer]
042 095
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 33
042 180
0: No
[spacer]
042 181
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 34
042 182
0: No
[spacer]
042 183
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 35
042 184
0: No
[spacer]
042 185
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 36
042 186
0: No
[spacer]
042 187
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 37
042 188
0: No
[spacer]
042 189
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 38
042 190
0: No
[spacer]
042 191
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 39
042 192
0: No
[spacer]
042 193
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 40
042 194
0: No
8-116
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 195
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 1
042 196
0: No
[spacer]
042 197
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 2
042 198
0: No
[spacer]
042 199
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 3
042 200
0: No
[spacer]
042 201
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 4
042 202
0: No
[spacer]
042 203
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 5
042 204
0: No
[spacer]
042 205
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 6
042 206
0: No
[spacer]
042 207
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 7
042 208
0: No
[spacer]
042 209
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 8
042 210
0: No
[spacer]
042 211
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 9
042 212
0: No
[spacer]
042 213
0: No
8-117
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 50
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 214
0: No
[spacer]
042 215
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 51
042 216
0: No
[spacer]
042 217
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 52
042 218
0: No
[spacer]
042 219
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 53
042 220
0: No
[spacer]
042 221
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 54
042 222
0: No
[spacer]
042 223
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 55
042 224
0: No
[spacer]
042 225
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 56
042 226
0: No
[spacer]
042 227
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 57
042 228
0: No
[spacer]
042 229
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 58
042 230
0: No
[spacer]
042 231
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 59
042 232
0: No
8-118
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
042 233
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 0
042 234
0: No
[spacer]
042 235
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 1
042 236
0: No
[spacer]
042 237
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 2
042 238
0: No
[spacer]
042 239
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 3
042 240
0: No
[spacer]
042 241
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 4
042 242
0: No
[spacer]
042 243
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 5
047 128
0: No
[spacer]
047 129
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 6
047 002
0: No
[spacer]
047 003
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 7
047 004
0: No
[spacer]
047 005
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 8
047 006
0: No
[spacer]
047 007
0: No
8-119
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 69
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
047 008
0: No
[spacer]
047 009
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 70
047 010
0: No
[spacer]
047 011
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 71
047 012
0: No
[spacer]
047 013
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 72
047 014
0: No
[spacer]
047 015
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 73
047 016
0: No
[spacer]
047 017
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 74
047 018
0: No
[spacer]
047 019
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 75
047 020
0: No
[spacer]
047 021
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 76
047 022
0: No
[spacer]
047 023
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 77
047 024
0: No
[spacer]
047 025
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 78
047 026
0: No
8-120
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
047 027
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 7 9
047 028
0: No
[spacer]
047 029
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 0
047 030
0: No
[spacer]
047 031
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 1
047 032
0: No
[spacer]
047 033
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 2
047 034
0: No
[spacer]
047 035
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 3
047 036
0: No
[spacer]
047 037
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 4
047 038
0: No
[spacer]
047 039
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 5
047 040
0: No
[spacer]
047 041
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 6
047 042
0: No
[spacer]
047 043
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 7
047 044
0: No
[spacer]
047 045
0: No
8-121
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 88
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
047 046
0: No
[spacer]
047 047
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 89
047 048
0: No
[spacer]
047 049
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 90
047 050
0: No
[spacer]
047 051
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 91
047 052
0: No
[spacer]
047 053
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 92
047 054
0: No
[spacer]
047 055
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 93
047 056
0: No
[spacer]
047 057
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 94
047 058
0: No
[spacer]
047 059
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 95
047 060
0: No
[spacer]
047 061
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 96
047 062
0: No
[spacer]
047 063
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 97
047 064
0: No
8-122
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
047 065
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 9 8
047 066
0: No
[spacer]
047 067
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 9 9
047 068
0: No
[spacer]
047 069
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 0
047 070
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 0 ( t )
047 071
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 1
047 072
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 1 ( t )
047 073
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 2
047 074
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 2 ( t )
047 075
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 3
047 076
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 3 ( t )
047 077
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 4
047 078
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 4 ( t )
047 079
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 5
047 080
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 5 ( t )
047 081
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 6
047 082
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output10 6 ( t )
047 083
0: No
8-123
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
LOGIC: Output107
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
047 084
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output107 ( t )
047 085
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output108
047 086
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output108 ( t )
047 087
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output109
047 088
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output109 ( t )
047 089
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output110
047 090
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output110 ( t )
047 091
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output111
047 092
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output111 ( t )
047 093
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output112
047 094
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output112 ( t )
047 095
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output113
047 096
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output113 ( t )
047 097
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output114
047 098
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output114 ( t )
047 099
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output115
047 100
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output115 ( t )
047 101
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output116
047 102
0: No
8-124
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
LOGIC: Output11 6 ( t )
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
047 103
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output11 7
047 104
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output11 7 ( t )
047 105
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output11 8
047 106
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output11 8 ( t )
047 107
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output11 9
047 108
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output11 9 ( t )
047 109
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 0
047 110
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 0 ( t )
047 111
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 1
047 112
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 1 ( t )
047 113
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 2
047 114
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 2 ( t )
047 115
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 3
047 116
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 3 ( t )
047 117
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 4
047 118
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 4 ( t )
047 119
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 5
047 120
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output12 5 ( t )
047 121
0: No
8-125
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
LOGIC: Output126
047 122
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output126 ( t )
047 123
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output127
047 124
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output127 ( t )
047 125
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output128
047 126
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output128 ( t )
047 127
0: No
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
052 032
[spacer]
[spacer]
011 138
052 033
0: No
[spacer]
052 035
0: No
[spacer]
052 036
0: No
[spacer]
052 037
0: No
[spacer]
052 038
0: No
[spacer]
052 039
0: No
8-126
P437
Parameter
Default
Binary counts
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
COUNT : Se t counte r 1 E X T
217 130
0: No
[spacer]
COUNT : Se t counte r 2 E X T
217 085
0: No
[spacer]
COUNT : Se t counte r 3 E X T
217 086
0: No
[spacer]
COUNT : Se t counte r 4 E X T
217 087
0: No
[spacer]
217 009
0: No
[spacer]
COUNT : Re s e t EX T
217 004
0: No
[spacer]
217 001
0: No
[spacer]
217 010
0: No
[spacer]
COUNT : Re s e t
217 005
0: No
[spacer]
217 191
0: No
[spacer]
217 192
0: No
[spacer]
217 193
0: No
[spacer]
217 194
0: No
[spacer]
8.1.2
Warning that the counter value has exceeded the set limit value.
Device
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
031 080
0: No
8-127
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 010
0: No
[spacer]
Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
Parameter
Default
Logical
communication
interface 1
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 180
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 184
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 186
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Logical
communication
interface 2
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
103 180
103 184
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-128
103 186
P437
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
120 037
0: don't execute
[spacer]
122 037
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
120 050
0: None
[spacer]
120 051
1: 1
[spacer]
COMM 3: Se nd s ignal , te st
120 053
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
120 055
255
122 055
255
[spacer]
[spacer]
120 054
0: don't execute
[spacer]
122 054
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
600
[spacer]
120 052
122 052
600
Selecting the hold time (in seconds) for the functional testing.
8-129
P437
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
122 050
0: None
[spacer]
122 051
1: 1
[spacer]
COMM 4: Se nd s ignal , te st
122 053
0: don't execute
8-130
P437
Parameter
Default
IEC Generic
Substation Status
Events
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 171
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
105 160
65535
[spacer]
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE sending
device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1 to 16).
[spacer]
105 161
65535
[spacer]
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE sending
device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 17 to 32).
[spacer]
105 162
65535
[spacer]
[spacer]
105 163
65535
[spacer]
[spacer]
105 164
65535
[spacer]
[spacer]
105 165
65535
[spacer]
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent with
each GSSE.
[spacer]
105 166
65535
[spacer]
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each
GSSE.
[spacer]
[spacer]
105 167
65535
8-131
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
105 170
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is to
be displayed.
[spacer]
65535
[spacer]
[spacer]
105 172
105 173
65535
[spacer]
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received with
each GSSE.
[spacer]
105 174
65535
[spacer]
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with each
GSSE.
[spacer]
105 175
65535
[spacer]
[spacer]
105 176
65535
[spacer]
[spacer]
GSS E: IE D t ime-out s
Not measured
[spacer]
8-132
105 177
65535
Number of GSSE received after the validity time period has elapsed.
This counter is reset by GS SE : Res e t st atisti cs.
P437
Parameter
Default
IEC 61850
Communication
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
104 245
104 246
0: don't execute
[spacer]
104 247
0: don't execute
[spacer]
IEC: Se l. pos . d ev .t es t
104 248
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
104 249
0: don't execute
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 045
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
OUTP: Re s e t latch. US ER
021 009
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 042
[spacer]
[spacer]
OUTP: Re lay te st
003 043
0: don't execute
[spacer]
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the duration set at OUTP: H ol d time f or tes t.
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 044
10
Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for
functional testing.
8-133
P437
Parameter
Default
Measured data
output
Address
Min
Max
Unit
[spacer]
8-134
Logic Diagram
037 116
P437
Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 002
All counters
LED indicators
Event counters
Fault data
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Unit
021 010
LED indicators
Fault data
021 005
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 007
[spacer]
The counters for counting the close and trip commands are reset.
[spacer]
003 033
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 032
[spacer]
The display of active and reactive energy output and input is reset.
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
005 253
005 254
8-135
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 040
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 105
0: No
[spacer]
Setting the enable for the issue of a close command from the local control panel
(enables manual breaker close operations).
[spacer]
003 017
0: don't execute
[spacer]
003 018
0: don't execute
[spacer]
003 019
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A phase-selective trip command is issued from the local control panel for
100 ms.
[spacer]
018 033
[spacer]
A close command is issued from the local control panel for the set reclose
command time.
[spacer]
003 039
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart of the software is carried out. The device functions as it does
when the power supply is turned on, except that no hardware tests are carried
out.
[spacer]
010 166
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power
supply is turned on.
[spacer]
000 085
0: don't execute
[spacer]
8-136
A cold restart of the software is carried out. This means that all settings and
recordings are cleared, but no tests of the hardware are carried out during the
restart. Parameter values used by the P437 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P437 is blocked after a cold restart.
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
009 254
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A cold restart is carried out. A cold restart means that all settings and recordings
are cleared. Parameter values used by the P437 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P437 is blocked after a cold restart.
Parameter
Default
Operating data
recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
100 001
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Parameter
Default
Monitoring signal
recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
003 008
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Overload recording
Address
Min
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Max
100 003
8-137
P437
Parameter
Default
Fault recording
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
FT_RC: Trigg er US E R
003 041
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
[spacer]
003 006
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LED indicators
Fault memory
Fault counter
Fault data
Parameter
Default
Power swing
blocking
PSB: R e se t counters
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
006 029
0: don't execute
[spacer]
8-138
Reset of the counters that are used for the enhanced counting-based tripping.
P437
Parameter
Default
Protective signaling
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 132
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 131
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
015 027
[spacer]
[spacer]
015 009
015 029
8-139
P437
Parameter
Default
Auto-reclosing
control
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
ARC: Enable US ER
0: don't execute
003 134
[spacer]
The auto-reclosing control function is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
003 133
[spacer]
The auto-reclosing control function is disabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
011 063
011 064
011 065
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-140
011 066
003 005
P437
Parameter
Default
Automatic
synchronism check
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 136
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 135
[spacer]
[spacer]
008 238
[spacer]
A close request is issued with Automatic Reclose parameters. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive.
[spacer]
018 004
[spacer]
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive.
[spacer]
008 237
[spacer]
A close request is issued with Automatic Reclose parameters. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
[spacer]
ASC: Te s t M C clos e r US ER
0: don't execute
018 005
[spacer]
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 089
8-141
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 138
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
003 137
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is disabled from the local control panel.
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
GSCSG: Enable US ER
003 140
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is enabled from the local control
panel.
[spacer]
003 139
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is disabled from the local control
panel.
[spacer]
023 086
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Thermal overload
protection
8-142
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
022 061
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
f<> : R es e t me as.val. US E R
Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
003 080
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Circuit breaker
failure protection
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
CBF: Enable US ER
0: don't execute
003 016
[spacer]
Circuit breaker failure protection is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 015
Circuit breaker failure protection is disabled from the local control panel.
8-143
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
003 011
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
022 150
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
003 013
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
CBM: S e t Itrip A
Blocked
65000
65000
022 136
65000
022 137
65000
Inom,CB
65000
Inom,CB
022 139
65000
Inom,CB
022 140
65000
CBM: S e t Itrip** 2 B
Blocked
8-144
022 134
CBM: S e t Itrip** 2 A
Blocked
[spacer]
65000
CBM: S e t Itrip C
Blocked
[spacer]
022 133
CBM: S e t Itrip B
Blocked
[spacer]
65000
[spacer]
022 132
[spacer]
[spacer]
65000
[spacer]
022 131
022 141
65000
Inom,CB**
2
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
022 142
65000
Inom,CB**
2
022 143
0.0
4000.0
kAs
0.0
4000.0
kAs
CBM: S e t I*t C
Blocked
[spacer]
Unit
CBM: S e t I*t B
Blocked
[spacer]
Max
CBM: S e t I*t A
Blocked
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
022 145
0.0
4000.0
kAs
Set the limit values for the ruptured currents and their squares. (An alarm is
displayed if these limit values are exceeded.)
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
034 038
LOGIC: Trigger 2
034 039
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 3
034 040
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 4
034 041
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 5
034 042
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 6
034 043
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 7
034 044
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 8
0: don't execute
[spacer]
034 045
8-145
P437
Parameter
Default
Binary counts
Address
Min
Max
Unit
217 008
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Count transmission.
[spacer]
COUNT : Re s e t USE R
217 003
0: don't execute
[spacer]
8.1.3
Logic Diagram
Count reset.
Operating data
recording
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
003 024
1000
Monitoring signal
recording
8-146
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
003 001
30
P437
8.2
Events
8.2.1
Event Counters
Parameter
Default
InterMiCOM
interface
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
120 042
65535
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
122 042
65535
8-147
P437
Parameter
Default
Main function
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
004 000
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
004 006
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
005 006
0: don't execute
[spacer]
005 007
0: don't execute
[spacer]
005 008
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
009 050
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
004 005
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
009 055
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
009 090
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
output was exceeded.
Note: The maximum value of this counter is 10000.
[spacer]
009 091
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy input
was exceeded.
Note: The maximum value of this counter is 10000.
8-148
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
009 092
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
output was exceeded.
Note: The maximum value of this counter is 10000.
[spacer]
009 093
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
input was exceeded.
Note: The maximum value of this counter is 10000.
Parameter
Default
Operating data
recording
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
100 002
1000
Monitoring signal
recording
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
004 019
30
Overload recording
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
004 101
9999
8-149
P437
Parameter
Default
Fault recording
Address
Min
Unit
004 020
[spacer]
Number of faults.
[spacer]
9999
004 010
9999
Power swing
blocking
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Max
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
006 025
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
006 026
0: don't execute
[spacer]
8-150
P437
Parameter
Default
Auto-reclosing
control
Address
Min
Max
Unit
004 001
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
004 002
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
004 003
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
004 004
0: don't execute
[spacer]
[spacer]
ARC: Num be r T DR
004 008
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
Automatic
synchronism check
Address
Min
Max
Unit
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
004 009
009 033
009 034
8-151
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
009 054
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
65000
[spacer]
008 011
008 012
65000
008 013
65000
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-152
65000
[spacer]
65000
[spacer]
008 014
008 016
65000
P437
8.2.2
Fault data
acquisition
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.0
[spacer]
[spacer]
008 010
6500.0
004 021
0.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
65.00
010 198
Display of the fault type. This value is determined from the starting signals of
the function group MAIN.
[spacer]
004 079
[spacer]
[spacer]
25000
010 199
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
100.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.0
2500.0
004 025
Inom
010 217
kV
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.000
004 026
3.000
Vnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
-180
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
004 024
180
004 049
100.00
Inom
8-153
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
010 216
25000
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
25000
012 242
0.00
100.00
004 059
Inom
[spacer]
Display of the ground fault current of the parallel line (as a primary quantity or
referred to IN,par,nom, respectively).
[spacer]
-180
[spacer]
[spacer]
-320.00
004 048
180
004 029
320.00
[spacer]
[spacer]
-320.00
320.00
004 028
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
320.00
004 023
[spacer]
[spacer]
-320.00
320.00
004 027
[spacer]
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %) referred to the setting at
FT_DA: Line reactance P S x.
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-154
-500.0
004 022
500.0
km
P437
Parameter
Default
Automatic
synchronism check
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
004 087
0.000
3.000
Vnom
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
0.000
004 088
3.000
Vnom
-3.000
004 091
3.000
Vnom
[spacer]
[spacer]
-180.0
004 089
180.0
[spacer]
[spacer]
-5.00
004 090
5.00
Hz
[spacer]
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
009 098
360
8-155
P437
Parameter
Default
Definite-time over
current protection
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
[spacer]
Address
009 004
360
Angle between the residual current and the neutral-point displacement voltage.
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
12.00
005 002
70.00
Hz
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
8-156
12.00
005 001
70.00
Hz
P437
Parameter
Default
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
65000
A
009 214
65000
A
009 047
0.00
100.00
Inom,CB
009 048
0.00
100.00
Inom,CB
009 049
0.00
100.00
Inom,CB
009 051
0.0
6000.0
0.0
6000.0
Inom,CB**
2
CBM: I tr ip** 2 C
Not measured
009 053
0.0
6000.0
Inom,CB**
2
[spacer]
[spacer]
CBM: Itr ip A
0
[spacer]
009 071
65000
Inom,CB
CBM: Itr ip B
0
[spacer]
CBM: I tr ip** 2 B
Not measured
[spacer]
CBM: I tr ip** 2 A
Not measured
[spacer]
009 213
CBM: I tr ip C
Not measured
[spacer]
CBM: I tr ip B
Not measured
[spacer]
CBM: I tr ip A
Not measured
[spacer]
65000
[spacer]
[spacer]
009 212
009 073
65000
Inom,CB
CBM: Itr ip C
0
009 076
65000
Inom,CB
[spacer]
Sum of the per-unit ruptured currents for each circuit breaker contact.
[spacer]
[spacer]
009 077
65000
009 078
65000
Inom,CB**
2
8-157
P437
Parameter
Default
[spacer]
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
009 079
65000
Inom,CB**
2
[spacer]
Sum of the squared per-unit ruptured currents for each circuit breaker contact.
[spacer]
CBM: I *t A
Not measured
[spacer]
60000
As
CBM: I *t B
Not measured
[spacer]
009 061
009 062
60000
As
CBM: I *t C
Not measured
009 063
60000
As
[spacer]
Current-time integral of the per-unit ruptured current for each circuit breaker
contact.
[spacer]
CBM: I* t A
0.0
[spacer]
8-158
4000.0
kAs
0.0
4000.0
kAs
CBM: I* t C
0.0
[spacer]
0.0
CBM: I* t B
0.0
[spacer]
009 087
009 089
0.0
4000.0
kAs
Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit ruptured currents for each
circuit breaker contact.
P437
Parameter
Default
Overload data
acquisition
Address
Min
Max
Unit
Logic Diagram
0.0
004 102
6500.0
[spacer]
[spacer]
250
004 147
[spacer]
[spacer]
0.00
3.00
004 058
Inom
[spacer]
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function to
calculate the tripping time.
[spacer]
-40
300
004 035
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
-40
215
004 036
Display of coolant temperature, dependent on the setting for THE RM: Sel ect
meas .inputPS x.
When set to Default temp. value the set temperature value will be displayed.
When set to From PT100 the temperature measured by the resistance
thermometer will be displayed. When set to From 20 mA input the temperature
measured via an external 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
[spacer]
0.0
1000.0
004 148
min
[spacer]
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function
will reach the tripping threshold (time-to-trip).
[spacer]
[spacer]
-25000
25000
004 154
8-159
P437
8.2.3
Event Recording
Parameter
Default
Overload recording
8-160
Logic Diagram
033 020
033 022
9999
033 023
9999
033 024
9999
033 025
9999
033 026
9999
[spacer]
[spacer]
Unit
9999
[spacer]
[spacer]
9999
[spacer]
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
033 027
9999
P437
Parameter
Default
Fault recording
9999
033 003
9999
033 004
9999
033 005
9999
033 006
9999
[spacer]
033 002
[spacer]
9999
[spacer]
033 001
[spacer]
Logic Diagram
9999
[spacer]
Unit
003 000
[spacer]
Max
[spacer]
Min
[spacer]
Address
033 007
9999
8-161
P437
8-162
P437
9
9-1
P437
9.1
Manage IED
The menu item Manage IED allows for establishing a connection between the
IED Configurator and the device.
The P437 features two memory banks one of which includes the active setting
parameters. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for
parameters via IED Configurator or operating program.
Toggling between active and inactive memory bank is carried out either by
executing the parameter IEC: Switch Config. Bank or via IED Configurator
(after the connection has been established) by pressing the Switch Banks
button.
Parameter
Active Bank
SCL File ID
Name of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the
IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via
menu item Manage IED).
SCL File Version
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out
with the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been
established (via menu item Manage IED).
Parameter
Inactive Bank
SCL File ID
Name of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED
Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via menu
item Manage IED).
SCL File Version
Version number of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with
the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established
(via menu item Manage IED).
9-2
P437
9.2
IED Details
The category IED Details contains several settings that characterize the device
as well as the SCL file, which identifies the IEC 61850 configuration.
SCL Details
Parameter
Default Value
SCL File ID
PX437
Identification of the .MCL configuration file. If required, this preset value may be
modified by, for example, entering a bay name.
SCL File Version
650.230
Specific value to identify the IEC 61850 data model and configuration.
If required, this preset value may be modified by, for example, identifying the
revision states during engineering.
IED Details
Parameter
Address
Name
104 057
Explicitly assigned device name for the function in the system (IED); is part of
the Logical Device Name.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and the name
must start with a letter. Note that a non-standard name causes problems with
the IEC 61850 communication.
Parameter
Template Details
ICD Template
SCL Schema Version
Description
Type
Configuration Revision
Supported Models
The values listed in the column Template Details only provide information.
They are preset and cannot be modified.
9-3
P437
9.3
Communications
The category Communications contains the general network-related settings.
Connected SubNetwork
Parameter
Default Value
Connected Sub-Network
NONE
AP1
Address
Configuration
Parameter
Default Value
Address
IP Address
0.0.0.0
104 001
Assigned IP address of the P437 for the server function in the system.
SubNet Mask
0.0.0.0
104 005
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the subnetwork and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Gateway Address
0.0.0.0
104 011
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.
General
Configuration
Parameter
Default Value
Media
Fibre
Network hardware provided as fiber optics (Fibre) or twisted pair copper wires
(Copper).
TCP Keepalive
5 seconds
2 minutes
Return time period for setting procedures that have commenced. (The default
value above is in seconds. The IED Configurator, however, displays converts this
to minutes.)
9-4
P437
9.4
SNTP
The category SNTP contains the clock synchronization settings.
9.4.1
Client Operation
General Config
Parameter
Default Value
64
9.4.2
External Server 1
Settings for the primary clock synchronization server.
Note that all values except IP Address and the Use Anycast button are usually
disabled and may be accepted only when imported from an XML configuration
file.
External Server
Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Address
IP Address
0.0.0.0
104 202
9.4.3
External Server 2
Settings for the primary clock synchronization server.
Note that all values except IP Address and the Use Anycast button are usually
disabled and may be accepted only when imported from an XML configuration
file.
External Server
Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Address
IP Address
0.0.0.0
104 210
9-5
P437
9.5
Dataset Definitions
Parameter
Dataset Definitions
Name
Explicitly (and uniquely) assigned name for the dataset.
Location
Saving datasets at System/LLN0 is compulsory.
Contents
Content (data objects, data attributes) of a dataset.
The GOOSE Capacity display allows for checking the length of a dataset for
less than 1500 bytes to permit transmission in GOOSE messages. The display is
irrelevant when the dataset is only used in reports.
Note: It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P437 if the
Dataset sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Therefore it is
recommended to limit the Dataset size(s) to max. 120% of the GOOSE
capacity.
9-6
P437
9.6
GOOSE Publishing
9.6.1
System/LLN0
Network Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
01-0C-CD-01-00-00
Virtual MAC address that the sending device provides as the destination; preset.
Application ID (hex)
0000
ID-number of the virtual LAN with which the GOOSE is sent; preset.
VLAN Priority
Priority with which the GOOSE is sent in the virtual LAN; preset.
Repeat Message
Transmission
Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
10 ms
First send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.
Maximum Cycle Time
1s
Continuous send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period;
preset.
Increment
900
Specification factor for the transition of time intervals for GOOSE send
repetitions from the first to the continuous repetition.
9-7
P437
Message Data
Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
GOOSE Identifier
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$GO$gcb01
GOOSE ID consisting of the Device Name and the GOOSE Control Block.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE.
Configuration Revision
9-8
P437
9.7
GOOSE Subscribing
9.7.1
Mapped Inputs
Source Network
Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
01-0C-CD-01-00-00
9-9
P437
Parameter
GOOSE Source
Parameters
Default Value
Source Path
Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Configuration Revision
Unknown
Unknown
Distance of the quality descriptor to the data object if not preset. The quality of
the received information is to be tested if such has been configured.
9-10
P437
Destination
Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Evaluation Expression
Equal to
False
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed.
True set
and
Failure: Faulty
9-11
P437
9.8
9.8.1
System/LLN0
Parameter
Report Parameters
Default Value
Report Type
Report type:
Unbuffered (updating)
Buffered (saving)
Report ID
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$RP
$urcbA, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$RP
$urcbP, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$BR
$brcbA, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$BR$brcbH
Report ID consisting of the Device Name and the Report Control Block.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the report.
Configuration Revision
9-12
P437
9.9
Controls
9.9.1
Control Objects
Parameter
Control Object
Parameters
ctlModel
To control external devices the following operating modes can be set:
sboTimeout
Return time period after selection without issuing a command.
9.9.2
Source Network
Parameters
Uniqueness of Control
Parameter
Default Value
01-0C-CD-01-00-00
9-13
P437
Parameter
GOOSE Source
Parameters
Default Value
Source Path
Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Configuration Revision
True
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed:
9-14
True set
P437
9.10
Measurements
Parameter
Scaling
Unit Multiplier
Multiplication factor; not supported.
Parameter
Range configuration
Deadband
Configuration
Parameter
Default Value
Deadband
100
Multiplier for the smallest display value of the measured value. In order to have
the current measured value sent when it has changed from the value last sent
the result of the set dead band value multiplied by the smallest display value
must exceed the smallest display value.
9-15
P437
9.11
9.11.1
System/LLN0
Mod.measCyc
Parameter
Default Value
Value
Mod.enCyc
Parameter
Default Value
Value
65535
Cyclic transmission of measured values without dead band check: Time interval
in seconds between transmissions of two energy count values.
Mod.comtrade
Parameter
Default Value
Value
BINARY
Mod.distExtr
Parameter
Default Value
Value
true
9-16
P437
10
Commissioning
10.1
Safety Instructions
DANGER
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the Warning page at the beginning of
this manual, may work on or operate this device.
DANGER
When installing and connecting the device the warning notices at the
beginning of Chapter Installation and Connection (Chapter 5, (p. 5-1)) must
be observed.
DANGER
The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on.
The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately
marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be
grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The
cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national
standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm (US:AWG12 or thicker) is
required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the
power supply module (identified by the letters PE on the terminal
connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device. The
cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm (US:AWG14 or
thicker) is required.
DANGER
Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is
connected, always disconnect the device from the supply.
10-1
P437
10 Commissioning
DANGER
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be
opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger
that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the
insulation.
For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for connection to the
current transformers is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit
current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
DANGER
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply
module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
DANGER
When increased-safety machinery is located in a hazardous area the P437
must always be installed outside of this hazardous area.
WARNING
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the
supply voltage for the device is shut off.
WARNING
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently,
the female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits
connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore,
when connecting the prescribed connecting cable be careful not to touch the
socket contacts.
WARNING
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance
with the maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see Technical
Data, Chapter 2, (p. 2-1)).
10-2
P437
10 Commissioning
WARNING
When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must
carry out a functional type test to conform to the requirements of the
relevant protection/control application. In particular, it is necessary to verify
that the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as
well as the time performance during device startup, during operation and
when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
10-3
P437
10 Commissioning
10.2
Commissioning Tests
10.2.1
Preparation
After the P437 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, (p. 51), the commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked
again:
Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary
voltage of the device?
Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly
isolated. The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on.
After voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various
startup tests are carried out (see Section 3.14, (p. 3-113)). The LED indicators for
HEALTHY (H1) and OUT OF SERVICE (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s,
the P437 is ready for operation. By default (factory setting) or after a cold restart,
the device type P437 and the time are displayed on the first line of the LCD
after the device has started up.
Once the change enabling command has been issued (see Section 6.11.3, (p. 618)), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings from the
integrated local control panel is described in Section 6.11.4, (p. 6-21).
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting
the P437 and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be
made from the integrated local control panel.
Par/DvID menu branch:
10-4
P437
10 Commissioning
PC : D e vice addr es s
PC : Baud rat e
PC : Parit y bit
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out
again before the blocking is cancelled:
10-5
P437
10 Commissioning
Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the
terminal connection diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
10.2.2
Tests
By using the signals and displays generated by the P437, it is possible to
determine whether the P437 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the
station. Signals are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into
the event memory. In addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the
appropriate signal in the menu tree.
If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during protection testing,
the trip commands can be blocked through MAI N: Trip cmd.block. USER
(Par/Func/Glob menu branch) or an appropriately configured binary signal input.
If circuit breaker testing is desired, it is possible to issue a trip command for
100 ms through MAI N: Man . tr ip cmd. USER (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch) or
an appropriately configured binary signal input. Selection of the trip command
from the integrated local control panel is password-protected (see
Section 6.11.8, (p. 6-29)).
The manual trip command is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the
selection of possible functions to effect a trip (in the configuration of trip
commands).
10.2.3
"High": Energized.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
10.2.4
10-6
P437
10 Commissioning
WARNING
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
10.2.5
10.2.6
10.2.6.1
10.2.6.1.1
Checking Starting
The starting settings can be illustrated in a V-I diagram (see Fig. 10-1, (p. 108)). The slope of the impedance line plotted in the V-I diagram is a function of
the settings for underimpedance starting and the phase displacement between
the measured values (see Fig. 10-2, (p. 10-9)).
10-7
P437
10 Commissioning
V/Vnom(/3)
1.0
DIST:
V< PSx
[*]
0.5
DIST:
I> (Ibl) PSx
[*]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST:
I>> PSx
[*]
1.0
DIST:
V< PSx
010
010
011
011
069
089
009
029
DIST:
I> (Ibl) PSx
010
010
011
011
068
088
008
028
2.0
I/Inom
DIST:
I>> PSx
010
010
010
011
054
074
094
014
D5Z50DFA
10-8
P437
10 Commissioning
X
DIST:
Xfw PSx
[ * ]
Z<(Z)
70
L
R
DIST:
PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Rfw,PP PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Rfw,PG PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zbw/Zfw PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zfw,PG PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zfw,PP PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
set
set
set
set
1
2
3
4
DIST:
Xfw PSx
010 050
010 070
010 090
011 010
DIST:
Rfw,PG PSx
010 051
010 071
010 091
011 011
DIST:
Rfw,PP PSx
010 052
010 072
010 092
011 012
DIST:
PSx
010 063
010 083
011 003
011 023
DIST:
Zbw/Zfw PSx
010 053
010 073
010 093
011 013
DIST:
Zfw,PG PSx
010 101
010 102
010 103
011 104
DIST:
Zfw,PP PSx
010 105
010 106
010 107
011 108
D5Z52DGA
= 2 Z<
| Vtest | e
jtest
| Itest | e j0
= 2 | Z< | e
jZ
= 2 | Z< |
test = Z
where:
10-9
P437
10 Commissioning
Z = Impedance Angle
In the range of the reactance limit, that is, for impedance angle Z in the range
L<Z<110, the starting impedance is calculated as follows:
| Z< | =
X fw
sinZ
X fw
Rfw
Starting Impedance
Z G
(180+) Z (180+G)
| Z< | =
Rfw
cosZ
| Z< | =
Rfw
cosZ
| Z< | =
X fw
sinZ
Z bw
Z fw
Z bw
Z fw
= (1 + kG) Z<
| Vtest | e
jtest
| Itest | e j0
= (1 + | kG | e
jG
) | Z< | e
jZ
10-10
P437
10 Commissioning
sinZ + | kG | sin(Z + G)
Z + | kG | cos(Z + G)
sintest + | kG | sin(test - G)
test + | kG | cos(test - G)
Z = arctan cos
where:
Z = Impedance Angle
From the input measured values, the P437 calculates the residual current IN and
the neutral-displacement voltage VNG, which are used for zero-sequence starting.
They are calculated according to the following equations:
|IN| = |IA + IB + IC|
|VNG| = |VAG + VBG + VCG|
For a single-phase test where |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0, the result of the calculation
formula for VNG given above is that the DIST: V NG> PSx or D IST: VNG>>
PSx triggers operate if the test voltage exceeds the following value:
| Vtest | = 3 V NG>
V nom
3
= 2 Z<
| Vtest | e
jtest
| Itest | e j0
= 2 | Z< | e
jZ
10-11
P437
10 Commissioning
| Vtest |
| Itest |
= 2 | Z< |
test = Z
where:
10.2.6.1.3
Z: Impedance Angle
Characteristics
With the P437, the user may choose between a polygonal and a circular tripping
characteristic. This selection of the tripping characteristic will then govern
calculation of the tripping impedances.
10.2.6.1.3.1
Circle Characteristic
If the circle characteristic has been selected, the tripping impedance is set in the
P437. If the setting Arc compensation: yes has also been selected, then the
characteristic shown in the following diagram is obtained when measuring with
sinusoidal quantities.
+135
Forward direction
Zn
Z
R
Backward direction
45 315
D5Z5025A
Fig. 10-3: Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the Circle setting.
The actual tripping impedance in the ranges 45 < Z < and 135 < Z < (
+180) is then calculated as follows:
|Ztrip| = |Z|(1+sin)
In the range 45 < Z < , the following relation applies: = Z
10-12
P437
10 Commissioning
In the range 135 < Z < (+180), the following relation applies: = Z
+180
where:
Ztrip: Actual tripping impedance
Z: settings DI ST: Z1 (ci rcl e ) P Sx to DIST: Z6 ( circle ) PSx
Z: Impedance Angle
: settings D I ST: 1 ( circle ) P Sx to DI ST: 6 ( circle) PSx
When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG must
be taken into account if the setting for DIST: Abs . valu e k G PSx is not equal
to one and/or the setting for DIST: A n gl e kG P Sx is not equal to 0. When the
test is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the
operate condition is obtained:
Vtest
Itest
= (1 + kG) Z<
| Vtest | e
jtest
| Itest | e j0
= (1 + | kG | e
jG
) | Z< | e
jZ
sintest + | kG | sin(test - G)
test + | kG | cos(test - G)
Z = arctan cos
where:
Z: Impedance Angle
In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping
impedance in all fault cases.
Ztrip = kze Z1
where:
Ztrip: Actual tripping impedance
kze:
D IST: kze,PP H SR P Sx or
D IS T: k ze,PG TDR P Sx or
10-13
P437
10 Commissioning
Whether the zone extension factors kze HSR are active or not is controlled by the
following protective functions:
Protective signaling.
If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to the zone
extension factor kzeTDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing
function. Regardless of the readiness of protective signaling, the zone extension
factor kzeHSR may be activated during the reclose command if set accordingly.
10.2.6.1.3.2
X
sinZ
X: D IST: X1 ,PG ( pol ygon ) PSx to D IST: X6, PG (polygon) PSx setting
The limit angle L is defined by the point of intersection of reactance and
resistance limits and is calculated as follows:
| L | = arctan
X
X
R + tan
R:
+135
DIST:
Xn
Z<
DIST:
n
Z
L
R
DIST:
Rn,PG
DIST:
Rn,PP
45
D5Z50DJA
Fig. 10-4: Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the Polygon setting.
In the range of the resistance limits (for impedance angles this means in the
range of 0 < Z L), the tripping impedance is calculated according to the
following equation:
10-14
P437
10 Commissioning
| Z< | =
R
sinZ
cosZ - tan
When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG
must be taken into account if the setting for DIST: Abs . valu e k G PSx is not
equal to one and/or the setting for DIST: A n gl e kG PSx is not equal to 0.
When the test is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation
for the operate condition is obtained:
Vtest
Itest
= (1 + kG) Z<
| Vtest | e
jtest
| Itest | e j0
= (1 + | kG | e
jG
) | Z< | e
jZ
sintest + | kG | sin(test - G)
test + | kG | cos(test - G)
Z = arctan cos
where:
Z: Impedance Angle
In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping
impedance in all fault cases.
Rtrip = kze R1
Xtrip = kze X1
where:
Rtrip: Actual tripping resistance
Xtrip: Actual tripping reactance
kze:
or D I ST: kze ,P P H SR P Sx
10-15
P437
10 Commissioning
Protective signaling.
If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to zone extension
factor kzeTDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing function.
Regardless of the readiness of protective signaling, zone extension factor kzeHSR
may be activated during the reclose command if set accordingly.
10.2.6.1.4
With the starting signal, the voltage memory is decoupled from the synchronizing
voltage (VAB), and the stored voltage can be used for directional measurement
for 2 s maximum.
The P437 determines, on the basis of the magnitude of the fault voltage, whether
the direction will be determined using the fault voltage, the stored voltage, or the
set angle (D I ST: 1 (pol ygon) P Sx, , DIST: 6 ( polygon) PSx). The
following possibilities exist:
Angle for Direction Determination with:
V memory
Enabled
Not enabled
10.2.6.2
10-16
P437
10 Commissioning
10.2.6.2.1
Current-Measuring Circuits
Monitoring of current-measuring circuits functions only if 0.125Inom flows in at
least one phase. The P437 determines the absolute value of the negativesequence component, from the three phase currents; the negative-sequence
component is calculated according to the following equation:
Phase sequence A-B-C
I neg = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |
Phase sequence A-C-B
I neg = 3 | (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |
Symbols used:
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
1
3
| Itest + a2 ( Itest) | =
1
3
| Itest |
IP,max = Itest
For the operate condition that means:
1
3
0.577 (Ineg>)
Therefore operation of the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits
with a two-phase test current in phase opposition is only possible if the threshold
operate value is set at less than 0.577.
If the threshold operate value satisfies the respective condition, then the
monitoring function for current-measuring circuits operates with a test current
greater than 0.125Inom after the set operate delay of + 300 s has elapsed.
10.2.6.2.2
Voltage-Measuring Circuits
Negative-sequence monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuits is enabled if at
least one phase-to-ground voltage exceeds the value 0.7 Vnom/3. Other enabling
10-17
P437
10 Commissioning
criteria that can be activated if desired are the following (selection of enabling
criteria at MC MON : Op. mode vol t. mon. in the Par/Func/Main/ menu
branch):
The signal at the binary signal input configured for MAIN: CB close d 3 p
EX T must have a logic value of 1.
Negative-sequence voltage
V
neg
1
3
| (V
+ a2 V
A-G
+ aV
B-G
)|
C-G
Negative-sequence current
1
I neg = 3 | (I A + a 2 I B + a I C) |
Phase sequence A-C-B (alternative terminology: anti-clockwise rotating
field)
Negative-sequence voltage
V
neg
1
3
| (V
+ aV
A-G
B-G
+ a2 V
Negative-sequence current
I neg = 3 | (I A + a I B + a 2 I C) |
Symbols used:
)|
C-G
a = e2j/3 = e j120
a 2 = e4j/3 = e j240
V nom
3
A trip signal is issued once the set operate delay has elapsed.
10.2.6.3
10-18
P437
10 Commissioning
sequence starting. Timer stage tIN> is also blocked by phase starting or while the
ARC hold time is elapsing.
The P437 calculates the resultant current IN according to the following equation:
|IN| = |IA+IB+IC|
In the case of a single-phase test (for example, IB = IC = 0), the following test
current is obtained:
|Itest| = IN>Inom
At this test current the operate value (BUOC : I N> PSx) is reached.
10.2.6.4
If the conditions for testing are satisfied, it is possible to generate a send signal
for test purposes using a setting parameter (P SI G: Tes t telecom. U SER in the
Oper/CtrlTest menu branch) or by triggering an appropriately configured binary
signal input. This pulse will be present for 500 ms and is extended for the set
reset time. If the with echo setting has been selected in the protection device
at the remote station, then the received signal will be returned.
10.2.6.5
10-19
P437
10 Commissioning
A test HSR can be executed for testing purposes using a setting parameter or by
triggering binary signal inputs. The test HSR function first issues a trip command
and then issues a reclose command after the set dead time has elapsed.
10.2.6.6
The ASC function is not enabled. (This can be determined by checking logic
state signal ASC : Enable d, (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.) This can have
the following causes:
The ASC function will be blocked by triggering the binary signal input
configured for A SC: Bl ocking E XT.
The setting determines whether a close enable may be carried out in case of
blocking.
10-20
P437
10 Commissioning
For test purposes, a close request can be generated for 500 ms using ASC: Test
M C close r USER the setting parameter (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch) or by
triggering an appropriately configured binary signal input (A SC: Tes t MC close
r. EXT). The check can only be carried out if there is no ARC cycle running. The
P437 checks whether enabling is permitted or not according to the set
conditions. If a positive decision is reached, then there is an A SC : C lose
enable signal. No (re-)close command takes place! If the check determines that
enabling is not permitted, the signal ASC: Cl ose rejection is issued.
10.2.6.7
On the binary signal input configured to MA IN: M.c. b. trip V EXT a logic
1 signal is present.
V nom
3
10.2.7
Completing Commissioning
Before the P437 is released for operation, the user should make sure that the
following steps have been taken:
10-21
P437
10 Commissioning
10-22
P437
11
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and
possible methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation
only, and in cases of doubt it is better to return the P437 to the manufacturer.
Please follow the packaging instructions in Section 5.1, (p. 5-3) when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
WARNING
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the Warning page at the beginning of
this manual, may work on or operate this device.
WARNING
Before checking further, disconnect the P437 from the power supply.
WARNING
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in
connecting cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the
connecting cable.
Problem
Key
Updating: The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the
monitoring signal is still present.
11-1
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
Self-monitoring
021 030
[spacer]
021 018
11-2
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Self-monitoring
SFMO N: C B faulty E X T
[spacer]
P437
Address
098 072
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
036 070
036 100
041 202
041 201
093 024
[spacer]
093 025
[spacer]
090 019
[spacer]
041 200
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes
11-3
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
[spacer]
[spacer]
Address
093 040
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
SFMO N: B at te ry failure
[spacer]
090 010
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module (digital).
This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is detected, the
software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are deleted.
093 026
[spacer]
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
093 081
[spacer]
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
093 082
[spacer]
093 080
096 100
[spacer]
096 101
[spacer]
096 102
11-4
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
P437
Address
[spacer]
096 103
[spacer]
096 104
[spacer]
096 105
[spacer]
096 106
[spacer]
096 107
[spacer]
096 108
[spacer]
096 109
[spacer]
096 110
[spacer]
096 111
[spacer]
096 112
[spacer]
096 113
[spacer]
096 114
[spacer]
096 115
[spacer]
096 116
[spacer]
096 117
[spacer]
096 118
[spacer]
096 119
[spacer]
096 120
[spacer]
[spacer]
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong digital bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
096 123
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong HMI. Since this is checked using the
module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade to a
version that is not compatible with the hardware.
096 124
11-5
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
[spacer]
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong communication module. Since this is
checked using the module variant number this signal can also occur after a
firmware upgrade to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
096 125
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong analog bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
096 126
097 000
[spacer]
097 001
[spacer]
097 002
[spacer]
097 003
[spacer]
097 004
[spacer]
097 005
[spacer]
097 006
[spacer]
097 007
[spacer]
097 008
[spacer]
097 009
[spacer]
097 010
[spacer]
097 011
[spacer]
097 012
[spacer]
097 013
[spacer]
097 014
[spacer]
097 015
[spacer]
097 016
[spacer]
097 017
[spacer]
097 018
[spacer]
097 019
11-6
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
[spacer]
[spacer]
P437
Address
097 020
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the data
transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.
093 110
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
093 111
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 01
097 086
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 02
097 087
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 03
097 088
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 04
097 089
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 05
097 090
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 06
097 091
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 07
097 092
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 8 08
097 093
[spacer]
097 102
[spacer]
097 103
[spacer]
097 104
[spacer]
097 105
[spacer]
097 106
[spacer]
097 107
[spacer]
097 108
[spacer]
097 109
[spacer]
097 118
[spacer]
097 119
[spacer]
097 120
[spacer]
097 121
[spacer]
097 122
11-7
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: E rror K 12 0 6
097 123
[spacer]
097 124
[spacer]
097 125
[spacer]
097 134
[spacer]
097 135
[spacer]
097 136
[spacer]
097 137
[spacer]
097 138
[spacer]
097 139
[spacer]
097 140
[spacer]
097 141
[spacer]
097 150
[spacer]
097 151
[spacer]
097 152
[spacer]
097 153
[spacer]
097 154
[spacer]
097 155
[spacer]
097 156
[spacer]
097 157
[spacer]
097 166
[spacer]
097 167
[spacer]
097 168
[spacer]
097 169
[spacer]
097 170
[spacer]
097 171
[spacer]
097 182
[spacer]
097 183
[spacer]
097 184
[spacer]
097 185
[spacer]
097 186
[spacer]
097 187
[spacer]
097 188
[spacer]
097 189
[spacer]
11-8
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
[spacer]
[spacer]
P437
Address
093 010
[spacer]
The application has been terminated in an unexpected way. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
093 030
[spacer]
Invalid parameter when calling a function of the operating system. If this error
occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the
device is blocked.
093 031
[spacer]
Software threads are locked from each other by mutex. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
093 032
[spacer]
093 033
11-9
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
[spacer]
[spacer]
093 034
[spacer]
093 011
[spacer]
Undefined interrupt.
093 012
[spacer]
093 013
[spacer]
090 021
[spacer]
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has been
detected.
090 003
11-10
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
P437
Address
[spacer]
[spacer]
093 041
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
090 012
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
Software overloaded.
093 015
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog I/O module Y. It
has detected an error.
093 112
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
096 121
[spacer]
093 145
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
093 075
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
11-11
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
[spacer]
[spacer]
Address
093 079
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module Y has been downloaded.
093 113
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
093 118
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of analog I/O
module Y.
093 124
093 114
[spacer]
093 115
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels of
analog I/O module Y.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
'Warning' output relay: Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog I/O
module Y.
093 116
[spacer]
098 035
11-12
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
P437
Address
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 028
[spacer]
098 020
[spacer]
Multiple signal.
098 018
[spacer]
098 000
[spacer]
098 132
The Ground fault protection (GFSC and GSCSG) is blocked (if these function
groups are operated with measured neutral-displacement voltage)
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 011
[spacer]
098 001
11-13
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 014
[spacer]
098 009
SFMO N: F F, V trigge r ed
[spacer]
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the voltagemeasuring circuit.
098 021
[spacer]
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the reference
voltage-measuring circuit.
098 022
[spacer]
098 023
[spacer]
098 017
[spacer]
098 254
11-14
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
[spacer]
[spacer]
P437
Address
098 255
[spacer]
098 002
[spacer]
098 003
[spacer]
098 004
[spacer]
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the currentmeasuring circuits.
098 005
[spacer]
098 016
[spacer]
098 015
11-15
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 013
093 140
[spacer]
093 146
[spacer]
The set time C OMM3: T ime -out comm.faul t (or COM M4: Time -out
comm.fault, resp.) has elapsed since the most recent 100% valid telegram
was received. The receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
093 143
[spacer]
093 149
093 142
[spacer]
093 148
[spacer]
Timer stage COM M3: T ime -out link fail . (or COMM4: Time-out l ink
fail., resp.) has elapsed indicating a persistent failure of the transmission
channel. The receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
093 141
[spacer]
093 147
[spacer]
The threshold set for timer stage COMM3: Limit telegr. e rrors was
exceeded and the receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
098 006
11-16
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
P437
Address
[spacer]
[spacer]
The operating mode settings for protective signaling and ground fault (shortcircuit) protection signaling are not identical.
098 019
[spacer]
098 027
[spacer]
The plausibility logic was triggered during the acquisition of the circuit breaker's
(CB) status signals.
098 124
[spacer]
098 066
[spacer]
098 067
[spacer]
098 068
[spacer]
The maximum sum of the disconnection current values to the second power has
been exceeded.
098 069
SFMO N: C B tm ax> A
098 070
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B tm ax> B
098 071
11-17
P437
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: C B tm ax> C
[spacer]
The maximum duration for the opening of a CB pole has been exceeded.
Disconnection is not determined for this CB pole.
098 077
SFMO N: I nv.inp.f.cloc k sy nc
[spacer]
The function was configured to a binary signal input on the analog I/O module Y.
Such a configuration is not permitted for this function.
093 120
Device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 30
098 053
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 30 ( t)
098 054
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 31
098 055
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 31 ( t)
098 056
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 32
098 057
[spacer]
SFMO N: O utput 32 ( t)
098 058
[spacer]
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by selection
at S FMON: Fct. ass ign. warning. The warning signals are also recorded
in the monitoring signal memory.
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
[spacer]
The P437 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer PT100 to the analog I/O module Y.
098 024
[spacer]
098 025
[spacer]
The P437 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.
098 026
11-18
11 Troubleshooting
Parameter
P437
Address
[spacer]
SFMO N: C T A error
[spacer]
098 034
11-19
P437
11-20
11 Troubleshooting
P437
12
Maintenance
WARNING
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the Warning page at the beginning of
this manual, may work on or operate this device.
The P437 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are
selected to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
12-1
P437
12.1
12 Maintenance
DANGER
Always turn off the power supply voltage before removing a hardware
module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply
module V is removed.
Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
WARNING
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in
connecting cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the
connecting cable.
NOTICE
The replaced power supply module must be disposed of in compliance with
applicable national regulations.
In general, the electronic components of the MiCOM P30 family of devices are
designed for a long service life.
For the power supply, however, dimensioning requirements dictate the use of
electrolytic capacitors that are subject to increased wear and tear. The useful life
of these capacitors depends on their temperature and thus on the components
fitted in the device, the load conditions, device location and environmental
conditions.
The internal voltage levels are cyclically checked by the P30 self-monitoring
functions. In case the voltage levels deviate from their specified values a warning
message will be issued or, for persistent problems, the device will be set to a
safe condition (blocking). Hence, there is no imperative need to replace the
power supply module after a pre-defined period of time. However, should you
need to guarantee a high availability of the device then we recommend
preventive replacement of the power supply module after a period of 8 to 10
years.
Moreover, the power supply module of the P437 is equipped with a lithium
battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for keeping the internal clock
running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply. The useful life of the
lithium battery depends on the auxiliary power supply of the device.
12-2
P437
12 Maintenance
Should the P437 be disconnected from the auxiliary power supply for
several years, then the battery capacity would decrease.
During normal operation, the battery voltage is monitored. If the voltage falls
below a pre-defined threshold, a warning message will be issued and the battery
has to be replaced.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Section 10.2, (p. 10-4) must be carried out.
12-3
P437
12.2
12 Maintenance
12-4
P437
12 Maintenance
12.3
12-5
P437
12.4
12 Maintenance
12-6
P437
12 Maintenance
12.5
Binary Outputs
With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes
even two-phase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no
monitoring function for the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing
relays must be triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions.
For these testing purposes, triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the
software through a special control function (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
WARNING
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
12-7
P437
12.6
12 Maintenance
Serial Interfaces
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface
also includes the communication module. The complete communication system,
including connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally
monitored as long as a link is established through the control program or the
communication protocol.
12-8
P437
13
Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of
-25C to +70C (-13F to +158F) must be maintained during storage (see
chapter entitled Technical Data). The relative humidity must be controlled so
that neither condensation nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the
electrolytic capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every
4 years. Recharge the capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P437 for
approximately 10 minutes.
If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply
module is used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working
memory of the processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required
and discharges rapidly. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is
recommended to remove the power supply module from the mounting rack
during long storage periods. The contents of the event memory should be
previously read out and stored separately!
13-1
P437
13-2
13 Storage
P437
14
Description
Order No.
Cable bushings
88512-4-0337414-301
Resistor 200
255.002.696
84 TE frame
88512-4-9650723-301
14-1
P437
14-2
P437
15
Order Information
P 4 37-
-7xx
-8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection,
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection,
7
8
-412
-413
3
4
Current transformer:
Inom =1A / 5 A (T1...
T4) 2)
0
9
Voltage transformer:
Vnom =50 ...130 V (4-pole)
Vnom =50 ...130 V (5-pole) for Automatic Synchronism Check
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
VA,nom =60 ...250 VDC / 100 ...230 VAC and 6 output relays
VA,nom =60 ...250 VDC / 100 ...230 VAC and 4 high break contacts
0
2
15-1
P437
15 Order Information
Further Options
Order information MiCOM P437
Distance Protection Device
P 4 37-
-7xx
-8xx
-461
-462
-463
-464
1
2
4
-90
-98
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST, dual homing
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
With guidance / protection interface:
Without
1
4
German (English)4)
French(English)4)
Spanish (English)4)
Polish (English)4)
Russian (English)4) 7)
15-2
-801
-802
-803
-804
-805
P437
15 Order Information
Key
15-3
P437
15-4
15 Order Information
P437
A1
Function Groups
ARC
Auto-reclosing control
ASC
BUOC
CBF
CBM
COMM1
COMM2
COMM3
InterMiCOM interface
COMM4
InterMiCOM interface
COUNT
Binary counts
DIST
Distance protection
DTOC
DVICE
Device
F_KEY
f<>
Over-/underfrequency protection
FT_DA
FT_RC
Fault recording
GF_RC
GFSC
GOOSE
GSCSG
GSSE
IDMT
IEC
INP
Binary input
IRIGB
IRIGB interface
LED
LED indicators
LIMIT
LOC
A1-1
P437
A1-2
A1 Function Groups
LOG_2
Programmable Logic
LOGIC
Programmable Logic
MAIN
Main function
MCMON
Measuring-circuit monitoring
MEASI
MEASO
MT_RC
OL_DA
OL_RC
Overload recording
OP_RC
OUTP
P<>
PC
PC link
PSB
PSIG
Protective signaling
PSS
SFMON
Self-monitoring
SOTF
THERM
V<>
Time-voltage protection
P437
A2
Internal Signals
ARC: 3-pole RRC
ARC: CB closed
ARC: HSR A
ARC: HSR B
ARC: HSR C
ARC: TDR
ASC: Active
A2-1
P437
A2 Internal Signals
ASC: Test
ASC: Vmeas
BUOC: Bl.Zero-sequ.start.
BUOC: SN
BUOC: Trip A
BUOC: Trip B
BUOC: Trip C
CBF: IN
CBF: Start A
A2-2
COMM1: Count 1
DIST: |Zmeas|
P437
A2 Internal Signals
DIST: IA,corr.
DIST: IA(1+kG)
DIST: IB,corr.
DIST: IB(1+kG)
A2-3
P437
A2-4
A2 Internal Signals
DIST: IC,corr.
DIST: IC(1+kG)
DIST: IkG,par
DIST: Imeas
DIST: INkG
DIST: N1,bw
DIST: N1,bw, A
DIST: N1,bw, B
DIST: N1,bw, C
DIST: N1,fw
DIST: N1,fw, A
DIST: N1,fw, B
DIST: N1,fw, C
DIST: N2,bw
DIST: N2,fw
DIST: N3,bw
DIST: N3,fw
DIST: N4,bw
DIST: N4,fw
DIST: N5,bw
DIST: N5,fw
DIST: N6,bw
DIST: N6,fw
DIST: N7,bw
DIST: N7,fw
DIST: RF
P437
A2 Internal Signals
DIST: Starting A
DIST: Starting B
DIST: Starting C
DIST: Starting G
DIST: Starting N1
A2-5
P437
A2 Internal Signals
DIST: Vmeas
DIST: XF
DIST:
A2-6
DIST: corr
DIST: F
DIST: X
P437
A2 Internal Signals
DTOC: IN
DTOC: t2 N
f<>: fMeas
f<>: VMeas
FT_DA: IMeas
FT_DA: Trigger N
FT_DA: VMeas
FT_RC: Trigger N
GFSC: Blocked
GFSC: IN filtered
GFSC: VNG
A2-7
P437
A2 Internal Signals
GSCSG: Trip A
GSCSG: Trip B
GSCSG: Trip C
IDMT: Bl.Start.Iref,N>
IDMT: Bl.Start.Iref,neg>
IDMT: Bl.Start.Iref,P> Px
IDMT: IN
IDMT: Starting A
IDMT: Starting B
IDMT: Starting C
A2-8
P437
A2 Internal Signals
MAIN: Trip A
MAIN: Trip B
MAIN: Trip C
MEASO: Enable
P<>: P
P<>: P-
P<>: P+
P<>: Q
P<>: Q-
P<>: Q+
PSB: Ready
A2-9
P437
A2 Internal Signals
PSIG: Receive
A2-10
P437
A2 Internal Signals
Signal 1 EXT
Signal 2 EXT
THERM: I
V<>: Vneg
V<>: VNG
V<>: Vpos
A2-11
P437
A2-12
A2 Internal Signals
P437
A3
Glossary
Modules
A:
Communication module
B:
L:
MMI module
P:
Processor module
T:
Transformer module
V:
X:
Y:
Symbols
Graphic symbols for block diagrams
Binary elements in compliance with DIN 40900 part 12, September 1992,
IEC 617-12: modified 1991
Analog information processing in compliance with DIN 40900 part 13, January
1981. To document the linking of analog and binary signals, additional symbols
have been used, taken from several DIN documents.
As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom.
Other flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left
side of the signal flow, output signals on the right side.
A3-1
P437
A3 Glossary
Symbol
Description
To obtain more space for representing a group of related
elements, contours of the elements may be joined or cascaded if
the following rules are met:
There is no functional linkage between elements whose common
contour line is oriented in the signal flow direction.
Note:
D5Z08X1B
D5Z08X2B
Control block
A control block contains an input function common to several
symbols. It is used for the collective setting of several trigger
elements, for example.
D5Z08X3B
Output block
An output block contains an output function common to several
symbols.
D5Z08X4B
A3-2
P437
A3 Glossary
MAIN:
Inom device
[ 010 003 ]
D5Z08X5B
MAIN:
Inom device
[ 010 003 ]
1.0
5.0
1.0: 1.0 A
5.0: 5.0 A
D5Z08X6B
Static input
Only the state of the binary input variable is effective.
D5Z08XBB
Dynamic input
Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 is effective.
D5Z08XAB
Negation of an output
The value up to the border line is negated at the output.
D5Z08X8B
Negation of an input
The input value is negated before the border line.
D5Z08X7B
AND element
The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables are 1.
&
D5Z08XCB
OR element
D5Z08XDB
A3-3
P437
A3 Glossary
Threshold element
D5Z08XEB
D5Z08XFB
t1
t2
D5Z08XGB
1
100ms
D5Z08XHB
D5Z08XJB
Subtractor
D5Z08XKB
D5Z08XLB
D5Z08XMB
A3-4
P437
A3 Glossary
Non-stable flip-flop
D5Z08XNB
D5Z08XOB
D5Z08XPB
+
R
D5Z08YFB
D5Z08YGB
L+
V1
LD5Z08XQB
A3-5
P437
A3 Glossary
A.1
A.2
IA
T1
D5Z08XRB
for A: A1 and A2
for B: B1 and B2
for C: C1 and C2
for N: N1 and N2
via transformer 1:
for
for
for
for
A: 1U
B: 1V
C: 1W
N: 1N
via transformer 2:
for A: 2U
for B: 2V
Item identifiers
for
for
for
for
A: T1
B: T2
C: T3
N: T4
for
for
for
for
A: T5
B: T6
C: T7
N: T8
for A: T15
Change-over contact
with item identifier
D5Z08XSB
Special symbol
D5Z08XTB
A3-6
P437
A3 Glossary
V24
PC interface
12V
+12V
0V
RXD
TXD
D5Z08XVB
Multiplier
D5Z08XWB
D5Z08XXB
The output variable is the result of the division of the two input
variables.
Comparator
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) are
equal to the function in the function block.
D5Z08XYB
Formula block
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) satisfy
the equation in the function block
2.5
D5Z08XZB
Description
305 100
The internal signal names used and their origins are listed in
Appendix.
DIST: VNG>> triggered
[ 036 015 ]
A3-7
P437
A3 Glossary
Symbols Used
Symbol
Meaning
Time duration
Complex voltage
Electrical current
Complex current
Complex impedance
|Z|
Frequency
Temperature in C
Sum, result
Angle
Time constant
Temperature difference in K
A3-8
P437
A4
Telecontrol Interfaces
A4.1
A4.1.1
Interoperability
This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets
and other options from which subsets are to be selected in order to implement
specific telecontrol systems. Certain parameters such as the number of bytes
(octets) in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This
means that only one value of the defined parameter is allowed per system. Other
parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the
command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of
subsets that are suitable for the given application. This section combines the
parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate
selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system
components supplied by different manufacturers, then it is necessary for all
partners to agree on the selected parameters.
The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked [see National Preface
of EN 60870-5-101].
The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain
parameters for specific parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling
factors for individually addressable measured values.
A4.1.1.1
[]
Point-to-point configuration
[]
[]
[]
Multipoint-star configuration
A4-1
P437
A4.1.1.2
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
[] 100 bit/s
[] 2400 bit/s
[] 2400 bit/s
[] 200 bit/s
[] 4800 bit/s
[] 4800 bit/s
[] 300 bit/s
[] 9600 bit/s
[] 9600 bit/s
[] 600 bit/s
[] 19200 bit/s
[] 1200 bit/s
[] 38400 bit/s
[] 56000 bit/s
[] 64000 bit/s
[] 100 bit/s
[] 2400 bit/s
[] 2400 bit/s
[] 200 bit/s
[] 4800 bit/s
[] 4800 bit/s
[] 300 bit/s
[] 9600 bit/s
[] 9600 bit/s
[] 600 bit/s
[] 19200 bit/s
[] 1200 bit/s
[] 38400 bit/s
[] 56000 bit/s
[] 64000 bit/s
A4-2
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
A4.1.1.3
P437
[]
Balanced transmission
[]
Unbalanced transmission
Address Field of the Link
[]
[]
One octet
[]
[]
Structured
[]
Unstructured
Frame Length
[240]
A4-3
P437
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
A4.1.1.4
Application Layer
(See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.)
Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is
used exclusively in this companion standard.
Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter)
[]
One octet
[]
Two octets
One octet
[]
Structured
[]
Two octets
[]
Unstructured
[]
Three octets
Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter)
[]
One octet
[]
A4-4
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
P437
[]
<1>
Single-point information
M_SP_NA_1
[]
<2>
M_SP_TA_1
[]
<3>
Double-point information
M_DP_NA_1
[]
<4>
M_DP_TA_1
[]
<5>
M_ST_NA_1
[]
<6>
M_ST_TA_1
[]
<7>
M_BO_NA_1
[]
<8>
M_BO_TA_1
[]
<9>
M_ME_NA_1
[]
<10>
M_ME_TA_1
[]
<11>
M_ME_NB_1
[]
<12>
M_ME_TB_1
[]
<13>
M_ME_NC_1
[]
<14>
Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
[]
<15>
Integrated totals
M_IT_NA_1
[]
<16>
M_IT_TA_1
[]
<17>
M_EP_TA_1
[]
<18>
ME_EP_TB_1
[]
<19>
M_EP_TC_1
[]
<20>
M_PS_NA_1
[]
<21>
M_ME_ND_1
A4-5
P437
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
[]
<45>
Single command
C_SC_NA_1
[]
<46>
Double command
C_DC_NA_1
[]
<47>
C_IT_NA_1
[]
<48>
C_RC_NA_1
[]
<49>
C_SE_NB_1
[]
<50>
C_SE_NC_1
[]
<51>
C_BO_NA_1
<70>
End of initialization
ME_EI_NA_1
<100>
Interrogation command
C_IC_NA_1
[]
<101>
C_CI_NA_1
[]
<102>
Read command
C_RD_NA_1
[]
<103>
C_CS_NA_1
[]
<104>
Test command
C_TS_NB_1
[]
<105>
C_RP_NC_1
[]
<106>
C_CD_NA_1
<110> =
P_ME_NA_1
[]
<111> =
P_ME_NB_1
[]
<112> =
[]
<113> =
Parameter activation
P_AC_NA_1
A4-6
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
P437
[]
<120>
File ready
F_FR_NA_1
[]
<121>
Section ready
F_SR_NA_1
[]
<122>
F_SC_NA_1
[]
<123>
F_LS_NA_1
[]
<124>
F_AF_NA_1
[]
<125>
Segment
F_SG_NA_1
[]
<126>
Directory
F_DR_TA_1
A4-7
P437
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
A4.1.1.5
[]
Remote initialization
General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter)
[] Global
[] Group 1
[] Group 7
[] Group 13
[] Group 2
[] Group 8
[] Group 14
[] Group 3
[] Group 9
[] Group 15
[] Group 4
[] Group 10
[] Group 16
[] Group 5
[] Group 11
[] Group 6
[] Group 12
Addresses per group have to be defined.
Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter)
[]
Clock synchronization
Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter)
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
No additional definition
[]
[]
[]
Persistent output
Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific
Parameter)
A4-8
P437
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
[]
Counter request
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
Counter reset
[]
[]
Threshold value
[]
Smoothing value
[]
[]
[]
[]
F_FR_NA_1
[]
F_FR_NA_1
A4.2
A4.2.1
Interoperability
A4.2.1.1
Physical Layer
A4.2.1.1.1
Electrical Interface
[]
EIA RS 485
[]
A4-9
P437
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
A4.2.1.1.2
Optical Interface
[]
Glass fiber
[]
Plastic fiber
[]
F-SMA connector
[]
BFOC/2.5 connector
A4.2.1.1.3
Transmission Rate
[]
9600 bit/s
[]
19200 bit/s
A4.2.1.2
Link Layer
There are no selection options for the link layer.
A4.2.1.3
Application Layer
A4.2.1.3.1
A4.2.1.3.2
[]
[]
A4.2.1.3.3
Description
[]
<0>
[]
<0>
Time synchronization
[]
<2>
Reset FCB
[]
<3>
Reset CU
[]
<4>
Start / restart
[]
<5>
Power on
A4-10
P437
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
Description
P437 Designations
(Address) Description
[]
<16>
Auto-recloser active
[]
<17>
Teleprotection active
[]
<18>
Protection active
[]
<19>
LED reset
[]
<20>
[]
<21>
Test mode
[]
<22>
[]
<23>
Characteristic 1
[]
<24>
Characteristic 2
[]
<25>
Characteristic 3
[]
<26>
Characteristic 4
[]
<27>
Auxiliary input 1
[]
<28>
Auxiliary input 2
[]
<29>
Auxiliary input 3
[]
<30>
Auxiliary input 4
A4-11
P437
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
Description
P437 Designations
(Address) Description
[]
<32>
Measurand supervision I
[]
<33>
Measurand supervision V
[]
<35>
[]
<36>
<37>
[]
<38>
VT fuse failure
[]
<39>
Teleprotection disturbed
[]
<46>
Group warning
[]
<47>
Group alarm
Description
P437 Designations
(Address) Description
[]
<48>
Earth fault A
[]
<49>
Earth fault B
[]
<50>
Earth fault C
[]
<51>
[]
<52>
A4-12
P437
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
Description
P437 Designations
(Address) Description
[]
<64>
Start / pick-up A
[]
<65>
Start / pick-up B
[]
<66>
Start / pick-up C
[]
<67>
Start / pick-up N
[]
<68>
General trip
[]
<69>
Trip A
[]
<70>
Trip B
[]
<71>
Trip C
[]
<72>
[]
<73>
[]
<74>
Fault forward/line
[]
<75>
Fault reverse/busbar
[]
<76>
Teleprotection signal
transmitted
[]
<77>
[]
<78>
Zone 1
[]
<79>
Zone 2
[]
<80>
Zone 3
[]
<81>
Zone 4
[]
<82>
Zone 5
[]
<83>
Zone 6
[]
<84>
General starting
[]
<85>
Breaker failure
[]
<86>
[]
<87>
[]
<88>
[]
<89>
[]
<90>
Trip I>
[]
<91>
Trip I>>
A4-13
P437
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
INF
Description
P437 Designations
(Address) Description
[]
<92>
Trip IN>
[]
<93>
Trip IN>>
Description
P437 Designations
(Address) Description
[]
<128>
CB on by AR
[]
<129>
CB on by long-time AR
[]
<130>
AR blocked
Description
P437 Designations
(Address) Description
[]
<144>
Measurand I
<145>
Measurands I, V
<146>
Measurands I, V, P, Q
<147>
<148>
A4-14
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
P437
Description
[]
<240>
[]
<241>
[]
<243>
[]
<244>
[]
<245>
[]
<249>
[]
<250>
[]
<251>
A4.2.1.3.4
Description
[]
<0>
[]
<0>
Time synchronization
A4-15
P437
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
Description
P437 Designations
(Address) Description
[]
<16>
Auto-recloser on/off
[]
<17>
Teleprotection on/off
[]
<18>
Protection on/off
[]
<19>
LED reset
[]
<23>
Activate characteristic 1
(Switches
PSS: Pa ram.su bs. se l .
USE R to Parameter subset
1.)
[]
<24>
Activate characteristic 2
(Switches
PSS: Pa ram.su bs. se l .
USE R to Parameter subset
2.)
[]
<25>
Activate characteristic 3
(Switches
PSS: Pa ram.su bs. se l .
USE R to Parameter subset
3.)
[]
<26>
Activate characteristic 4
(Switches
PSS: Pa ram.su bs. se l .
USE R to Parameter subset
4.)
A4-16
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
P437
Description
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
[]
A4-17
P437
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
A4.2.1.3.5
[]
Test mode
[]
[]
Disturbance data
[]
Generic services
[]
Private data
A4.2.1.3.6
Miscellaneous
Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in
Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value.
In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words, there is
only one choice for each measurand.
Measured value
1.2
or
2.4
Current A
[]
[]
Current B
[]
[]
Current C
[]
[]
Voltage A-G
[]
[]
Voltage B-G
[]
[]
Voltage C-G
[]
[]
Enabled power P
[]
[]
Reactive power Q
[]
[]
Frequency f
[]
[]
Voltage A-B
[]
[]
A4-18
P437
A5
Version
P437
Changes
Hardware
301
401
601
Diagram
Release: 2000-06-09
P437
Hardware
301
No changes.
401
601-701
Diagram
Release: 2000-08-28
No changes.
Software
COMM1
Bug fixing:
P437
Hardware
302
402
602
Release: 2000-11-20
Diagram
The updated diagram now includes the new IRIG-B
interface.
Software
IRIGB
P437
Hardware
302
No changes.
402
602-702
Diagram
Release: 2001-02-20
No changes.
Software
COMM1
A5-1
P437
Version
P437
Changes
Hardware
302
No changes.
402
602-703
Diagram
Release: 2001-07-27
No changes.
Software
MAIN
P437
Hardware
303
402/403
603
Release: 2002-01-28
A5-2
FT_DA
SFMON
PSIG, ARC,
ASC, GFSC,
GSCSG
PSB
P437
Version
Changes
PSIG
P437
COMM2
DIST
Hardware
303
No changes.
402/403
603-704
Diagram
Release: 2002-02-13
No changes.
Software
f<>
P437
Hardware
303
No changes.
402/403
603-705
Bug fixing.
Diagram
Release: 2002-08-09
No changes.
Software
LOC
P437
Hardware
303
No changes.
402/403
604
Diagram
Release: 2002-10-29
No changes.
Software
MAIN
PSIG, ARC,
ASC, GFSC,
GSCSG
A5-3
P437
Version
Changes
MEASO
P437
Hardware
304
404/405
605
Release: 2002-11-19
Diagram
The new connection diagrams include the InterMiCOM
communication interface (function group COMM3).
Software
IDMT
DTOC
MAIN
A5-4
P437
Version
Changes
COMM1
P437
GSCSG
f<>
COMM3
Hardware
304
No changes.
404/405
605-706
Bug fixing:
Diagram
Release: 2003-01-30
No changes.
Software
IDMT
DTOC
A5-5
P437
Version
Changes
GFSC
P437
Hardware
304
No changes.
404/405
605-707
Diagram
Release: 2003-02-12
No changes.
Software
COMM3
P437
Hardware
304
404/405
605-708
Release: 2003-07-28
Diagram
No changes.
Software
COMM1
DIST
DIST, PSIG
A5-6
P437
Version
Changes
MCMON
Bug fixing:
ARC
Bug fixing:
P437
Hardware
305
406/407
606
Release: 2003-11-11
Diagram
Software
UCA2
P437
Hardware
305
No changes.
406/407
607
Diagram
Release: 2004-05-03
No changes.
Software
SOTF
Bug fixing:
UCA2
A5-7
P437
Version
Changes
PSIG
DTOC
PSB
SFMON
MAIN
P437
Hardware
305
No changes.
406/407
608
Diagram
Release: 2004-07-23
No changes.
Software
A5-8
P437
Version
Changes
MAIN
PSIG
ARC
GSCSG
COMM1
ASC
FT_RC
A5-9
P437
Version
Changes
COMM2
P437
Hardware
305
No changes.
406/407
608-711
Diagram
Release: 2004-10-21
No changes.
Software
FT_DA
COMM1
PSIG
ARC
P437
Hardware
306
406/407
609
Release: 2005-02-25
A5-10
P437
Version
Changes
COMM1
MAIN
DIST
A5-11
P437
Version
Changes
MCMON
Bug fixing:
SOTF
PSIG
ARC
Bug fixing:
IDMT
P437
Hardware
306
No changes.
406/407
609-712
Diagram
Release: 2005-0x-xx
No changes.
Software
A5-12
P437
Version
Changes
PSIG
P437
Hardware
306
No changes.
406/407
609-713
Diagram
Release: 2005-10-30
No changes.
Software
ASC
P437
Bug fixing:
Hardware
307
408/409
610
Release: 2006-02-26
Diagram
A5-13
P437
Version
Changes
SFMON
CBF
A5-14
P437
Version
Changes
DIST
MCMON
FT_RC
SOTF
PSIG
ARC
A5-15
P437
Version
Changes
GFSC
GSCSG
DTOC
IDMT
Directional measurement, based on the negativesequence current has been adapted to the new method
as implemented in GFSC, and the previously fixed
compensation impedance has been replaced by a
settable compensation reactance.
Bug fixing:
INP
The ground fault stage operated always as nondirectional, regardless of the setting.
A5-16
P437
Version
Changes
IEC, GOOSE,
GSSE
UCA2
COMM3,
OUTP, LED,
MAIN, LOGIC
P437
Bug fixing:
Hardware
307
No changes.
408/409
610-714
Diagram
Release: 2006-09-20
No changes.
Software
MCMON
BUOC
Bug fixing:
Bug fixing:
P437
Hardware
307
No changes.
408/409
610-715
P437/EN M/R-11-A // P437311650
Diagram
A5-17
P437
Version
Changes
Release: 2006-10-09
No changes.
Software
COMM1
IEC
P437
Bug fixing:
Hardware
307
No changes.
408/409
611
Diagram
Release: 2007-02-28
No changes.
Software
COMM1
DIST
A5-18
P437
Version
Changes
PSB
SOTF
PSIG
ARC
A5-19
P437
Version
Changes
ASC
GSCSG
P<>
GFSC
P437
GFSC, GSCSG
IEC
Hardware
308
408/409
612
Release: 2007-12-31
A5-20
P437
Version
Changes
Diagram
No changes.
Software
IEC
A5-21
P437
Version
Changes
LOC
F_KEY
A5-22
LED
The function group LED was enhanced to do the colorspecific settings related to the multi-colored LEDs.
SFMON
P437
Version
Changes
MAIN
DIST
DIST: V NG> P Sx
DIST: VNG>> P Sx
Bug fixing:
PSB
SOTF
A5-23
P437
Version
Changes
GFSC, GSCSG
GSCSG
DTOC
LIMIT
CBF
P437
Hardware
308
No changes.
408/409
613
Diagram
Release: 2009-06-15
No changes.
Software
A5-24
P437
Version
Changes
IEC
MAIN
A5-25
P437
Version
Changes
DIST
D IST: Zf w,P P P Sx 0
VPG
I P (1 + kG )
Bug fixing:
A5-26
P437
Version
Changes
COMM1
FT_DA
Bug fixing:
Bug fixing:
FT_RC
Bug fixing:
PSB
P437
LOGIC
CBF
Hardware
308
No changes.
408/409
630
Diagram
Release: 2009-09-10
No changes.
Software
CBF
A5-27
P437
Version
Changes
MAIN
DIST
Bug fixing:
(038
(038
(038
(038
(038
(038
(038
(038
(038
045)
105)
108)
047)
106)
109)
044)
104)
107)
DIST:
DI ST:
D IST:
D IST:
DIST:
DIST:
D IST:
D IST:
DIST:
Di r.u s in g V me as Sys1
Di r.u sing Vme as Sys2
D ir.us in g V meas Sys3
D ir.us in g V mem Sys1
Di r.u s in g V me m Sys2
Dir. usi ng Vme m Sys3
Forw . w/o me as . Sys1
F orw . w/o meas . Sys2
Forw. w/o me as . Sys3
A5-28
P437
Version
Changes
PSB
PSIG
ASC
IEC, GOOSE
COMM1
F_KEY
P437
Hardware
A5-29
P437
Version
Changes
308
No changes.
408/409
614
Diagram
Release: 2011-01-07
No changes.
Software
IEC
F_KEY
PC
COMM1
A5-30
P437
Version
Changes
COMM1,
COMM2
P437
Hardware
308
No changes.
408/409
631
Diagram
Release: 2011-01-07
No changes.
Software
IEC
FT_RC
PSIG
Bug fixing:
A5-31
P437
Version
Changes
PC
COMM1
COMM1,
COMM2
P437
Hardware
308
No changes.
408/409
614-722
Diagram
Release: 2012-02-01
No changes.
Software
A5-32
P437
Version
Changes
IEC
GOOSE
PC, COMM2
Bug fixing:
EK_SV
P437
Hardware
309
410/411
631-723
Release: 2012-02-01
A5-33
P437
Version
Changes
now 24 60 VDC
(previously 24 VDC).
Software
A5-34
P437
Version
Changes
IEC
GOOSE
PC, COMM2
Bug fixing:
EK_SV
P437
Hardware
310
410/411
632
Release: 2013-12-09
Diagram
No changes.
Software
No changes.
A5-35
P437
Version
P437
Changes
Hardware
311
412/413
650
Release: 2014-06-17
Software
MEASI
A5-36
P437
Version
Changes
MAIN
A5-37
P437
Version
Changes
A5-38
P437
Version
Changes
MCMON
IDMT
PC
F_KEY
FT_RC
GFSC
PSB
COUNT
A5-39
P437
Version
Changes
PC, DVICE
IEC
A5-40
P437
Version
Changes
FT_DA
CBF
LED
A5-41
P437
Version
Changes
PSIG
A5-42
P SI G: Se nd (012 243)
LOGIC
DIST
COMM4
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com
Publication: P437/EN M/R-11-A